1 The former account I wrote, Theophilus, told all that Jesus began to do and to teach, 2 until the day that he was taken up, after he had given commands through the Holy Spirit to the apostles he had chosen. 3 After his suffering, he presented himself alive to them with many convincing proofs. For forty days he appeared to them, and he spoke about the kingdom of God. 4 When he was meeting together with them, he commanded them not to leave Jerusalem, but to wait for the promise of the Father, about which he said, "You heard from me 5 that John indeed baptized with water, but you will be baptized with the Holy Spirit in a few days."
6 When they were assembled together they asked him, "Lord, is this the time you will restore the kingdom to Israel?" 7 He said to them, "It is not for you to know the times or the seasons which the Father has determined by his own authority. 8 But you will receive power when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, and you will be my witnesses both in Jerusalem and in all Judea and Samaria, and to the ends of the earth." 9 When the Lord Jesus had said these things, as they were looking up, he was raised up, and a cloud hid him from their eyes. 10 While they were looking intensely to heaven as he went, suddenly, two men stood by them in white clothing. 11 They said, "You men of Galilee, why do you stand here looking into heaven? This Jesus who has been taken up from you into heaven, will return in the same manner as you saw him going into heaven."
12 Then they returned to Jerusalem from the mountain that is called Olives, which is near to Jerusalem, a Sabbath day's journey. 13 When they arrived, they went up into the upper chamber, where they were staying. They were Peter, John, James, Andrew, Philip, Thomas, Bartholomew, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas son of James. 14 They all were devoted with one purpose to prayer, together with the women, and Mary the mother of Jesus, and his brothers.
15 In those days Peter stood up in the midst of the brothers, about 120 names, and said, 16 "Brothers, it was necessary that the scripture should be fulfilled, that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who guided the ones who arrested Jesus. 17 For he was one of us and received a share of this ministry." 18 (Now this man bought a field with the earnings he received for his wickedness, and there he fell headfirst, and his body burst open, and all his intestines poured out. 19 All those living in Jerusalem heard about this, so they called that field in their language "Akeldama," that is, "Field of Blood.") 20 "For it is written in the Book of Psalms,
'Let his field be made desolate,
and do not let even one person live there';
'Let someone else take his position of leadership.'
21 It is necessary, therefore, that one of the men who accompanied us all the time the Lord Jesus went in and out among us, 22 beginning from the baptism of John to the day that he was taken up from us, become a witness with us of his resurrection." 23 They put forward two men, Joseph called Barsabbas, who was also called Justus, and Matthias. 24 They prayed and said, "You, Lord, know the hearts of all people, so reveal which of these two is the one whom you have chosen 25 to take the place in this ministry and apostleship from which Judas turned away to go to his own place." 26 They cast lots for them, and the lot fell to Matthias, and he was numbered with the eleven apostles.
This chapter records an event, commonly known as the "Ascension," when Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. He will not come back until he returns at his "second coming." (See: heaven and resurrection)
The UDB has set the words "Dear Theophilus" apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You might want to start this book the way people start letters in your culture.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULB does this with the two quotes from Psalms in 1:20.
The word "baptize" has two meanings in this chapter. It refers to the water baptism of John and to the baptism of the Holy Spirit (Acts 1:5). (See: baptize)
Some scholars believe that when Jesus "spoke about the kingdom of God," he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God did not come before he died. Others believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was alive and that here Jesus was explaining that it was beginning in a new form.
The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:
In Matthew:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.
In Mark:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.
In Luke:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.
Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.
This is a phrase in Hebrew or Aramaic. Luke used Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told what it means. You should probably spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain the meaning.
The "former account" is the Gospel of Luke.
Luke wrote this book to a man named Theophilus. Some translations follow their own culture's way of addressing a letter and write "Dear Theophilus" at the beginning of the sentence. Theophilus means "friend of God"
This refers to Jesus's ascension into heaven. Alternate translation: "until the day on which God took him up to heaven" or "until the day that he ascended into heaven"
The Holy Spirit had led Jesus to instruct his apostles on certain things.
This refers to Jesus's suffering and death on the cross.
Jesus appeared to his apostles and to many other disciples.
Here the word "he" refers to Jesus. Except where otherwise noted, the word "you" in the book of Acts is plural.
This event happened during the 40 days that Jesus appeared to his followers after he had risen from the dead.
"When Jesus was meeting together with his apostles"
This is a reference to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: "the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised to send, about whom Jesus said"
Jesus contrasts how John baptized people in water with how God would baptize believers in the Holy Spirit.
"John indeed baptized people with water"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will baptize you"
Here the word "they" refers to the apostles.
"will you now make Israel a great kingdom again"
Possible meanings are 1) the words "times" and "seasons" refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: "the general period of time or the specific date" or 2) the two words are basically synonymous. Alternate translation: "the exact time"
The apostles will receive power that will enable them to be witnesses for Jesus. Alternate translation: "God will empower you ... to be my witnesses"
Possible meanings are 1) "all over the world" or 2) "to the places on earth that are farthest away"
"as they watched." The apostles "were looking" at Jesus because Jesus rose into the sky. Alternate translation: "as they were looking up at the sky"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he rose up into the sky" or "God raised him up into the sky"
"a cloud blocked their view so that they could no longer see him"
"staring at the sky" or "gazing at the sky"
"from Galilee"
Jesus ascended into the sky, through the clouds, and the clouds hid him Acts 1:9. He will return from the sky, through (or on) the clouds, and people will be able to see him.
"The apostles returned"
This refers to the distance which, according to Rabbinical tradition, a person was allowed to walk on a Sabbath day. Alternate translation: "about one kilometer away"
"When they reached their destination." Verse 12 says they were returning to Jerusalem.
"the room on the upper level of the house"
They all spent much time ... praying
The phrase "with one purpose" translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
This event happened during the time that Peter and the other believers were staying together in the upper room.
These words mark the beginning of a new part of the story. They refer to the period of time after Jesus ascended. On many days after Jesus ascended, the disciples met in the upper chamber. Alternate translation: "During that time"
"one hundred and twenty names"
The word "names" is a metonym for the people whose names they were. Alternate translation: "people"
Here the word "brothers" refers to fellow believers and includes both men and women.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the things that we read about in scripture had to take place"
The word "mouth" refers to the words that David wrote. Alternate translation: "through the words of David"
Although Peter is addressing the entire group of people, here the word "us" refers only to the apostles.
In verse 17 Peter continues his speech to the believers that he began in Acts 1:16.
The author begins to tell the reader background information about how Judas died and what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter's speech.
The words "this man" refers to Judas Iscariot.
"the money that he earned from the evil thing that he did." The words "his wickedness" refer to Judas Iscariot's betraying Jesus to the people who killed him.
This suggests that Judas fell from a high place, rather than just falling down. The fall was severe enough to cause his body to burst open. Other passages of scripture mention that he hanged himself.
The author finishes telling the reader background information about how Judas died and what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter's speech.
When the people living in Jerusalem heard of the way in which Judas died, they renamed the field.
Based on the situation with Judas that Peter just recounted, he recalls two Psalms of David that relate to the incident. The quote ends at the end of this verse.
Peter continues his speech to the believers that he began in Acts 1:16.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "For David wrote in the Book of Psalms"
These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words.
Possible meanings are 1) that the word "field" refers to the field where Judas died or 2) that the word "field" refers to Judas's dwelling place and is a metaphor for his family line.
"become empty"
Here the word "us" refers to the apostles and does not include the audience to whom Peter is speaking.
Peter finishes his speech to the believers that he began in Acts 1:16.
Based on the scriptures that he quoted and on what Judas had done, Peter tells the group what they must do.
Going in and out among a group of people is a metaphor for openly being part of that group. Alternate translation: "the Lord Jesus lived among us"
The qualification for the new apostle that began with the words "It is necessary ... that one of the men who accompanied us" in verse 21 ends here. The subject of the verb "become" is thus "one of the men." Here is a reduced form of the sentence: "It is necessary ... that one of the men who accompanied us ... beginning from the baptism of John ... must become a witness with us."
The noun "baptism" can be translated as a verb. Possible meanings: 1) "beginning from when John baptized Jesus" or 2) "beginning from when John baptized people"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "until the day when Jesus left us and rose up to heaven" or "until the day that God took him up from us"
"must begin to testify with us about his resurrection"
Here the word "They" refers to all of the believers who were present. Alternate translation: "They proposed two men who fulfilled the requirements that Peter listed"
This can be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: "Joseph, whom people also called Barsabbas and Justus"
Here the word "They" refers to all of the believers, but it was probably one of the apostles who spoke these words. Alternate translation: "The believers prayed together and one of the apostles said"
Here the word "hearts" refers to the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: "You, Lord, know the thoughts and motives of everyone"
Here the word "apostleship" defines what kind of "ministry" this is. Alternate translation: "to take Judas's place in this apostolic ministry" or "to take Judas's place in serving as an apostle"
Here the expression "turned away" means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: "which Judas stopped fulfilling"
This phrase refers to Judas's death and likely to his judgment after death. Alternate translation: "to go where he belongs"
The apostles cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias.
The lot indicated that Matthias was the one to replace Judas.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the believers considered him to be an apostle with the other eleven"
1 When the day of Pentecost came, they were all together in the same place. 2 Suddenly a sound like the rush of a violent wind came from heaven, and it filled the whole house where they were sitting. 3 There appeared to them tongues like fire that were distributed, and they sat upon each one of them. 4 They were all filled with the Holy Spirit and began to speak in other tongues, as the Spirit gave them the ability.
5 Now there were Jews who were living in Jerusalem, godly men, from every nation under heaven. 6 When this sound was heard, the multitude came together and was confused because everyone heard them speaking in his own language. 7 They were amazed and marveled; they said, "Really, are not all these who are speaking Galileans? 8 Why is it that we are hearing them, each in our own language in which we were born? 9 Parthians and Medes and Elamites, and those who live in Mesopotamia, in Judea and Cappadocia, in Pontus and Asia, 10 Phrygia and Pamphylia, in Egypt and the parts of Libya toward Cyrene, and visitors from Rome, 11 Jews and proselytes, Cretans and Arabians, we hear them telling in our languages about the mighty works of God." 12 They were all amazed and perplexed; they said to one another, "What does this mean?" 13 But others mocked and said, "They are full of new wine."
14 But Peter stood with the eleven, raised his voice, and declared to them, "Men of Judea and all of you who live at Jerusalem, let this be known to you; pay attention to my words. 15 For these people are not drunk as you assume, for it is only the third hour of the day. 16 But this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel:
17 'It will be in the last days,' God says,
'I will pour out my Spirit on all flesh.
Your sons and your daughters will prophesy,
your young men will see visions,
and your old men will dream dreams.
18 Surely on my servants
and my female servants in those days
I will pour out my Spirit, and they will prophesy.
19 I will show wonders in the sky above
and signs on the earth below,
blood, fire, and vapor of smoke.
20 The sun will be turned to darkness
and the moon to blood
before the great and remarkable
day of the Lord comes.
21 It will be that everyone who calls
on the name of the Lord will be saved.'
22 Men of Israel, hear these words: Jesus of Nazareth was a man accredited to you by God with the mighty deeds and wonders and signs which God did through him in your midst, as you yourselves know. 23 This man was handed over by God's predetermined plan and foreknowledge; and you, by the hand of lawless men, put him to death by nailing him to a cross. 24 But God raised him up, freeing him from the agonies of death, because it was impossible for him to be held by it. 25 For David says about him,
'I saw the Lord always before my face,
for he is beside my right hand
so that I should not be moved.
26 Therefore my heart was glad
and my tongue rejoiced.
Also, my flesh will live in hope.
27 For you will not abandon my soul to Hades,
neither will you allow
your Holy One to see decay.
28 You have made known to me the ways of life;
you will make me full of gladness with your face.'
29 Brothers, it is proper for me to speak to you confidently about the patriarch David, that he both died and was buried, and his tomb is with us to this day. 30 Therefore, he was a prophet and knew that God had sworn with an oath to him that he would set one of the fruit of his loins on his throne. 31 He saw what was to happen in the future and spoke about the resurrection of the Christ, that he was neither abandoned to Hades, nor did his flesh see decay.
32 This Jesus—God raised him up, of which we all are witnesses. 33 Therefore, having been exalted to the right hand of God and having received the promised Holy Spirit from the Father, he has poured out what you see and hear.
34 For David did not ascend to the heaven, but he says,
'The Lord said to my Lord,
"Sit at my right hand
35 until I make your enemies
the footstool for your feet."'
36 Therefore, let all the house of Israel certainly know that God has made him both Lord and Christ, this Jesus whom you crucified."
37 Now when they heard this, they were pierced in their hearts, and said to Peter and the rest of the apostles, "Brothers, what must we do?"
38 Then Peter said to them, "Repent and be baptized, each of you, in the name of Jesus Christ for the forgiveness of your sins, and you will receive the gift of the Holy Spirit. 39 For the promise is to you and to your children and to all who are far off, as many people as the Lord our God will call." 40 With many other words he testified and exhorted them, saying, "Be saved from this perverse generation." 41 Then they received his word and were baptized, and there were added in that day about three thousand souls. 42 They devoted themselves to the apostles' teaching and fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers.
43 Fear came upon every soul, and many wonders and signs were done through the apostles. 44 All who believed were together and had all things in common, 45 and they sold their property and possessions and distributed them to all, according to the needs anyone had. 46 So day after day they devoted themselves with one purpose in the temple. They also broke bread in homes, and they shared food together with glad and generous hearts, 47 praising God and having favor with all the people, and every day the Lord added to their number those who were being saved.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17-21, 25-28, and 34-35.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULB does this with the quoted material in 2:31.
The events described in this chapter are commonly called "Pentecost." Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers at Pentecost.
The word "tongues" has two meanings in this chapter. Luke describes what came down from heaven (Acts 2:3](../../act/02/03.md)) as tongues that looked like fire. This is different from "a tongue of flame," which is a fire that looks like a tongue. Luke also uses the word "tongues" to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them ([Acts 2:4).
No one knows for sure when the "last days" (Acts 2:17) began. Your translation should not say more than the ULB does about this. (See: lastday)
The word "baptize" in this chapter refers to Christian baptism (Acts 2:38-41). Though the event described in Acts 2:1-11 is the baptism of the Holy Spirit that Jesus promised in Acts 1:5, the word "baptize" here does not refer to that event. (See: baptize)
Many of the things that Joel said would happen did happen on the day of Pentecost (Acts 2:17-18), but some things Joel spoke of have not happened yet (Acts 2:19-20). (See: prophet)
These words refer to things that only God could do, things that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was.
This is a new event; it is now the Day of Pentecost, 50 days after Passover. Here the word "they" refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers that Luke mentions in Acts 1:15.
This word explains that no one expected to hear the sound or to have it fill the house.
Possible meanings are 1) "heaven" refers to the place where God lives. Alternate translation: "a sound came from heaven" or 2) "heaven" refers to the sky. Alternate translation: "a sound came from the sky"
This may have been a house or a larger building.
These might have been something that looked like tongues or like fire, not actual tongues or fire. Possible meanings are 1) tongues that looked like they were made of fire or 2) small flames of fire that looked like tongues. When fire burns in a small space, such as on a lamp, the flame can be shaped like a tongue.
This means that the "tongues like fire" spread out so that there was one on each person.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The Holy Spirit filled all of those who were there and they"
They were speaking in languages that they did not already know.
The Holy Spirit gave them the ability to speak; they were dependent on the Spirit to speak in different languages.
Here the word "them" refers to the believers; the word "his" refers to each person in the multitude. Verse 5 gives background information about the large number of Jews who were living in Jerusalem, many of whom were present during this event.
Here "godly men" refers to people who were devout in their worship of God and tried to obey all of the Jewish laws.
"every nation in the world." The word "every" is an exaggeration that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: "many different nations"
This refers to the sound that was similar to a strong wind. Alternate translation: "When they heard this sound"
"the large crowd of people"
These two words share similar meanings. Together they emphasize the intensity of amazement. Alternate translation: "They were greatly amazed"
The people ask this question to express their amazement. The question could be changed to an exclamation. Alternate translation: "All of these Galileans could not possibly know our languages!"
Possible meanings are 1) this is a rhetorical question that expresses how amazed they were or 2) this is a real question for which the people wanted an answer.
"in our own languages that we have learned from birth"
These are names of people groups.
These are names of large areas of land.
These are names of large areas of land.
These are names of people groups.
converts to the Jewish religion
These two words share similar meanings. Together they emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: "surprised and confused"
Some people accuse the believers of having drunk too much wine. Alternate translation: "They are drunk"
This refers to wine that is in the process of fermentation.
Peter begins his speech to the Jews who were there on the Day of Pentecost.
All the apostles stood up in support of Peter's statement.
This is an idiom for "spoke loudly."
Made a formal, important speech to them. See how you translated "make declarations" in Acts 2:4.
This means that Peter is about to explain the meaning of what the people had witnessed. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "know this" or "let me explain this to you"
Peter was referring to what he was saying. Alternate translation: "listen carefully to what I am saying"
"It is only nine o'clock in the morning." Peter expected his audience to know that people do not get drunk that early in the day.
Here Peter tells them a passage about which the prophet Joel wrote in the Old Testament that relates to what is happening with the languages in which the believers spoke. This is written in the form of poetry as well as being a quotation.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "this is what God told the prophet Joel to write" or "this is that which the prophet Joel spoke"
"This is what will happen" or "This is what I will do"
Here the words "pour out" mean to give generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: "I will give my Spirit abundantly to all flesh"
This is a hyperbolic metonym that refers to all people by speaking of them as all living creatures, who have flesh. Alternate translation: "all people"
Peter continues to quote the prophet Joel.
"both my male and my female servants." These words emphasize that God will pour out his Spirit on all of his servants, both men and women.
Here the words "pour out" mean to give generously and abundantly. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:17]
"thick smoke" or "clouds of smoke"
Peter finishes quoting the prophet Joel.
This means that the sun will appear to be dark instead of light. Alternate translation: "The sun will become dark"
This means that the moon will appear to be red like blood. Alternate translation: "the moon will be turned to blood" or "the moon will appear to be red"
The words "great" and "remarkable" share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of greatness. Alternate translation: "the very great day"
great and beautiful
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Lord will save everyone who calls on him"
Peter continues his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 1:16.
"listen to what I am about to say"
This means that God proved that he had appointed Jesus for his mission, and proved who he was by his many miracles.
The nouns "plan" and "foreknowledge" can be translated as verbs. This means that God planned out and knew beforehand what would happen to Jesus. Alternate translation: "because God planned out and knew beforehand everything that would happen"
Possible meanings: 1) "you handed Jesus over into the hands of his enemies" or 2) "Judas betrayed Jesus to you."
Although "lawless men" actually crucified Jesus, Peter accuses the crowd of having killed him because they demanded his death.
Here "hand" refers to the actions of the lawless men. Alternate translation: "through the actions of lawless men" or "by what lawless men did"
Possible meanings are 1) the unbelieving Jews who accused Jesus of crimes or 2) the Roman soldiers who performed the execution of Jesus.
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "But God caused him to live again"
He speaks of the agonies of dying as if God were freeing Christ from ropes that were binding Jesus. Alternate translation: "ending the pains of death"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "for death to hold him"
Peter speaks of Christ remaining dead as if death were a person who held him captive. Alternate translation: "for him to remain dead"
Here Peter quotes a passage that David wrote in a Psalm which relates to Jesus's crucifixion and resurrection. Since Peter says that David said these words about Jesus, the words "I" and "my" refer to Jesus and the words "Lord" and "he" refer to God.
The context makes it plain that this is an elliptical way of saying that David was speaking as if David were the Messiah. Alternate translation: "For David spoke these words as if he were the Christ: 'I saw"
"in front of me." Alternate translation: "in my presence" or "with me"
To be at someone's "right hand" often means to be in a position to help and sustain. Alternate translation: "right beside me" or "with me to help me"
Here the word "moved" means to be troubled. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "people will not be able to cause me trouble" or "nothing will trouble me"
People consider the "heart" the center of emotions and the "tongue" voices those emotions. Alternate translation: "I was glad and rejoiced"
Possible meanings of the phrase "my flesh" are 1) it indicates that the writer is a mortal who will die. Alternate translation: "even though I am only mortal, I will live in hope" or 2) it is a synecdoche for the writer's entire person. Alternate translation: "I will live in hope"
Here the word "hope" refers to a person's confidence that what he desires will happen. Since the speaker hoped that God would rescue him, "in hope" could be translated as "in confidence in God." The phrase "live in hope" can also be translated with the phrases "confidently expect," "confidently wait," or "trust." Alternate translation: "will live with confidence in God" or "will confidently wait for God to rescue me"
Since Peter says that David said these words about Jesus, the words "my," "Holy One," and "me" refer to Jesus and the words "you" and "your" refer to God.
Peter finishes quoting David.
The Messiah, Jesus, refers to himself with the words "your Holy One." Alternate translation: "neither will you allow me, your Holy One, to see decay"
Here the word "see" means to experience something. The word "decay" refers to the decomposition of his body after death. Alternate translation: "to decay"
"the ways that lead to life"
Here the word "face" refers to the presence of God. Alternate translation: "very glad when I see you" or "very glad when I am in your presence"
joy, happiness
The words "he" and "his" refer to David.
Peter continues the speech to the Jews that surround him and the other believers in Jerusalem, which he began in Acts 1:16.
"My fellow Jews, it"
Or "it is possible." He is able to speak because it is proper for him to do so.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he died and people buried him"
"God would set one of David's fruit upon David's throne." Alternate translation: "God would appoint one of David's fruit to be king in David's place"
This is a metaphor for a child or other descendant. Alternate translation: "one of his children" or "one of his descendants"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Neither did God abandon him to Hades nor did his flesh see decay" or "God did not abandon him to Hades, and his flesh did not see decay"
Here the word "see" means to experience something. The word "decay" refers to the decomposition of his body after death. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:27]
Peter talks again about Jesus. Alternate Translation: "It is this Jesus whom God raised up" or "God raised up this Jesus"
This is an idiom. Alternate translation: "God caused him to live again"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "because God has exalted Jesus up to his right hand"
"Right hand of God" here is an idiom that means that Christ will rule as God, with God’s authority. Alternate translation: "Christ is in the position of God"
Here the words "poured out" mean that Jesus, who is God, made these events to happen. It is implicit that he did this by giving the Holy Spirit to the believers. Alternate translation: "he has caused to happen these things that"
"has given generously and abundantly." See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 2:17. Alternate translation: "given abundantly"
Peter again quotes one of David's Psalms. David is not speaking of himself in this Psalm. "The Lord" and "my" refer to God; "my Lord" and "your" refer to Jesus the Messiah.
Peter finishes his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 1:16.
To sit at the "right hand of God" is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: "Sit in the place of honor beside me"
This means that God will completely defeat the Messiah's enemies and make them subject to him. Alternate translation: "until I make you victorious over all of your enemies"
This refers to the entire nation of Israel. Alternate translation: "every Israelite"
Here the word "they" refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke.
The Jews respond to Peter's speech and Peter answers them.
"when the people heard what Peter had said"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Peter's words pierced their hearts, and they said"
This means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: "deeply troubled"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "allow us to baptize you"
"In the name of" here is a metonym for "by the authority of" Alternate translation: "by the authority of Jesus Christ"
This means either 1) "all people who live far away" or 2) "all people who are far from God."
"he seriously told them." Here the word "testified" and "begged" share similar meanings and emphasize that Peter urged them strongly to respond to what he was saying. Alternate translation: "he strongly urged them"
or "pleaded with"
The implication is that God will punish "this perverse generation." Alternate translation: "Be saved from the punishment that these wicked people will suffer"
Possible meanings are 1) Peter was urging people to let God save them. Alternate translation: "Let God save you," or 2) Peter was simply urging them in a general way to avoid being punished. Alternate translation: "Save yourselves" or "Flee" or "Escape"
This is the end of the part of the story that happened on the Day of Pentecost.
Here the word "received" means that they accepted what Peter said to be true. Alternate translation: "they believed what Peter said"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "people baptized them"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "about three thousand souls joined the believers on that day"
Here the word "souls" refers to people. Alternate translation: "about 3,000 people"
This section explains how the believers continued to live after the Day of Pentecost.
Bread was part of their meals. These words could refer to 1) any meals they might eat together. Alternate translation: "eating meals together" or 2) meals they would eat together in order to remember Christ's death and resurrection. Alternate translation: "eating the Lord's Supper together"
Here the word "Fear" refers to deep respect and awe for God. The word "soul" refers to the entire person. Alternate translation: "Each person felt a deep respect and awe for God"
Possible meanings are 1) "the apostles performed many wonders and signs" or 2) "God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles"
"miraculous deeds and supernatural events." See how you translated this in Acts 2:22.
Possible meanings are 1) "All of them believed the same thing" or 2) "All who believed were together in the same place."
"shared their belongings with one another"
"land and things they owned"
Here the word "them" refers to the profit that they made from selling their property and possessions. Alternate translation: "distributed the proceeds to all"
They distributed the proceeds that they earned from selling their property and possessions to any believer who had a need.
You may need to supply the words that have been omitted in this ellipse. What they devoted themselves to doing is stated in verse 42. Alternate translation: "they devoted themselves to the apostles' teaching with one purpose in the temple"
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
Bread was part of their meals. Alternate translation: "They also ate meals together in their homes"
"praising God. All the people approved of them"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "those whom the Lord saved"
1 Now Peter and John were going up into the temple at the hour of prayer, the ninth hour. 2 Now a man who was lame from his mother's womb was being carried to the temple gate called Beautiful. They would place him there every day so he could ask those who were going into the temple for alms. 3 When he saw Peter and John about to enter the temple, he asked them for alms. 4 Peter, fastening his eyes upon him, with John, said, "Look at us." 5 The lame man looked at them, expecting to receive something from them. 6 But Peter said, "Silver and gold I do not have, but what I do have, I will give to you. In the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth, walk." 7 Taking him by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man's feet and ankles were made strong. 8 Leaping up, the lame man stood and began to walk; and he entered with Peter and John into the temple, walking, leaping, and praising God. 9 All the people saw him walking and praising God. 10 They noticed that it was the man who had been asking people for alms at the Beautiful Gate of the temple; and they were filled with wonder and amazement because of what had happened to him.
11 As he was holding on to Peter and John, all the people ran together to them in the porch that is called Solomon's, greatly marveling. 12 When Peter saw this, he answered the people, "You Israelite men, why do you marvel? Why do you fix your eyes on us, as if we made him walk by our own power or godliness? 13 The God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob, the God of our fathers, has glorified his servant Jesus. He is the one whom you handed over and rejected before the face of Pilate, when he had decided to release him. 14 You rejected the Holy and Righteous One, and you asked instead for a murderer to be given to you. 15 You killed the Founder of life, whom God raised from the dead—and we are witnesses of this. 16 On the basis of faith in his name, his name made this man, whom you see and know, strong. The faith that is through Jesus has given him this perfect health in the presence of you all. 17 Now, brothers, I know that you acted in ignorance, as did also your rulers. 18 But the things which God foretold by the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ should suffer, he has now fulfilled. 19 Repent, therefore, and turn, so that your sins may be blotted out, 20 so that times of refreshing may come from the presence of the Lord; and that he may send the Christ who has been appointed for you, Jesus. 21 He is the One heaven must receive until the time of the restoration of all things, about which God spoke from ancient times by the mouth of his holy prophets. 22 Moses indeed said, 'The Lord God will raise up a prophet like me from among your brothers. You must listen to everything he tells you. 23 It will happen that every person who does not listen to that prophet will be completely destroyed from among the people.' 24 Yes, and all the prophets from Samuel and those who came after him, they spoke out and announced these days. 25 You are the sons of the prophets and of the covenant that God made with your ancestors, as he said to Abraham, 'In your seed all the families of the earth will be blessed.' 26 After God raised up his servant, he sent him to you first, in order to bless you by turning every one of you from your wickedness."
This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews because God was fulfilling part of the covenant he had made with Abraham. Peter thought that the Jews were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus, but he wanted them to understand that Jesus, by living and dying, had fulfilled God's promise to Abraham and that if they repented, God would forgive them.
The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and told the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter thought that they were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus. But he tells them that they are also the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus's followers to invite them to repent (Acts 3:26). (See: repent)
One day Peter and John go to the temple.
They did not go into the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: "to the temple courtyard" or "into the temple area"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "people were carrying a man who was lame from from his mother's womb"
"ever since he was born"
This was one of the gates in the high, strong wall that surrounded the temple. People sometimes gathered near the gate.
unable to walk
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Both Peter and John looked at the man, but only Peter spoke.
Possible meanings are 1) "looking directly at him" or 2) "looking intently at him"
Here the word "looked" means to pay attention to something. Alternate translation: "The lame man paid close attention to them"
"I do not own any silver or gold"
These words refer to money.
It is understood that Peter has the ability to heal the man.
Here the word "name" refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: "With the authority of Jesus Christ"
"Peter caused him to stand"
He did not go inside the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: "he entered ... the temple area" or "he entered ... into the temple courtyard"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"realized that it was the man" or "recognized him as the man"
This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 3:2.
Here the words "wonder" and "amazement" share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of the people's amazement. Alternate translation: "they were extremely amazed"
The phrase "in the porch that is called Solomon's" makes it clear that they were not inside the temple where only the priests were allowed to enter. Here the words "us" and "we" refer to Peter and John but not to the crowd to whom Peter is talking.
After healing the man who could not walk, Peter talks to the people.
"Solomon's Porch." This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof, and which people named after king Solomon. It was in the temple courtyard.
"extremely surprised"
Here the word "this" refers to the amazement of the people.
"Fellow Israelites." Peter was addressing the crowd.
Peter asks this question to emphasize that they should not be surprised by what had happened. Alternate translation: "you should not be surprised."
Peter asks this question to emphasize that the people should not think that he and John had healed the man by their own abilities. This could be written as two statements. Alternate translation: "Do not fix your eyes on us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness."
This means that they looked intently at them without stopping. Alternate translation: "stare at us" or "look at us"
Peter continues his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 3:12.
Here the phrase "before the face of" means "in the presence of." Alternate translation: "rejected in Pilate's presence"
"when Pilate had decided to release Jesus"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "for Pilate to release a murderer to you"
Here the word "we" includes just Peter and John.
This refers to Jesus. Possible meanings are 1) "the one who gives people eternal life" or 2) "the ruler of life" or 3) "the one who leads people to life"
Possible meanings are 1) this is the reason the man was made strong. Alternate translation: "Because of faith in his name" or 2) this is how the man was made strong. Alternate translation: "By faith in his name"
The word "his" refers to the Founder of life, Jesus. The abstract noun "faith" can be translated with the verb "believe." Possible meanings are 1) the lame man had faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: "Because he believed in Jesus name" or 2) Peter and John, and perhaps the lame man, had faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: "Because we believed in Jesus's name"
The phrase "his name" is a metonym either for Jesus or for Jesus's power.
"made this man ... well"
Possible meanings are 1) this is the faith that Jesus enables people to have. Alternate translation: "The faith that comes from Jesus" or 2) this is faith in Jesus.
Here Peter shifts the audience's attention from the lame man and continues to talk to them directly.
Possible meanings are 1) that the people did not know that Jesus was the Messiah or 2) that the people did not understand the significance of what they were doing.
When the prophets spoke, it was as though God himself was speaking because he told them what to say. Alternate translation: "God foretold by telling all of the prophets what to speak"
"God spoke about ahead of time" or "God told about before they happened"
Here the word "mouth" refers to the words that the prophets spoke and wrote down. Alternate translation: "the words of all the prophets"
"and turn to the Lord." Here "turn" is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: "and start obeying the Lord"
Here "blotted out" is a metaphor for forgiving. Sins are spoken of as if they are written in a book and God erases them from the book when he forgives them. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "so that God will forgive you for sinning against him"
Possible meanings are 1) "times when God will strengthen your spirits" or 2) "times when God will revive you"
Here the words "presence of the Lord" is a metonym for the Lord himself. Alternate translation: "from the Lord"
"that he may again send the Christ." This refers to Christ's coming again.
This may be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom he has appointed for you"
Peter continues the speech that he began in Acts 3:12 to the Jews who stood in the temple area.
"He is the One heaven must welcome." Peter speaks of heaven as if it were a person who welcomes Jesus into his home.
This means that it is necessary for Jesus to remain in heaven because that is what God has planned.
Possible meanings are 1) "until the time when God will restore all things" or 2) "until the time when God will fulfill everything that he foretold."
When the prophets spoke long ago, it was as if God himself was speaking because he told them what to say. Alternate translation: "about which things God spoke long ago by telling his holy prophets to speak about them"
Here the word "mouth" refers to the words that the prophets spoke and wrote down. Alternate translation: "the words of his holy prophets"
Peter begins to quote something Moses told the Israelites before the Messiah came.
"will cause one of your brothers to become a true prophet, and everyone will know about him"
"your nation"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that prophet, God will completely destroy"
Peter finishes his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 3:12.
"In fact, all the prophets." Here the word "Yes" adds emphasis to what follows.
"beginning with Samuel and continuing with the prophets who lived after he did"
"these times" or "the things that are happening now"
Here the word "sons" refers to heirs who will receive what the prophets and the covenant promised. Alternate translation: "You are the heirs of the prophets and heirs of the covenant"
"Because of your offspring"
Here the word "families" refers to people groups or nations. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I will bless all the people groups in the world"
"After God caused Jesus to become his servant and made him famous"
This refers to the Messiah, Jesus.
Here "turning ... from" is a metaphor for causing someone stop doing something. Alternate translation: "causing every one of you to stop doing wicked things" or "causing every one of you to repent from your wickedness"
1 As Peter and John were speaking to the people, the priests and the captain of the temple and the Sadducees came upon them. 2 They were deeply troubled because Peter and John were teaching the people and proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection from the dead. 3 They laid hands on them and put them in custody until the next morning, since it was now evening. 4 But many of the people who had heard the message believed; and the number of the men who believed was about five thousand.
5 It came about on the next day that their rulers, elders, and scribes gathered together in Jerusalem. 6 Annas the high priest was there, and Caiaphas, and John, and Alexander, and all who were relatives of the high priest. 7 When they had set Peter and John in their midst, they asked them, "By what power, or in what name, have you done this?" 8 Then Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said to them, "You rulers of the people, and elders, 9 if we are on trial today concerning a good deed done to a sick man, and by what means this man was healed, 10 let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel that this man stands before you healthy in the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth, whom you crucified, but whom God raised from the dead. 11 Jesus Christ is the stone which you builders rejected but which has been made the cornerstone. 12 There is no salvation in any other person, for there is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved."
13 Now when they saw the boldness of Peter and John and realized that they were ordinary, uneducated men, they were surprised, becoming aware that Peter and John had been with Jesus. 14 Because they saw the man who was healed standing with them, they had nothing to say against this. 15 But after they had commanded the apostles to leave the council meeting, they talked among themselves. 16 They said, "What should we do with these men? For a remarkable sign has been done through them, and this is evident to everyone who lives in Jerusalem, and we cannot deny it. 17 But in order that it spreads no further among the people, let us warn them not to speak anymore to anyone in this name." 18 Then they called them in and commanded them not to speak or teach at all in the name of Jesus. 19 But Peter and John answered and said to them, "Whether it is proper in the sight of God to obey you rather than him, you judge. 20 We are not able to stop speaking about the things we have seen and heard." 21 After further warning Peter and John, they let them go. They were unable to find any excuse to punish them, because all of the people were glorifying God for what had been done. 22 The man who had experienced this sign of healing was more than forty years old.
23 After they were set free, Peter and John came to their own people and reported all that the chief priests and the elders had said to them. 24 When they heard it, they raised their voices with one purpose to God and said, "Lord, you made the heavens and the earth and the sea, and all that is in them. 25 You spoke by the Holy Spirit through the mouth of your servant, our father David,
'Why did the Gentile nations rage,
and the peoples imagine useless things?'
26 You said,
'The kings of the earth set themselves together,
and the rulers gathered together
against the Lord, and against his Christ.'
27 Indeed, both Herod and Pontius Pilate, together with the Gentiles and the people of Israel, gathered together in this city against your holy servant Jesus, whom you anointed. 28 They gathered together to do all that your hand and your plan had decided in advance would happen. 29 Now, Lord, look upon their warnings and grant to your servants to speak your word with all boldness. 30 Stretch out your hand to heal and to give signs and wonders through the name of your holy servant Jesus." 31 After they had prayed, the place where they were gathered together was shaken, and they were all filled with the Holy Spirit and they spoke the word of God with boldness.
32 The great number of those who believed were of one heart and soul. No one said that anything he possessed was his own, but they had everything in common. 33 With great power the apostles were proclaiming their testimony about the resurrection of the Lord Jesus, and great grace was upon them all. 34 There was no person among them who lacked anything, for all who owned title to lands or houses sold them and brought the money from the things that were sold 35 and laid it at the apostles' feet, and it was distributed to each one according to their need.
36 Joseph, whom the apostles called Barnabas (which is translated Son of Encouragement), a Levite, a man from Cyprus, 37 sold a field that belonged to him and brought the money and laid it at the apostles' feet.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25-26.
The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.
This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he can do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.
The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything about the church depends on Jesus. (See: and faith)
"There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved" (Acts 4:12). With these words Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or will ever be on earth can save people.
The religious leaders arrest Peter and John after Peter's having healed the man who was born lame.
"approached them" or "came to them"
"They were very angry." The Sadducees, in particular, would have been angry about what Peter and John were saying because they did not believe in resurrection.
Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way as he had raised Jesus from among the dead. Translate this in a way that allows "the resurrection" to refer to both Jesus's resurrection and the general resurrection of other people.
From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
"The priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees arrested Peter and John"
It was common practice not to question people at night.
This refers only to men and does not include how many women or children believed.
"grew to about five thousand"
Here the word "their" refers to the Jewish people as a whole.
The rulers question Peter and John, who answer without fear.
This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
This is a reference to the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling court, which consisted of these three groups of people.
These two men were members of the high priest's family. This is not the same John as the apostle.
"Who gave you power"
Here the word "name" refers to authority. Alternate translation: "by whose authority"
This can be stated in active form. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:4]
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you are questioning us today"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "by what means we have made this man well"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "May all of you and all of the people of Israel know this"
"to you who are questioning us and to all the other people of Israel"
Here the word "name" refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: "by the power of Jesus Christ of Nazareth"
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "whom God caused to live again"
Peter completes his speech to the Jewish religious rulers that he began in Acts 4:8.
Peter is quoting from the Psalms. This is a metaphor that means the religious leaders, like builders, rejected Jesus, but God will made him the most important in his kingdom, as a cornerstone in a building is important.
"you builders thought was worth nothing"
Here the word "we" refers to Peter as well as those to whom he is speaking.
The noun "salvation" can be translated as a verb. This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: "He is the only person who is able to save"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "no other name under heaven that God has given among men"
The phrase "name ... given among men" refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: "no other person under heaven, who is given among men, by whom"
This is a way of referring to everywhere in the world. Alternate translation: "in the world"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "which can save us" or "who can save us"
Here the second instance of "they" refers to Peter and John. All other occurrences of the word "they" in this section refer to the Jewish leaders.
Here the abstract noun "boldness" refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders, and can be translated with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: "how boldly Peter and John had spoken" or "how bold Peter and John were"
bravery, courage, lack of fear. A person with boldness is not afraid.
The Jewish leaders "realized" this because of the way Peter and John spoke.
"and understood"
The words "ordinary" and "uneducated" share similar meanings. They emphasize that Peter and John had received no formal training in Jewish law.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the man whom Peter and John had healed"
"nothing to say against Peter and John's healing of the man." Here the word "this" refers to what Peter and John had done.
This refers to Peter and John.
The Jewish leaders ask this question out of frustration because they could not think of what to do with Peter and John. Alternate translation: "There is nothing that we can do with these men!"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "For God has done a remarkable sign through them, and everyone who lives in Jerusalem has seen it" or "For everyone who lives in Jerusalem knows that they have done a remarkable sign"
The miracle of healing was a sign that Peter and John were obeying God, who did the healing.
This is a generalization. It may also be an exaggeration to show that the leaders think that this is a very big problem. Alternate translation: "many of the people who live in Jerusalem" or "people who live throughout Jerusalem"
Here the word "it" refers to any miracles or teaching Peter and John might continue to do. Alternate translation: "in order that news of this miracle spreads no further" or "in order that no more people hear about this miracle"
Here the word "name" refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: "not to speak anymore to anyone about this person, Jesus"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here the phrase "in the sight of God" refers to God's opinion. Alternate translation: "Whether God thinks it is right"
Here the word "we" refers to Peter and John but not to those whom they are addressing.
The Jewish leaders again threatened to punish Peter and John.
Although the Jewish leaders threatened Peter and John, they could not find a reason to punish them without causing the people to riot.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "for what Peter and John had done"
This verse gives background information about the age of the lame man who was healed.
"The man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed"
The miracle of healing was a sign that Peter and John were obeying God, who did the healing.
The phrase "their own people" refers to the rest of the believers. Alternate translation: "went to the other believers"
Speaking together, the people quote a Psalm of David from the Old Testament. Here the word "they" refers to the rest of the believers, but not to Peter and John.
To raise the voice is an idiom for speaking. "they began speaking with one purpose to God"
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
This means that the Holy Spirit caused David to speak or write down what God said.
Here the word "mouth" refers to the words that David spoke or wrote down. Alternate translation: "by the words of your servant, our father David"
Here the word "father" refers to an ancestor.
This is a rhetorical question that emphasizes the futility of opposing God. Alternate translation: "The Gentile nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things."
These "useless things" consist of plans to oppose God. Alternate translation: "the peoples imagine useless things against God"
people groups
The believers complete their quotation from King David in the Psalms that they began in Acts 4:25.
These two lines mean basically the same thing. The two lines emphasize the combined effort of the earth's rulers to oppose God.
These two phrases mean that they joined their armies together to fight a battle. Alternate translation: "set their armies together ... gathered their troops together"
Here the word "Lord" refers to God. In the Psalms, the word "Christ" refers to the Messiah or God's anointed one.
The believers continue praying.
"this city" refers to Jerusalem.
"Jesus, who serves you faithfully"
Here the word "hand" is used to mean God's power. Additionally, the phrase "your hand and your desire decided" shows God's power and plan. Alternate translation: "to do all that you in your power had decided and planned they would do"
Here the words "look upon" are a request for God to take notice of the way in which the Jewish leaders threatened the believers. Alternate translation: "notice how they threaten to punish us"
The word "word" here is a metonym for God's message. The abstract noun "boldness" can be translated as an adverb. Alternate translation: "speak your message boldly" or "be bold when we speak your message"
The believers complete the prayer that they began in Acts 4:24.
Here the word "hand" refers to God's power. This is a request for God to show how powerful he is. Alternate translation: "Show your power by healing people and by giving"
Here the word "name" refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: "through the power of your holy servant Jesus"
"Jesus, who serves you faithfully." See how you translated this in Acts 4:27.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the place ... shook"
This can be stated in active form. See how you translated this in Acts 2:4. Alternate translation: "the Holy Spirit had filled them all" or "God had filled them all with the Holy Spirit"
Here the word "heart" refers to the thoughts and the word "soul" refers to the emotions. Together they refer to the total person. Alternate translation: "thought the same way and wanted the same things"
"they shared their belongings with one another." See how you translated this in Acts 2:44.
Possible meanings are: 1) that God was greatly blessing the believers or 2) that the people in Jerusalem held the believers in very high esteem.
The word "all" here is a generalization. Alternate translation: "Many people who owned title to lands or houses" or "People who owned title to lands or houses"
"owned land or houses"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the money that they received from the things that they sold"
This means that they presented the money to the apostles. Alternate translation: "presented it to the apostles" or "gave it to the apostles"
The noun "need" can be translated with a verb. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they distributed the money to each believer who needed it"
Luke introduces Barnabas into the story.
The apostles used this name to show that Joseph was a person who encouraged others. "Son of" is an idiom used to describe a person's behavior or character. Alternate translation: "Encourager" or "one who encourages"
This means that they presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated this in [Acts 4:35]
1 Now a certain man named Ananias, with Sapphira his wife, sold a piece of property, 2 and he kept back part of the sale money (his wife also knew it), and brought the other part of it and laid it at the apostles' feet. 3 But Peter said, "Ananias, why has Satan filled your heart to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back part of the price of the land? 4 While it remained unsold, did it not remain your own, and after it was sold, was it not under your authority? Why did you put it in your heart to do this? You have not lied to men, but to God." 5 Hearing these words, Ananias fell down and breathed his last, and great fear came upon all who heard it. 6 The young men arose and wrapped him up, and they carried him out and buried him.
7 After about three hours, his wife came in, not knowing what had happened. 8 Peter said to her, "Tell me whether you sold the land for so much." She said, "Yes, for so much." 9 Then Peter said to her, "How is it that you have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord? Look, the feet of the men who buried your husband are at the door, and they will carry you out." 10 She immediately fell down at his feet and breathed her last. When the young men came in, they found her dead, and carried her out and buried her beside her husband. 11 Great fear came upon the whole church and upon all who heard these things.
12 Many signs and wonders were taking place among the people through the hands of the apostles. They were all together in Solomon's Porch. 13 But none of the rest had the courage to join them; however, they were held in high esteem by the people. 14 Still more believers were being added to the Lord, multitudes of men and women, 15 so that they even carried the sick into the streets and laid them on beds and couches, so that as Peter came by, his shadow might fall on some of them. 16 There also came together a great number of people from the towns around Jerusalem, bringing the sick and those afflicted with unclean spirits, and they were all healed.
17 But the high priest rose up, and all those who were with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees); and they were filled with jealousy 18 and laid hands on the apostles, and held them in custody in the common prison. 19 Yet during the night an angel of the Lord opened the doors of the prison and led them out, and said, 20 "Go, stand in the temple and speak to the people all the words of this life." 21 When they heard this, they entered into the temple about daybreak and taught. But the high priest came, and those who were with him, and called the council together, all the elders of the people of Israel, and sent to the prison to have the apostles brought. 22 But the officers that went did not find them in the prison, and they returned and reported, 23 "We found the prison securely shut and the guards standing at the door, but when we had opened it, we found no one inside." 24 Now when the captain of the temple and the chief priests heard these words, they were much perplexed concerning them as to what would come of it. 25 Then someone came and told them, "The men whom you put in the prison are standing in the temple and teaching the people." 26 So the captain went with the officers and brought them back, but without violence, for they feared the people, that they might be stoned. 27 When they had brought them, they set them before the council. The high priest interrogated them, 28 saying, "We ordered you with a command not to teach in this name, and yet you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching and desire to bring this man's blood upon us." 29 But Peter and the apostles answered, "We must obey God rather than men. 30 The God of our fathers raised up Jesus, whom you killed by hanging him on a tree. 31 God exalted him to his right hand to be a Prince and a Savior, to give repentance to Israel, and forgiveness of sins. 32 We are witnesses of these things, and so is the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those who obey him."
33 When the council members heard this, they were furious and they wanted to kill the apostles. 34 But a Pharisee named Gamaliel, a teacher of the law who was honored by all the people, stood up in the council and gave a command to take the men outside for a little while. 35 Then he said to them, "Men of Israel, pay close attention to what you propose to do with these people. 36 For before these days, Theudas rose up claiming to be somebody, and a number of men, about four hundred, joined him. He was killed, and all who had been obeying him were scattered and came to nothing. 37 After this man, Judas of Galilee rose up in the days of the census and drew away some people after him. He also perished, and all who had been obeying him were scattered. 38 Now I say to you, keep away from these men and let them alone, for if this plan or work is of men, it will be overthrown. 39 But if it is of God, you will not be able to overthrow them; you may even find that you are fighting against God." So they were persuaded. 40 Then they called the apostles in and beat them and commanded them not to speak in the name of Jesus, and let them go. 41 They went away from before the council rejoicing that they were counted worthy to suffer dishonor for the Name. 42 Thereafter every day, in the temple and from house to house, they were continuously teaching and proclaiming the good news that the Christ is Jesus.
No one knows for sure if Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (Acts 5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan.
When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.
Continuing the story of how the new Christians shared their belongings with other believers, Luke tells about two believers, Ananias and Sapphria.
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story to tell a new part of the story.
"his wife also knew that he kept back part of the sale money"
This means that they presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated this in [Acts 4:35]
If your language does not use rhetorical questions, you may reword these as statements.
Peter uses this question to rebuke Ananias. Alternate translation: "you should not have let Satan fill your heart to lie ... land."
Here the word "heart" is a metonym for the will and emotions. The phrase "Satan filled your heart" is a metaphor. Possible meanings of the metaphor are 1) "Satan completely controlled you" or 2) "Satan convinced you"
This implies that Ananias had told the apostles that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land.
Peter uses this question to rebuke Ananias. Alternate translation: "While it remained unsold, it was your own ... authority."
"Before you sold it"
Peter uses this question to rebuke Ananias. Alternate translation: "after it was sold, you had control over the money that you received."
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "after you sold it"
Peter used this question to rebuke Ananias. Here the word "heart" refers to the will and emotions. Alternate translation: "You should not have thought of doing this thing." or "It is Satan who has put this activity in your heart."
Here "breathed his last" means "breathed his final breath" and is a polite way of saying that he died. Ananias fell down because he died; he did not die because he fell down. Alternate translation: "died and fell to the ground"
This means that they began to act. This does not necessarily mean that they had been sitting or that Peter and Ananias had been at the front of the room or a meeting hall. If your language has a phrase that speaks of people responding to something by beginning to act, you may use it.
"Ananias' wife came in" or "Sapphira came in"
"that her husband had died"
"for this much money." This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles.
Here the word "you" is plural and refers to both Ananias and Sapphira.
Peter asks this question to rebuke Sapphira. Alternate translation: "You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!"
"the two of you have agreed together"
Here the word "test" means to challenge or to prove. They were trying to see if they could get away with lying to God without receiving punishment.
The word "Look" is an idiom for "Pay attention!" Peter is probably telling Sapphira to pay attention to the sound of the men's footsteps, which indicate that they are about to enter the building, not to look at their feet. Here the phrase "the feet" can be either a synecdoche for the men whose feet they are or a metonym for the sound that they make. Alternate translation: "Pay attention! The men" or "Listen! The footsteps of the men"
"the men will carry"
This is the end of the part of the story about Ananias and Sapphira.
This means that when she died, she fell on the floor in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with falling down at a person's feet as a sign of humility.
Here "breathed his last" means "breathed her final breath" and is a polite way of saying "she died." See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 5:5]
This page has intentionally been left blank.
It is not clear whether here the word "They" refers to the believers or only to the apostles.
Luke continues to tell what happens in the early days of the church.
"Many signs and wonders took place among the people through the hands of the apostles." This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The apostles performed many signs and wonders among the people"
"supernatural events and miraculous deeds." See how you translated these terms in Acts 2:22
Here the word "hands" refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: "through the apostles"
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose. The people were more than just in the same place at the same time.
This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof, and which people named after king Solomon. See how you translated "the porch that is called Solomon's" in Acts 3:11.
The words "them" and "they" refer to the apostles.
Possible meanings are 1) the apostles were in Solomon's Porch, but the rest of the believers were afraid to join them there, or 2) all the believers were in Solomon's Porch, and the word "none" is a hyperbole that means that most of the people who were not believers were afraid to join them.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the people held the believers in high esteem"
This could be stated in active form. See how you translated "were added" in [Acts 2:41]
Here the word "they" refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem.
It is implied that God would heal them if Peter's shadow touched them.
"those whom unclean spirits had afflicted"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God healed them all" or "the apostles healed them all"
The religious leaders began to persecute the believers.
This begins a contrasting story. You may translate this in the way that your language introduces a contrasting narrative.
Here the phrase "rose up" means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: "the high priest took action"
The abstract noun "jealousy" can be translated as an adjective. This could be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they became very jealous"
This means they had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in [Acts 4:3]
Here the word "them" refers to the apostles.
This phrase here refers to the temple courtyard, not to the temple building, where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: "in the temple courtyard"
The word "words" here is a metonym for the message that the apostles had already proclaimed. Possible meanings are 1) "all this message of eternal life" or 2) "the whole message of this new way of living"
Here the word "they" refers to the apostles.
They went into the temple courtyard, not into the temple building, where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: "into the temple courtyard"
"as it began to be light." Although the angel led them out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time the apostles reached the temple courtyard.
This implies someone went to the jail. Alternate translation: "sent someone to the jail to bring the apostles"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Possible meanings are 1) they found no one inside the apostles' cell Alternate translation: "we did not find them inside" or 2) the apostles had been the only prisoners and now there were no prisoners at all in the jail.
Here the word "you" is plural and refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests.
"they were very puzzled" or "they were very confused"
"concerning the words they had just heard" or "concerning these things"
"and what would happen as a result" or "what would happen next"
Here the word "you" is plural and refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests.
They did not go into the part of the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: "standing in the temple courtyard"
The captain and the officers bring the apostles before the Jewish religious council.
"brought the apostles back"
This can be expressed with an active form. Alternate translation: "they feared that the people might stone them"
"the captain and officers had brought the apostles, the captain and the officers set the apostles ... interrogated the apostles"
questioned to find out what was true
The speakers were referring to themselves, but not to the apostles, so these words are exclusive.
These words refer to the apostles and so are plural.
Here the word "name" refers to the person of Jesus. See how you translated this in [Acts 4:17]
Teaching many people in a city is spoken of as if they were filling the city with a teaching. Alternate translation: "you have taught many people in Jerusalem about him" or "you have taught about him throughout the Jerusalem"
Here the word "blood" is a metonym for death, and to bring someone's blood on people is a metaphor for saying that they are guilty of that person's death. Alternate translation: "desire to make us responsible for this man's death"
Here the word "We" refers to the apostles, and not to the audience.
Peter spoke on behalf of all of the apostles when he said the following words.
Here "raised up" is an idiom. Alternate translation: "The God of our fathers caused Jesus to live again"
Here Peter uses the word "tree" to refer to the cross, which was made of wood. Alternate translation: "by hanging him on a cross"
To be at the "right hand of God" is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: "God exalted him to the place of honor beside him"
The words "repentance" and "forgiveness" can be translated as verbs. Alternate translation: "give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins"
The word "Israel" refers to the Jewish people.
"those who submit to God's authority"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Gamaliel addresses the council members.
Luke introduces Gamaliel and provides background information about him.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom all the people honored"
The words "the men" refers to the apostles.
"think carefully about" or "be cautious about." Gamaliel was warning them not to do something that they would later regret.
Possible meanings are 1) "Theudas rebelled" or 2) "Theudas appeared."
"claiming to be somebody important"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "People killed him"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "all the people scattered who had been obeying him" or "all who had been obeying him went in different directions"
This means that they did not do what they had planned to do.
"After Theudas"
"during the time of the census"
This means that he persuaded some people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: "caused many people to follow him" or "caused many people to join him in rebellion"
Gamaliel is telling the Jewish leaders not to punish the apostles any more and not to put them back in jail.
"if men have devised this plan or are doing this work"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "someone will overthrow it"
Gamaliel finishes addressing the council members.
Here the word "it" refers to "this plan or work." Alternate translation: "if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "So Gamaliel persuaded them"
Here the word "they" refers to the council members and all instances of "them" refer to the apostles.
The council members would have ordered the temple guards to do these things.
Here "name" refers to the authority of Jesus. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 4:18. Alternate translation: "to speak anymore in the authority of Jesus"
All instances of "they" refer to the apostles.
The apostles rejoiced because God had honored them by letting the Jewish leaders dishonor them. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God had counted them worthy to suffer dishonor for the Name"
Here "the Name" refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: "for Jesus"
The word "they" refers to the apostles.
"After that day, every day." This phrase marks what the apostles did every day through the following days.
They did not go into the temple building where only the priests went. Alternate translation: "in the temple courtyard and in different people's houses"
1 Now in these days, when the number of the disciples was multiplying, a complaint by the Grecian Jews began against the Hebrews, because their widows were being overlooked in the daily distribution of help. 2 The twelve called the multitude of the disciples to them and said, "It is not right for us to give up the word of God in order to serve tables. 3 You should therefore choose, brothers, seven men from among yourselves, men of good reputation, full of the Spirit and of wisdom, whom we may appoint over this business. 4 As for us, we will always continue in prayer and in the ministry of the word." 5 Their speech pleased the whole multitude. So they chose Stephen, a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit, and Philip, Prochorus, Nicanor, Timon, Parmenas, and Nicolaus, a proselyte from Antioch. 6 The believers brought these men before the apostles, who prayed and then placed their hands upon them.
7 So the word of God continued to spread, and the number of disciples in Jerusalem increased greatly, and a large number of the priests became obedient to the faith.
8 Now Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing great wonders and signs among the people. 9 But there arose some people who belonged to the synagogue called the synagogue of the Freedmen, of the Cyrenians and Alexandrians, and some from Cilicia and Asia. These people were debating with Stephen. 10 But they were not able to stand against the wisdom and the Spirit with which Stephen spoke. 11 Then they bribed some men to say, "We have heard Stephen speak blasphemous words against Moses and against God." 12 They stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes, and they approached Stephen and seized him and brought him before the council. 13 They brought false witnesses, who said, "This man does not stop speaking words against this holy place and the law. 14 For we have heard him say that this Jesus of Nazareth will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us." 15 Everyone who sat in the council fixed their eyes on him and saw his face was like the face of an angel.
The believers in Jerusalem gave help—probably money but possibly food—every day to women whose husbands had died. All of these widows had been raised as Jews, but some of them had lived in Judea and spoke Hebrew. Others had lived in Gentile areas and spoke Greek. Those who gave out the money or food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of help. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.
No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen's face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. It is best for the translation to say only what the ULB says about this.
This is the beginning of a new part of the story. Luke gives important background information to understand the story.
Consider how new parts of a story are introduced in your language.
"was greatly increasing"
These were both groups of Jews who had become believers. The writer assumes that the reader understands that these people were all believers because at this point all believers had grown up as Jews.
These were believers who had grown up as Jews or become converts living somewhere in the Roman Empire outside of Israel and speaking Greek. Their language and culture were somewhat different from those who had grown up in Israel.
These were believers who had grown up as Jews or become converts in Israel speaking Hebrew or Aramaic.
A widow is a woman who has not remarried since her husband died.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Hebrew believers were overlooking the Grecian widows"
"being ignored" or "being forgotten." There were so many who needed help that some were missed.
The disciples were able to help the widows because believers were giving money to the apostles Acts 4:34-35. Possible meanings are 1) the disciples used the money to buy food, which they would give to the widows, or 2) the disciples gave the money directly to the widows.
Here the word "us" refers to the 12 apostles and not to their hearers, so it is exclusive.
This refers to the eleven apostles plus Matthias, who was selected in Acts 1:26.
"all of the disciples" or "all the believers"
This is an exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of their task of teaching the word of God. Alternate translation: "stop preaching and teaching the word of God"
This is a phrase meaning to serve food to the people.
Here the word "you" refers to the believers and so is plural.
Possible meanings are 1) the men have three qualities—a good reputation, being full of the Spirit, and being full of wisdom or 2) the men have a reputation for two qualities—being full of the Spirit, and being full of wisdom .
"men that people know are good" or "men whom people trust"
"to be responsible to do this task"
Here the word "us" refers to the 12 apostles and not to their hearers, so it is exclusive.
"the ministry of teaching and preaching the message"
"All the disciples liked their suggestion"
These are Greek names, so it seems that all of the men elected were from the Grecian Jewish group of believers.
a Gentile who converted to the Jewish religion
This represented giving a blessing and imparting responsibility and authority for the work to the seven.
This verse gives an update on the church's growth.
The writer speaks of the growing number of people who believed the word as if the word of God itself were covering a larger area. Alternate translation: "the number of people who believed the word of God increased" or "the number of people who believed the message from God increased"
"followed the teaching of the new belief"
Possible meanings are 1) the gospel message of trust in Jesus or 2) the teaching of the church or 3) the Christian teaching.
The writer begins to give background information about Stephen and other people that is important to understanding the story.
This is the beginning of a new part of the story.
This introduces Stephen as the main character in this part of the story.
The words "grace" and "power" here refer to power from God. This could be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: "God was giving Stephen power to do"
The writer continues giving background information about Stephen and other people that is important to understanding the story.
The word "arose" is an idiom that represents beginning to act. These people did not begin to rise into the air, nor did they necessarily get up from a sitting position. Alternate translation: "some people ... Asia, began to debate against Stephen"
Possible meanings are 1) the Cyrenians, the Alexandrians and those from Cilicia and Asia were all members of the synagogue of the Freedmen; 2) the Cyrenians and the Alexandrians were members of the synagogue of the Freedmen, but those from Cilicia and Asia were not; or 3) there were three separate groups of people: those from the synagogue, those from Cyrene and Alexandria, and those from Cilicia and Asia.
"Freedmen" were probably ex-slaves from these different locations. It is unclear if the other people listed were part of the synagogue or just participated in the debate with Stephen.
"people from Cyrene and Alexandria." Cyrene and Alexandria were cities in Northern Africa. They were south of the Mediterranean Sea.
Cilicia was a city and Asia was a Roman province, both north of the Mediterranean Sea.
"arguing with Stephen"
The writer finishes giving background information about Stephen and other people that is important to understanding the story.
This phrase means they could not prove false what he said. Alternate translation: "could not argue against"
this refers to the Holy Spirit
Here the word "We" refers only to the men they persuaded to lie. The word "they" refers back to the people from the synagogue of the freemen
They were given money to give false testimony. Alternate translation: "some men to lie and say"
"bad things about"
The word "they" most likely refers back to the people from the synagogue of the Freedmen (Acts 6:9). They were responsible for the false witnesses and for inciting the council, the elders, the scribes, and the other people.
"caused the people, the elders, and the scribes to be very angry at Stephen"
"grabbed him and held him so he could not get away"
The word "they" most likely refers back to the people from the synagogue of the Freedmen (Acts 6:9).
"continually speaks"
The words "we" and "us" refer only to the speakers, not to the hearers, and so is exclusive.
The phrase "handed down" means "passed on." Alternate translation: "taught our ancestors"
This is an idiom that means they looked intently at him. Here "eyes" is a metonym for sight. Alternate translation: "looked intently at him" or "stared at him"
This phrase compares his face to that of an angel but does not say specifically what they have in common.
1 The high priest said, "Are these things true?" 2 Stephen said,
"Brothers and fathers, listen to me: The God of glory appeared to our father Abraham when he was in Mesopotamia, before he lived in Haran; 3 he said to him, 'Leave your land and your relatives, and go into the land that I will show you.'
4 "Then he left the land of the Chaldeans and lived in Haran; from there, after his father died, God brought him into this land, where you live now. 5 He gave none of it as an inheritance to him, no, not even enough to set a foot on. But he promised—even though Abraham had no child yet—that he would give the land as a possession to him and to his descendants after him. 6 God was speaking to him like this, that his descendants would live for a while in a foreign land, and that the inhabitants there would bring them into slavery and mistreat them for four hundred years. 7 'But I will judge the nation that they serve,' said God, 'and after that they will come out and worship me in this place.' 8 Then God gave Abraham the covenant of circumcision, so Abraham became the father of Isaac and circumcised him on the eighth day; Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob the father of the twelve patriarchs.
9 "Because the patriarchs were jealous of Joseph, they sold him into Egypt; but God was with him 10 and rescued him from all his tribulation. He gave Joseph favor and wisdom in the presence of Pharaoh, king of Egypt, who appointed him governor over Egypt and over all his household.
11 "Now a famine and great tribulation came over all Egypt and Canaan, and our fathers could find no food. 12 But when Jacob heard that there was grain in Egypt, he sent out our fathers on their first trip. 13 On their second trip Joseph made himself known to his brothers, and Joseph's family became known to Pharaoh. 14 Joseph sent his brothers back to invite Jacob his father to come to Egypt, along with all his relatives, seventy-five persons in all. 15 So Jacob went down into Egypt, and he died, he and our fathers. 16 They were carried over to Shechem and laid in the tomb that Abraham had bought for a price in silver from the sons of Hamor in Shechem.
17 "As the time of the promise approached, the promise that God had made to Abraham, the people grew and multiplied in Egypt, 18 until there arose another king over Egypt, a king who did not know about Joseph. 19 He deceived our people and mistreated our fathers, forcing them to expose their newborn infants so they would not be kept alive.
20 "At that time Moses was born; he was very beautiful before God and was nourished for three months in his father's house. 21 When he was placed outside, Pharaoh's daughter adopted him and raised him as her own son. 22 Moses was educated in all the wisdom of the Egyptians, and he was mighty in his words and works.
23 "But when he was about forty years old, it came into his heart to visit his brothers, the descendants of Israel. 24 Seeing an Israelite being mistreated, Moses defended him and avenged him who was oppressed by striking the Egyptian: 25 he thought that his brothers would understand that God, by his hand, was giving them salvation, but they did not understand. 26 On the next day he appeared to them when they were fighting, and he tried to make peace between them, saying, 'Men, you are brothers; why are you wronging one another?'
27 "But the one who had wronged his neighbor pushed him away, and said, 'Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us? 28 Would you like to kill me, as you killed the Egyptian yesterday?' 29 Moses ran away after hearing this statement; he became a foreigner in the land of Midian, where he became the father of two sons.
30 "When forty years were past, an angel appeared to him in the wilderness of Mount Sinai, in a flame of fire in a bush. 31 When Moses saw the fire, he marveled at the sight; and as he approached to look at it, the voice of the Lord came, saying, 32 'I am the God of your fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob.' Moses trembled and did not dare to look.
33 "The Lord said to him, 'Take off the sandals from your feet, for the place where you are standing is holy ground. 34 I have certainly seen the oppression of my people who are in Egypt; I have heard their groaning, and I have come down to rescue them; now come, I will send you to Egypt.'
35 "This Moses whom they rejected, when they said, 'Who appointed you a ruler and a judge?'—he was the one whom God sent as both a ruler and deliverer. God sent him by the hand of the angel who appeared to Moses in the bush. 36 Moses led them out of Egypt, after doing miracles and signs in Egypt and at the Sea of Reeds, and in the wilderness during forty years.
37 "It is the same Moses who said to the people of Israel, 'God will raise up a prophet for you from among your brothers, a prophet like me.' 38 This is the man who was in the assembly in the wilderness with the angel who had spoken to him on Mount Sinai, who was with our fathers, and who received living words to give to us.
39 "But our fathers refused to obey him; they pushed him away from themselves, and in their hearts they turned back to Egypt. 40 At that time they said to Aaron, 'Make us gods who will lead us. As for this Moses, who led us out of the land of Egypt, we do not know what has happened to him.' 41 So they made a calf in those days and brought a sacrifice to the idol, and rejoiced because of the work of their hands. 42 But God turned and gave them up to worship the stars in the sky, as it is written in the book of the prophets,
'Did you bring me offerings and sacrifices
during the forty years in the wilderness, house of Israel?
43 You accepted the tabernacle of Molech
and the star of the god Rephan,
and the images that you made to worship them:
and I will carry you away beyond Babylon.'
44 "Our fathers had the tabernacle of the testimony in the wilderness, just as God commanded when he spoke to Moses, that he should make it like the pattern that he had seen. 45 Later, our fathers, under Joshua, received the tabernacle and brought it with them when they took possession of the land. God took the land from the nations and drove them out before the face of our fathers. The tabernacle remained in the land until the time of David, 46 who found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob [1] . 47 But it was Solomon who built the house for God.
48 "However, the Most High does not live in houses made with hands, as the prophet says,
49 'Heaven is my throne,
and the earth is the footstool for my feet.
What kind of house can you build for me? says the Lord,
or what is the place for my rest?
50 Did my hand not make all these things?'
51 "You stiff-necked people, uncircumcised in heart and ears, you always resist the Holy Spirit; you act just as your fathers acted. 52 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? They killed the prophets who appeared in advance of the coming of the Righteous One; and you have now become the betrayers and murderers of him also, 53 you people who received the law that angels had ordained, but you did not keep it."
54 Now when the council members heard these things, they were furious in their hearts and they ground their teeth at Stephen. 55 But he, being full of the Holy Spirit, looked up intently into heaven and saw the glory of God; and he saw Jesus standing at the right hand of God. 56 Stephen said, "Look, I see the heavens opened, and the Son of Man standing at the right hand of God."
57 At this the council members covered their ears, and shouting out with a loud voice, they rushed at him with one purpose. 58 They forced him out of the city and began to stone him. The witnesses laid down their outer clothing at the feet of a young man named Saul.
59 As they were stoning Stephen, he was calling out to the Lord and saying, "Lord Jesus, receive my spirit." 60 He knelt down and cried out with a loud voice, "Lord, do not hold this sin against them." When he had said this, he fell asleep.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.
It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.
Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.
The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.
When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.
Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph's brothers "sold him into Egypt"
Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling "over Egypt" and over all of Pharaoh's household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh's household.
The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said.
The part of the story about Stephen, which began in Acts 6:8, continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel's history. Most of this history comes from Moses's writings.
The word "our" includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience.
Stephen was being very respectful to the council in greeting them as extended family.
The word "your" refers to Abraham and so is singular.
In verse 4 the words "he," "his," and "him" refer to Abraham. In verse 5 the words "He" and "he" refer to God, but the word "him" refers to Abraham. Here the word "you" refers to the Jewish council and audience.
"He did not give any of it"
Possible meanings for this phrase are 1) enough ground to stand on or 2) enough ground to take a step. Alternate translation: "a very tiny piece of ground"
"for Abraham to own and to give to his descendants"
It may be helpful to state that this occurred later than the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: "Later God told Abraham"
"400 years"
"nation" refers to the people in it. Alternate translation: "I will judge the people of the nation"
"the nation that they will serve"
The Jews would have understood that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: "made a covenant with Abraham to circumcise the males of his family"
The story transitions to Abraham's descendants.
"Jacob became the father." Stephen shortened this.
"the founders of our tribes" or "our ancestors." A patriarch is a man who rules a family.
The Jews knew their ancestors sold Joseph to be a slave in Egypt. Alternate translation: "sold him as a slave in Egypt"
This is an idiom for helping someone. Alternate translation: "helped him"
This refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: "over all the people of Egypt"
This refers to all his possessions. Alternate translation: "everything he owned"
"a famine came." The ground stopped producing food and this caused a terrible suffering.
This refers Jacob and his sons, who were the ancestors of the Jewish people.
Grain was the most common food at that time.
Here this phrase refers to Joseph's older brothers, who were Jacob's sons.
"On their next trip"
Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph's family"
"sent his brothers back to Canaan" or "sent his brothers back home"
Make sure it does not sound as though he died as soon as he arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: "eventually Jacob died"
"Jacob and his sons, who became our ancestors"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Jacob's descendants carried Jacob's body and his son's bodies over ... and buried them"
"with money"
In some languages it may be helpful to say that the people increased in number before saying that the time of the promise arrived.
It was close to the time that God would fulfill his promise to Abraham.
"another king began to rule"
"Egypt" refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: "over the people of Egypt"
"Joseph" refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: "who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt"
The word "our" includes Stephen and his audience.
This introduces Moses into the story.
This phrase is an idiom that means Moses was very beautiful.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "his parents nourished him" or "his parents cared for him"
Moses was "placed outside" because of Pharaoh's command. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When his parents placed him outside" or "When they abandoned him"
She did for him every good thing a mother would do for her own son. Use your language's normal word for what a mother does to make sure her son becomes a healthy adult.
If your language has a word for an informal procedure, not a formal legal procedure, in which one family takes a child in and raises him, you may want to use that here. Pharaoh's daughter did do for Moses what any mother would do for her child, but this involved no formal legal procedure.
"as if he were her own son"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The Egyptians educated Moses"
This is an exaggeration to emphasize that he was trained in the best schools in Egypt.
"effective in his speech and actions" or "influential in what he said and did"
Here "heart" is a metonym for "mind." The phrase "it came into his heart" is an idiom that means to decide something. Alternate translation: "it came into his mind" or "he decided"
This refers to his people, and not just to his family. Alternate translation: "see how his own people, the children of Israel, were doing"
This can be stated in active form by rearranging the order. Alternate translation: "Seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite, Moses defended and avenged the Israelite by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him"
Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died.
"he imagined"
Here "hand" refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: "was giving them salvation through what he, Moses, was doing"
The abstract noun "salvation" can be translated using the verb "save." Alternate translation: "was saving them" or "was rescuing them"
Some translations make it clear that two men were fighting. Alternate translation: "when two men of Israel were fighting"
"make them stop fighting"
Moses was addressing the Israelites who were fighting.
Moses asked this question to encourage them to stop fighting. Alternate translation: "you should not do wrong to each other!"
Here the word "us" refers to the Israelites but does not include Moses.
The man used this question to rebuke Moses. Alternate translation: "No one appointed you ruler or judge over us." or "You have no authority over us!"
The man used this question to warn Moses that he and probably others knew Moses had killed the Egyptian.
Stephen's audience already knew that Moses had married a Midianite woman when he fled Egypt.
The implied information is that Moses understood that the Israelites knew that he had killed an Egyptian the day before (Acts 7:28).
"After 40 years passed." This was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: "Forty years after Moses fled from Egypt"
Stephen's audience knew that God spoke through the angel.
Moses was surprised that the bush was not burning up in the fire. This was previously known by Stephen's audience. Alternate translation: "because the bush was not burning up"
This may mean Moses initially drew close to the bush to investigate.
"I am the God whom your ancestors worshiped"
This may mean Moses drew back in fear when he heard the voice.
Moses shook from fear. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: "Moses trembled with fear"
God told Moses this so he would honor God.
The implied information is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered holy or is made holy by God.
"seen for sure." The word "certainly" adds emphasis to "seen."
The abstract noun "oppression" can be translated using the verb "oppress." Alternate translation: "the way the Egyptians are oppressing my people"
The word "my" emphasizes that these people belonged to God. Alternate translation: "the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob"
"will personally cause their release"
"get ready." God uses an order here.
Verses 35-38 contain a series of connected phrases referring to Moses. Each phrase begins with statements such as "This Moses" or "This same Moses" or "This is the man" or "It is the same Moses." If possible, use similar statements to emphasize Moses. After the Israelites left Egypt, they spent 40 years wandering around the wilderness before God led them into the land he had promised them.
This refers back to the events recorded in Acts 7:27-28.
"rescuer"
The hand is a metonym for the action performed by the person. In this case, the angel had commanded Moses to return to Egypt. Stephen speaks as if the angel had a physical hand. You may need to make explicit what action the angel did. Alternate translation: "by the action of the angel" or "by having the angel ... bush command him to return to Egypt"
Stephen's audience knew about the forty years the Israelites spent in the wilderness. Alternate translation: "during the 40 years that the Israelite people lived in the wilderness"
"cause a man to be a prophet"
"from among your own people"
"This is the man Moses who was among the Israelites"
The phrase "This is the man" throughout this passage refers to Moses.
God was the one who gave those words. Alternate translation: "to whom God spoke living words to give to us"
Possible meanings are 1) "a message that endures" or 2) "words that give life."
This metaphor emphasizes their rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: "they rejected him as their leader"
Here "hearts" is a metonym for people's thoughts. To do something in the heart means to desire do to something. Alternate translation: "they desired to turn back"
The quotation in this verse is from the writings of Moses.
"When they decided to return to Egypt"
Stephen's audience knew the calf they made was a statue. Alternate translation: "they made a statue that looked like a calf"
These phrases all refer to the same statue of the calf.
Stephen's quotation here is from the prophet Amos.
"God turned away." This action expresses that God was not pleased with the people and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: "God stopped correcting them"
"abandoned them"
Possible meanings for the original phrase are 1) the stars only or 2) the sun, moon, and stars.
This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets into one scroll. It would also have included the writings of Amos.
God asked this question to show Israel they did not worship him with their sacrifices. Alternate translation: "You did not honor me when brought offerings and sacrifices ... Israel."
This refers to the whole nation of Israel. Alternate translation: "all you Israelites"
The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
It is implied that they took these idols with them as they traveled in the wilderness. Alternate translation: "you carried with you from place to place"
the tent that housed the false god Molech
the star that is identified with the false god Rephan
They made statues or images of the gods Molech and Rephan in order to worship them.
"I will remove you to places even farther than Babylon." This would be God's act of judgment.
The tent that housed the ark (a box) with the 10 commandments carved in stone inside it
The phrase "under Joshua" means that their ancestors did these things in obedience to Joshua's direction. Alternate translation: "our fathers, in accordance with Joshua's instructions, received the tabernacle and brought it with them"
This sentence tells why the ancestors were able to take possession of the land. Alternate translation: "God forced the nations to leave the land before the face of our fathers"
Here "the face of our fathers" refers to the presence of their ancestors. Possible meanings are 1) "As our ancestors watched, God ... drove them out" or 2) "When our ancestors came, God ... drove them out"
This refers to the people who lived in the land before Israel. Alternate translation: "the people who previously lived here"
"forced them to leave the land"
Here "house" is probably a metonym for the ark of the covenant. David wanted to build a place for the ark, which represented God's presence, so people could go there to worship God. Alternate translation: "he might build a place where people could worship the God of Jacob"
Many versions read, "the God of Jacob."
This page has intentionally been left blank.
The hand is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: "made by people"
In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself.
The prophet is comparing the greatness of God's presence to how impossible it is for man to build a place for God to rest on earth since the whole earth is nothing but a place for God to rest his feet.
God asks this question to show how useless man's efforts are to take care of God. Alternate translation: "You can not build a house adequate enough for me!"
God asks this question to show man that he cannot provide God any rest. Alternate translation: "There is no place of rest good enough for me!"
In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself.
God asks this question to show that man did not create anything. Alternate translation: "My hand made all these things!"
With a sharp rebuke, Stephen finishes his response to the high priest and the council, which he began in Acts 7:2.
Stephen shifts from identifying with the Jewish leaders to rebuking them.
The Jews regarded uncircumcised people as disobedient to God. Stephen uses "hearts and ears" to represent to the Jewish leaders who acted the way Gentiles act when they do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: "you refuse to obey and hear"
Stephen asked this question to show them that they learned nothing from the errors of their forefathers. Alternate translation: "Your forefathers persecuted every prophet!"
This refers to the Christ, the Messiah.
"you have also betrayed and murdered him"
"murderers of the Righteous One" or "murderers of the Christ"
"the laws that God caused angels to give to our ancestors"
The council reacts to Stephen's words.
This is the turning point; the sermon ends and the council members react.
This means that they were extremely angry.
This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen or hatred of Stephen. Alternate translation: "they became so angry that they ground their teeth together" or "moved their teeth back and forth as they looked at Stephen"
"stared up into heaven." It appears that only Stephen saw this vision and not anyone else in the crowd.
People normally experienced the glory of God as a bright light. Alternate translation: "saw a bright light from God"
To stand at the "right hand of God" is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: "and he saw Jesus standing in the place of honor and authority beside God"
Stephen refers to Jesus by the title "Son of Man."
"put their hands on their ears." They did this to show that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said.
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
"They seized Stephen and forcefully took him out of the city"
These are cloaks or robes they would wear outside to stay warm, similar in function to a jacket or coat.
"in front of." They were placed there so Saul could watch them.
Saul was probably around 30 years old at the time.
"take my spirit." It may be helpful to add "please" to show that this was a request. Alternate translation: "please receive my spirit"
This ends the story of Stephen.
This is an act of submission to God.
This can be stated in a positive way. Alternate translation: "forgive them for this sin"
Here to fall asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: "died"
1 Saul was in agreement with his death.
So there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem; and the believers were all scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles. 2 Devout men buried Stephen and made great lamentation over him. 3 But Saul tried to destroy the church. He would enter house after house, drag off both men and women, and put them in prison.
4 Yet the believers who had been scattered went about preaching the word. 5 Philip went down to the city of Samaria and proclaimed to them the Christ. 6 Crowds of people were giving close attention to what was being said by Philip; with one mind they heard him, and they saw the signs he did. 7 Unclean spirits came out of many who were possessed, crying out with a loud voice, and many who were paralyzed and lame were healed. 8 So there was much joy in that city.
9 But there was a certain man in the city named Simon, who had earlier been practicing sorcery; he used to astonish the people of Samaria while claiming that he was an important person. 10 All the Samaritans, from the least to the greatest, paid attention to him; they said, "This man is that power of God which is called Great." 11 They listened to him because he had astonished them for a long time with his sorceries. 12 But when they believed Philip as he proclaimed the gospel about the kingdom of God and the name of Jesus Christ, they were baptized, both men and women. 13 Even Simon himself believed, and after he was baptized he stayed with Philip constantly. When he saw signs and mighty works taking place, he was amazed.
14 Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard that Samaria had received the word of God, they sent to them Peter and John. 15 When they had come down, they prayed for them, that they might receive the Holy Spirit. 16 For until that time, the Holy Spirit had not come upon any of them; they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus. 17 Then Peter and John placed their hands on them, and they received the Holy Spirit. 18 Now when Simon saw that the Holy Spirit was given through the laying on of the apostles' hands, he offered them money. 19 He said, "Give me this authority, too, that whoever I place my hands on might receive the Holy Spirit."
20 But Peter said to him, "May your silver perish along with you, because you thought to obtain the gift of God with money. 21 You have no part or allotted portion in this matter, because your heart is not right with God. 22 Therefore repent of this wickedness of yours, and pray to the Lord, so that he might perhaps forgive you for the intention of your heart. 23 For I see that you are in the poison of bitterness and in the bonds of unrighteousness."
24 Simon answered and said, "Pray to the Lord for me, so that nothing you have said may happen to me."
25 When they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord, Peter and John returned to Jerusalem, proclaiming the gospel to many villages of the Samaritans.
26 Now an angel of the Lord spoke to Philip and said, "Arise and go toward the south to the road that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza." (This road is in a desert.) 27 He arose and went. Behold, there was a man from Ethiopia, a eunuch of great authority under Candace, queen of the Ethiopians. He was in charge of all her treasure. He had come to Jerusalem to worship. 28 He was returning and sitting in his chariot, and was reading the prophet Isaiah.
29 The Spirit said to Philip, "Go over and stay close to this chariot."
30 So Philip ran to him, and heard him reading Isaiah the prophet, and said, "Do you understand what you are reading?"
31 Then he said, "How can I, unless someone guides me?" He invited Philip to come up into the chariot and sit with him.
32 Now the passage of the scripture which the Ethiopian was reading was this,
"He was led like a sheep to the slaughter,
and like a lamb before his shearer is silent,
so he did not open his mouth.
33 In his humiliation
justice was taken away from him.
Who can give a full account of his descendants?
For his life was taken from the earth."
34 So the eunuch asked Philip, and said, "I beg you, tell me who is the prophet speaking about, himself, or someone else?" 35 Philip began to speak, and beginning with this scripture he proclaimed the gospel about Jesus to him. 36 As they went on the road, they came to some water and the eunuch said, "Look, there is water here. What prevents me from being baptized?" 37[1]38 So the Ethiopian commanded the chariot to stop. They went down into the water, both Philip and the eunuch, and Philip baptized him. 39 When they came up out of the water, the Spirit of the Lord took Philip away, and the eunuch saw him no more, but went on his way rejoicing. 40 But Philip appeared at Azotus and he went through that region, proclaiming the gospel to all the cities until he came to Caesarea.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.
The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words "So there began."
In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15-19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.
This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word "proclaim" translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge as the UDB does.
The story shifts from Stephen to Saul in these verses.
This part of verse 1 is background information about the persecution that began after Stephen's death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3.
This refers to the day that Stephen died (Acts 7:59-60).
The word "all" is a generalization to express that a large number of the believers left Jerusalem because of the persecution.
This statement implies that the apostles remained in Jerusalem even though they also experienced this great persecution.
"God-fearing men" or "Men who feared God"
"greatly mourned his death"
"houses one by one"
"took away both men and women by force." Saul forcefully took Jewish believers out of their homes and put them into prison.
This refers to men and women who believed in Jesus.
The cause for the scattering, the persecution, was stated previously. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "who had fled the great persecution"
This is a metonym for "the message." You may need to make explicit that the message was about Jesus. Alternate translation: "the message about Jesus"
This begins the story of Philip, whom the people had chosen as a deacon.
The phrase "went down" is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
Possible meanings are 1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: "the main city in Samaria" or 2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: "a city in Samaria"
The title "Christ" refers to Jesus, the Messiah. Alternate translation: "told them about Jesus Christ" or "told them about Jesus the Messiah"
"Many people in the city of Samaria." The location was specified in Acts 8:5.
The reason people paid attention was because of all the healing Philip did.
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
"who had them" or "who were controlled by them"
The phrase "that city" refers to the people who were rejoicing. Alternate translation: "So the people of the city were rejoicing"
Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse gives the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans.
This is a way of introducing a new person into the story. Your language may use different wording to introduce a new person into the story.
"the city in Samaria" (Acts 8:5)
Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse continues to give the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans.
The word "all" is a generalization. Alternate translation: "Many of the Samaritans" or "The Samaritans in the city"
These two phrases refer to everyone from one extreme to the other. Alternate translation: "no matter how important they were"
People were saying that Simon was the divine power known as "The Great Power."
Possible meanings are 1) the powerful representative of God or 2) God or 3) the most powerful man or 4) an angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as "the Great power of God."
Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse ends the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans.
Verses 12 and 13 give more information about Simon and some of the Samaritans coming to believe in Jesus.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Philip baptized them" or "Philip baptized the new believers"
Verses 12 and 13 give more information about Simon and some of the Samaritans coming to believe in Jesus.
The word "himself" is here used to emphasize that Simon believed. Alternate translation: "Simon was also one of those who believed"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Philip baptized Simon"
Luke continues the news of what was happening in Samaria.
This marks the beginning of a new part of the story of the Samaritans.
This refers to the many people who had become believers throughout the district of Samaria.
"had believed" or "had accepted"
"when Peter and John had come down"
This phrase is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
"Peter and John prayed for the Samaritan believers"
"that the Samaritan believers might receive the Holy Spirit"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers"
Here "name" represents authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: "they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus"
The word "them" refers to the Samaritan people who believed Stephen's message of the gospel.
This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the apostles gave the Holy Spirit by laying their hands on people"
"that I can give the Holy Spirit to anyone on whom I place my hands"
Here the words him, your, you, and yours all refer to Simon.
"May you and your money be destroyed"
Here this refers to the ability of a person to give the Holy Spirit by laying his hands on someone.
The words "part" and "allotted portion" mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: "You may not participate in this work"
Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's thoughts or motives. Alternate translation: "you are not right in your heart" or "the motives of your mind are not right"
"these evil thoughts"
"he may be willing to forgive"
Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's thoughts. Alternate translation: "for what you intended to do" or "for what you were thinking of doing"
Here "in the poison of bitterness" is a metaphor for being very envious. It speaks of envy as if it tastes bitter and poisons the person who is envious. Alternate translation: "very envious"
The phrase "bonds of unrighteousness" is spoken as if unrighteousness could make Simon a prisoner. It is metaphor that means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: "because you continue sinning you are like a prisoner" or "sin has made you its prisoner"
Here the word "you" refers to Peter and John.
This refers to Peter's rebuke about Simon's silver perishing along with him.
This can be stated another way. Alternate translation: "the things you have said may not happen to me"
This is concludes the part of the story about Simon and the Samaritans.
Peter and John told what they personally knew about Jesus to the Samaritans.
Here "word" is a metonym for "message." Peter and John explained the message about Jesus to the Samaritans.
Here "villages" refers to the people in them. Alternate translation: "to the people in many Samaritan villages"
This begins the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia.
This marks a transition in the story.
These verbs work together to emphasize that he should get ready to start a long journey that will take some time. Alternate translation: "Get ready to travel"
The phrase "goes down" is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Gaza.
Most scholars believe Luke added this comment to describe the area through which Philip would travel.
This verse gives background information about the man from Ethiopia.
The word "behold" alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
The emphasis of "eunuch" here is about the Ethiopian's being a high government official, not so much his physical state of being castrated.
This was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the way the word Pharaoh was used for the kings of Egypt.
This implies that he was a Gentile who believed in God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. Alternate translation: "He had come to worship God at the temple in Jerusalem"
Possibly "wagon" or "carriage" is more fitting in this context. Chariots are normally mentioned as a vehicle for war, not as a vehicle for long-distance travel. Also, people stood to ride in chariots.
This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: "reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah"
Philip understood that this meant he was to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: "accompany the man in this chariot"
This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: "reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah"
The Ethiopian was intelligent and could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Alternate translation: "Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?"
This question was asked to state emphatically that he could not understand without help. Alternate translation: "I cannot understand unless someone guides me."
It is implied here that Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the scriptures.
Possible meanings are that 1) he offered a sincere invitation or 2) he made a sincere request.
This a passage from the book of Isaiah. Here the word "he" refers to the Messiah.
A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used.
This verse continues quoting a passage from the book of Isaiah. Here the words "his" and "him" refer to the Messiah.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "He was humiliated and they did not judge him fairly" or "He allowed himself to be humbled before his accusers and he suffered injustice"
This question was used to emphasize that he will not have descendants. Alternate translation: "No one will be able to speak about his descendants, for there will not be any."
This referred to his death. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "men killed him" or "men took his life from the earth"
"Please tell me"
This refers to Isaiah's writings in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: "the writings of Isaiah"
"they continued to travel along the road"
The eunuch uses this question as a way of asking Philip for permission to be baptized. Alternate translation: "Please allow me to be baptized."
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"told the driver of the chariot to stop"
This is the end of the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia. The story of Philip ends at Caesarea.
The words "took Philip away" imply that the Spirit took forceful, physical action, perhaps a miracle that moved Philip in an instant. The angel probably did not just suggest or even command that Philip leave the eunuch and go elsewhere.
"the eunuch did not see Philip again"
There was no indication of Philip's traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus.
This refers to the area around the town of Azotus.
"to all the cities in that region"
1 But Saul, still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples of the Lord, went to the high priest 2 and asked him for letters for the synagogues in Damascus, so that if he found any who belonged to the Way, whether men or women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem. 3 As he was traveling, it happened that as he came near to Damascus, suddenly there shone all around him a light out of heaven; 4 and he fell upon the ground and heard a voice saying to him, "Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me?" 5 Saul replied, "Who are you, Lord?" The Lord said, "I am Jesus, whom you are persecuting; 6 but rise, enter into the city, and it will be told you what you must do." 7 The men who traveled with Saul stood speechless, hearing the voice, but seeing no one. 8 Saul arose from the ground, and when he opened his eyes, he could see nothing; so they led him by the hand and brought him into Damascus. 9 For three days he was without sight, and he neither ate nor drank.
10 Now there was a disciple at Damascus named Ananias. The Lord said to him in a vision, "Ananias!" He said, "See, I am here, Lord."
11 The Lord said to him, "Arise, and go to the street which is called Straight, and at the house of Judas ask for a man from Tarsus named Saul, for he is praying. 12 He has seen in a vision a man named Ananias coming in and laying his hands on him, so that he might see again."
13 But Ananias answered, "Lord, I have heard from many about this man, how much harm he has done to your holy people in Jerusalem. 14 He has authority from the chief priests to put in bonds everyone here who calls upon your name."
15 But the Lord said to him, "Go, for he is a chosen instrument of mine, to carry my name before the Gentiles and kings and the children of Israel; 16 for I will show him how much he must suffer for the cause of my name."
17 So Ananias departed, and entered into the house. Laying his hands on him, he said, "Brother Saul, the Lord Jesus, who appeared to you on the road when you were coming, has sent me so that you might receive your sight and be filled with the Holy Spirit." 18 Immediately something like scales fell from Saul's eyes, and he received his sight; he arose and was baptized; 19 and he ate and was strengthened.
He stayed with the disciples in Damascus for several days. 20 Right away he proclaimed Jesus in the synagogues, saying that he is the Son of God. 21 All who heard him were amazed and said, "Is not this the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name? He has come here to take them bound to the chief priests." 22 But Saul became more and more powerful, and he was causing distress among the Jews who lived in Damascus by proving that Jesus is the Christ.
23 After many days, the Jews planned together to kill him. 24 But their plan became known to Saul. They watched the gates day and night in order to kill him. 25 But his disciples took him by night and let him down through the wall, lowering him in a basket.
26 When he had come to Jerusalem, Saul attempted to join the disciples, but they were all afraid of him, not believing that he was a disciple. 27 But Barnabas took him and brought him to the apostles, and he told them how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to him, and how at Damascus Saul had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus. 28 He was with them, going in and out around Jerusalem. He spoke boldly in the name of the Lord Jesus 29 and debated with the Grecian Jews; but they kept trying to kill him. 30 When the brothers learned of this, they brought him down to Caesarea and sent him away to Tarsus.
31 So then, the church throughout all Judea, Galilee, and Samaria had peace and was built up; and, walking in the fear of the Lord and in the comfort of the Holy Spirit, the church grew in numbers. 32 Now it came about that, as Peter went throughout the whole region, he came down also to God's holy people who lived in the town of Lydda. 33 There he found a certain man named Aeneas, who had been in his bed for eight years, for he was paralyzed. 34 Peter said to him, "Aeneas, Jesus Christ heals you. Get up and make your bed," and right away he got up. 35 So everyone who lived in Lydda and in Sharon saw the man and they turned to the Lord.
36 Now there was in Joppa a certain disciple named Tabitha (which is translated "Dorcas"). This woman was full of good works and merciful deeds that she did for the poor. 37 It came about in those days that she fell sick and died; when they had washed her, they laid her in an upper room. 38 Since Lydda was near Joppa, and the disciples had heard that Peter was there, they sent two men to him, pleading with him, "Come to us without delay." 39 Peter arose and went with them. When he had arrived, they brought him to the upper room, and all the widows stood by him weeping, showing him the tunics and garments that Dorcas had made while she had been with them. 40 Peter put them all out of the room, knelt down, and prayed; then, turning to the body, he said, "Tabitha, arise." Then she opened her eyes, and seeing Peter she sat up. 41 Peter then gave her his hand and raised her up; and when he called God's holy people and the widows, he presented her alive to them. 42 This matter became known throughout all Joppa, and many people believed on the Lord. 43 It happened that Peter stayed for many days in Joppa with a man named Simon, a tanner.
No one knows for sure who first started calling believers "followers of the Way." This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or "way." If this is true, the believers were "following the way of the Lord" by living in a way that pleased God.
The "letters" Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.
It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he "fell upon the ground." Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, "I have seen the Lord Jesus" because it was a human form that he saw here.
Verses 1-2 give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen.
The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation.
The noun "murder" can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: "still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples"
Verses 1-2 give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word "him" refers to the high priest and "he" refers to Saul.
This refers to the people in the synagogues. Alternate translation: "for the people in the synagogues" or "for the leaders in the synagogues"
"when he found people" or "if he found people"
"who followed the teachings of Jesus Christ"
This term appears to have been a title for Christianity at that time.
"he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem." Paul's purpose can be made clear by adding "so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them"
After the high priest gave Saul the letters, Saul left for Damascus.
Saul left Jerusalem and now travels to Damascus.
This is an expression that marks a change in the story to show something different is about to happen.
"a light from heaven shone all around him"
Possible meanings are 1) out of heaven, where God lives or 2) out of the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
Possible meanings are that 1) "Saul threw himself to the ground and heard" or 2) "the light caused Saul to fall to the ground, and he heard" or 3) "Saul fell to the ground the way one who faints falls, and he heard"
This rhetorical question communicates a rebuke to Saul. Alternate translation: "You are persecuting me!" or "Stop persecuting me!"
Every occurrence of the word "you" here is singular.
Saul was not acknowledging that Jesus is the Lord. He uses that title because he understood that he spoke to someone of supernatural power.
"get up and go into the city Damascus"
This can be stated in the active form. Alternate translation: "someone will tell you"
This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: "stood speechless. They heard the voice, but they did not see anyone"
"but they saw no one" or "but they did not see anyone." Apparently only Saul experienced the light.
This implies that he had closed his eyes because the light was too bright.
"he could not see anything." Saul was blind.
"was blind" or "could not see anything"
It is not stated whether he chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship, or if he had no appetite because he was too distressed from his situation. It is preferable not to specify the reason.
The story of Saul continues, and Luke introduces another man named Ananias. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3]
This introduces Ananias as a new character.
"Ananias said"
"go to Straight Street"
This Judas was not the disciple who had betrayed Jesus. This Judas was owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying.
"a man from the city of Tarsus named Saul" or "Saul of Tarsus"
This was a symbol of giving a spiritual blessing to Saul.
"he might regain his ability to see"
Here "holy people" refers to Christians. Alternate translation: "the people in Jerusalem who believe in you"
It is implied that the extent of the power and authority granted Saul was limited to the Jewish people at this point in time.
Putting someone in bonds is a metonym for arresting that person. Alternate translation: "arrest"
Here "your name" refers to Jesus.
"chosen instrument" refers to something that is set apart for service. Alternate translation: "I have chosen him to serve me"
This is an expression for identifying or speaking out for Jesus. Alternate translation: "in order that he might speak about me"
This is an expression meaning "for telling people about me."
The word "you" here is singular and refers to Saul.
Ananias goes to the house where Saul is staying. After Saul is healed, the story shifts from Ananias back to Saul.
It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. Alternate translation: "So Ananias went, and after he found the house where Saul was, he entered it"
Ananias put his hands on Saul. This was a symbol of giving a blessing to Saul.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you"
"something that appeared like fish scales fell"
"he was able to see again"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he got up and Ananias baptized him"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here the first "he" refers to Saul. The second "he" refers to Jesus, the Son of God.
This is an important title for Jesus.
Here "him" and "He" refer to Saul.
The word "All" is a generalization. Alternate translation: "Those who heard him" or "Many who heard him"
This is a rhetorical and negative question that emphasizes that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. Alternate translation: "This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name Jesus!"
Here "name" refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: "the name of Jesus"
They were distressed in the sense that they could not find a way to refute Saul's arguments that Jesus was the Christ.
The word "him" in this section refers to Saul.
This refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "But someone told their plan to Saul" or "But Saul learned about their plan"
This city had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates.
people who believed Saul's message about Jesus and were following his teaching
"used ropes to lower him in a large basket through an opening in the wall"
Here the words "he" and "him" refer to Saul.
Here "they were all" is a generalization, but it is possible that it refers to every person. Alternate translation: "but they were afraid of him"
Here "him" refers to Saul and "he" refers to Barnabas.
This is a way of saying he preached or taught the gospel message of Jesus Christ without fear. Alternate translation: "had openly preached the message about Jesus"
Here the word "He" refers to Saul, and the word "them" probably refers to the apostles and other disciples in Jerusalem. This is an idiom meaning that Paul was able to associate freely with the believers in Jerusalem.
Possible meanings are 1) this simply refers to the Lord Jesus and tells who Paul spoke about. Alternate translation: "about the Lord Jesus" or 2) "name" is a metonym for authority. Alternate translation: "under the authority of the Lord Jesus" or "with the authority that the Lord Jesus gave him"
Saul tried to reason with the Jews who spoke Greek.
Here the words "the brothers" refer to the believers in Jerusalem.
The phrase "brought him down" is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
Caesarea was a seaport. They brothers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship.
Verse 31 is a statement that gives an update on the church's growth.
This is the first use of the singular "church" to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel.
"lived peacefully." This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished.
The agent was either God or the Holy Spirit. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God helped them grow" or "the Holy Spirit built them up"
"Walking" here is a metaphor for "living." Alternate translation: "living in obedience to the Lord" or "continuing to honor the Lord"
"with the Holy Spirit strengthening and encouraging them"
Here the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.
This phrase is used to mark a new part of the story.
This is an generalization for Peter's visiting the believers in many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria.
The phrase "came down" is used here because Lydda is lower in elevation than the other places where he was traveling.
Lydda is a city located about 18 kilometers southeast of Joppa. This city is called Lod in the Old Testament and in modern Israel.
Peter was not intentionally searching for a paralyzed person, but happened upon him. Alternate translation: "There Peter met a man"
This introduces Aeneas as a new character in the story.
This is background information about Aeneas.
This means he was unable to walk. He probably was unable to move any part of his body below his waist.
"roll up your mat"
This is a generalization referring to many of the people there. Alternate translation: "those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon" or "many people who lived in Lydda and Sharon"
The city of Lydda was located in the Plain of Sharon.
It may be helpful to state that they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: "saw the man whom Peter had healed"
Here "turned to the Lord" is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: "and they repented of their sins and started obeying the Lord"
Verses 36 and 37 give background information about the woman named Tabitha.
Luke continues the story with a new event about Peter.
This introduces a new part in the story.
Tabitha is her name in the Aramaic language, and Dorcas is her name in the Greek language. Both names mean "gazelle." Alternate translation: "Tabitha, which in the Greek language was Dorcas. This woman"
"doing many good things and performed merciful deeds"
Verses 36 and 37 give background information about the woman named Tabitha.
This refers to the time when Peter was in Joppa. This can be stated. Alternate translation: "It came about while Peter was nearby"
This was washing to prepare for her burial.
This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process.
"the disciples sent two men to Peter"
"to the upstairs room where Dorcas' body was lying"
It is possible that all the widows of the town were there since it was not a large town.
women whose husbands had died and therefore needed help
"while she was still alive with the disciples"
"told them all to leave the room." Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha.
Peter took hold of her hand and helped her to sit up in the bed and then stand up on the floor.
The widows were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them.
The story of Tabitha ends in verse 42. Verse 43 tells us what happens to Peter after the story ends.
This refers to the miracle of Peter's raising Tabitha from the dead. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter"
"believed in the gospel of the Lord Jesus"
The story of Tabitha ends in verse 42. Verse 43 tells us what happens to Peter after the story ends.
"It came about that." This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story.
"a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins"
1 Now there was a certain man in the city of Caesarea, Cornelius by name, a centurion of what was called the Italian Company of Soldiers. 2 He was a devout man, one who feared God with all his household, gave many alms to the people, and prayed to God constantly. 3 About the ninth hour of the day, he clearly saw in a vision an angel of God coming to him. The angel said to him, "Cornelius!" 4 Cornelius stared at the angel and was very afraid and said, "What is it, sir?"
The angel said to him, "Your prayers and your alms have gone up as a memorial offering into God's presence. 5 Now send men to the city of Joppa to bring a man named Simon who is called Peter. 6 He is staying with a tanner named Simon, whose house is by the seaside."
7 When the angel who spoke to him had left, Cornelius called two of his house servants, and a devout soldier from among those who served him. 8 Cornelius told them all that had happened and sent them to Joppa.
9 Now on the next day at about the sixth hour, as they were on their journey and were approaching the city, Peter went up upon the housetop to pray. 10 He then became hungry and wanted something to eat, but while the people were cooking some food, a trance came on him, 11 and he saw the sky open and a certain container descending, something like a large sheet coming down to the earth, let down by its four corners. 12 In it were all kinds of four-footed animals and things that crawled on the earth, and birds of the sky. 13 Then a voice spoke to him: "Rise, Peter, kill and eat."
14 But Peter said, "Not so, Lord; for I have never eaten anything that was defiled and unclean."
15 But the voice came to him again a second time: "What God has made clean, you must not call defiled." 16 This happened three times; then the container was immediately taken back up into the sky.
17 Now while Peter was very confused about what the vision that he had seen could mean, behold, the men who were sent by Cornelius stood before the gate, after they had asked their way to the house. 18 They called out and asked whether Simon, who was also called Peter, was staying there.
19 While Peter was still thinking about the vision, the Spirit said to him, "Behold, three men are looking for you. [1]20 Arise and go down and go with them. Do not hesitate to go with them, because I have sent them."
21 So Peter went down to the men and said, "I am he whom you are seeking. Why have you come?"
22 They said, "A centurion named Cornelius, a righteous man and one who fears God, and is well spoken of by all the nation of the Jews, was instructed by a holy angel to send for you to come to his house, so he could listen to a message from you." 23 So Peter invited them to come in and stay with him.
On the next morning he got up and went with them, and some of the brothers from Joppa accompanied him. 24 On the following day they came to Caesarea. Cornelius was waiting for them; he had called together his relatives and his close friends. 25 It came about that when Peter entered, Cornelius met him and fell down at his feet to worship him. 26 But Peter helped him up, saying, "Stand up! I too am a man."
27 While Peter was talking with him, he went in and found many people gathered together. 28 He said to them, "You yourselves know that it is not lawful for a Jewish man to associate with or to visit a foreigner. But God has shown me that I should not call any man defiled or unclean. 29 That is why I came without arguing, when I was sent for. So I ask you why you sent for me."
30 Cornelius said, "Four days ago at this very hour, I was praying at the ninth hour in my house; and see, a man stood before me in bright clothing. 31 He said, 'Cornelius, your prayer has been heard by God, and your alms have reminded God about you. 32 So send someone to Joppa, and call to you a man named Simon who is called Peter. He is staying in the house of a tanner named Simon, by the seaside.' [2]33 So at once I sent for you. You are kind to have come. Now then, we are all here present in the sight of God to hear everything that you have been instructed by the Lord to say." [3]
34 Then Peter opened his mouth and said, "Truly I understand that God is not partial. 35 Instead, in every nation anyone who fears him and does what is right is acceptable to him. 36 You know the message that he sent to the people of Israel, when he announced the good news about peace through Jesus Christ, who is Lord of all— 37 you yourselves know the events that took place, which occurred throughout all Judea, beginning in Galilee, after the baptism that John announced; 38 the events concerning Jesus of Nazareth, how God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power. He went about doing good and healing all who were oppressed by the devil, for God was with him. 39 We are witnesses of all the things Jesus did, both in the country of the Jews and in Jerusalem. They killed him by hanging him on a tree, 40 but God raised him up on the third day and caused him to be seen, 41 not by all the people, but to the witnesses who were chosen beforehand by God—by us who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead. 42 He commanded us to proclaim to the people and to testify that this is the one who has been chosen by God to be the Judge of the living and the dead. 43 About him all the prophets testify, that everyone who believes in him receives forgiveness of sins through his name."
44 While Peter was still saying these things, the Holy Spirit fell on all of those who were listening to his message. 45 The people who belonged to the circumcision group of believers—all of those who came with Peter—were amazed, because the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out also on the Gentiles. 46 For they heard these Gentiles speaking in tongues and exalting God. Then Peter answered, 47 "Can anyone keep water from these people so they should not be baptized, these people who have received the Holy Spirit as well as we?" 48 Then he commanded them to be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ. Then they asked him to stay with them for several days.
The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God's sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God's people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: clean and lawofmoses)
The Holy Spirit "fell on" those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
The writer begins to give background information about Cornelius.
This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account.
"from Caesarea whose name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 60 soldiers from the Italian Company of Soldiers, in the Roman army"
The writer finishes giving background information about Cornelius.
a man who wanted to do what God expected of him
worshiped God with deep respect and awe
The word "constantly" is a generalization. Alternate translation: "prayed to God often" or "he prayed to God regularly"
"three o'clock in the afternoon." This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews.
"Cornelius clearly saw"
It is implied that his gifts and prayers had been accepted by God. Alternate translation: "God is pleased by your prayers and alms. They have gone up ... to him"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
a person who makes leather from animal skins
"When Cornelius' vision of the angel had ended."
a soldier who wanted to do what God expected of him. See how you translated "devout" in Acts 10:2.
Cornelius explained his vision to his two servants and to one of his soldiers.
"sent two of his two servants and the one soldier to Joppa."
Here the word "they" refers to Cornelius' two servants and the soldier under Cornelius' command (Acts 10:7).
The story shifts away from Cornelius to tell us what God is doing with to Peter.
"around noon"
The roofs of the houses were flat, and people often did many different activities on them.
"before the people finished cooking the food"
This metaphor means that Peter went into the trance without expecting it or desiring it. Alternate translation: "he went into a trance"
Peter saw things in his mind, not with his physical eyes.
This was the beginning of Peter's vision. It can be a new sentence.
The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth.
"with its four corners suspended" or "with its four corners higher than the rest of it"
snakes and insects, as opposed to "four-footed animals"
The person speaking is not specified. The "voice" was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God.
"I will not do that"
It is implied that some of the "four-footed animals and things that crawled on the earth, and birds of the sky"
This refers to the animals in the sheet.
If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: "What I, God, have made clean"
Possible meanings are 1) Peter heard the words "What God has made clean, you must not call defiled" three times or 2) a total of three times the sheet came down from heaven and Peter heard and responded to the voice. It would be best to translate without adding information here.
This means that Peter was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant.
The word "behold" here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows, in this case, the two men standing at the gate.
"stood before the gate to the house." It is implied that this house had a wall with a gate one would use to enter the property.
This happened before they arrived at the house. This could be stated earlier in the verse, as the UDB does.
Cornelius' men remained outside the gate while asking about Peter.
"wondering about the meaning of the vision"
"the Holy Spirit"
"Pay attention, because what I am about to say is both true and important: three"
Some ancient texts have a different number of men.
"go down from the roof of the house"
It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with them, because they were strangers and they were Gentiles.
"I am the man you are looking for"
The word "They" here refer to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius (Acts 10:7).
This can be divided into several sentences and stated in active form as the UDB does.
worships God with deep respect and awe
This number of people is exaggerated with the word "all" to emphasize how widely this was known among the Jews.
The word "them" here refer to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius (Acts 10:7).
The journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon.
"be his guests"
This refers to believers who lived in Joppa.
This was the next day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day.
"Cornelius expected them"
"when Peter entered the house"
"he knelt down and put his face close to Peter's feet." He did this to honor Peter.
He purposely did this to show that he was worshiping.
Peter was rebuking Cornelius mildly for worshiping Peter. Alternate translation: "Do not worship me! I am only a man, as you are"
The word "him" here refers to Cornelius, and "he" refers to Peter.
Peter addresses the people who are gathered in Cornelius' house.
"many Gentile people gathered together." It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles.
Here the words "You" and "yourselves" include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present and so are plural.
"it is forbidden for a Jewish man." This refers to the Jewish religious law.
people who are not Jews
Here both instances of "you" include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present and so are plural.
In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. The words "you" and "your" are all singular. The word "we" here does not include Peter.
Cornelius responds to Peter's question.
Cornelius is referring to the day before the third night before he is speaking to Peter. Biblical culture counts the current day, so the day before three nights ago is "four days ago." Current Western culture does not count the current day, so many Western translations read, "three days ago."
Some ancient authorities say "fasting and praying" instead of simply "praying."
The normal afternoon time that the Jews pray to God.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has heard your prayer"
"brought you to God's attention." This does not imply that God had forgotten.
"tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you"
"right away"
This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: "I certainly thank you for coming"
This refers to Cornelius and his family but not to Peter, so this is exclusive.
"present with God"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that the Lord has told you to say"
Peter begins speaking to everyone in the house of Cornelius.
"began to speak"
This means that what he is about to say is especially important to know.
"God does not favor certain people"
"he accepts anyone who fears him and does what is right"
to God
worships with deep respect and awe
All instances of "he" here refers to God.
Peter continues to talk to Cornelius and his guests.
Here "all" means "all people."
The word "all" is a generalization. Alternate translation: "throughout Judea" or "in many places in Judea"
"after John preached to the people to repent and then baptized them"
This long sentence, which begins in verse 36, can be shortened into several sentences as in the UDB.
The Holy Spirit and God's power are spoken of as if they are something that can be poured out onto a person.
The word "all" is a generalization. Alternate translation: "those who were oppressed by the devil" or "many people who were oppressed by the devil"
The idiom "was with him" means "was helping him."
The word "We" refer to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to his hearers. The word "him" here refers to Jesus.
This refers mainly to Judea at that time.
This is another expression that refers to crucifixion. Alternate translation: "nailing him to a wooden cross"
Both instances of "him" refer to Jesus.
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "God caused him to live again"
"the third day after he died"
"permitted many people to see him after he was raised from the dead"
The word "us" refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to his hearers. The words "him" and "he" here refers to Jesus.
From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.
Here the word "us" includes Peter and believers. It excludes his audience.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that God chose this Jesus"
This refers to people who are still living and people who have died. Alternate translation: "the people who are alive and the people who are dead"
Peter finishes his speech to everyone in the house of Cornelius, which he began in Acts 10:34.
"All the prophets testify about Jesus"
This could be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will forgive the sins of everyone who believes in Jesus because of what Jesus has done"
Here "his name" refers to the actions of Jesus. His name means God who saves. Alternate translation: "through what Jesus has done for them"
Here the word "fell" indicates that the event happened suddenly. Alternate translation: "the Holy Spirit suddenly came"
Here "all" refers to all the Gentiles at the house who were listening to Peter.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God also poured out the Holy Spirit"
That is, the Holy Spirit himself was the gift.
The Holy Spirit is spoken of as if he were something that could be poured out upon people. It implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: "generously given"
"the free gift"
Here "also" refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers.
These were known spoken languages that caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Gentiles were indeed praising God.
Here "tongues" is a metonym for languages. Alternate translation: "speaking in other languages"
Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. Alternate translation: "No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received ... we!"
The words "he" and "him" refer to Peter.
This is the end of the part of the story about Cornelius.
It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. Alternate translation: "Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them" or "Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them"
Here "in the name of Jesus Christ" expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: "be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ"
1 Now the apostles and the brothers who were in Judea heard that the Gentiles also had received the word of God. 2 When Peter had come up to Jerusalem, they who belonged to the circumcision group criticized him; 3 they said, "You associated with uncircumcised men and ate with them!" 4 But Peter started to explain the matter to them in detail, saying, 5 "I was praying in the city of Joppa, and in a trance I saw a vision of a container coming down, like a large sheet let down from heaven by its four corners. It descended to me. 6 I gazed at it and I thought about it. I saw the four-legged animals of earth, wild beasts, things that crawled, and birds of the sky. 7 Then I heard a voice say to me, 'Get up, Peter; kill and eat!'
8 I said, 'Not so, Lord; for nothing unholy or unclean has ever entered into my mouth.'
9 But the voice answered again from heaven, 'What God has made clean, you must not call defiled.' 10 This happened three times, and then everything was taken back up into heaven again.
11 "Behold, right away there were three men standing in front of the house where we were; they had been sent from Caesarea to me. 12 The Spirit commanded me to go with them, and that I should make no distinction regarding them. These six brothers went with me, and we went into the man's house. 13 He told us how he had seen the angel standing in his house and saying, ‘Send men to Joppa and bring back Simon who is called Peter. 14 He will speak to you a message by which you will be saved—you and all your household.’ 15 As I began to speak to them, the Holy Spirit came on them, just as on us in the beginning. 16 I remembered the words of the Lord, how he said, 'John indeed baptized with water; but you will be baptized with the Holy Spirit.' 17 Then if God gave to them the same gift as he gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, that I could oppose God?"
18 When they heard these things, they said nothing in response, but they glorified God and said, "Then God has given repentance for life to the Gentiles also."
19 Now those who had been scattered by the persecution that arose over Stephen spread as far as Phoenicia, Cyprus, and Antioch, speaking the word only to Jews. 20 But some of them, men from Cyprus and Cyrene, came to Antioch and spoke also to Greeks, proclaiming to them the gospel about the Lord Jesus. 21 The hand of the Lord was with them; a great number believed and turned to the Lord. 22 News about them came to the ears of the church in Jerusalem, and they sent out Barnabas as far as Antioch. 23 When he came and saw the grace of God, he was glad and he encouraged them all to remain with the Lord with purpose of heart. 24 For he was a good man and full of the Holy Spirit and of faith, and many people were added to the Lord. 25 Barnabas then went out to Tarsus to search carefully for Saul. 26 When he found him, he brought him to Antioch. It came about, that for an entire year they gathered together with the church and taught many people. The disciples were first called Christians in Antioch.
27 Now in these days some prophets came down from Jerusalem to Antioch. 28 One of them, Agabus by name, stood up and indicated by the Spirit that a great famine would occur over all the world. This happened in the days of Claudius. 29 So the disciples, as each one was able, determined to send a contribution for the relief of the brothers in Judea. 30 They did this; they sent money to the elders by the hand of Barnabas and Saul.
Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to "receive the word of God." Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
This is the beginning of a new event in the story.
This marks a new part of the story.
The phrase "brothers" here refers to the believers in Judea.
"who were in the province of Judea"
This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: "believed the message of God about Jesus"
Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there.
Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming up to Jerusalem and going down from it.
This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: "some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcised"
The phrase "uncircumcised men" refers to Gentiles.
It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles.
Peter responds to the Jews by telling them about his vision and about what had happened at Cornelius' house.
Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly, explanatory manner.
"exactly what happened"
Peter saw something that was only in his mind. It was not physical. His mind was not working in its usual way. See how you translated similar words in Acts 10:10.
The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
"with its four corners suspended" or "with its four corners higher than the rest of it." See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
From Peter's response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 10:12]
This probably refer to the animals people do not or cannot tame or control.
snakes and insects, as opposed to "four-footed animals." See how you translated this in Acts 10:12.
The person speaking is not specified. The "voice" was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated "a voice" in [Acts 10:13]
"I will not do that." See how you translated this in Acts 10:14.
Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. This can be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: "I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals"
In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually "unclean" in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals.
This refers to the animals in the sheet.
Possible meanings are 1) Peter heard the words "What God has made clean, you must not call defiled" three times or 2) a total of three times the sheet came down from heaven and Peter heard and responded to the voice. It would be best to translate without adding information here. See how you translated "This happened three times" in Acts 10:16.
Here "we" refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem.
This word alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
"immediately" or "at that exact moment"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "someone had sent them"
"that I should not be concerned that they were Gentiles"
"These six brothers went with me to Caesarea"
"These six Jewish believers"
This refers to the house of Cornelius.
"Simon who is also called Peter." See how you translated the same phrase in Acts 10:32.
This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: "everyone who lives in your house"
Here the word "us" refers to Peter, the other apostles, and all of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost.
This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.
Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: "the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost"
Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will baptize you with the Holy Spirit"
The word "them" refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. The word "us" refers to the speaker and his hearers and so is inclusive.
Peter finishes his speech (which he began in Acts 11:4) to the Jews about his vision and about what had happened at the house of Cornelius.
Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. Alternate translation: "Since God gave to them ... I decided that I could not oppose God!"
Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit.
The word "they" refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke.
"they did not argue with Peter"
"God has given repentance that leads to life to the Gentiles also." Here "life" refers to eternal life. The abstract nouns "repentance" and "life" can be translated as the verbs "repent" and "live." Alternate translation: "God has also given the Gentiles the ability to repent and then live eternally" or "God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally"
Luke tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.
This introduces the new part of the story.
The Jews began persecuting Jesus's followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus's followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places.
"went in many different directions"
This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom the Jews had been persecuting because of Stephen, and so had left Jerusalem, spread"
the persecution that happened because of what Stephen had said and done
The believers thought God's message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles.
These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: "also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek"
God's hand signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: "God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively"
Here "turned to the Lord" is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: "they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord"
The word "he" refers to Barnabas. The word "they" refers to the believers of the church at Jerusalem.
Here "ears" refers to the believers' hearing about the event. Alternate translation: "the believers in the church"
The word "he" refers to Barnabas. The word "them" refers to the believers he met on his way to Antioch.
"saw how God acted kindly toward the believers"
"he kept on encouraging them"
"to remain faithful to the Lord" or "to continue to trust in the Lord"
Here the "heart" refers to a person's will and desire. Alternate translation: "with all their will" or "with complete commitment"
The word "he" refers to Barnabas.
The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit.
Here "added" means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: "many more people also believed in the Lord"
"out to the city of Tarsus"
The word "he" refers to Barnabas and "him" to Saul.
It probably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul.
This begins a new event in the story.
"Barnabas and Saul gathered together with the church"
This implies that it was other people who called the believers Christians. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "People in Antioch were the fist to call the disciples Christians"
Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch.
This word is used here to mark a break in the main story-line.
Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going down from it.
"whose name was Agabus"
"the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy"
"a great shortage of food would happen"
This was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: "all over the inhabited world" or "throughout the Roman Empire"
Luke's audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: "when Claudius was the Roman emperor"
This word means marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus' prophesy or the famine.
The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less.
"the believers in Judea"
The words "They" and "they" refer to the believers in the church in Antioch (Acts 11:27).
The hand is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: "by having Barnabas and Saul take it to them"
1 Now about that time Herod the king laid hands on some who belonged to the church so that he might mistreat them. 2 He killed James the brother of John with the sword. 3 After he saw that this pleased the Jews, he proceeded to arrest Peter also. That was during the days of unleavened bread. 4 After arresting him, he put him in prison, assigning him over to four squads of soldiers to guard him; he was intending to bring him to the people after the Passover. 5 So Peter was kept in the prison, but prayer was made earnestly to God for him by those in the church. 6 On the night before Herod was going to bring him out for trial, Peter was sleeping between two soldiers, bound with two chains, while guards in front of the door were keeping watch over the prison. 7 Behold, an angel of the Lord suddenly appeared by him, and a light shone in the prison cell. He struck Peter on the side and woke him and said, "Get up quickly," and his chains fell off his hands. 8 The angel said to him, "Gird yourself and put on your sandals." Peter did so. The angel said to him, "Put on your outer garment and follow me." 9 So Peter followed the angel and went out. He did not know that what was done by the angel was real. He thought he was seeing a vision. 10 After they had passed by the first guard and the second, they came to the iron gate that led into the city; it opened for them by itself. They went out and went down a street, and the angel left him right away. 11 When Peter came to himself, he said, "Now I truly know that the Lord has sent his angel and delivered me out of the hand of Herod, and from everything the Jewish people were expecting." 12 When he realized this, he went to the house of Mary the mother of John, also called Mark, where many people had gathered and were praying. 13 When he knocked at the door of the gate, a servant girl named Rhoda came to answer. 14 When she recognized Peter's voice, out of joy she failed to open the gate; instead, she came running into the room; she reported that Peter was standing at the gate. 15 So they said to her, "You are insane." But she insisted that it was so. They said, "It is his angel." 16 But Peter continued knocking, and when they had opened the door, they saw him and were amazed. 17 Peter motioned to them with his hand to be silent, and he told them how the Lord had brought him out of prison. He said, "Report these things to James and the brothers." Then he left and went to another place. 18 Now when it became day, there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter. 19 After Herod had searched for him and could not find him, he questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death.
Then Herod went down from Judea to Caesarea and stayed there. 20 Now Herod was very angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. They went to him with one purpose, and after persuading Blastus, the king's assistant, to help them, they asked for peace because their country received its food from the king's country. 21 On a set day Herod dressed himself in royal clothing and sat on a throne; he made a speech to them. 22 The people shouted, "This is the voice of a god, not of a man!" 23 Immediately an angel of the Lord struck him, because he did not give God the glory; he was eaten by worms and died.
24 But the word of God increased and multiplied.
25 So when Barnabas and Saul had completed their mission, they returned from Jerusalem, [1] bringing with them John, also called Mark.
Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch.
The "word of God" is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many.
This is background information about Herod's killing James.
This begins the new persecution, first of James's death and then of Peter's imprisonment and then release.
This begins a new part of the story.
This refers to the time of the famine.
This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in [Acts 4:3]
Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem.
"in order to cause the believers to suffer"
This tells the manner in which James was killed.
Possible meanings are 1) Herod himself killed James or 2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: "Herod gave the order and they killed James"
Here the word "he" refers to Herod (Acts 12:1).
"When Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders"
"made the Jewish leaders happy"
"Herod did this" or "This happened"
This refers to the Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: "the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast"
"four groups of soldiers." Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24 hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance.
"Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people" or "Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people"
This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him"
continuously and with dedication
That Herod planned to execute him can be clarified. Alternate translation: "The happened on the day before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him"
"tied with two chains" or "fastened with two chains." Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter.
"were guarding the prison doors"
The words "him" and "his" refer to Peter.
This word alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
"next to him" or "beside him"
"in the prison room"
"The angel tapped Peter" or "The angel poked Peter." Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him.
The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them.
Peter had probably loosened his belt and taken off his sandals so he could go to sleep. The angel was telling Peter to get ready to leave the cell.
"Peter did what the angel told him to do" or "Peter obeyed"
Here the word "He" refers to Peter. The words "they" and "They" refer to Peter and the angel.
"He did not understand"
This could be changed to active form. Alternate translation: "the actions of the angel were real" or "what the angel did truly happened"
It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: "The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then"
"had walked by"
The word "guard" is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: "and the second guard"
"Peter and the angel arrived at the iron gate"
"that opened to the city" or "that went from the prison to the city"
Here "by itself" means neither Peter nor the angel opened it. Alternate translation: "the gate swung open for them" or "the gate opened itself for them"
"walked along a street"
"left Peter suddenly" or "suddenly disappeared"
This is an idiom. Alternate translation: "When Peter became fully awake and alert" or "When Peter became aware that what had happened was real"
Here "the hand of Herod" refers to "Herod's hold" or "Herod's plans." Alternate translation: "brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me"
"rescued me"
Here "the people of the Jews" probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: "all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me"
He became aware that God had rescued him.
John was also called Mark. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "John, whom people also called Mark"
"Peter knocked." Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture.
"at the outer door" or "at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard"
"came to the gate to ask who was knocking"
Here all instances of "she" refer to the servant girl Rhoda (Acts 12:13).
"because she was so joyful" or "being overly excited"
"did not open the gate" or "forgot to open the gate"
You may prefer to say "went running into the room in the house"
"she told them" or "she said"
Here the words "she" and "her" both refer to the servant girl Rhoda (Acts 10:13), and the words "they" and "They" refer to the people who were inside praying (Acts 10:12).
The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: "You are crazy"
"she insisted that what she said was true"
"They answered"
"What you have seen is Peter's angel." Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter's angel had come to them.
Here both instances of "they" refer to the people in the house. The word "him" refers to Peter.
The word "continued" means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking.
Here both instances of "them" refer to the people who were inside praying (Acts 12:12).
"Tell these things"
"the other believers"
This word is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day.
"in the morning"
This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: "there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter"
The abstract noun "disturbance" can be expressed with the words "disturbed" or "upset." Alternate translation: "the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter"
The word "him" here refers to Peter, and both instances of "he" refers to Herod.
"After Herod searched for Peter and could not find him"
Possible meanings are that 1) "Herod" here is a metonym for his soldiers, that is, when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison, or 2) when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison.
It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped.
The phrase "went down" is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea.
Luke continues with another event in Herod's life.
This word is used here to mark the next event in the story.
This phrase translates a word that speaks of a person being so angry that he is ready to kill other people.
Here the word "They" is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: "Men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went with one purpose to talk with Herod"
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
"after these men persuaded Blastus"
a man's name
This phrase refers to a person who assists the king in his personal life, not necessarily his work as ruler.
"these men requested peace"
They probably purchased this food. Alternate translation: "the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled"
It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of food because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon.
This was probably the day on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: "On the day when Herod agreed to meet them"
expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king
This was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This is the end of the part of the story about Herod.
"Right away an angel" or "While the people were praising Herod, an angel"
"afflicted Herod" or "caused Herod to become very ill"
Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God.
Here "worms" refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "worms ate Herod's insides and he died"
The word of God is spoken of as if it were a living plant able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: "the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him"
"the message God sent about Jesus"
This verse continues the history from [11:30]
This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in [Acts 11:29-30]
They went back to Antioch from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: "Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch"
1 Now in the church in Antioch, there were some prophets and teachers. They were Barnabas, Simeon (who is called Niger), Lucius of Cyrene, Manaen (the foster brother of Herod the tetrarch), and Saul. 2 While they were worshiping the Lord and fasting, the Holy Spirit said, "Set apart for me Barnabas and Saul, to do the work to which I have called them." 3 After they had fasted, prayed, and laid their hands on these men, they sent them off.
4 So Barnabas and Saul, having been sent out by the Holy Spirit, went down to Seleucia; from there they sailed away to Cyprus. 5 While they were in the city of Salamis, they proclaimed the word of God in the synagogues of the Jews. They also had John for an assistant. 6 When they had gone through the whole island to Paphos, they found a certain magician, a Jewish false prophet, whose name was Bar-Jesus. 7 This magician associated with the proconsul, Sergius Paulus, who was an intelligent man. This man summoned Barnabas and Saul, because he sought to hear the word of God. 8 But Elymas "the magician" (that is how his name is translated) opposed them; he tried to turn the proconsul away from the faith. 9 But Saul, who is also called Paul, filled with the Holy Spirit, stared at him intensely 10 and said, "You son of the devil, you are full of all kinds of deceit and wickedness. You are an enemy of every kind of righteousness. You will never stop twisting the straight paths of the Lord, will you? 11 Now look, the hand of the Lord is upon you, and you will become blind. You will not see the sun for a while." Immediately there fell on Elymas a mist and darkness; he started going around seeking people to lead him by the hand. 12 After the proconsul saw what had happened, he believed, because he was astonished at the teaching about the Lord.
13 Now Paul and his friends set sail from Paphos and came to Perga in Pamphylia. But John left them and returned to Jerusalem. 14 Paul and his friends traveled from Perga and came to Antioch of Pisidia. There they went into the synagogue on the Sabbath day and sat down. 15 After the reading of the law and the prophets, the leaders of the synagogue sent them a message, saying, "Brothers, if you have any message of encouragement for the people here, say it." 16 So Paul stood up and motioned with his hand; he said, "Men of Israel and you who fear God, listen. 17 The God of this people Israel chose our fathers and exalted the people when they stayed in the land of Egypt, and with an uplifted arm he led them out of it. 18 For about forty years he put up with them in the wilderness. [1]19 After he had destroyed seven nations in the land of Canaan, he gave our people their land for an inheritance. 20 All these events took place over 450 years. After all these things, God gave them judges until Samuel the prophet. 21 Then the people asked for a king, and God gave them Saul son of Kish, a man from the tribe of Benjamin, to be king for forty years. 22 After God removed him from the kingship, he raised up David to be their king. It was about David that God testified, saying, 'I have found David son of Jesse to be a man after my heart, who does all I want him to do.' 23 From this man's descendants God has brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, as he promised to do. 24 Before the arrival of Jesus, John proclaimed a baptism of repentance to all the people of Israel. 25 As John was finishing his work, he said, 'Who do you think I am? I am not the one. But listen, one is coming after me, the sandals of whose feet I am not worthy to untie.' 26 Brothers, children of the offspring of Abraham, and those among you who fear God, it is to us that the message about this salvation has been sent. 27 For they who live in Jerusalem and their rulers did not recognize him, and they fulfilled the voices of the prophets that are read every Sabbath by condemning him. 28 Even though they found no reason for the death penalty, they called on Pilate to kill him. 29 When they had completed all the things that were written about him, they took him down from the tree and laid him in a tomb. 30 But God raised him from the dead. 31 He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem. These people are now his witnesses to the people. 32 So we tell you the good news: The promise that came to our fathers 33 God has fulfilled for us, their children, by raising up Jesus. As it is written in the second Psalm:
'You are my Son,
today I have become your Father.'
34 As to his raising him from the dead, never to return to decay, he has spoken in this way:
'I will give you the holy and sure blessings
promised to David.'
35 This is why he also says in another Psalm,
'You will not allow your Holy One
to see decay.'
36 For when David had served the purpose of God in his own generation, he fell asleep; he was laid with his fathers and his body experienced decay. 37 But he whom God raised up experienced no decay. 38 So let it be known to you, brothers, that through this man forgiveness of sins is proclaimed to you. The law of Moses could not make you righteous. 39 But by this man God makes righteous everyone who believes. 40 So then be careful that the thing the prophets spoke about does not happen to you:
41 'Look, you despisers,
and be astonished and then perish;
For I am doing a work in your days,
a work that you would never believe,
even if someone announces it to you.'"
42 As Paul and Barnabas left, the people begged them that they might speak these same words again the next Sabbath. 43 When the synagogue meeting ended, many of the Jews and devout proselytes followed Paul and Barnabas, who were speaking to them and persuading them to continue in the grace of God.
44 On the next Sabbath, almost the whole city was gathered together to hear the word of the Lord. 45 When the Jews saw the crowds, they were filled with envy and spoke against the things that were said by Paul and insulted him. 46 But Paul and Barnabas spoke out boldly and said, "It was necessary that the word of God should first be spoken to you. Seeing you push it away from yourselves and consider yourselves unworthy of eternal life, see, we will turn to the Gentiles. 47 For so has the Lord commanded us, saying,
'I have appointed you as a light for the Gentiles,
that you should bring salvation
to the uttermost parts of the earth.'"
48 As the Gentiles heard this, they were glad and glorified the word of the Lord. As many as were appointed to eternal life believed. 49 The word of the Lord was spread out through the whole region. 50 But the Jews incited the devout women of high standing and the leading men of the city. They stirred up persecution against Paul and Barnabas and threw them out of their region. 51 But Paul and Barnabas shook off the dust from their feet against them. Then they went to the city of Iconium. 52 And the disciples were filled with joy and with the Holy Spirit.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:33-35 and 13:41.
This chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter. Luke also writes about the believers preaching to the Gentiles rather than to the Jews.
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: and righteous)
Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch.
Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul.
"At that time in the church at Antioch"
These are men's names.
Manaen was probably Herod's playmate or close friend while they were growing up.
The words "they" refers to the other three leaders (Acts 13:1), not including Barnabas and Saul, and it could include other believers.
"Appoint Barnabas and Saul to serve me"
The verb here means that God chose them to do this work.
The words "they" and "their" refer to the other three leaders (Acts 13:1), not including Barnabas and Saul, and they could include other believers.
"laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service." This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work.
"sent those men off" or "sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do"
Here the word "they" refers to Barnabas and Saul.
This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit.
The phrase "went down" is used here because Seleucia is lower in elevation than Antioch.
a city by the sea
Here the words "They" and "their" refer to Barnabas and Saul.
The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island.
"Word of God" here is a synecdoche for "message of God." Alternate translation: "proclaimed the message of God"
Possible meanings are that 1) there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached or 2) Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.
"John went with them and was helping them"
John Mark
"helper"
Here both instances of "they" refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark.
They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.
a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived
Here "found" means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: "they met" or "they came upon"
"a particular person who practiced witchcraft" or "a person who practiced supernatural magic arts"
"Bar-Jesus" means "Son of Jesus." There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. "Jesus" was a common name at that time.
Here the word "he" refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul.
"was often with" or "was often in the company of"
This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: "governor"
This is background information about Sergius Paulus.
The phrase "this man" refers to Sergius Paulus.
"he wanted to hear the word of God"
Here the word "them" refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark, and "he" refers to Elymas.
This was Bar Jesus, who was also called "the magician"
"that was what he was called in Greek"
"resisted them by trying to turn" or "attempted to stop them by trying to turn"
Here "to turn ... away from" is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: "attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message"
The word "him" refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus (Acts 13:6-8).
While on the island of Paphos, Paul begins to talk to Elymas.
"Saul" was his Jewish name, and "Paul" was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: "Saul, who now called himself Paul"
"looked at him intensely"
Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: "You are like the devil" or "You act like the devil"
"you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and are always doing what is wrong"
The word in this context means laziness and lack of diligence in following God's law.
Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas.
Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. Alternate translation: "You are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!"
Here "straight paths" refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: "the true ways of the Lord"
The words "you," "he," and "him" refer to Elymas the magician.
Paul finishes speaking to Elymas.
Here "hand' represents the power of God and "upon you" implies punishment. Alternate translation: "The Lord will punish you"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will make you blind"
Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see the sun. Alternate translation: "You will not even see the sun"
"for a period of time" or "until the time appointed by God"
"the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark" or "Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything"
"Elymas wandered around" or "Elymas started feeling around and"
Both instances of "he" refer to the proconsul.
A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: "the governor"
"he believed in Jesus"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the teaching about the Lord amazed him"
Verse 13 gives background information about this part of the story. "Paul and his friends" were Barnabas and John Mark
This is a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia.
This marks the beginning of a new part of the story.
"traveled by sailboat from Paphos"
"arrived in Perga, which is in Pamphylia"
"But John Mark left Paul and Barnabas"
Verse 14 continues to give background information about this part of the story. The word "they" refers to Paul and his friends Barnabas and John Mark
"the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia." This is different from the city of Antioch that Paul and Barnabas left at the beginning of the chapter.
The word "them" refers to Paul and his friends Barnabas and John Mark.
The "law and the prophets" refer to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: "After someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets"
"told someone to say to them" or "asked someone to say to them"
The term "brothers" is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.
"if you want to say anything to encourage us"
or "exhortation"
"please speak it" or "please tell it to us"
The words "he" and "his" refer to Paul. The word "you" is plural.
Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel's history.
This could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: "moved his hands to show that he was about to speak"
This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. "you who are not Israelites but who worship God"
"God, listen to me" or "God, listen to what I am about to say"
The word "our" includes the speaker and the hears and so is plural. The words "they" and "them" refer to "the people." The word "he" refers to God.
"The God the people of Israel worship"
"our ancestors"
"caused the people to become very numerous"
This refers to God's mighty power. Alternate translation: "with great power"
"out from the land of Egypt"
"God tolerated the people of Israel." This means "he tolerated them." Some versions have have a different word that means "he took care of them." Alternate translation: "God endured their disobedience" or "God took care of them"
Here both instances of "he" refer to God. The word "our" refers to Paul and his audience.
Here the word "nations" refers to different people groups and not to lands with geographical boundaries.
The word "them" refers to the people of Israel.
"took more than 450 years to accomplish"
"until the time of the prophet Samuel"
king for forty years
"their king for forty years" or "king, and he reigned over them for forty years"
The quotation here is from Old Testament.
This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: "rejected Saul from being king"
"God chose David to be their king"
"the king of Israel" or "the king over the Israelites"
"God gave this testimony about David:"
"I have observed that David ... is"
This expression means "a man who wants what I want."
"From David's descendants." This is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the savior had to be one of David's descendants (Acts 13:22).
This refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: "gave to the people of Israel"
"just as God promised he would do"
You can translate the word "repentance" as the verb "repent." Alternate translation: "that all the people of Israel who wanted to repent of their sin needed to have him baptize them"
John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. Alternate translation: "Think about who I am."
John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: "I am not the Messiah"
This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.
This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: "The Messiah will soon come"
"I am not worthy even to untie his sandals." The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him.
Here the word "us" includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue.
Possible meanings are 1) this is a list with three items, and Paul is addressing three groups of people together, or 2) the phrases "children of the offspring of Abraham" and "those among you who fear God" refer to the two groups of people whom Paul addresses as "brothers."
These words refer specifically to Gentiles who worshiped in the synagogue and obeyed much of the law of Moses but had not been circumcised.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has sent the message about this salvation"
The word "salvation" can be translated with the verb "save." Alternate translation: "that God will save people"
The word "they" and "their" refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem.
"did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them"
Here the word "voices" is a metonym for the message that the voices spoke. Alternate translation: "the writings of the prophets" or "the messages of the prophets"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "which someone reads"
Here the word "they" refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him" here refers to Jesus.
It is implied that they found no legal reason for Jesus to be put to death. Alternate translation: "they found no legal reason for Jesus to be killed" or "they found no legal reason to kill Jesus"
"When they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him"
It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: "they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died"
"from the cross." This was another way people at that time referred to the cross.
"But" indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did.
"raised him from among those who were dead." To be with "the dead" means to be dead. To raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "caused him to live again"
From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The disciples who traveled with Jesus ... Jeruaslem saw him for many days"
We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate "many days" with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.
"are now testifying to the people about Jesus" or "are now telling the people about Jesus"
This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is God's raising Jesus from the dead.
"our ancestors." Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. "God has fulfilled for us, their children, the promise that he made to our fathers, by raising up Jesus"
"for us, who are the children of our ancestors." Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These ancestors were the physical ancestors of the Jews and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "by making Jesus alive again"
"This is what was written in the second Psalm"
"Psalm 2"
These are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God.
The quotation is from the prophet Isaiah.
"God has spoken in this way that he raised him up from the dead never to return to decay" "God used these words to say that he raised him up from the dead, and so he would never die again"
All those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
"and he will never die again"
God has said using these words
"certain blessings"
Paul's audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: "In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah"
"David also says." David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken.
The phrase "see decay" is a metonym for "decay." Alternate translation: "You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot"
David is speaking to God here.
"during his lifetime"
"did what God wanted him to do" or "did what pleased God"
This was a polite way to refer to death. Alternate translation: "he died"
"was buried with his ancestors who had died"
The phrase "his body experienced decay" is a less direct way of saying "his body decayed" or "his body rotted."
"Jesus, whom God raised up, experienced"
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "God caused to live again"
The phrase "experienced no decay" is a way to say "his body did not decay." Alternate translation: "did not rot"
"know this" or "this is important for you to know"
Paul uses this term because they are his fellow Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: "my fellow Israelites and other friends"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus"
The abstract noun "forgiveness" can be translated with the verb "to forgive." Alternate translation: "that God can forgive your sins"
"But God makes righteous everyone who believes in this man"
Here "this man" refers to Jesus Christ.
It is implied that the thing they should be careful about is Paul's message. Alternate translation: "give close attention to the things I have said"
"so that what the prophets spoke about"
In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word "I" refers to God.
Paul finishes his speech in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch, which he began in Acts 13:16.
"you who feel contempt" or "you who ridicule"
"be amazed" or "be shocked"
"then die"
"am doing something" or "am doing a great deed"
"during your lifetime"
"days. I am doing something that"
"even if someone tells you about it"
"When Paul and Barnabas were leaving"
"begged them to"
Here "words" refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: "this same message"
Possible meanings are 1) this restates "As Paul and Barnabas left" in verse 42 or 2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later.
These were non-Jewish people who converted to Judaism.
"and Paul and Barnabas were speaking to those people and persuading them"
It is implied that they believed Paul's message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: "to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people's sins because of what Jesus did"
The "city" represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord's word. Alternate translation: "almost all the people of the city were"
It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: "to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus"
Here the word "him" refers to Paul.
Here "Jews" represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders"
Here envy is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: "became very envious"
"contradicted" or "opposed"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the things that Paul said"
Both instances of the word "you" and the word "yourselves" refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking and so are plural. The word "we" refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present.
This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: "God commanded"
This can be stated in active form. "Word of God" here is a synecdoche for "message from God." Alternate translation: "that we speak the message from God to you first" or "that we speak the word of God to you first"
Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: "Since you reject the word of God"
"have shown that you are not worthy of eternal life" or "act as though you are not worthy of eternal life"
"we will go to the Gentiles." Paul and Barnabas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: "we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles"
The word "us" refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present, so it is exclusive.
Both instances of "you" here are singular, but when Paul said, "... the Lord commanded us," Paul was applying those singular words to both himself and Barnabas. The words in the quotation were originally spoken by God through Isaiah the prophet to God's servant. By quoting Isaiah's prophecy, Paul was saying that he and Barnabas were doing what God commanded his servant to do. Paul was not saying that God had spoken directly to him.
Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were a light that allowed people to see.
The abstract word "salvation" can be translated with the verb "to save." The phrase "uttermost parts" refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: "tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them"
Here "word" refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: "glorified God for the message about the Lord Jesus" or "glorified the Lord for his word"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "As many as God appointed to eternal life" or "All the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life"
Here "word" refers to the message about Jesus. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Those who believed spread the word of the Lord through the whole region" or "Those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus"
This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders"
This means that they spoke to the women and men and caused them to be angry and act violently. Alternate translation: "stirred up ... women ... and ... men"
The word "devout" means that these women feared God. The phrase "of high standing" means that people respected these women.
"the most important men"
The word "they" here probably refers to the devout women and the leading men. They listened to the Jews and then convinced the rest of the people in the city to persecute the apostles and throw them out.
"made Paul and Barnabas leave their land"
Here this word refers to the area that the people of the city considered their own, not to land within an official government border.
Here the word "they" refers to Paul and Barnabas.
Paul and Barnabas end their time in Antioch of Pisidia and go to Iconium.
This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them.
This probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left.
1 It came about in Iconium that Paul and Barnabas entered together into the synagogue of the Jews and spoke in such a way that a great multitude both of Jews and of Greeks believed. 2 But the Jews who were disobedient stirred up the minds of the Gentiles and made them bitter against the brothers. 3 So they stayed there for a long time, speaking boldly with the Lord's power, while he gave evidence about the message of his grace. He did this by granting signs and wonders to be done by the hands of Paul and Barnabas. 4 But the people of the city were divided; some sided with the Jews, others with the apostles. 5 Both Gentiles and Jews (together with their leaders) made an attempt to mistreat them and to stone them, 6 but as soon as they learned about this, they fled to the Lycaonian cities of Lystra and Derbe and the surrounding region, 7 where they continued to proclaim the gospel.
8 At Lystra a certain man sat, powerless in his feet, a cripple from his mother's womb, who never had walked. 9 This man heard Paul speaking. Paul fixed his eyes on him and saw that he had faith to be made well. 10 So he said to him in a loud voice, "Stand up on your feet." Then the man jumped up and walked around.
11 When the multitude saw what Paul had done, they raised their voice, saying in the dialect of Lycaonia, "The gods have become like men and come down to us." 12 They called Barnabas "Zeus," and Paul "Hermes," because he was the main speaker. 13 The priest of Zeus, whose temple was just outside the city, brought oxen and wreaths to the gates; he and the multitudes wanted to offer sacrifice. 14 But when the apostles, Barnabas and Paul, heard of it, they tore their clothing and quickly went out into the crowd, crying out, 15 "Men, why are you doing these things? We also are human beings, with the same nature as you. We are telling you good news that you should turn from these useless things to the living God, who made the heavens, the earth, the sea, and everything that is in them. 16 In the past ages, he allowed all the nations to walk in their own ways. 17 But still, he did not leave himself without witness, in that he did good and gave you the rains from heaven and fruitful seasons, filling your hearts with food and gladness." 18 Even with these words, Paul and Barnabas barely kept the multitudes from sacrificing to them.
19 But some Jews from Antioch and Iconium came and persuaded the crowds. They stoned Paul and dragged him out of the city, thinking that he was dead. 20 Yet as the disciples were standing around him, he got up and entered the city. The next day, he went to Derbe with Barnabas. 21 After they had proclaimed the gospel in that city and made many disciples, they returned to Lystra, to Iconium, and to Antioch. 22 They kept strengthening the souls of the disciples and encouraging them to continue in the faith, saying, "We must enter into the kingdom of God through many tribulations." 23 When they had appointed for them elders in every church, and had prayed with fasting, they entrusted them to the Lord, in whom they had believed. 24 Then they passed through Pisidia and came to Pamphylia. 25 When they had spoken the word in Perga, they went down to Attalia. 26 From there they sailed to Antioch, where they had been committed to the grace of God for the work which they had now completed. 27 When they arrived in Antioch and gathered the church together, they reported all the things that God had done with them, and how he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles. 28 They stayed for a long time with the disciples.
The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: grace and believe)
The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the "living God." (See: falsegod)
Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues.
Possible meanings here are 1) "It happened in Iconium that" or 2) "In Iconium, as usual,"
"spoke so powerfully." It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: "spoke the message about Jesus so powerfully"
This refers to the portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus.
Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed.
Here the word "minds" refers to the people. Alternate translation: "the Gentiles"
Here "brothers" refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers.
Here the words "he," "his," and "He" refer to the Lord.
"Nevertheless they stayed there." Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in Acts 14:1. "So" could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text.
"demonstrated that the message about his grace was true"
"about the message of the Lord's grace"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders"
Here "hands" refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: "by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas"
"the people of the city disagreed with each other"
"supported the Jews" or "agreed with the Jews." The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace.
The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: "sided with the apostles"
Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here "apostle" might be used in the general sense of "ones sent out."
Here the words "made an attempt" implies that they were not able to mistreat Paul and Barnabas before Paul and Barnabas left the city.
"to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them"
A district in Asia Minor
A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe
A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra
Here the word "they" refers to Paul and Barnabas.
"where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news"
Paul and Barnabas are now in Lystra.
This introduces a new person in the story.
"unable to move his legs" or "unable to walk on his feet"
"having been born as a cripple"
person who cannot walk
The words "him" and "he" refer to the crippled man.
"Paul looked straight at him"
The abstract noun "faith" can be translated with the verb "believe." Alternate translation: "believed that Jesus could heal him" or "believed that Jesus could make him well"
"Paul said to the crippled man"
"leaped in the air." This implies that his legs were completely healed.
This refers to Paul's healing the crippled man.
To raise the voice is to speak loudly. Alternate translation: "they spoke loudly"
"in their own Lycaonian language." The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek.
These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men. A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: "The gods have come down from heaven to us in the form of men"
The people of Iconium probably considered Zeus to be the king over all the other pagan gods.
The people of Iconium probably considered Hermes to be the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods.
It may be helpful to include additional information about the priest. Alternate translation: "There was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought"
The oxen were to be sacrificed. The wreaths were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice.
The gates of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city.
"wanted to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes"
Luke is here probably using "apostle" in the general sense of "one sent out."
This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them.
Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. Alternate translation: "Men, you must not do these things!"
"worshiping us"
By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: "We are just human beings like you. We are not gods"
"like you in every way"
"telling you good news: you can turn" or "giving you good advice to turn." That is, the good news is that they can and should turn.
Here "turn from ... to" is a metaphor meaning to stop doing one thing and start doing something else. Alternate translation: "stop worshiping these false gods that cannot help you, and instead begin to worship the living God"
"the God who truly exists" or "the God who lives"
"In previous times" or "Until now"
Walking in a way, or walking on a path, is a metaphor for living one's life. Alternate translation: "to live their lives the way they wanted to" or "to do whatever they wanted to do"
Paul and Barnabas continue speaking to the crowd outside the city of Lystra (Acts 14:8).
This could also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "God has certainly left a witness" or "God has indeed testified"
"as shown by the fact that"
Here "your hearts" refers to the people. Alternate translation: "giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy"
Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude from sacrificing to them, but it was difficult to do so.
"had difficulty preventing"
Here the words "he" and "him" refer to Paul.
It my be helpful to explicitly state what they persuaded the crowd to do. Alternate translation: "persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them"
This may not be the same group as the "multitude" in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together.
"because they thought that he was already dead"
These were new believers in the city of Lystra.
"Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers"
"Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe"
Here both instances of "they" refer to Paul and Barnabas.
"Derbe" (Acts 14:20)
Here the words "they" refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the word "We" includes Paul, Barnabas, and the disciples. The word "them" refers to the disciples.
Here "souls" refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: "Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus" or "Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus
"encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus"
Some version translate this as an indirect quote, "saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many tribulations." The word "we" here includes Luke and the readers.
Paul includes his hearers, so the word "we" is inclusive.
"Paul and Barnabas had appointed for the believers"
Possible meanings are 1) "Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed ... the elders had believed" or 2) "Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed and the other disciples ... the elders and other disciples had believed"
The word "they" refers to Paul and Barnabas.
Both instances of "they" refer to Paul and Barnabas.
"Word" here is a metonym for "message of God." Alternate translation: "had spoken the message of God"
The phrase "went down" is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga.
This can be stated in the active form. Alternate translation: "where believers and leaders in Antioch had committed Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God" or "where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas"
Here the words "they," "them," and "They" refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word "he" refers to God.
"called the local believers to meet together"
God's enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: "God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
1 Some men came down from Judea to Antioch and taught the brothers, saying, "Unless you are circumcised according to the custom of Moses, you cannot be saved." 2 This brought Paul and Barnabas into a sharp dispute and debate with them. So Paul and Barnabas, along with some others from among them, were appointed to go up to Jerusalem to meet with the apostles and elders about this question. 3 They therefore, being sent by the church, passed through both Phoenicia and Samaria and announced the conversion of the Gentiles. They brought great joy to all the brothers. 4 When they came to Jerusalem, they were welcomed by the church and the apostles and the elders, and they reported all the things that God had done with them. 5 But certain men who believed, who belonged to the group of Pharisees, stood up and said, "It is necessary to circumcise them and to command them to keep the law of Moses." 6 So the apostles and the elders gathered together to consider this matter.
7 After much debate, Peter stood up and said to them, "Brothers, you know that a good while ago God made a choice among you, that by my mouth the Gentiles should hear the word of the gospel, and believe. 8 God, who knows the heart, has testified to them by giving them the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us. 9 He made no distinction between us and them, having cleansed their hearts by faith. 10 Now therefore why do you test God, that you should put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? 11 But we believe that we will be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, just as they were."
12 All the multitude kept silent while they listened to Barnabas and Paul report the signs and wonders God had worked among the Gentiles through them. 13 After they stopped speaking, James answered, saying,
"Brothers, listen to me. 14 Simon has told how God first graciously helped the Gentiles in order to take from them a people for his name. 15 The words of the prophets agree with this, as it is written,
16 'After these things I will return,
and I will build again the tabernacle of David,
which has fallen down;
I will set up and restore its ruins again,
17 so that the remnant of men may seek the Lord,
including all the Gentiles called by my name.'
18 This is what the Lord says,
who has done these things
that have been known from ancient times. [1]
19 Therefore, I have decided that we should not trouble those of the Gentiles who turn to God. 20 But we will write to them that they must keep away from the pollution of idols, from sexual immorality, and from the meat of strangled animals, and from blood. 21 For Moses has been proclaimed in every city from ancient generations and he is preached in the synagogues every Sabbath."
22 Then it seemed good to the apostles and the elders, with the whole church, to choose Judas called Barsabbas, and Silas, who were leaders of the brothers, and send them to Antioch with Paul and Barnabas.
23 They wrote this with their hands,
"From the apostles and elders, your brothers,
to the Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia:
Greetings!
24 Because we have heard that certain men have gone out from us, with no orders from us, and have disturbed you with words that upset your souls, 25 it seemed good to us, who have come to one mind, to choose men and to send them to you with our beloved Barnabas and Paul, 26 men who have risked their lives for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ. 27 Therefore we have sent Judas and Silas, who will report to you the same things in their own words. 28 For it seemed good to the Holy Spirit and to us, to lay upon you no greater burden than these necessary things: 29 that you abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality. If you avoid these things, you will do well.
Farewell."
30 So they, when they were dismissed, came down to Antioch; after they gathered the multitude together, they delivered the letter. 31 When they had read it, they rejoiced because of the encouragement. 32 Judas and Silas, also prophets, encouraged the brothers with many words and strengthened them. 33 After they had spent some time there, they were sent away in peace from the brothers to those who had sent them. 34[2]35 But Paul and Barnabas stayed in Antioch, teaching and preaching (along with many others) the word of the Lord.
36 After some days Paul said to Barnabas, "Let us return now and visit the brothers in every city where we proclaimed the word of the Lord, and see how they are." 37 Barnabas wanted to also take with them John, who was called Mark. 38 But Paul thought it was not good to take Mark, who had left them in Pamphylia and did not go further with them in the work. 39 Then there arose a sharp disagreement, so that they separated from each other, and Barnabas took Mark with him and sailed away to Cyprus. 40 But Paul chose Silas and left, after he was entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord. 41 Then he went through Syria and Cilicia, strengthening the churches.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.
The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the "Jerusalem Council." This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.
In this chapter Luke begins to use the word "brothers" to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.
Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was "an everlasting covenant." But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.
It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision.
"Some men." You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ.
The phrase "came down" is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch.
Here "brothers" stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: "taught the believers at Antioch" or "were teaching the believers at Antioch"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Unless someone circumcises you according to the custom of Moses, God cannot save you" or "God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses"
The abstract nouns "sharp dispute" and "debate" can be stated as verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "... had confronted and debated with the men from Judea"
Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
"this issue"
Both instances of "They" here refer to Paul, Barnabas, and certain others (Acts 15:2).
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem"
The words "passed through" and "announced" indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing.
The abstract noun "conversion" means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. Alternate translation: "announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God"
Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if "joy" were an object that they brought to the brothers. Alternate translation: "What they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice"
Here "brothers" refers to fellow believers.
All instances of "they" and "them" here refer to Paul, Barnabas, and certain others (Acts 15:2).
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them"
"through them"
Here the word "them" refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God.
Paul and Barnabas are now in Jerusalem to meet with the apostles and elders there.
Here Luke contrasts those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus but also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.
"to obey the law of Moses"
The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.
The word "them" refers to apostles and elders
Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law (Acts 15:5-6).
Peter is addressing all of the believers who are present.
Here "mouth" refers to Peter. Alternate translation: "from me" or "by me"
"the Gentiles would hear"
Here "word" stands for a message. Alternate translation: "the message about Jesus"
The word "them" refers to the Gentiles, and both instances of "you" are plural.
Here "heart" refers to the "minds" or "inner beings." Alternate translation: "who knows the people's minds" or "who knows what people think"
"has testified to the Gentiles"
"causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them"
The word "he" refers to God, the word "us" refers to the speaker and the hearers, and the word "them" refers to the Gentiles.
God did not treat Jewish believers differently from Gentile believers.
God's forgiving the Gentile believers' sins is spoken of as though he cleaned their hearts. Here "heart" stands for the person's inner being. Alternate translation: "forgiving their sins because they believe in Jesus"
Peter includes his audience by his use of "our" and "we."
This does not mean "at this moment," but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
Peter uses a question with a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: "Do not test God by putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!"
This refers to their Jewish ancestors.
Peter finishes speaking to the apostles and elders.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "But we believe the Lord Jesus will save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers"
Here the word "them" refers to Paul and Barnabas.
"Everyone" or "The whole group" (Acts 15:6)
"God had done" or "God had caused"
Here the word "they" refers to Paul and Barnabas (Acts 15:12).
James begins to speak to the apostles and elders (Acts 15:6).
"Fellow believers, listen." James was probably speaking only to men.
"so that he might choose from among them a people"
"for God's name." Here "name" refers to God. Alternate translation: "for himself"
James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament.
Here "words" stands for a message. Alternate translation: "What the prophets said agrees" or "The prophets agree"
"confirm this truth"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "as they wrote" or "as the prophet Amos wrote long ago"
Here "I" refers to God, who spoke through the words of his prophet.
This speaks of God's again choosing one of David's descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down.
Here the word "tabernacle," a dwelling place, stands for David's family. The same word is used for the tent that Yahweh told Moses to construct.
This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him.
Here "men" includes males and females. Alternate translation: "remnant of people"
God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: "may seek me, the Lord"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "including all the Gentiles who belong to me"
Here "my name" stands for God.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that people have known"
Here "we" includes James, the apostles, and the elders.
You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: "we should not require the Gentiles to become circumcised and obey the laws of Moses"
A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically turning towards God.
Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods.
This possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship.
God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the blood in it. Also, even earlier in Moses's writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal.
James finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. (See: Acts 15:2 and Acts 15:13)
James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them in every city where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from the synagogues to learn more about these rules.
Here "Moses" represents the law of Moses, and so does "he." This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The law of Moses has been proclaimed ... the law is read" or "Jews have taught the law of Moses ... they read the law"
The word "every" here is a generalization. Alternate translation: "in many cities"
Here the word "them" refers to Judas and Silas.
This is the name of a man. "Barsabbas" is a second name that people called him.
The word "brothers" here refers to the people there who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: "leaders of the believers" or "leaders of the church"
One or more of the apostles and elders wrote the letter and gave it to Judas and Silas so Judas and Silas could give it to the Gentile brothers.
This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: "This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you" or "To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers"
Here the word "brothers" refers to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers.
This is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus.
Here all instances of "we" and "us" refer to the writers but not the readers
"that some men"
"even though we gave no orders for them to go"
Here "souls" refers to the people. Alternate translation: "taught things that have troubled you"
Here the words "us" and "our" refer to the writers but not the readers
"who are now agree completely"
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
The men they sent were Judas, who was called Barsabbas, and Silas (Acts 15:22).
These words refer to Barnabas and Paul, not to Judas and Silas.
Here "name" refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: "because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ" or "because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ"
Here the word "we" refers to the writers of the letter [Acts 15:22]
This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: "who themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written"
Here the word "us" refers to the writers of the letter [Acts 15:22]
This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders.
This concludes the letter from the Jerusalem church to the Gentile believers in Antioch.
This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol.
This refers to drinking blood or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained.
A strangled animal was killed but its blood was not drained.
This announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: "Goodbye"
Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch.
The word "they" refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: "So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men" or "when the believers in Jerusalem sent them"
The phrase "came down" is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
"the believers in Antioch rejoiced"
The abstract noun "encouragement" can be expressed with the verb "encourage." Alternate translation: "because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them"
Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: "because they were prophets" or "who were also prophets"
"the fellow believers"
Judas and Silas' helping them to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger.
Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch.
This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word "they" refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: "After they stayed there for a while"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace"
This refers to the believers in Antioch.
"to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas" (Acts 15:22)
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here "word" stands for a message. Alternate translation: "the message about the Lord"
"I suggest we now return"
"care for the brothers" or "offer to help the believers"
Here "word" stands for the message. Alternate translation: "the message about the Lord"
"learn how they are doing." They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God's truth.
"to take John, who was also called Mark"
The words "not good" are used to say the opposite of good. Alternate translation: "Paul thought that taking Mark would be bad"
This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
"did not continue to work with them then" or "did not continue to serve with them"
Here the word "they" refers to Barnabas and Paul.
The abstract noun "disagreement" can be stated as the verb "disagree." Alternate translation: "They strongly disagreed with each other"
To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord" or "after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him"
The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: "they went" or "Paul and Silas went" or "Paul took Silas and went"
These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus.
Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. The word "churches" refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: "encouraging the believers in the churches" or "helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus"
1 Paul also came to Derbe and to Lystra, and behold, a certain disciple named Timothy was there, the son of a Jewish woman who was a believer, but his father was a Greek. 2 He was well spoken of by the brothers who were at Lystra and Iconium. 3 Paul wanted him to travel with him, so he took him and circumcised him because of the Jews that were in those places, for they all knew that his father was a Greek. 4 As they were going along through the cities, they were passing along the decrees to obey that were decided on by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem. 5 So the churches were strengthened in the faith and increased in number daily.
6 Paul and his companions went through the regions of Phrygia and Galatia, since they had been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to proclaim the word in the province of Asia. 7 When they came near Mysia, they attempted to go into Bithynia, but the Spirit of Jesus prevented them. 8 So passing by Mysia, they came down to the city of Troas. 9 A vision appeared to Paul in the night: A man of Macedonia was standing there, begging him and saying, "Come over into Macedonia and help us." 10 When Paul had seen the vision, immediately we sought to go to Macedonia, concluding that God had called us to preach the gospel to them.
11 Setting sail therefore from Troas, we made a straight course to Samothrace, and the next day we came to Neapolis. 12 From there we went to Philippi, which is a city of Macedonia, the most important city in the district and a Roman colony, and we stayed in this city for several days.
13 On the Sabbath day we went outside the gate by the river, where we thought there would be a place of prayer. We sat down and spoke to the women who had come together. 14 A certain woman named Lydia, a seller of purple from the city of Thyatira, who worshiped God, listened to us. The Lord opened her heart to pay attention to what was said by Paul. 15 When she and her house were baptized, she pleaded with us, saying, "If you have judged me to be faithful to the Lord, come and stay in my house." And she persuaded us.
16 It came about that, as we were going to the place of prayer, a certain slave girl who had a spirit of divination encountered us. She brought her masters much gain by fortunetelling. 17 This woman followed after Paul and us and shouted, saying, "These men are servants of the Most High God. They proclaim to you the way of salvation." 18 She did this for many days. But Paul, being greatly annoyed by her, turned and said to the spirit, "I command you in the name of Jesus Christ to come out of her." And it came out at that same hour.
19 When her masters saw that their hope of profit was now gone, they seized Paul and Silas and dragged them into the marketplace before the authorities. 20 When they had brought them to the magistrates, they said, "These men are causing trouble in our city. They are Jews. 21 They proclaim customs that are not lawful for Romans to accept or practice."
22 Then the crowd rose up together against Paul and Silas; the magistrates tore their garments off them and commanded them to be beaten with rods. 23 When they had laid many blows upon them, they threw them into prison and commanded the jailer to guard them securely. 24 After he got this command, the jailer threw them into the inner prison and fastened their feet in the stocks.
25 Around midnight Paul and Silas were praying and singing hymns to God, and the other prisoners were listening to them. 26 Suddenly there was a great earthquake, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken; and immediately all the doors were opened, and everyone's chains were unfastened. 27 The jailer was awakened from sleep and saw the open prison doors; he drew his sword and was about to kill himself, because he thought that the prisoners had escaped.
28 But Paul shouted with a loud voice, saying, "Do not harm yourself, because we are all here."
29 The jailer called for lights and rushed in and, trembling for fear, fell down before Paul and Silas, 30 and brought them out and said, "Sirs, what must I do to be saved?"
31 They said, "Believe in the Lord Jesus, and you will be saved, you and your household." 32 They spoke the word of the Lord to him, together with everyone in his house. 33 Then the jailer took them at the same hour of the night, and washed their wounds, and he and those in his entire house were baptized immediately. 34 Then as he brought Paul and Silas up into his house and he set food before them, he rejoiced greatly with those of his house, that he had believed in God.
35 Now when it was day, the magistrates sent word to the guards, saying, "Let those men go."
36 The jailer reported the words to Paul, saying, "The magistrates have sent word to me to let you go. Now therefore come out, and go in peace."
37 But Paul said to them, "They have publicly beaten us without a trial, even though we are Roman citizens—and they threw us into prison. Do they now want to send us away secretly? No! Let them come themselves and lead us out."
38 The guards reported these words to the magistrates, and when they heard that Paul and Silas were Romans, they were afraid. 39 The magistrates came and apologized to them and brought them out, asking them to go away from the city. 40 So Paul and Silas went out of the prison and came to the house of Lydia. When Paul and Silas saw the brothers, they encouraged them and then departed from the city.
Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.
Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy.
Here "came" can be translated as "went."
This is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in Acts 14:6.
The word "behold" alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.
The words "in Christ" are understood. Alternate translation: "who was a believer in Christ" or "who believed in Christ"
This can be stated in active from. Alternate translation: "The brothers spoke well of him" or "Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers" or "The brothers said good things about him"
Here "brothers" refers to believers. Alternate translation: "by the believers"
"wanted Timothy ... took Timothy ... circumcised Timothy ... Timothy's father"
"with Paul ... Paul took"
It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.
"because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling"
Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ.
The word "they" here refers to Paul, Silas (Acts 15:40), and Timothy (Acts 16:3).
"the decrees for the church members to obey" or "teh decrees for the believers to obey"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided on"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day"
This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger.
This is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in Acts 2:10.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Holy Spirit had forbidden them" or "the Holy Spirit did not permit them"
Here "word" stands for "message." Alternate translation: "the message about Christ"
Here "came" can be translated as "went" or "arrived."
These are two more regions in Asia.
"the Holy Spirit"
The phrase "came down" is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.
Here "came" can be translated as "went."
"Paul saw a vision from God" or "Paul had a vision from God"
Or "inviting him."
The phrase "Come over" is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas.
Here the words "we" and "us" refer to Paul and his companions, including Luke, the author of Acts.
"we looked for a way to go to Macedonia" or "we prepared to go to Macedonia"
These are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia.
Here "came to" can be translated as "went to" or "arrived at."
This is a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes.
Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. The story of Lydia begins here. This short story happens during Paul's travels.
Here "A certain woman" introduces a new person in the story. Alternate translation: "There was a woman named Lydia"
Here "cloth" is understood. Alternate translation: "a merchant who sold purple cloth"
This is the name of a city.
A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him, but does not obey all of the Jewish laws.
For the Lord to cause someone to pay attention and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person's heart. Alternate translation: "The Lord caused her to listen well and to believe"
Here "heart" stands for a person's mind. Also, the author speaks about the "heart" or "mind" as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "what Paul said"
The story of Lydia ends here.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When they baptized Lydia and members of her household"
Here "house" represents the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: "the members of her household" or "her family and household servants"
Background information is given here to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people's futures.
This begins the first event in another short story during Paul's travels; it is about a young fortune teller.
This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
The phrase "a certain" introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: "there was a slave girl ... who encountered"
An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.
How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: "how God can save you"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "But she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned around"
Here "name" stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ.
"the spirit came out immediately"
"the owners of the slave girl"
Here the word "hope" is the reason for which a person can expect that what he desires will happen. Now that the spirit was gone, the girl's masters could not expect to earn money from the spirit's telling people things. Alternate translation: "their opportunity to make money was now gone" or "they could no longer expect to make money"
It can be stated clearly why they no longer expected to make money. Alternate translation: "she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes"
"into the public square." This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services takes place.
"into the presence of the authorities" or "so that the authorities could judge them"
"When they had brought them to the judges"
rulers, judges
Here the word "our" refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it.
"to believe or to obey" or "to accept or to do"
Here the words "their" and "them" refer to Paul and Silas.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "commanded the soldiers to beat them with rods"
"the magistrates had ... upon Paul and Silas, the magistrates threw Paul and Silas ... keep Paul and Silas"
"had hit them many times with rods"
"told the jailer to make sure they did not get out"
a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison
"he heard this command"
"securely locked their feet in the stocks"
a piece of wood with holes for preventing a person's feet from moving
The word "them" refers to Paul and Silas.
This continues Paul and Silas' time in Philippi in prison and tells what happens to their jailer.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "earthquake which shook the foundations of the prison"
When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "all the doors opened"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "everyone's chains came loose"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The jailer woke up"
"was ready to kill himself." The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape.
Here the word "we" refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer.
The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison"
The word "lights" stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: "for torches" or "for lamps"
"quickly entered the jail"
The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas.
"led them outside the jail"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "what must I do for God to save me from my sins"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will save you" or "God will save you from your sins"
Here "house" stands for the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: "all the members of your household" or "your family"
The word "They" refers to Paul and Silas (Acts 16:25), and the word "him" refers to the jailer.
Here "word" stands for a message. Alternate translation: "They told him the message about the Lord Jesus"
The words "them" and "their" refer to Paul and Silas (Acts 16:25), and the words "he" and "his" refer to the jailer.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household"
All instances of "he" and "his" refer to the jailer.
This is the last event in the story of Paul and Silas in Philippi (Acts 16:12).
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in Acts 16:16.
Here "word" stands for "message" or "command." Alternate translation: "sent a message to the guards" or "sent a command to the guards"
Here "sent" means the magistrates told someone to go tell the guards their message.
"Release those men" or "Allow those men to leave"
"come outside of the jail"
The word "they" refers to the magistrates. All instances of "we" and "us" refer only to Paul and Silas and so are exclusive.
Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: "said to the jailer"
Here "They" refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: "The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public"
"men who are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail though they had not proven in court that we were guilty"
Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. Alternate translation: "I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!"
Here "themselves" is used for emphasis.
To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizen of the Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas.
"the magistrates heard ... the magistrates were afraid"
All instances of "them" refer to Paul and Silas.
Here the word "they" refers to Paul and Silas. The word "them" refers to the believers in Philippi.
This is the end of Paul and Silas' time in Philippi.
Here "came" can be translated as "went."
"the home of Lydia"
Here "brothers" refers to believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: "saw the believers"
1 Now when they had passed through the cities of Amphipolis and Apollonia, they came to the city of Thessalonica, where there was a synagogue of the Jews. 2 Paul, as his custom was, went to them, and for three Sabbath days reasoned with them from the scriptures. 3 He was opening the scriptures and explaining that it was necessary for the Christ to suffer and to rise again from the dead. He said, "This Jesus whom I proclaim to you is the Christ." 4 Some of the Jews were persuaded and joined Paul and Silas, including a large number of devout Greeks, and not a few of the leading women. 5 But the unbelieving Jews, being moved with jealousy, took certain wicked men from the marketplace, gathered a crowd together, and set the city in an uproar. Assaulting the house of Jason, they were seeking to bring Paul and Silas out to the people. 6 But when they did not find them, they dragged Jason and certain other brothers before the officials of the city, crying, "These men who have turned the world upside down have come here also. 7 These men whom Jason has welcomed act against the decrees of Caesar; they say that there is another king—Jesus." 8 They troubled the crowd and the officials of the city who heard these things. 9 But after they took security from Jason and the rest, they let them go.
10 That night the brothers sent Paul and Silas to Berea. When they arrived there, they went into the synagogue of the Jews. 11 Now these people were more noble than those in Thessalonica, for they received the word with all readiness of mind, examining the scriptures daily to see whether these things were so. 12 Therefore many of them believed, including some influential Greek women and many men. 13 But when the Jews of Thessalonica learned that Paul was also proclaiming the word of God at Berea, they went there and stirred up and troubled the crowds. 14 Then immediately, the brothers sent Paul to go to the sea, but Silas and Timothy stayed there. 15 Those who were leading Paul took him as far as the city of Athens. As they left Paul there, they received from him instructions for Silas and Timothy to come to him as quickly as possible.
16 Now while Paul was waiting for them in Athens, his spirit was provoked within him as he saw the city full of idols. 17 So he reasoned every day in the synagogue with the Jews and others who worshiped God, as well as in the marketplace with those who happened to be there. 18 But also some of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers encountered him. Some said, "What is this babbler trying to say?" Others said, "He seems to be one who calls people to follow strange gods," because he was proclaiming the gospel about Jesus and the resurrection. 19 They took Paul and brought him to the Areopagus, saying, "May we know this new teaching which you were speaking? 20 For you bring some strange things to our ears. Therefore, we want to know what these things mean." 21 (Now all the Athenians and the strangers living there spent their time in nothing but either telling or listening about something new.)
22 So Paul stood in the middle of the Areopagus and said,
"You men of Athens, I see that you are very religious in every way. 23 For as I passed along and observed the objects of your worship, I found an altar with this inscription, "TO AN UNKNOWN GOD." What therefore you worship in ignorance, this I announce to you.
24 The God who made the world and everything in it, since he is Lord of heaven and earth, does not live in temples built with hands. 25 Neither is he served by men's hands, as though he needed anything, since he himself gives people life and breath and everything else. 26 From one man he made every nation of people to live on the surface of the earth, having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their living areas, 27 so that they should search for God and perhaps they may feel their way toward him and find him. Yet he is not far from each one of us. 28 For in him we live and move and have our being, just as one of your own poets has said, 'For we also are his offspring.'
29 "Therefore, since we are God's offspring, we ought not to think that the qualities of deity are like gold, or silver, or stone—images created by the art and imagination of man. 30 Therefore God overlooked the times of ignorance, but now he commands all men everywhere to repent. 31 This is because he has set a day when he will judge the world in righteousness by the man he has appointed. God has given proof of this man to everyone by raising him from the dead."
32 Now when the men of Athens heard of the resurrection of the dead, some mocked Paul; but others said, "We will listen to you again about this matter." 33 After that, Paul left them. 34 But certain men joined him and believed, including Dionysius the Areopagite, a woman named Damaris, and others with them.
The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: christ)
Paul said that the Athenians were "religious," but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: falsegod)
In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
Both instances of "they" refers to Paul and Silas (Acts 16:40).
This continues the story of Paul, Silas, and Timothy's missionary trip. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says "they" and not "we."
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.
"traveled through"
These are coastal cities in Macedonia.
Here "came to" can be translated as "went to" or "arrived at." Alternate translation: "they went to the city" or "they arrived at the city"
"went to the Jews ... reasoned with the Jews"
"as his habit was" or "as his common practice was." Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present.
"on each Sabbath day for three weeks"
"gave them reasons to believe from the scriptures" or "debated with them about the scriptures" or "discussed the scriptures with them." Paul explained what the scriptures mean in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah.
Here the word "He" refers to Paul (Acts 17:2).
Possible meanings are 1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it) or 2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it.
"it was part of God's plan"
"to come back to life"
From among all those who have died. The expression "the dead" describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Jews believed" or "the Jews understood"
"became associated with Paul"
This refers to Greeks who worshiped God but had not converted to Judaism through circumcision.
This is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: "many leading women"
Here the word "they" refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.
The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: "feeling very jealous" or "feeling very angry"
It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul's message.
Here "took" does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.
"some evil men." The word "men" here refers specifically to males.
"from the public square." This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place.
Here "the city" stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: "caused the people of the city to be in an uproar" or "caused the people of the city to riot"
"Violently attacking the house." This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house.
This is the name of a man.
The word "seeking" here means that the people wanted to bring Paul out and were trying to bring him out.
Possible meanings or "people" are 1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or 2) a mob.
Here "brothers" refers to believers. Alternate translation: "some other believers"
"into the presence of the officials"
The Jewish leaders were speaking, and the phrase "These men" refers to Paul and Silas.
This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas were causing trouble everywhere they went. The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: "caused trouble everywhere in the world" or "caused trouble everywhere they have gone"
This phrase signals that Jason was in agreement with the apostles' troubling message.
"They caused the people in the city to be afraid"
The words "the rest" refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.
"the officials took security ... they let Jason and the other believers go"
Jason and the others gave the money to the officials to show that they would not cause any more trouble. This was not a fine or a punishment, so they might have expected the officials to give the money back later.
Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.
The word "brothers" here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: "the believers"
The word "now" is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said.
These "well-born" people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: "more open minded" or "more willing to listen"
Here "word" refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: "listened to the teaching"
These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul's teachings about the scripture.
"carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day"
"the things Paul said were true"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Athens was south of Berea. Both were on the coast of Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece.
This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: "went there and agitated" or "went there and disturbed"
"worried the crowds" or "caused dread and fear among the people"
The word "brothers" here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: "believers"
"to go to the coast." From here Paul would probably sail to another city.
"who were accompanying Paul" or "who were going along with Paul"
"he told them to instruct Silas and Timothy." This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UDB.
This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas' travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
Here "spirit" stands for Paul himself. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he became upset because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city" or "seeing the idols everywhere in the city upset him"
"he debated" or "he discussed." This means that his listeners also spoke and asked him questions. He was not the only speaker.
This refers to Gentiles who gave praise to God and followed him but did not obey all of the Jewish laws.
"in the public square." This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place.
Here the words "him," "He, "and "he" refer to Paul.
Philosophers are people who think about the world and try to understand how people should live. The Epicureans and the Stoics were two groups of philosophers. They believed that a god or gods existed, but they did not trust in or obey any god. Alternate translation: "thinkers called Epicureans and Stoics"
"happened upon him"
"Some of the philosophers said"
The word "babbler" was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: "What is this uneducated person"
"Other philosophers said"
"He seems to be a proclaimer" or "He seems to be on a mission to add people to his philosophy"
This is not in the sense of "odd," but in the sense of "foreign," that is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.
This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.
The "Areopagus" was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: "to the leaders that met on the Areopagus"
Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: "the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul"
This is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met.
Paul's teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. Here "ears" refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: "For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before"
The word "all" is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: "Now many of the Athenians and the strangers living there"
"Athenians" are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia
"the foreigners"
Here "time" is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: "used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening" or "were always doing nothing but telling or listening"
The phrase "spent their time in nothing" is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: "did not do much but tell or listen" or "spent much of their time telling or listening"
"discussing new philosophical ideas" or "talking about what was new to them"
Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.
Paul is referring to the Athenians' public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.
"as I walked among the objects of your worship and observed them" or "as I walked around in the city, I observed the objects of your worship"
Possible meanings are 1) "to a certain unknown god" or 2) "to a god not known." This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.
In the most general sense, the "world" refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.
"because he is the Lord." Here "he" is referring to the unknown god mentioned in Acts 17:23 that Paul is explaining is the Lord God.
The words "heaven" and "earth" are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth.
Here "hands" stands for people. Alternate translation: "built by the hands of people" or "that people built"
Here "served" has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: "Neither do men's hands take care of him"
Here "hands" stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: "by humans"
"because he himself." The word "himself" is added for emphasis.
Here the word "he" refer to God, the creator, and both instances of "their" refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth.
This means Adam, the first person God created. This can be stated to include Eve. It was through Adam and Eve that God made all other people. Alternate translation: "one couple"
This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: "and he determined when and where they would live"
All instances of "they" and "their" refer to the people who live on earth, all instances of "him" and "he" refer to God, and the word "us" includes the speaker, the hearers, and the people who live on earth.
Here "search for God" represents desiring to know him, and "feel their way toward him and find him" represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: "so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people"
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "Yet he is very near to every one of us"
Here the words "him" and "his" refer to God
"Because of him"
Both instances of "we" include the speaker, the hearers, and other people.
Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God's literal children.
Here "deity" refers to God's nature or attributes. Alternate translation: "God is like"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed" or "images that people make by using their art and imagination"
Here the word "he" refers to God.
"Because what I have just said is true"
"God decided not to punish people during the time of ignorance"
This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.
This means all people, whether male or female. Alternate translation: "all people"
Paul finishes his speech to the philosophers in the Areopagus, which he began in Acts 17:22.
"when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness"
Here "world" refers to the people. Alternate translation: "he will judge all people"
"justly" or "fairly"
"God has demonstrated his choice of this man"
From among all those who have died. The expression "the dead" describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
Here the word "We" refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite.
This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens.
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke changes from Paul's teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.
These are the people who were present at the Areopagus and were listening to Paul.
"some ridiculed Paul" or "some laughed at Paul." These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Dionysius is a man's name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus.
This is the name of a woman.
1 After these things Paul left Athens and went to Corinth. 2 There he met a Jew named Aquila, a native of Pontus, who had recently come from Italy with his wife Priscilla, because Claudius had commanded all the Jews to leave Rome. Paul went to them, 3 and because he worked at the same trade, he stayed with them and labored, for they were tentmakers by trade. 4 So Paul reasoned in the synagogue every Sabbath, trying to persuade both Jews and Greeks. 5 Now when Silas and Timothy came down from Macedonia, Paul devoted himself to the word, testifying to the Jews that Jesus was the Christ. 6 But when the Jews opposed and insulted him, Paul shook out his garment at them and said to them, "May your blood be upon your own heads; I am clean. From now on I will go to the Gentiles." 7 Then he left from there and went to the house of a man named Titius Justus, a man who worshiped God. His house was next to the synagogue. 8 Crispus, the leader of the synagogue, believed in the Lord, together with all his household; and many of the Corinthians who heard about it believed and were baptized. 9 The Lord said to Paul in the night in a vision, "Do not be afraid, but speak and do not be silent. 10 For I am with you, and no one will try to harm you, for I have many people in this city." 11 Paul lived there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them.
12 But when Gallio became governor of Achaia, the Jews rose up with one mind against Paul and brought him before the judgment seat; 13 they said, "This man persuades people to worship God contrary to the law." 14 Yet when Paul was about to speak, Gallio said to the Jews, "You Jews, if indeed it were a matter of wrong or a wicked crime, it would be reasonable to put up with you. 15 But since these are questions about words and names and your own law, settle it yourselves. I do not wish to be a judge of these matters." 16 Gallio made them leave the judgment seat. 17 So they all seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, and beat him in front of the judgment seat. But Gallio did not care what they did.
18 Paul, after staying there for many more days, left the brothers and sailed for Syria with Priscilla and Aquila. Before he left the seaport, Cenchreae, he had his hair cut off because of a vow he had taken. 19 When they came to Ephesus, Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there, but he himself went into the synagogue and reasoned with the Jews. 20 When they asked Paul to stay a longer time, he declined. 21 But taking his leave of them, he said, "I will return again to you if it is God's will." He then set sail from Ephesus.
22 When Paul had landed at Caesarea, he went up and greeted the Jerusalem church and then went down to Antioch. 23 After having spent some time there, Paul departed and went through the regions of Galatia and Phrygia, strengthening all the disciples.
24 Now a certain Jew named Apollos, an Alexandrian by birth, came to Ephesus. He was eloquent in speech and mighty in the scriptures. 25 Apollos had been instructed in the teachings of the Lord. Being fervent in spirit, he spoke and taught accurately the things concerning Jesus, but he knew only the baptism of John. 26 Apollos began to speak boldly in the synagogue. But when Priscilla and Aquila heard him, they took him aside and explained to him the way of God more accurately. 27 When he desired to pass over into Achaia, the brothers encouraged him and wrote to the disciples in Achaia to welcome him. When he arrived, he greatly helped those who believed by grace. 28 Apollos powerfully refuted the Jews in public debate, showing by the scriptures that Jesus is the Christ.
Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: faithful and christ and repent)
This is another part of the story of Paul's travels as he goes to Corinth.
"After these events took place in Athens"
Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 17:15.
The writer begins to give background information about Aquila and Priscilla.
Possible meanings are that 1) Paul happened to find by chance or 2) Paul intentionally found.
Here the phrase "a certain" indicates this is introducing new person in the story.
Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea.
This is probably sometime in the past year.
This is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy.
Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in Acts 11:28.
The writer finishes giving background information about Aquila and Priscilla.
"he did the same kind of work that they did"
"So Paul debated" or "So Paul discussed." He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people.
Possible meanings are 1) "and he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe" or 2) "and he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks."
Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God's judgment.
Here "blood" stands for the guilt of their actions. Here "heads" refers to the whole person. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: "You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin"
The word "clean" here is a metaphor for Paul being innocent of wrong against either the people or God. Alternate translation: "I am innocent" or "God will not punish me when he punishes you"
"Paul left ... Titius' Justus's house"
This is the name of a man.
A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.
This is the name of a man.
a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, not necessarily the teacher
Here "his household" refers to the people who lived together in his house. Alternate translation: "the people who lived with him in his house"
Crispus's household
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "received baptism"
The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: "You must not be afraid; instead, you should continue to speak and not become silent"
The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: "you must certainly continue to speak"
It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: "do not stop speaking about the gospel"
"there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me" or "many people in this city will put their faith in me"
This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. "Word of God" here is a synecdoche for the entire scriptures. Alternate translation: "Paul lived there ... teaching the scriptures among them"
Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province.
The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.
This is the name of a man.
This stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus.
This phrase means that the Jews began to act, not that they rose into the air or rose to stand from a sitting position. If your language has a different idiom for beginning to act, you may use it here.
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here "judgment seat" refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: "took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province.
Here "law" can refer to either the law of Moses or the Jewish customs of Paul's time. Gallio is simply telling the Jews that they are to do what they think right and that he is not interested in being the judge.
"I refuse to make a judgment about these matters"
"Gallio dismissed the Jews from the judgment seat." Here "judgment seat" refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: "Gallio made them leave his presence in the court" or "Gallio made them leave the court"
It is not clear what events this verse describes. The Jews had been accusing Paul, but it appears that they ended up beating Sosthenes and not Paul.
Possible meanings are 1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or 2) Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so even though he was "the ruler of the synagogue," the Jews beat him in front of the court.
This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: "many people seized" or "many of them grabbed"
Sosthenes was "the ruler of the synagogue" at Corinth.
"repeatedly hit him" or "repeatedly punched him."
Here both instances of "he" refer to Paul.
The word "brothers" refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: "left the fellow believers"
Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him.
This was a town near Corinth in Greece. It was on the coast, and Paul probably got on the ship there.
This is a symbolic action that indicates that he had done something he had vowed to do. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he had someone cut off the hair on his head"
This continues Paul's missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain, since it says "he" here and not "they." The word "they" refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila.
"gave the Jews reasons to believe" or "debated with the Jews about the scriptures" or "discussed the scriptures with the Jews." Paul explained what the scriptures mean in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. See how you translated "reasoned with" in [Acts 17:2]
Here the word "they" refers to the Jews in Ephesus.
Here the word "them" refers to the Jews in Ephesus. The word "you" is plural.
"saying good-bye to them"
Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
Paul continues his missionary journey.
"arrived at Caesarea." The word "landed" is used to show that he arrived by ship.
He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase "went up" is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
Here "church" refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: "greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem"
The phrase "went down" is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
"Paul went away" or "Paul left"
This speaks about "time" as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: After staying there for a while"
Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him.
Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila.
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story.
The phrase "a certain" indicates that Luke is introducing a new person in the story.
"a man who was born in the city of Alexandria." This was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa.
"a good speaker"
"he knew the scriptures thoroughly." He understood the Old Testament writings well.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live"
Here "spirit" refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: "Being very enthusiastic"
"the baptism that John performed." John's baptism was with water, but Jesus's baptism is with the Holy Spirit.
How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels.
"correctly" or "more fully"
Here the he words "he" and "him" refer to Apollos (Acts 18:24).
"to go to the region of Achaia." The phrase "pass over" is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus.
Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
The word "brothers" here refers to men and women believers. You can make explicit that these are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: "fellow believers in Ephesus"
"wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia"
"those who had believed in salvation by grace" or "those who by God's grace believed in Jesus"
"In public debate Apollos powerfully showed that the Jews were wrong"
"as he showed them by the scriptures that Jesus is the Christ"
1 It came about that while Apollos was at Corinth, Paul passed through the upper country and came to the city of Ephesus, and found certain disciples there. 2 Paul said to them, "Did you receive the Holy Spirit when you believed?"
They said to him, "No, we did not even hear about the Holy Spirit."
3 Paul said, "Into what then were you baptized?"
They said, "Into John's baptism."
4 So Paul replied, "John baptized with the baptism of repentance. He told the people that they should believe in the one who would come after him, that is, in Jesus." 5 When the people heard this, they were baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus. 6 Then when Paul had laid his hands on them, the Holy Spirit came on them and they spoke in tongues and prophesied. 7 In all they were about twelve men.
8 Paul went into the synagogue and spoke boldly for three months, reasoning and persuading them about the kingdom of God. 9 But when some Jews were hardened and disobedient, they began to speak evil of the Way before the crowd. So Paul left them and took the disciples with him, reasoning with them every day in the lecture hall of Tyrannus. 10 This continued for two years, so that all who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord, both Jews and Greeks. 11 God was doing extraordinary miracles by the hands of Paul, 12 so that even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched him were taken to the sick and their illnesses left them and the evil spirits came out of them.
13 But there were Jewish exorcists traveling through the area. They called on the name of the Lord Jesus so they could have power over evil spirits when they said, "By the Jesus whom Paul proclaims, I command you to come out." 14 The Jewish high priest, whose name was Sceva, had seven sons who were doing this.
15 An evil spirit answered them, "Jesus I know, and Paul I know; but who are you?" 16 The evil spirit in the man leaped on the exorcists and subdued them and beat them up. Then they fled out of that house naked and wounded. 17 This became known to all, both Jews and Greeks, who lived at Ephesus. They became very afraid, and the name of the Lord Jesus was honored. 18 Also, many of the believers came and confessed and gave a full account of the evil things they had done. 19 Many who practiced magic brought their books together and burned them in the sight of everyone. When they counted the value of them, it was fifty thousand pieces of silver. 20 So the word of the Lord spread very widely in powerful ways.
21 Now after these things were completed, Paul decided in the Spirit to pass through Macedonia and Achaia on his way to Jerusalem; he said, "After I have been there, I must also see Rome." 22 Paul sent to Macedonia two of those who served him, Timothy and Erastus. But he himself stayed in Asia for a while.
23 At about that time there was no small disturbance in Ephesus concerning the Way. 24 A certain silversmith named Demetrius, who made silver shrines of Artemis, brought in much business for the craftsmen. 25 So he gathered together the workmen of that occupation and said, "Men, you know that in this business we make much money. 26 You see and hear that, not only at Ephesus, but almost throughout all Asia, this Paul has persuaded and turned away many people. He is saying that gods made by hands are not gods. 27 Not only is there danger that our trade will be discredited, but also that the temple of the great goddess Artemis might be regarded as worthless, and her greatness would be brought to nothing, she whom all Asia and the world worship."
28 When they heard this, they were filled with anger and cried out, saying, "Great is Artemis of the Ephesians." 29 The whole city was filled with confusion, and the people rushed with one mind into the theater. They had seized Paul's travel companions, Gaius and Aristarchus, who came from Macedonia. 30 Paul wanted to enter in among the crowd of people, but the disciples prevented him. 31 Also, some of the officials of the province of Asia who were his friends sent him a message pleading with him not to enter the theater. 32 Some people were shouting one thing, and some another, for the crowd was in confusion. Most of them did not even know why they had come together. 33 Some of the crowd advised Alexander, whom the Jews were pushing forward. So Alexander motioned with his hand, wanting to give a defense to the assembly. 34 But when they recognized that he was a Jew, they all cried out for about two hours with one voice, saying, "Great is Artemis of the Ephesians." 35 When the town clerk had quieted the crowd, he said, "You men of Ephesus, what man is there who does not know that the city of the Ephesians is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of the image which fell down from heaven? 36 Seeing then that these things are undeniable, you ought to be quiet and do nothing rash. 37 For you have brought these men to this court who are neither robbers of temples nor blasphemers of our goddess. 38 Therefore, if Demetrius and the craftsmen who are with him have an accusation against anyone, the courts are open and there are proconsuls. Let them accuse one another. 39 But if you are seeking anything more, it should be resolved in the regular assembly. 40 For we are in danger of being accused of rioting today, and there is no cause we can give to justify this uproar." When he had said this, he dismissed the assembly. [1]
John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus's followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.
The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
The "upper country" was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean Sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today), which is directly east of Corinth by sea.
Paul travels to Ephesus.
This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
"traveled through"
This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.
"we have not even heard about the Holy Spirit"
The word "They" refers to the disciples (Acts 19:1). The word "you" is plural.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "What kind of baptism did you receive?"
You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: "We were baptized into John's baptism" or "We received the kind of baptism about which John taught"
You can translate the abstract noun "repentance" as the verb "repent." Alternate translation: "the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent"
Here "the one" refers to Jesus.
This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.
Paul continues staying in Ephesus.
Here "people" refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul (Acts 19:1),
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they received baptism"
Here "name" refers to Jesus's power and authority. Alternate translation: "as believers in the Lord Jesus"
All instances of "them" and "they" refer to "the people" (Acts 19:5)
"placed his hands on them." He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: "placed his hands on their heads as he prayed"
Unlike in Acts 2:3-4, there are no details of who understood their messages.
All instances of "them" and "they" refer to "the people" (Acts 19:5)
This tells how many men were baptized.
"12 men"
"Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly"
Probable meanings are 1) the words "reasoning" and "persuading" are a hendiadys that means "arguing persuasively" or 2) the words describe two separate activities, "giving them reasons to believe" and "convincing them"
Here "kingdom" stands for God's rule as king. Alternate translation: "about God's rule as king" or "about how God would show himself as king"
People who were stubbornly refusing to believe are spoken of as though they were becoming hard and unable to move. Alternate translation: "some Jews were stubborn and did not believe" or "some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message"
What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase, "the Way," seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: "to speak evil about Christianity to the crowd" or "to speak to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God" (See: and Acts 9:2)
"to speak bad things about"
"in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people"
This is the name of a man.
Here "all" is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel.
Here "word" stands for a message. Alternate translation: "the message about the Lord"
Here "hands" stands for Paul's whole person. Alternate translation: "God was causing Paul to do extraordinary miracles" or "God was doing extraordinary miracles through Paul"
Here the words "them" and "their" refer to those who were sick.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul"
Possible meanings are 1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or 2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.
cloths worn around the head
clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of people
This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: "sick people" or "those who were sick"
"those who were sick became healthy"
This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.
people who send evil spirits away from people or places
Here "name" refers to Jesus's power and authority.
"Jesus" was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.
This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: "by the authority of Jesus" or "by the power of Jesus"
This is the name of a man.
"I know Jesus and Paul" or "I know Jesus, and I know Paul"
The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. Alternate translation: "but I do not know you!" or "but you have no authority over me!"
This means that the evil spirit caused the man whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.
This refers to people who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in Acts 19:13.
The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they honored the name of the Lord Jesus" or "they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great"
This stands for the power and authority of Jesus.
This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists.
"collected their books." The word "books" refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written.
"in front of everyone"
"the value of the books" or "the value of the scrolls"
"50,000"
A "piece of silver" was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer.
"So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus"
Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
"Paul completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus"
Possible meanings are 1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or 2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.
Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
"I must also travel to Rome"
This is the name of a man.
It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus.
This is repeated for emphasis.
Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.
This is a summary opening statement.
"the people became very upset" See how you translated this in Acts 12:18
This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in Acts 9:1.
The writer introduces Demetrius to the story and gives background information about him. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as "Diana." She was a false goddess of fertility.
The use of the words "a certain" introduces a new person in the story.
a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry
This is the name of a man. Demetrius was a silversmith in Ephesus who was against Paul and the local church.
"enabled those who made the idols to make much money"
These were probably carved or molten images of the temple of Artemis or of the part of the temple in which the statue of Artemis stood.
An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: "others who did that kind of work"
Demetrius continues to speak to the craftsmen.
"You have come to know and understand that"
Paul's stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: "persuaded many people and caused them to stop worshiping the local gods"
Here the word "hands" can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: "He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that what Paul is saying will discredit our trade" or "that people will think that our trade is false"
This refers to their business of making and selling idols.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "people will think that the temple of the great goddess Artemis is worthless" or "people will think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis"
"Her greatness" is a metonym for her reputation of being great. Being "brought to nothing" is a metaphor for becoming nothing or no longer existing. Alternate translation: "People would no longer recognize how great she is" or "She will lose her reputation of being great"
This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Here the words "Asia" and "the world" refer to the people in the province of Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: "whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship"
Here "they" refers to the craftsmen who made the idols (Acts 19:24-25).
This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here "anger" is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: "they became very angry"
"shouted aloud" or "shouted loudly"
Here "city" refers to the people. The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, "confusion" is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: "Then people all over the city became upset and started shouting"
This phrase translates a word that speaks of people who agree with each other and who work together to accomplish a common purpose.
The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.
The men who had been with Paul.
These are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Ephesus was in the Roman Empire's province of Asia.
The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated "theater" in Acts 19:29.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This is the name of a man.
You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: "gestured to the crowd to be quiet"
It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like "to explain what was going on."
The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: "in unison" or "together"
The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.
This refers to the town "writer" or "secretary."
The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. Alternate translation: "every man knows that the city of the Ephesians is temple keeper ... heaven."
The town clerk uses "not" to emphasize that all of the people knew this.
The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis.
Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).
The word "you" is plural.
"Since you know these things"
"do not do anything before you have had time to think about it"
without careful thought
The word "you" is plural.
The words "these men" refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul's traveling companions (Acts 19:29).
"Because what I have just said is true." The town clerk had said in Acts 19:37 that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers.
The word "accusation" can be stated as the verb "accuse." Alternate translation: "want to accuse someone"
the Roman governor's representatives who made legal decisions in court
This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: "There people can accuse one another"
The town clerk finishes speaking to the crowd.
"But if you want to ask about anything more" or "But if you have something to discuss about other matters"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "let us settle it in the regular assembly"
This refers to a regular public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today"
1 After the uproar was over, Paul sent for the disciples and after he encouraged them, he said farewell and left to go into Macedonia. 2 When he had gone through those regions and had spoken many words of encouragement to them, he came to Greece. 3 After he had spent three months there, a plot was formed against him by the Jews as he was about to sail for Syria, so he decided to return through Macedonia. 4 Accompanying him as far as Asia were Sopater son of Pyrrhus from Berea; Aristarchus and Secundus, both from the Thessalonian believers; Gaius of Derbe; Timothy; and Tychicus and Trophimus from Asia. 5 But these men had gone before us and were waiting for us at Troas. 6 We sailed away from Philippi after the days of unleavened bread, and in five days we came to them in Troas. There we stayed for seven days.
7 On the first day of the week, when we were gathered together to break bread, Paul spoke to the believers. He was planning to leave the next day, so he prolonged his message until midnight. 8 There were many lamps in the upper room where we had come together. 9 In the window was sitting a young man named Eutychus, who fell into a deep sleep. As Paul spoke even longer, this young man, still sleeping, fell down from the third story and was picked up dead. 10 But Paul went down, stretched himself out on him, and embraced him. Then he said, "Do not be upset any more, for he is alive." 11 Then he went upstairs again and broke bread and ate. After talking with them much longer until dawn, he left. 12 They brought back the boy alive and were greatly comforted.
13 We ourselves went ahead of Paul by ship and sailed away to Assos, where we planned to take Paul on board. This is what he himself desired to do, because he planned to go by land. 14 When he met us at Assos, we took him onto the ship and went to Mitylene. 15 Then we sailed from there and arrived the next day opposite the island of Chios. The following day we touched at the island of Samos, and the day after we came to the city of Miletus. 16 For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus, so that he would not spend any time in Asia; for he was hurrying to be in Jerusalem for the day of Pentecost, if it were at all possible for him to do so.
17 From Miletus he sent men to Ephesus and called to himself the elders of the church. 18 When they had come to him, he said to them, "You yourselves know, from the first day that I set foot in Asia, how I always spent my time with you. 19 I kept serving the Lord with all lowliness of mind and with tears, and in trials that happened to me because of the plots of the Jews. 20 You know how I did not keep back from declaring to you anything that was useful, and how I taught you in public and from house to house, 21 testifying to both Jews and Greeks about repentance toward God and of faith in our Lord Jesus. 22 Now look, I am going to Jerusalem, compelled by the Spirit, not knowing what will happen to me there, 23 except that the Holy Spirit testifies to me in every city that chains and afflictions await me. 24 But I do not consider my life valuable to myself, if only I may finish the race and complete the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus, to testify to the gospel of the grace of God. 25 Now look, I know that you all, among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom, will see my face no more. 26 Therefore I testify to you this day, that I am innocent of the blood of any man. 27 For I did not hold back from declaring to you the whole will of God. 28 Therefore be careful about yourselves, and about all the flock of which the Holy Spirit has appointed you overseers. Be careful to shepherd the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood. [1]29 I know that after my departure, vicious wolves will come in among you and will not spare the flock. 30 Even from your own number men will arise and distort the truth to draw away the disciples after them. 31 So be on guard. Remember that for three years I never stopped warning each one of you night and day with tears. 32 Now I commit you to God and to the word of his grace, which is able to build you up and to give you the inheritance among all those who are being sanctified. 33 I coveted no man's silver, gold, or clothing. 34 You yourselves know that these hands served my own needs and the needs of those who were with me. 35 In all things I gave you an example of how you should help the weak by laboring, and of how you should remember the words of the Lord Jesus, words that he himself said: 'It is more blessed to give than to receive.'"
36 After he had spoken in this way, he knelt down and prayed with them all. 37 There was a lot of crying and they embraced Paul and kissed him. 38 They were in anguish most of all because of what he had said, that they would never see his face again. Then they escorted him to the ship.
In this chapter Luke describes Paul's last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.
Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: and discipline)
Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.
"After the riot" or "Following the riot"
"he said goodbye"
"had greatly encouraged the believers" or "had said many things to encourage the believers"
"After he had stayed there three months." This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Jews formed a plot against him" or "the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him"
This means only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: "by some of the Jews"
"as he was ready to sail for Syria"
"Traveling with him." Here the word "him" refers to Paul (Acts 20:1).
These are names of men.
These are names of places.
These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Acts 19:29.
"these men had traveled ahead of us"
Here "us" refers to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
This is the name of a place.
All instances of "we" refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
This refers to the Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in Acts 12:3.
Here the word "we" refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: and Acts 20:4-6)
Luke tells about Paul's preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.
"when the sun came up again." If the writer was using the Jewish system of determining days, Paul was planning to travel after sunrise on "the first day of the week." If the writer was using the Greek system, Paul was planning to travel on the second day of the week.
Bread was part of their meals. Possible meanings are 1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: "to eat a meal" or 2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ's death and resurrection. Alternate translation: "to eat the Lord's Supper"
"he continued to speak"
This may have been on the third floor of the house.
This was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough on which a person could sit.
This is the name of a man.
This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: "who slept soundly" or "who became more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly"
When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "third story; and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead"
This means two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the "second story."
Here "him" and "he" refers to the young man, Eutychus.
Here "he" refers to Paul.
Here the word "he" refers to Paul.
This is the end of the part of the story about Paul's preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.
Bread was a common food during meals. Here "broke bread" probably means that they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread.
"he went away"
This refers to Eutychus (Acts 20:9). Possible meanings are 1) he was a young man over 14 years old or 2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or 3) the word "boy" implies that he was a servant or a slave.
Here the word "we" refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader.
The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip.
The word "ourselves" adds emphasis and separates Luke and his traveling companions from Paul, who did not travel by boat.
Assos is a town located directly below present day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea.
Here "he himself" refers to Paul. "Himself" is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted.
"to travel on land"
Here "he" and "him" refer to Paul.
Here the words "we" and "us" refer to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader.
Mitylene is a town located in present day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea.
Here the word "we" refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
"near the island" or "across from the island"
Chios is an island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the Aegean Sea.
"we arrived at the island of Samos"
Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey.
Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River.
Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus.
This speaks about "time" as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: "so that he would not have to remain for a time" or "so that he would not have a delay"
Here the word "he" refers to Paul.
Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15]
Here "yourselves" is used for emphasis.
Here "foot" stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: "I entered Asia"
This speaks about time as if it were something that a person could spend. Alternate translation: "how I always conducted myself when I was with you"
This speaks about something humble as if it were low to the ground. The word "mind" stands for a person's inner attitude. Alternate translation: "humility" or "humbleness"
Here "tears" stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: "with crying as I served the Lord"
"Trials" is an abstract noun. The meaning can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: "while God was testing me"
This does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: "of some of the Jews"
"You know how I was never silent, but I always declared to you"
"I also taught when I was in your homes"
The abstract nouns "repentance" and "faith" can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: "that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ"
The word "our" refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking.
Here the word "I" refers to Paul.
They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "because the Spirit compels me to go there"
"and I do not know what will happen to me there"
Here "chains" refers to Paul's being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: "people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer"
This speaks about Paul's "race" and "ministry" as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Here "race" and "ministry" mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. Alternate translation: "so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do"
Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a race.
"to tell people the good news about God's grace." This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus.
Paul continues to talk to the Ephesian elders (Acts 20:17).
"Now, pay careful attention, because I know"
"I know that all of you"
Here "kingdom" stands for God's rule as king. Alternate translation: "to whom I preached the message about God's reign as king" or "to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king"
The word "face" here represents Paul's physical body. Alternate translation: "will not see me anymore on this earth"
Here "blood" stands for a person's death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God's truth. Alternate translation: "I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus"
Here this means any person whether male or female. Alternate translation: "any person"
"For I did not keep silent and not tell you." This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "For I certainly declared to you"
"Because what I have just said is true," referring to all that Paul has said so far in his speech about his leaving them.
Believers are likened to a "flock" of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a shepherd would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: "the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God"
The shedding of the blood of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: "the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross"
Here "blood" stands for Christ's death.
This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were wolves that eat the sheep of the flock. Alternate translation: "many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers"
A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: "in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead"
"be on guard and remember" or "be on guard as you remember"
"be awake and alert" or "watch out." Christian leaders being alert about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army.
"Continue to remember that" or "Do not forget that"
Paul taught them over the space of three years, but not necessarily every day for three years.
This does not mean that the only words he spoke were words of warning. Rather, Paul is using hyperbole to remind them that he had told them often that evil men would try to deceive them. Alternate translation: "I warned ... you as often as I could"
Here "tears" refers to Paul's crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people.
Here "word" stands for a message. Alternate translation: "I ask God to take care of you and to help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace"
A person's faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: "which is able to make become stronger and stronger in your faith"
This speaks about the "word of his grace" as if the word itself would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: "God will give you the inheritance"
The blessings that God gives believers are spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father.
"I did not desire someone's silver" or "I did not want for myself anyone's silver"
Clothing was considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.
The word "yourselves" is used here to add emphasis.
The word "hands" here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: "I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses"
Paul finishes speaking to the elders of the church of Ephesus; he began to speak them in Acts 20:18.
"you should work so as to have money to help people who cannot earn it for themselves"
You can state this nominal adjective as an adjective. Alternate translation: "weak persons" or "those who are weak"
"sick"
Here "words" refers to what Jesus has said.
This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.
Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.
It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God.
"hugged him closely" or "put their arms around him"
Kissing someone on the cheek is an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.
The word "face" here represents Paul's physical body. Alternate translation: "they would not see him anymore on this earth"
1 When we had gone away from them and set sail, we took a straight course to the city of Cos, and the next day to the city of Rhodes, and from there to the city of Patara. 2 When we found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia, we went aboard and set sail. 3 After sighting Cyprus, leaving it on the left side of the boat, we sailed on to Syria and landed at Tyre, where the ship was to unload its cargo. 4 After we found the disciples, we stayed there seven days. Through the Spirit they kept urging Paul not to go to Jerusalem. 5 When our days there were over, we left and went on our way, and they all, with their wives and children, accompanied us out of the city. Then we knelt down on the beach, prayed, 6 and said farewell to each other. Then we went on board the ship, and they returned home.
7 When we had finished the voyage from Tyre, we arrived at Ptolemais. There we greeted the brothers and stayed with them for one day. 8 On the next day we left and went to Caesarea. We entered the house of Philip, the evangelist, who was one of the seven, and we stayed with him. 9 Now this man had four virgin daughters who prophesied.
10 As we stayed there for some days, a certain prophet named Agabus came down from Judea. 11 He came to us and took Paul's belt. With it he tied his own feet and hands and said, "Thus says the Holy Spirit, 'This is how the Jews in Jerusalem will tie up the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.'" 12 When we heard these things, both we and the people who lived in that place pleaded with Paul not to go up to Jerusalem.
13 Then Paul answered, "What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? For I am ready, not only to be tied up, but also to die in Jerusalem for the name of the Lord Jesus."
14 Since Paul would not be persuaded, we remained silent and then we said, "May the will of the Lord be done."
15 After these days, we picked up our bags and went up to Jerusalem. 16 There also went with us some of the disciples from Caesarea. They brought with them a man named Mnason, a man from Cyprus, an early disciple, with whom we would stay.
17 When we had arrived in Jerusalem, the brothers welcomed us gladly. 18 The next day Paul went with us to James, and all the elders were present. 19 When he had greeted them, he reported one by one the things that God had done among the Gentiles through his ministry. 20 When they heard it, they glorified God, and they said to him, "You see, brother, how many thousands have believed among the Jews. They are all zealous to keep the law. 21 They have been told about you, that you teach all the Jews who live among the Gentiles to abandon Moses, and that you tell them not to circumcise their children, and not to walk according the traditional ways. 22 What should we do? They will certainly hear that you have come. 23 So do what we say to you. We have four men who made a vow. 24 Take these men and purify yourself with them, and pay their expenses for them, so that they may shave their heads. So everyone will know that the things they have been told about you are false. They will learn that you also live correctly, obeying the law. 25 But concerning the Gentiles who have believed, we wrote about our decision that they should keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols, from blood, from what is strangled, and from sexual immorality." 26 Then Paul took the men, and the next day he purified himself along with them. Then they went into the temple, giving notice when the days of purification would be fulfilled and the offering would be presented for each of them.
27 When the seven days were almost finished, some Jews from Asia, seeing Paul in the temple, stirred up the whole crowd and laid hands on him. 28 They were shouting, "Men of Israel, help us. This is the man who teaches all men everywhere things that are against the people, the law, and this place. Besides, he has also brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place." 29 For they had previously seen Trophimus the Ephesian with him in the city, and they thought that Paul had brought him into the temple. 30 All the city was excited, and the people ran together and laid hold of Paul. They dragged him out of the temple, and the doors were immediately shut. 31 As they were trying to kill him, news came up to the chief captain of the company of soldiers, that all Jerusalem was in an uproar. 32 Right away he took soldiers and centurions and ran down to the crowd. When the people saw the chief captain and the soldiers, they stopped beating Paul. 33 Then the chief captain approached and laid hold of Paul, and commanded him to be bound with two chains. Then he asked who he was and what he had done. 34 Some in the crowd were shouting one thing and others another. Since the captain could not learn the truth because of all the noise, he ordered that Paul be brought into the fortress. 35 When he came to the steps, he was carried by the soldiers because of the crowd's violence. 36 For the crowd of people followed after and kept shouting out, "Away with him!"
37 As Paul was about to be brought into the fortress, he said to the chief captain, "Is it permitted for me to say something to you?"
The captain said, "Do you know Greek? 38 Are you not then the Egyptian who some time ago started a rebellion and led the four thousand men of the 'Assassins' out into the wilderness?"
39 Paul said, "I am a Jew, from the city of Tarsus in Cilicia. I am a citizen of no unimportant city. I beg you, allow me to speak to the people."
40 When the captain had given him permission, Paul stood on the steps and motioned with the hand to the people. When there was a deep silence, he spoke to them in the Hebrew language. He said,
Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul's journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.
The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULB does.
The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.
The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23).
The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: holy)
The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
Here the word "we" refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.
"we went straight to the city of Cos" or "we went directly to the city of Cos"
Cos is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region.
Rhodes is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete.
Patara is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea.
Here "a ship crossing over" stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: "When we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia"
Here "crossing" does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: "a ship that would be going across the water" or "a ship that would be going"
Here the word "we" refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
The left is the "port" side of a boat. Here this means they sailed south of Cyprus. Alternate translation: "Cyprus, sailing south of it"
Here "ship" stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: "the crew would unload the cargo from the ship"
"The Spirit caused them to urge Paul again and again not to go to Jerusalem." The Spirit may have revealed to them that Paul would suffer in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: "Because the Spirit had told them that Paul would suffer in Jerusalem, they urged him again and again not to go there"
Here the word "They" refers to the believers from Tyre.
"When the seven days were over" or "When it was time to leave"
It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God.
"said goodbye to one another"
Here the word "we" refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
Ptolemais was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemais is modern day Acre, Israel.
"fellow believers"
This begins Paul's time in Caesarea.
The "seven" refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in Acts 6:5.
a person who tells people good news
"Philip" from verse 8.
This word is used here to mark a stop in the main story. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters.
"four virgin daughters who regularly received and passed along messages from God"
Here the words "we" and "us" refers to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader.
This introduces a new person in the story.
Agabus was a man from Judea.
This tells about a prophecy made about Paul in Caesarea by the prophet Agabus.
"removed Paul's belt from Paul's waist"
This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: "The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will tie up ... of the Gentiles."
This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders" or "some of the Jews"
"deliver him"
The word "hands" here represents control. Alternate translation: "into the legal custody of the Gentiles" or "to the Gentiles"
This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: "the Gentile authorities"
Here the word "we" refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader.
Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. Alternate translation: "Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart."
This is a metaphor for making someone sad or discouraging them. Here "heart" stands for a person's emotions. Alternate translation: "discouraging me" or "making me very sad"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "not only for them to tie me up"
Here "name" refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: "for the sake of the Lord Jesus" or "because I believe in the Lord Jesus"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Paul would not allow us to to persuade him" or "we were unable to persuade Paul"
You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: "persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "May everything happen as the Lord has planned it"
Here the word "we" refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader.
This ends Paul's time in Caesarea.
"Among them was a man"
Mnason was a man from the island of Cyprus.
This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
Here the words "we" and "us" refer to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader.
Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.
Here "brothers" refers to the believers in Jerusalem, whether male or female. Alternate translation: "the fellow believers welcomed us"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here the words "he" and "his" refer to Paul. The word "them" refers to the elders.
"he gave a detailed account of all"
The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.
Here the word "they" refers to James and the elders. The word "him" refers to Paul.
Here "brother" means "fellow believer."
The word "they" refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.
this phrase here refers to the law of Moses
Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of Moses. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God's true message.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "People have told the Jewish believers"
Here "Moses" stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: "to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us"
A person who obeys the traditions and customs is spoken of as if he were walking on a path. Alternate translation: "not to obey the old customs" or "not to practice the old customs"
"the usual Jewish customs"
Here the word "we" refers to James and the elders
The word "They" refers to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses (Acts 21:20-21).
The word "you" refers to Paul.
Here the word "we" refers to James and the elders
"four men who made a promise to God." This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time.
James and the elders continue speaking to Paul.
They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple.
"pay for what they will need." The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings.
This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the things that people are saying about you"
Here the word "we" refers to James and the elders.
James and the elders in Jerusalem finish their request to Paul (Acts 21:18).
All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to an idol, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in [Acts 15:20]
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol"
This can be stated in active form. You can also state explicitly the assumed information about strangled animals. Alternate translation: "from animals that a person has strangled" or "from animals that a person killed for food but did not drain its blood"
These are the 4 men who made a vow.
Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.
They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: "went into the temple courtyard"
This is a separate purification process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they presented the animals for an offering"
This begins the story of Paul's arrest.
These are the seven days for purification.
Paul was not in the temple itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: "in the temple courtyard"
People who incited a crowd to become very angry at Paul are spoken of as if they stirred up the crowd's emotions. Alternate translation: "caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul"
Here "laid hands on" means to "seized" or to "grabbed." See how you translated "laid hands on" in [Acts 5:18]
"the people of Israel, the law of Moses, and the temple"
Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple.
Verse 29 gives background information about the Jews from Asia.
This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple.
This was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in Acts 20:4.
The word "All" here is an exaggeration for emphasis. The word "city" represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: "Many people in the city became angry at Paul"
"seized Paul" or "grabbed Paul"
They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors" or "the temple guards immediately shut the doors"
Here "news" refers to the messenger who went to speak the news. Alternate translation: "someone gave news to the chief captain of the cohort"
The phrase "came up to" is used because the chief captain was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.
This is a Roman military leader of about 1,000 soldiers.
A company is a group of about 1,000 soldiers.
The word "Jerusalem" here represents the people of Jerusalem. The word "all" is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: "all the people in Jerusalem were in an uproar" or "the large crowd in Jerusalem was in an uproar" (See: and )
The first word "he" refers to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in Acts 21:31.
From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court.
"took hold of Paul" or "arrested Paul"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "commanded his soldiers to bind him"
This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.
This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: "he asked, 'Who is this man? What has he done?'"
The chief captain is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.
The words "were shouting" are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: "and others were shouting another" or "and others in the crowd were shouting something else"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul"
This fortress was connected to the outer temple court.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers carried him"
The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul's death. Alternate translation: "Put him to death" or "Kill him"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul"
This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
The chief captain uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Alternate translation: "So you know Greek." or "I didn't know you knew Greek."
know how to speak and understand the Greek language
The chief captain uses this question and the question "Do you speak Greek?"
Shortly before Paul's visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man.
This word "rebellion" can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: "caused people to rebel against the Roman government"
"the 4,000 terrorists"
This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported the Roman government.
Paul is correcting the chief captain's wrong idea about who Paul is.
Cilicia was a Roman province across the Mediterranean Sea from Egypt, and Tarsus was a large, well-known city.
Paul uses the double negative in the phrase "no unimportant city" to emphasize that the chief captain should have known that Tarsus was an important city. Alternate translation: "I am a citizen of an important city"
Or "I plead with you."
"please allow me" or please permit me"
The word "permission" can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: "the captain permitted Paul to speak" or "the captain allowed Paul to speak"
The word "steps" here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.
It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with the hand. Alternate translation: "motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet"
"When the people were completely silent"
1 "Brothers and fathers, listen to my defense which I will now make to you."
2 When the crowd heard Paul speak to them in the Hebrew language, they became quiet. He said,
3 "I am a Jew, born in Tarsus of Cilicia, but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel. I was instructed according to the strict ways of the law of our fathers. I am zealous for God, just as all of you are today. 4 I persecuted this Way to the death, binding up and delivering to prison both men and women, 5 as the high priest and all the elders can testify. I received letters from them for the brothers in Damascus, and I went there to bring them back in bonds to Jerusalem to be punished. 6 It happened that when I was traveling and nearing Damascus, about noon suddenly a great light from heaven began to shine around me. 7 I fell to the ground and heard a voice say to me, 'Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me?'
8 I answered, 'Who are you, Lord?'
He said to me, 'I am Jesus of Nazareth, whom you are persecuting.'
9 Those who were with me saw the light, but they did not understand the voice of him who spoke to me. 10 I said, 'What should I do, Lord?'
The Lord said to me, 'Arise and go into Damascus. There you will be told everything that has been appointed for you to do.' 11 I could not see because of that light's brightness, and being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus. 12 There I met a man named Ananias, a devout man according to the law and well spoken of by all the Jews who lived there. 13 He came to me, stood by me, and said, 'Brother Saul, receive your sight.' In that very hour I saw him. 14 Then he said, 'The God of our fathers has appointed you to know his will, to see the Righteous One, and to hear the voice coming from his own mouth. 15 For you will be a witness for him to all men about what you have seen and heard. 16 Now why are you waiting? Arise, be baptized, and wash away your sins, calling on his name.' 17 After I had returned to Jerusalem, and while I was praying in the temple, a trance came on me. 18 I saw him say to me, 'Hurry and leave Jerusalem quickly, because they will not accept your testimony about me.' 19 I said, 'Lord, they themselves know that I imprisoned and beat those who believed in you in every synagogue. 20 When the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled, I also was standing by and agreeing, and I was guarding the cloaks of those who killed him.' 21 But he said to me, 'Go, because I will send you far away to the Gentiles.'"
22 They listened to him until that statement. Then they raised their voices and said, "Away with such a fellow from the earth, for it is not right that he should live." 23 As they were shouting, throwing off their cloaks, and throwing dust into the air, 24 the chief captain commanded Paul to be brought into the fortress. He ordered that he should be questioned with scourging, so that he himself might know why they were shouting against him like that. 25 When they had tied him up with the thongs, Paul said to the centurion who was standing by, "Is it lawful for you to scourge a man who is a Roman and who has not been put on trial?"
26 When the centurion heard this, he went to the chief captain and told him, saying, "What are you about to do? For this man is a Roman citizen." 27 The chief captain came and said to him, "Tell me, are you a Roman citizen?"
Paul said, "Yes."
28 The chief captain answered, "It was only with a large amount of money that I acquired citizenship."
But Paul said, "I was born a Roman citizen." 29 Then the men who were going to question him left him immediately. The chief captain also was afraid, when he learned that Paul was a Roman citizen, because he had tied him up.
30 On the next day, the chief captain wanted to know for certain about the Jews' accusations against Paul. So he untied his bonds and ordered the chief priests and all the council to meet. Then he brought Paul down and placed him in their midst.
This is the second account of Paul's conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul's conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26)
Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.
No one knows for sure who first started calling believers "followers of the Way." This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or "way." If this is true, the believers were "following the way of the Lord" by living in a way that pleased God.
The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The "chief captain" could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul's age as well as the older men in the audience.
"I will now explain to you" or "I will now present to you"
The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "but I was a student of Gamaliel here in Jerusalem"
Here "feet" stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: "by Gamaliel"
Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in Acts 5:34.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "He instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers" or "The instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers"
"law of our ancestors." This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses.
"I am completely dedicated to obeying God" or "I am passionate about my service to God"
"in the same way all of you are today." Paul compares himself with the crowd.
Here "this Way" represents the people who belonged to the group called "the Way." The word "death" can be translated with the verb "kill." Alternate translation: "I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way and I looked for ways to kill them"
This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated "the Way" in Acts 9:2.
"tying up both men and women and taking them to prison"
"The high priests and elders gave me letters"
Here "brothers" refers to "fellow Jews."
"to bind those of the Way with chains and bring them back to Jerusalem"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "so that they would receive punishment" or "so that the Jewish authorities could punish them"
Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.
This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
Here "voice" stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: "I heard someone say to me"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here "voice" stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: "they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "There someone will tell you" or "There you will learn"
"I was left blind because of that light's brightness"
Here "hands" stands for those leading Paul. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "those with me guided me into Damascus"
Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in [Acts 5:3]
Ananias was very serious about following God's law.
This can be stated in active form in a new sentence. Alternate translation: "law. All the Jews who lived there spoke well of him"
The words "He" and "him" refer to Ananias.
Here "Brother" is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: "My friend Saul"
The word "sight" can be translated with the verb "see." Alternate translation: "see again"
This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: "At that instant" or "Instantly" or "Immediately"
The word "he" refers to Ananias (Acts 22:12).
"what God is planning and will cause to happen"
Both "voice" and "mouth" refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: "to hear him speak directly to you"
Here "men" means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: "to all people"
Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.
Here "now" does not mean "at this moment," but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. Alternate translation: "do not wait!" or "do not delay!"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "let me baptize you" or "receive baptism"
As washing one's body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one's inner being from sin. Alternate translation: "ask forgiveness for your sins"
Here "name" refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: "calling on the Lord" or "trusting in the Lord"
Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.
This metaphor means that Paul went into the trance without expecting it or desiring it. See how you translated similar words in [Acts 10:10]
"I saw Jesus as he said to me"
"those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me"
Here the word "they" refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.
The word "themselves" is used for emphasis.
Paul went to synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus.
Here "blood" stands for Stephen's life. To spill blood means to kill. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they killed Stephen, who testified about you"
This ends what Paul was able to say to the crowd of Jewish people by the fortress.
Here the words "him" and "he" refer to Paul.
"until Paul said that"
The phrase "from the earth" adds emphasis to "Away with such a fellow." Alternate translation: "Kill him"
"While they were." The phrase "As they were" is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.
These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God.
This is a Roman military leader of about 1,000 soldiers. See how you translated this in Acts 21:31.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "ordered his soldiers to bring Paul"
This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
The commander wants soldiers to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure he tells the truth. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "He ordered his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth"
The first "he" refers to chief captain. The second "he" refers to Paul.
The word "himself" is used for emphasis.
Here the word "they" refers to the soldiers.
These were strips of leather or animal hide.
Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. Alternate translation: "It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!"
This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. Alternate translation: "You should not do this!"
Here the word "him" refers to Paul.
Here "came" can be translated as "went."
"It was only after I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities." The captain makes this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth.
"I got citizenship." The word "citizenship" is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: "I became a citizen"
If a man was a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they were born.
"the men who planned to question" or "the men who were preparing to question"
Here the word "he" refers to the chief captain.
Possibly the "chief captain" stands for the chief captain's soldiers. Alternate translation: "So the chief captain ordered his soldiers to untie Paul's bonds"
There was a stairway going down from the fortress to the temple courts.
1 Paul looked directly at the council members and said, "Brothers, I have lived before God in all good conscience until this day." 2 The high priest Ananias commanded those who stood by him to strike him on the mouth.
3 Then Paul said to him, "God will strike you, you whitewashed wall. Are you sitting to judge me by the law, yet order me to be struck, against the law?"
4 Those who stood by said, "Is this how you insult God's high priest?"
5 Paul said, "I did not know, brothers, that he was high priest. For it is written, 'You must not speak evil of a ruler of your people.'"
6 When Paul saw that the one part of the council were Sadducees and the other Pharisees, he spoke loudly in the council, "Brothers, I am a Pharisee, a son of Pharisees. It is because I have the hope of the resurrection of the dead that I am being judged." 7 When he said this, an argument began between the Pharisees and Sadducees, and the crowd was divided. 8 For the Sadducees say that there is no resurrection, no angels, and no spirits, but the Pharisees acknowledge all of them.
9 So a large uproar occurred, and some of the scribes belonging to the Pharisees stood up and argued, saying, "We find nothing wrong with this man. What if a spirit or an angel has spoken to him?" 10 When there arose a great argument, the chief captain feared that Paul would be torn to pieces by them, so he commanded the soldiers to go down and take him by force from among the council members, and bring him into the fortress.
11 The following night the Lord stood beside him and said, "Have courage, for as you have testified about me in Jerusalem, so you must also testify in Rome."
12 When it became day, some Jews formed a conspiracy and put themselves under an oath, saying that they would not eat or drink anything until they had killed Paul. 13 There were more than forty men who formed this conspiracy. 14 They went to the chief priests and the elders and said, "We have sworn a great oath to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. 15 Now, therefore, let the council formally request the chief captain to bring him down to you, as if you would decide his case more precisely. As for us, we are ready to kill him before he comes here."
16 But Paul's sister's son heard that they were lying in wait, so he went and entered the fortress and told Paul.
17 Paul called one of the centurions and said, "Take this young man to the chief captain, for he has something to report to him."
18 So the centurion took the young man and brought him to the chief captain and said, "Paul the prisoner called me to him, and asked me to bring this young man to you. He has something to say to you."
19 The chief captain took him by the hand to a private place and asked him, "What is it that you have to report to me?"
20 The young man said, "The Jews have agreed to ask you to bring down Paul tomorrow to the council, as if they were going to ask more precisely about his case. 21 But do not be persuaded by them, because there are more than forty men who are lying in wait for him. They have put themselves under oath neither to eat nor to drink until they have killed him. Even now they are ready, waiting for your approval."
22 So the chief captain let the young man go, after instructing him, "Tell no one that you have reported these things to me."
23 Then he called to him two of the centurions and said, "Get two hundred soldiers ready to go as far as Caesarea, and seventy horsemen also, and two hundred spearmen. You will leave at the third hour of the night." 24 He also ordered them to provide animals which Paul could ride and to take him safely to Felix the governor.
25 Then he wrote a letter like this:
26 "Claudius Lysias,
To the most excellent Governor Felix,
Greetings.
27 This man was arrested by the Jews and was about to be killed by them when I came upon them with soldiers and rescued him, since I learned that he was a Roman citizen. 28 I wanted to know why they accused him, so I took him down to their council. 29 I learned that he was being accused about questions concerning their own law, but that there was no accusation against him that deserved death or imprisonment. 30 Then it was reported to me that there was a plot against the man, so I immediately sent him to you and instructed his accusers also to bring their charges against him in your presence.
Farewell."
31 So the soldiers obeyed their orders. They took Paul and brought him by night to Antipatris. 32 On the next day, most of the soldiers left the horsemen to go with him and they themselves returned to the fortress. 33 When the horsemen reached Caesarea and delivered the letter to the governor, they also presented Paul to him. 34 When the governor read the letter, he asked what province Paul was from. When he learned that he was from Cilicia, 35 he said, "I will hear you fully when your accusers come here." Then he commanded him to be kept in Herod's government headquarters.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULB does this with the quoted material in 23:5.
The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: raise and reward)
Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.
The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The "chief captain" could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
This is a metaphor in scripture describing someone who appears to be good or clean or righteous when that person is evil or unclean or unrighteous.
Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members (Acts 22:30).
Here this means "Fellow Jews."
"I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do"
This is the name of a man. Although he has the same name, the Ananias here is neither the Ananias mentioned in [Acts 5:1]
This refers to a wall that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: "white-painted wall" or "wall painted white"
Paul uses a question to point out Ananias' hypocrisy. Some modern translations read this as a statement, "You are sitting to judge ... against the law." Alternate translation: "You are wrong to sit there to judge ... against the law."
This can be stated in active form. You can use the same word for "strike" as you did in the phrase "God will strike you." Alternate translation: "command people to strike me"
The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3]
Paul is about to quote what Moses wrote in the law. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "For Moses wrote in the law"
Here "Brothers" means "Fellow Jews"
Here "son" means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: "and my father and forefathers were Pharisees"
Here the word "hope" is a person's confident expectation that what he desires really will happen. The abstract noun "hope" can be translated here with the verbs "confidently expect" or "confidently wait" or "trust." The abstract noun "resurrection" can be expressed with the verb phrase "become alive again." Alternate translation: "I confidently expect the resurrection of the dead" or "I trust that the dead will become alive again"
The phrase "the dead" can be expressed as "those who have died."
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you are judging me"
"the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another"
This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees.
"So they began shouting loudly at one another." The word "so" marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul's stating his belief in the resurrection.
The Pharisees use this question to suggest that Paul may have gotten his teaching from an angel or a spirit. They may be rebuking the Sadducees for not believing that spirits and angels exist and can speak to people. Alternate translation: "Maybe a spirit or an angel has spoken with him!"
The words "a great argument" can be re-stated as "argue violently." Alternate translation: "When they began to argue violently"
This is a Roman military leader of about 1,000 soldiers. See how you translated this in Acts 21:31.
This can be stated in active form. The phrase "be torn to pieces" might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: "they might tear Paul to pieces" or "they would cause Paul great physical harm"
"use physical force to take him away"
This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: "That night"
The words "about me" are understood. Alternate translation: "testify about me in Rome"
While Paul is in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.
"organized a group with a shared purpose." The purpose for organizing this group was to kill Paul.
The noun "oath" is an abstract noun that refers to a promise that the men made to God to kill Paul. It can also be made explicit what would happen to the men if they did not do what they had promised to do. Alternate translation: "asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised"
"40 men"
"who made this plan" or "who planned to kill Paul"
Here the word "They" refers to the forty Jews in Acts 23:13.
"We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do"
Here "you" is plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. Both "us" and "we" refer to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul.
"Because what we have just said is true" or "Because we have put ourselves under this curse"
This does not mean "at this moment," but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
"bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you"
"as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done"
"the son of Paul's sister" or "Paul's nephew"
"they were ready to ambush Paul" or "they were waiting to kill Paul"
This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"Paul the prisoner asked me to come talk with him"
Since the chief captain calls him a young man, this suggests Paul's nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
Since the chief captain took the young man by the hand and calls him a young man (verse 18), this suggests Paul's nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
This does not mean all Jews, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: "Some of the Jews have agreed"
"to bring Paul down from the fortress"
"they wanted to learn more about what Paul has done"
"40 men"
"ready to ambush Paul" or "ready to kill Paul"
"They have sworn to eat and drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do"
"for you to agree to do what they have asked you to do"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"he called to himself." Both "he" and "him" refer to the chief captain.
"2 of the centurions"
"70 horsemen"
"200 soldiers that are armed with spears"
This was about 9:00 p.m. at night.
Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the roman governor of the area.
Here "he" refers to the chief captain.
Claudius Lysias was the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region.
This is a formal introduction to the letter. The chief captain begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. The words "am writing" are understood. Alternate translation: "I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix, and I greet you"
"to Governor Felix, you who deserve the greatest honors"
Here "Jews" means "some of the Jews." This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Some of the Jews arrested this man"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they were ready to kill him"
"I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were"
Here the word "I" refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain. The word "they" refers to the Jews who accused Paul. The word "him" refers to Paul.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that they were accusing him of questions about"
The abstract nouns "accusation," "death," and "imprisonment" can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: "but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison"
The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Then someone told me" or "Then I learned"
Here "you" refers to Governor Felix.
This ends Paul's time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.
The word "so" marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the chief captain's commanding the soldiers to escort Paul.
Here "brought" can be translated as "took." Alternate translation: "They got Paul and took him at night"
Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel.
Here "him" refers to Paul.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This can be stated with direct quotations. Alternate translation: "he asked Paul, 'What province are you from?' Paul said, 'I am from Cilicia.' When the governor learned this"
"When the governor learned that Paul"
"the governor said"
"I will listen to all you have to say"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he commanded soldiers to keep him" or "commanded soldiers to restrain him"
1 After five days, Ananias the high priest, certain elders, and an orator named Tertullus went there. These men brought charges against Paul before the governor. 2 When Paul stood before the governor, Tertullus began to accuse him and said to the governor, "Because of you we have great peace, and your foresight brings good reform to our nation;
3 so with all thankfulness we welcome everything that you do, most excellent Felix. 4 So that I detain you no more, I beg you in your kindness to hear us briefly. 5 For we have found this man to be a pest and one who causes all the Jews throughout the world to rebel. He is a leader of the Nazarene sect. 6 He even tried to desecrate the temple, so we arrested him. [1]7[2]8 When you examine Paul about all these matters, you will be able to learn about all the things of which we are accusing him." 9 The Jews also joined in the accusation, affirming that these charges were true.
10 But when the governor motioned for Paul to speak, Paul answered, "I understand that for many years you have been a judge to this nation, and so I gladly explain myself to you.
11 You can learn for yourself that it has not been more than twelve days since I went up to worship in Jerusalem. 12 When they found me in the temple, I did not argue with anyone, and I did not stir up a crowd, either in the synagogues, or in the city. 13 They cannot prove to you the accusations they are now making against me. 14 But I confess this to you, that according to the Way, which they call a sect, I serve the God of our fathers, believing all things that are according to the law and that has been written in the prophets. 15 I have a hope in God, which these men also have, that there will be a resurrection of both the righteous and the wicked. 16 So I always strive to have a blameless conscience before God and human beings. 17 Now after many years I came to give alms to my nation and present sacrifices. 18 When I did this, certain Jews from Asia found me in a purification ceremony in the temple, not with a crowd or an uproar. 19 These men ought to be before you now and accuse me, if they have anything. 20 Or else, these same men should say what wrong they found in me when I stood before the Jewish council, 21 unless it is about this one thing that I shouted out when I stood among them, 'It is concerning the resurrection of the dead that I am on trial before you today.'"
22 Then Felix, who was well informed about the Way, postponed the hearing. He said, "When Lysias the commander comes down from Jerusalem, I will decide your case." 23 Then he commanded the centurion that Paul should be kept in custody, but to have some freedom so that none of his friends would be prevented from attending to his needs.
24 After some days, Felix returned with Drusilla his wife, who was Jewish, and he sent for Paul and he heard from him about faith in Christ Jesus. 25 But when Paul reasoned with him about righteousness, self-control, and the coming judgment, Felix became frightened and said, "Go away for now. But when I have time later on, I will send for you." 26 At the same time he hoped that Paul would give money to him, so he often sent for him and spoke with him. 27 But when two years passed, Porcius Festus became the governor after Felix, but Felix wanted to gain favor with the Jews, so he left Paul bound.
Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.
Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2-4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.
The words "governor," "commander," and "centurion" may be difficult to translate into some languages.
Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.
"Five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea"
This is the name of a man. He is not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1]
"a lawyer." Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court.
This is the name of a man.
"went to Caesarea where Paul was"
"in the presence of the governor, who was judge in the court"
"began to argue the case before the governor that Paul had broken the law."
Here the word "you" refers to Felix, the governor.
Here "we" refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: "we, the people that you govern, have great peace"
"and your planning has greatly improved our nation"
The word "thankfulness" is an abstract noun. It can be stated as an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: "so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do" or "so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do"
"Governor Felix, who deserves greatest honor." Felix was the roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 23:25.
Possible meanings are 1) "so that I will not take up too much of your time" or 2) "so that I will not tire you"
"to be kind and listen to the short speech I am giving to state these men's case"
The word "we" refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus.
Here "pest" is a metaphor for a person who causes trouble. Alternate translation: "this man to be a trouble maker"
The word "all" here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul.
The phrase "Nazarene sect" is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: "He also leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene"
This is a smaller group of people within a larger group group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here the word "you" is singular and refers to Governor Felix.
Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.
"to learn whether or not these charges that we bring against him are true" or "to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things we accuse him of"
This refers to the Jewish leaders who were there at Paul's trial.
Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
"the governor gestured"
Here "nation" refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: "a judge for the people of the Jewish nation"
"explain my situation"
"12 days since"
Here the word "they" refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.
"Stir up" here is a metaphor for agitating people into unrest, just as stirring a liquid agitates it. Alternate translation: "I did not cause a crowd to riot"
"the blames for wrongdoings" or "the charges for crimes"
"I acknowledge this to you"
The phrase "the Way" was a title used for Christianity during Paul's time.
This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Christianity was originally considered to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated "sect" in Acts 24:5.
Paul is referring to the law of Moses.
Here the word "hope" is a person's confident expectation that what he desires really will happen. The abstract noun "hope" can be translated here with the verbs "confidently expect" or "confidently wait" or "trust." Alternate translation: "Just as these men, I trust in God that there will be a resurrection"
the Jews who are accusing Paul in court
The abstract noun "resurrection" can be stated with the verb "resurrect." Alternate translation: "that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous"
These nominal adjectives refer to righteous people and wicked people. Alternate translation: "righteous people and wicked people" or "those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil"
"I always work hard" or "I do my best"
Here "conscience" refers to a person's inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: "to be blameless" or "to always do what is right"
"in the presence of God"
This word marks a shift in Paul's argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.
"after many years away from Jerusalem"
Here "I came" can be translated as "I went." Alternate translation: "I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift; I also went to present sacrifices"
"in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself"
This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: "in the temple. I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot"
"The Jews from Asia"
"if they have anything to say"
This refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul's trial.
"should say the wrong thing I did that they were able to prove"
Paul finishes responding to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
The abstract noun "resurrection" can be stated as "God brings back to life." Alternate translation: "It is because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you are judging me today"
Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24]
This is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in Acts 9:2.
"when Lysias the commander comes down" or "at the time Lysias the commander comes down"
This is the name of the chief captain. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:26.
Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
"I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you" or "I will judge whether you are guilty"
"to have some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners"
"After several days"
Drusilla is a woman's name.
Felix may have felt conviction of his sins.
"for the present time"
Here the word "hope" means think that what one desires might happen. Sometimes prisoners gave money to government officials so that the officials would free them from prison early, and Felix hoped that Paul would do that. Alternate translation: "he thought that Paul might give money to him"
"so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul"
This was the Roman Governor who replaced Felix.
Here "the Jews" refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: "wanted the Jewish leaders to like him"
"he left Paul in prison"
1 Now, Festus entered the province, and after three days, he went from Caesarea up to Jerusalem. 2 The chief priests and the prominent Jews brought their charges against Paul, and they asked Festus earnestly— 3 asking him to do them a favor against Paul—to summon him to Jerusalem, for they were preparing an ambush to kill him along the way. 4 Festus answered that Paul was being held in custody at Caesarea, and that he himself was going there soon. 5 "Therefore, those who can," he said, "should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him."
6 Festus stayed not more than eight or ten days and then he went down to Caesarea, and on the next day he sat on the judgment seat and commanded Paul to be brought to him. 7 When he arrived, the Jews from Jerusalem stood nearby, and they brought many serious charges which they could not prove.
8 Paul defended himself and said, "I have committed no sin against the law of the Jews or against the temple or against Caesar."
9 But Festus wanted to gain the favor of the Jews, and so he answered Paul and said, "Do you want to go up to Jerusalem and to be judged by me about these things there?" 10 Paul said, "I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar where I must be judged. I have wronged no Jews, just as you also very well know. 11 Though if I have done wrong and if I have done what is worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if their accusations are nothing, no one can hand me over to them. I appeal to Caesar." 12 After Festus talked with the council, he answered, "You have appealed to Caesar. To Caesar you will go!"
13 Now after some days, King Agrippa and Bernice arrived at Caesarea to pay an official visit to Festus. 14 After they had been there for many days, Festus presented Paul's case to the king; he said, "A certain man was left behind here by Felix as a prisoner. 15 When I was in Jerusalem, the chief priests and the elders of the Jews brought charges against this man to me, and they asked for a sentence of condemnation against him. 16 I answered them that it was not the custom of the Romans to hand over anyone before the accused had faced his accusers and received an opportunity to defend himself against the charges. 17 Therefore, when they came together here, I did not wait, but the next day I sat in the judgment seat and I ordered the man to be brought in. 18 When the accusers stood up, they charged him with nothing that I considered wickedness. 19 Instead, they had certain disputes with him about their own religion and about a certain Jesus who was dead, whom Paul claims to be alive. 20 I was perplexed about how to investigate this matter, and so I asked him if he would be willing to go to Jerusalem to stand trial there about these charges. 21 But when Paul appealed to be kept in custody while awaiting the decision of the emperor, I ordered him to be held in custody until I could send him to Caesar." 22 Agrippa spoke to Festus, "I would also like to listen to this man." "Tomorrow," Festus said, "you will hear him."
23 So on the next day, Agrippa and Bernice came with much ceremony; they came into the hall with the military officers and with the prominent men of the city. When Festus spoke the command, Paul was brought to them. 24 Festus said, "King Agrippa, and all you men who are here with us, you see this man; all the multitude of Jews appealed to me in Jerusalem and here also, and they shouted to me that he should no longer live. 25 I found he had done nothing worthy of death; but because he appealed to the emperor, I decided to send him to Rome. 26 But I do not have anything certain to write to my lord. For this reason, I have brought him to you, especially to you, King Agrippa, so that I might have something more to write about the case. 27 For it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not also state the charges against him."
This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus "wanted to gain the favor of the Jews," he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: favor)
The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 24:27.
Paul continues to be a prisoner in Caesarea.
This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
Possible meanings are 1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or 2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
The phrase "went up" is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
This speaks about accusations as if they were an object that a person could bring to someone else. Alternate translation: "The chief priests and the important Jews accused Paul to Festus"
Some versions translate this as "to have him summoned to Jerusalem." The word "him" refers to Paul. The Jews wanted Festus to have his soldiers take Paul to Jerusalem.
They were going to hide along the road and kill Paul as he was passing by, but Festus was not aware of this part of their plan.
This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: "But Festus said, 'Paul is being held in custody in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.'"
Here the word "us" refers to Festus and the Romans traveling with him, but not to his audience.
The phrase "he said" can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: "Then he said, 'Therefore, those who are able to go to Caesarea should go there with us"
"If Paul has done something wrong"
"you should accuse him of violating laws" or "you should bring charges against him"
Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
Here "judgment seat" refers to Festus' ruling as judge over Paul's trial. Alternate translation: "sat upon the seat where he acted as judge" or "sat down as judge"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "his soldiers bring Paul to him"
"When Paul came and stood before Festus"
Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: "they spoke against Paul many serious things"
Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem temple. Alternate translation: "against the entry rules of the temple"
Here "the Jews" means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: "wanted to please the Jewish leaders"
Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "where I will judge you with regard to these charges"
The "judgment seat" refers to Caesar's authority to judge Paul. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I ask to go before Caesar, so he can judge me"
Paul does not believe that he has done wrong, but he shows that he will submit to the law and will not refuse to be punished if he really has done wrong.
"if I have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty"
"if the charges against me are not true"
Possible meanings are 1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or 2) the governor should not give in to the request of the Jews.
"I ask to go before Caesar so he can judge me"
This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as "council" throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: "with his own government advisors"
King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was Agrippa's sister.
This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
"to visit Festus concerning official matters"
"After King Agrippa and Bernice"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here"
Felix was the Roman governor of the area and resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24.
This is a metaphor that means to accuse someone in court. Alternate translation: "spoke to me against this man"
The abstract nouns "sentence" and "condemnation" can be expressed as verbs. The phrase "a sentence of condemnation" implies that they were requesting that Paul be executed. Alternate translation: "they asked me to sentence him to death" or "they asked me to condemn him to death"
Here "hand over" represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: "let someone punish anyone" or "to condemn anyone to death"
Here "faced his accusers" is an idiom that means to meet with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: "before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him"
"Because what I have just said is true." Festus has just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense.
"when the Jewish leaders came to meet with me here"
Here "judgment seat" refers to Festus ruling over Paul's trial as judge. Alternate translation: "I sat upon the seat to act as judge" or "I sat down as judge"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here "religion" means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
To "stand trial" is an idiom meaning to speak to a judge so the judge can decide if a person is right or wrong. Alternate translation: "to go to trial about these charges" or "for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not"
Festus finishes explaining Paul's case to King Agrippa.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody" or "I told the soldiers to guard him"
The phrase "Festus said" can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: "Festus said, 'I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.'"
Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in Acts 25:13.
"with a great ceremony to honor them"
This was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them"
Festus again gives information about Paul's case to King Agrippa.
The word "all" is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: "a great number of the Jews" or "many of the Jewish leaders"
"they spoke very strongly to me"
This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: "he should die immediately"
"because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him"
The emperor was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
Festus used the word "lord" to refer to the emperor. Alternate translation: "to write to the emperor"
Here the first "you" is plural and refers to all the men to whom Festus is speaking. The second "you" is singular and refers to King Agrippa. Alternate translation: "I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa"
"so that I will have something else to write" or "so that I will know what I should write"
The negative words "unreasonable" and "to not ... state" can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "it seems reasonable to me to send a prisoner and to also state"
Possible meanings are 1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or 2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul's case.
1 So Agrippa said to Paul, "You may speak for yourself." Then Paul stretched out his hand and made his defense.
2 "I consider myself happy, King Agrippa, to make my case before you today against all the accusations of the Jews, 3 especially because you are an expert in all the Jewish customs and questions. So I beg you to hear me patiently. 4 Truly, all the Jews know how I lived from my youth in my own nation and at Jerusalem. 5 They have known about me from the beginning, if they are willing to admit it, that I lived as a Pharisee, the strictest party of our religion. 6 Now I stand here to be judged because of my hope in the promise made by God to our fathers. 7 It is this promise that our twelve tribes hope to receive as they worship God earnestly night and day, and it is for this hope, king, that the Jews are accusing me. 8 Why should any of you judge it to be incredible that God raises the dead? 9 Now indeed, I myself thought that I should do many things against the name of Jesus of Nazareth. 10 I did these in Jerusalem. I locked up in prison many of God's holy people by the authority I received from the chief priests; and when they were killed, I cast my vote against them. 11 I punished them many times in all the synagogues and I tried to force them to blaspheme. I was furiously enraged against them and I persecuted them even to foreign cities. 12 While I was doing this, I went to Damascus with authority and orders from the chief priests; 13 and on the way there, in the middle of the day, king, I saw a light from heaven that was brighter than the sun, and it shone around both me and the men who were traveling with me. 14 When we all fell to the ground, I heard a voice speaking to me that said in the Hebrew language, 'Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? It is hard for you to kick a goad.' 15 Then I said, 'Who are you, Lord?' The Lord replied, 'I am Jesus whom you persecute. 16 Now get up and stand on your feet; because for this purpose I appeared to you, to appoint you to be a servant and a witness concerning the things that you know about me now and the things that I will show to you later; 17 and I will rescue you from the people and from the Gentiles to whom I am sending you, 18 to open their eyes and to turn them from darkness to light and from the dominion of Satan to God, so that they may receive from God the forgiveness of sins and the inheritance that I give to them who are sanctified by faith in me.' 19 Therefore, King Agrippa, I did not disobey the heavenly vision; 20 but, to those in Damascus first, and then at Jerusalem, and throughout all the country of Judea, and also to the Gentiles, I gave them the message that that they should repent and turn to God, doing deeds worthy of repentance. 21 For this cause the Jews arrested me in the temple and tried to kill me. 22 Therefore I have received the help that comes from God until this very day, and I stand and testify to both small and great about nothing more than what the prophets and Moses said would happen— 23 that Christ must suffer, and by being the first to rise from the dead he would proclaim light to our own people and to the Gentiles."
24 As Paul completed his defense, Festus said with a loud voice, "Paul, you are insane; your great learning makes you insane." 25 But Paul said, "I am not insane, most excellent Festus, but I am declaring words of truth and sound judgment. 26 For the king knows about these things; and so I speak boldly to him, for I am persuaded that none of this is hidden from him; for this has not been done in a corner. 27 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? I know that you believe." 28 Agrippa said to Paul, "In a short time would you persuade me and make me a Christian?"
29 Paul said, "I pray to God, that whether in a short or long time, not you only, but also all that hear me today, would be like me, but without these prison chains."
30 Then the king stood up, and the governor, and Bernice also, and those who were sitting with them; 31 when they left the hall, they talked to one another and said, "This man does nothing worthy of death or of bonds."
32 Agrippa said to Festus, "This man could have been freed if he had not appealed to Caesar."
This is the third account of Paul's conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul's conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22)
Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: righteous)
Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa.
Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in Acts 25:13.
"held out his hand" or "gestured with his hand"
The abstract noun "defense" can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: "began to defend himself against those who were accusing him"
Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
Paul was happy because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
This phrase means to describe one's situation, so that those in court can discuss and make a decision about it. Alternate translation: "to defend myself"
The abstract noun "accusations" can be stated as the verb "accuse." Alternate translation: "against all the Jews who are accusing me"
This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders"
You can make explicit what kinds of questions this means. Alternate translation: "questions about religious matters"
This is a generalization. Possible meanings are 1) Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: "the Jews" or 2) Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders"
Possible meanings are 1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or 2) in the land of Israel.
"a group within Judaism that lives by very strict rules"
This word marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I am here, where they are putting me on trial"
Here the word "hope" is a person's confident expectation that what he desires really will happen. The abstract noun "hope" can be translated here with the verbs "trust" or "confidently wait." Alternate translation: "because I trust in the promise made by God to our fathers
Hope in a promise is the expectation that the promise will be fulfilled. Alternate translation "because of my hope that God will do what he promised our forefathers he would do" or "because I confidently wait for God to do what he promised our forefather he would do"
This speaks about a promise being fulfilled as if it were an object that is received. Alternate translation: "the promise that our twelve tribes confidently wait for God to fulfill"
The phrase "our twelve tribes" stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: "our fellow Jews in the twelve tribes"
The extremes "night" and "day" are used together to mean consistently mean Alternate translation: "continually worship God earnestly"
Paul is addressing King Agrippa by his title, not by his name. Your language may require that you add another word or part of a word, as in older English "O King," or that you add the king's name, as in "King Agrippa," or that you use another expression such as "Your Majesty."
This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: "that the leaders of the Jews"
Here "you" is plural and refers to the people who were listening to Paul.
Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews there. They believe that God can raise the dead, but they do not believe that God brought Jesus back to life. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: "You should not judge it to be unbelievable that God raises the dead" Or "You should not say that it is impossible to believe that God raises the dead."
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: "makes dead people come alive again"
Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus's people.
The word "name" here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: "to stop people from teaching about Jesus"
The phrase "were killed" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn believers to die"
Possible meanings are 1) Paul punished some believers many times or 2) Paul punished many different believers.
While talking to King Agrippa, Paul tells about when the Lord spoke with him.
Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
Paul had letters from the Jewish leaders granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here "voice" stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: "I heard someone speaking to me who said"
This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. Alternate translation: "Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me." or "Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me."
For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod
Paul continues giving his defense to King Agrippa, quoting his conversation with the Lord.
Paul continues giving his defense to King Agrippa, quoting his conversation with the Lord.
Paul continues giving his defense to King Agrippa, quoting his conversation with the Lord.
Paul continues giving his defense to King Agrippa, quoting his conversation with the Lord.
Paul helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if he were helping them to open their physical eyes. Alternate translation: "to make them able to understand the truth"
Paul convincing people to stop obeying Satan and doing evil things and to start obeying God and doing good things is spoken of as if Paul were taking them out of a dark place where Satan controlled them and into a place where there was light and God controlled them. Alternate translation: "to help them stop doing what is evil, stop obeying Satan, and start trusting and obeying God"
The abstract noun "forgiveness" can be stated as the verb "forgive." Alternate translation: "God may forgive their sins and they may receive"
The abstract noun "inheritance" may be stated as the verb "inherit." Alternate translation: "they may inherit that which I give"
The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that children receive from their father.
Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he literally set them apart from other people.
"because they believe in me." Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord.
"Because what I have just said is true." Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision.
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "I obeyed"
This refers to what the person in the vision told Paul. Alternate translation: "what the person from heaven told me in the vision"
To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: "trust in God"
The abstract noun "repentance" can be stated as the verb "repented." Alternate translation: "and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented"
This does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: "some Jews"
Here "small" and "great" refer to people who are unimportant and important, respectively, and are used together to mean "all people." Alternate translation: "to all people, whether unimportant or important, about nothing"
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "about the exact thing that"
Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament prophets.
Paul finishes giving his defense to King Agrippa.
You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: "that Christ must suffer and die"
The phrase "the dead" refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
"he would proclaim the message about the light." To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: "he would proclaim the message about how God saves people"
Paul and King Agrippa continue to talk together.
"you are speaking nonsense" or "you are crazy"
"you have learned so much that you are now crazy"
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "I am sane ... and" or "I am able to think well ... and"
"Festus, who deserves highest honors"
Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: "For you ... to you ... from you"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I am sure"
This can be stated in active and positive form. Alternate translation: "that he is aware of this" or "that you are aware of this"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "has not happened in a corner"
This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in the corner of a room where no one can see him. Alternate translation: "in a dark place" or "in secret"
Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: "You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa."
Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: "Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!"
Here "prison chains" stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: "but, of course, I do not want you to be a prisoner, as I am"
Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa (Acts 25:13).
This ends Paul's time before King Agrippa.
"Then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus"
This was a large room for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
The abstract noun "death" can be stated as the verb "die." Here "bonds" stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: "This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "This man could have gone free" or "I could have freed this man"
1 When it was decided that we should sail for Italy, they committed Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion named Julius, who belonged to the Augustan company of soldiers. 2 We boarded a ship from Adramyttium which was about to sail along the coast of Asia. So we went to sea. Aristarchus from Thessalonica in Macedonia went with us. 3 The next day we landed at the city of Sidon, where Julius treated Paul kindly and allowed him to go to his friends to receive their care. 4 From there we went to sea and sailed under the lee of Cyprus, close to the island, because the winds were against us. 5 When we had sailed across the sea past Cilicia and Pamphylia, we landed at Myra, a city of Lycia. 6 There, the centurion found a ship from Alexandria that was going to sail to Italy. He put us on it. 7 When we had sailed slowly for many days and had finally arrived with difficulty near Cnidus and the wind no longer allowed us to go that way, we sailed along the sheltered side of Crete, opposite Salmone. 8 We sailed along the coast with difficulty, until we came to a certain place called Fair Havens, which is near the city of Lasea.
9 We had now taken much time, the time of the Jewish fast also had passed, and it had now become dangerous to sail. So Paul warned them, 10 and said, "Men, I see that the voyage we are about to take will be with injury and much loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives." 11 But the centurion was more persuaded by the master and by the owner of the ship than by those things that were spoken by Paul. 12 Because the harbor was not easy to spend the winter in, most of the sailors advised to sail from there, and if by any means we could reach the city of Phoenix, to spend the winter there. Phoenix is a harbor in Crete, facing both southwest and northwest. 13 When a south wind began to blow gently, the sailors thought that they had what they needed. So they weighed anchor and sailed along Crete, close to the shore. 14 But after a short time a wind of hurricane force, called the northeaster, began to beat down from the island. 15 When the ship was caught by the storm and could no longer head into the wind, we had to give way to the storm and were driven along by the wind. 16 We sailed along the lee of a small island called Cauda, and with difficulty we were able to secure the lifeboat. 17 When they had hoisted the lifeboat up, they used its ropes to bind the hull of the ship. They were afraid that they should run upon the sandbars of Syrtis, so they lowered the sea anchor and were driven along. 18 We took such a violent battering by the storm that the next day they began throwing the cargo overboard. 19 On the third day the sailors threw overboard the ship's equipment with their own hands. 20 When the sun and stars did not shine on us for many days, and the great storm still beat upon us, any more hope that we should be saved was abandoned. 21 When they had gone long without food, then Paul stood up among the sailors and said, "Men, you should have listened to me, and not have set sail from Crete, so as to get this injury and loss. 22 Now I urge you to take courage, for there will be no loss of life among you, but only the loss of the ship. 23 For last night an angel of the God to whom I belong, whom also I worship—his angel stood beside me 24 and said, 'Do not be afraid, Paul. You must stand before Caesar, and see, God in his kindness has given to you all those who are sailing with you.' 25 Therefore have courage, men! For I trust God that it will happen just as it was told to me. 26 But we must run aground upon some island."
27 When the fourteenth night had come, as we were driven this way and that in the Adriatic Sea, about midnight the sailors thought that they were approaching some land. 28 They took soundings and found twenty fathoms; after a little while, they took more soundings and found fifteen fathoms. 29 They were afraid that we might crash on the rocks, so they lowered four anchors from the stern and prayed that morning would come soon. 30 The sailors were looking for a way to abandon the ship and had lowered the lifeboat into the sea, and pretended that they would throw down the anchors from the bow. 31 But Paul said to the centurion and to the soldiers, "Unless these men stay in the ship, you cannot be saved." 32 Then the soldiers cut away the ropes of the boat and let it drift away. 33 When daylight was coming on, Paul encouraged them all to take some food. He said, "This day is the fourteenth day that you have been on constant guard and have gone without food—you have not eaten anything. 34 So I urge you to share some food, for this is necessary for you to survive. For not one of you will lose a single hair from his head." 35 When he had said this, he took bread and he thanked God in the sight of everyone. Then he broke the bread and began to eat. 36 Then they were all encouraged and they also took food. 37 We were 276 souls on the ship. 38 When they had eaten enough, they made the ship lighter by throwing out the wheat into the sea. 39 When it was day, they did not recognize the land, but they saw a bay with a beach, and they discussed whether they could drive the ship onto it. 40 So they cut loose the anchors and left them in the sea. At the same time they loosed the ropes of the rudders and raised the foresail to the wind; and so they headed to the beach. 41 But the ship struck a sandbar and ran aground. The bow was stuck there and remained unmovable, and the stern was broken up by the force of the waves. 42 The soldiers' plan was to kill the prisoners so that none of them could swim away and escape. 43 But the centurion wanted to save Paul, so he stopped their plan; and he ordered those who could swim to jump overboard first and get to land. 44 Then the rest of the men should follow, some on planks, and some on other things from the ship. In this way it happened that all of us were brought safely to land.
People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.
Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: trust)
Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. The word "we" includes the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader.
Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When the king and the governor decided"
Italy is the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated "Italy" in Acts 18:2.
"they put a centurion named Julius, of the Imperial Regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners"
Possible meanings are that 1) "they" refers to the governor and the king or 2) "they" refers to other Roman officials.
Julius is a man's name.
Some versions translate the word Augustan as "Imperial" or "emperor's."
This was a group of about 1,00 soldiers. See how you translated this in Acts 21:31.
If your language requires a person to act here, you can add human actors: "We boarded a ship that people had brought from Adramyttium; they were about to sail it along."
Possible meanings are 1) a ship that had come from Adramyttium or 2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
"soon going to sail" or "would depart soon"
"began our journey on the sea"
Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in Acts 19:29.
Here the word "we" refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
"Julius treated Paul with a friendly concern." See how you translated "Julius" in Acts 27:1.
The abstract noun "care" can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: "go to his friends so they could care for him" or "go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed"
"we started sailing and went"
"the lee of Cyprus" is the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so sailing vessels are not forced off their course.
This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
You can make explicit that they got off of the ship in Myra. Alternate translation: "came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship"
Lycia was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey.
It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: "found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy"
This is the name of a city.
You can make explicit that the reason they were sailing slowly and with difficulty was because the wind was blowing against them.
This is an ancient settlement located in modern-day Turkey.
"we could no longer go that way because of the strong wind"
"we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind"
This is a coastal city in Crete.
You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult.
This was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete.
This is a coastal city in Crete.
Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
The writer includes himself, Paul, and those who were traveling with them, but not the reader.
This fast took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
"if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss"
If your language has a word for "injury" that results from wrongdoing, you may want to use it here.
Paul includes himself and his hearers, so this is inclusive.
Here "loss" means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
Cargo is something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: "not only the ship and the goods on the ship"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that Paul said"
You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: "harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms"
a place near land that is usually safe for ships
Phoenix was a port city on the south coast of Crete.
This speaks about the season of winter as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: "to stay there for the cold season"
Here "faces northwest and southwest" means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: "it opened to the northwest and southwest"
These directions are based on what one sees as one faces the setting sun. Northwest is a little to the right of the setting sun, and southwest is a little to the left of the setting sun.
Here "weighed" means "pulled out of the water." An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea to keep the ship from drifting about.
Paul and those traveling on the boat encounter a fierce storm.
"after a little while"
"a very strong, dangerous wind"
"called 'a strong wind from the northeast.'" The word for "the northeaster" in the original language is "Euroclydon." You can transliterate this word for your language.
"came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship"
"When the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew"
"We sailed on the side of the island where the wind was not so strong"
This island was located on the south coast of Crete.
This was a smaller boat towed behind or secured onto a ship, used to take people and goods across water too shallow for the ship and also to escape from the ship if it sank. At this point the lifeboat was in the water being towed by the ship.
"they had lifted up the lifeboat" or "they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship"
The "hull" is the body of the ship. They tied ropes around it so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
Sandbars are very shallow areas in the sea where ships can get stuck in the sand. Syrtis is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa.
A sea anchor is something that is towed in the water behind a ship to slow the ship down and make it more stable. It may be a large cloth or a stiff board. Alternate translation: "they let the floating anchor down into the water"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "had to go in whatever direction the wind blew us"
"The wind blew us so roughly back and forth that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm"
The word "they" refers to the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
Cargo is something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in Acts 27:10. Alternate translation: "goods on the ship"
Here "equipment" refers to the sailors' equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
They could not see the sun and stars because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
"the terrible storm still blew us roughly back and forth"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "everyone abandoned hope that we would be saved"
Here the word "hope" is a person's thought that what he desires might happen. Here the men on the boat had no reason to believe that they would be rescued, so they quit hoping. Alternate translation: "we quit thinking that we might be saved"
"be rescued." Since there is no mention of the people praying for God to save them, this might simply have the sense of "survive."
Paul speaks to the sailors on the ship.
Here "they" refers to the sailors. It is implied that Luke, Paul, and those with them had not eaten either. Alternate translation: "When we had gone a long time without food"
"among the men"
"and as a result suffer this harm and loss"
Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: "none of us will die: the storm will destroy only the ship"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
The phrase "stand before Caesar" refers to Paul's going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: "You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you"
"has decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "just as the angel told me"
"we must steer our boat so that it wrecks on some island"
The fierce storm continues.
The ordinal number "fourteenth" can be translated as "fourteen" or "14." Alternate translation: "After 14 days since the storm started, that night"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "as the wind blew us back and forth"
This is the sea between Italy and Greece.
"They measured the depth of the sea water." They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water.
"found 20 fathoms." A "fathom" is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: "found 40 meters"
"found 15 fathoms." A "fathom" is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: "found 30 meters"
An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
"from the back of the ship"
This was a smaller boat towed behind or secured onto a ship, used to take people and goods across water too shallow for the ship and also to escape from the ship if it sank. See how you translated this in Acts 27:16.
"from the front of the ship"
Here the word "you" is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers.
Paul meant that if those men left the ship, then no one on the ship would be saved. This can be stated positively, and the passive phrase "be saved" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "You can be saved only if these men stay in the ship" or "Only if these men stay in the ship will you survive"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"When it was almost sunrise"
The ordinal number "fourteenth" can be stated as "fourteen." Alternate translation: "For 14 days"
This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: "every one of you will survive this disaster unharmed"
"tore the bread" or "tore off a piece from the loaf of bread"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "This encouraged all of them"
"There were two hundred and seventy-six of us in the ship." This is background information.
This is a metonym for the people themselves. Alternate translation: "people"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
a large area of water partly surrounded by land
"saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew"
"cut the ropes and left the anchors behind"
large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering
"the sail at the front of the ship." The sail was a large piece of cloth that caught the wind to move the ship.
"they steered the ship toward the beach"
an underwater pile of sand that made the water suddenly shallow
the front end of the ship
"the back end of the ship"
"The soldiers were planning"
"so he stopped them from doing what they planned to do"
"jump off the ship into the water"
"some on wooden boards"
1 When we were brought safely through, we learned that the island was called Malta. 2 The native people offered to us not just ordinary kindness, but they lit a fire and welcomed us all because of the constant rain and cold. 3 But when Paul had gathered a bundle of sticks and placed them on the fire, a viper came out because of the heat and fastened onto his hand. 4 When the native people saw the animal hanging from his hand, they said one to another, "This man certainly is a murderer who has been saved from the sea; Justice does not permit him to live." 5 But then he shook the animal into the fire and suffered no harm. 6 They were waiting for him to swell up or suddenly fall down dead. But after they watched him for a long time and saw that nothing was wrong with him, they changed their minds and said that he was a god.
7 Now in a nearby place there were lands belonging to the chief man of the island, a man named Publius. He welcomed us and kindly provided for us for three days. 8 It happened that the father of Publius was lying afflicted with a fever and dysentery. When Paul went to him, he prayed, placed his hands on him, and healed him. 9 After this happened, the rest of the people on the island who were sick also came and were healed. 10 The people also honored us with many honors. When we were preparing to sail, they gave us what we needed.
11 After three months we set sail in a ship that had spent the winter at the island, a ship of Alexandria, with "the twin gods" as its figurehead. 12 After we landed at the city of Syracuse, we stayed there three days. 13 From there we sailed and arrived at the city of Rhegium. After one day a south wind sprang up, and in two days we came to the city of Puteoli. 14 There we found some brothers and were invited to stay with them for seven days. In this way we came to Rome. 15 From there the brothers, after they heard about us, came to meet us as far as the Market of Appius and the Three Taverns. When Paul saw the brothers, he thanked God and took courage.
16 When we entered Rome, Paul was allowed to live by himself with the soldier who was guarding him.
17 Then it came about that after three days Paul called together those men who were the leaders among the Jews. When they had come together, he said to them, "Brothers, although I have done nothing wrong against the people or the customs of our fathers, I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans. 18 After they questioned me, they wished to set me free, because there was no reason for the death penalty in my case. 19 But when the Jews spoke against their desire, I was forced to appeal to Caesar, although it is not as if I were bringing any accusation against my nation. 20 For this reason, therefore, I called upon you that I might see you and speak with you, since it is because of the hope of Israel that I am now wearing this chain."
21 Then they said to him, "We neither received letters from Judea about you, nor did any of the brothers come and report or say anything bad about you. 22 But we want to hear from you what you think about this sect, because it is known by us that it is spoken against everywhere."
23 When they had appointed a day for him, more people came to him at his dwelling place. He presented the matter to them, and testified about the kingdom of God. He tried to persuade them about Jesus, both from the law of Moses and from the prophets, from morning until evening. 24 Some were convinced about the things which were said, while others did not believe. 25 When they did not agree with one another, they left after Paul had spoken this one word: "The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your fathers.
26 He said, 'Go to this people and say,
"Hearing you will hear, but you will never understand;
seeing, you will see, but you will never know.
27 For the heart of this people has become dull,
and with their ears they hardly hear,
and they have shut their eyes.
Otherwise they might see with their eyes,
and hear with their ears,
and understand with their heart and turn again,
and I would heal them."'
28 Therefore, you should know that this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles, and they will listen." 29[1]
30 Paul lived for two whole years in his own rented house, and he welcomed all who came to him. 31 He was proclaiming the kingdom of God and was teaching the things about the Lord Jesus Christ with all boldness without being hindered.
No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.
The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.
When the Jewish leaders spoke of "brothers," they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.
The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
Here the word "we" refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader.
After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When we arrived safely"
Paul and Luke learned the name of the island. Alternate translation: "we learned from the people" or "we found out from the residents"
Malta is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily.
"The local people"
Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: "were not only very kind to us"
This phrase is used to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: "a great deal of kindness"
"they put together twigs and branches and burned them"
Possible meanings are 1) "welcomed all of the people from the ship" or 2) "welcomed Paul and all his companions."
"a poisonous snake came out of the bundle of sticks"
"bit Paul's hand and did not let go"
"For sure, this man is a murderer" or "This man is truly a murderer"
"Justice" was the name of a goddess that the people on the island worshiped. Alternate translation: "the goddess called Justice"
"shook his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire"
"Paul was not hurt at all"
They they that his body would swell because of the snake venom.
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "everything about him was as it should be"
To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: "they thought again"
Perhaps the people believed that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god. This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: "said, 'This man must be a god.'"
Here the words "us" and we" refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
"Now" is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
Possible meanings are 1) the main leader of the people or 2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
This is background information about Publius' father that is important to understanding the story.
"was in bed, ill"
Dysentery is an infectious disease of the intestines.
"touched him with his hands"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he healed them too"
Probably they honored Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
Paul's journey to Rome continues.
"that the crew left at the island for the cold season"
Possible meanings are this refers to 1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or 2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
On the bow of the ship, there was a carving of the two idols called "the twin gods." Their names were Castor and Pollux.
Syracuse is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy.
This is the port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy.
"the wind began to blow from the south"
Puteoli is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy.
"There we met"
These were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: "fellow believers"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they invited us"
Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey to Rome was on land. Alternate translation: "And after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome"
The Market of Appius was a popular market village about 60 kilometers south of the city of Rome on a road called the Appian Way. The Three Taverns was another village about 50 kilometers south of Rome.
"after they heard we were coming"
Courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: "this encouraged him, and he thanked God"
Here the word "we" refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.
Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "After we had arrived in Rome, the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to"
This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
These are the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
Here this means "Fellow Jews."
"against our people" or "against the Jews"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities"
Here "hands" stands for power or control.
"there was no reason for them to execute me" or "I had done nothing to cause them to kill me"
This does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: "the Jewish leaders"
"complained about what the Roman authorities wanted to do"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I had to ask for Caesar to judge me"
The abstract noun "accusation" can be stated as the verb "accuse." Here "nation" stands for the people. Alternate translation: "but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar"
Here the word "hope" is what a person desires to happen and is confident will happen. In this case it is what the people of Israel hope for. Alternate translation: "what Israel joyfully waits for" or "what the people of Israel confidently expect"
Paul did not state clearly what Israel hoped for. He may have been referring 1) to their hope that the Messiah would come or 2) to their hope that God would cause those who have died to live again.
Here "Israel" stands for the people. Alternate translation: "the people of Israel" or "the Jews"
Here "wearing this chain" stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: "that I am a prisoner"
Here the word "We" refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
The Jewish leaders respond to Paul.
Here "brothers" stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: "nor did any of our fellow Jews"
Here the words "we" and "us" refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
A sect is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: "you think about this group to which you belong"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "because we know"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it"
Here all instances of "they" and "them" refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome. All instances of "him," "his," and "He" refer to Paul (Acts 28:17).
"had chosen a time for him to speak to them"
Here "kingdom of God" stands for God's rule as king. Alternate translation: "told them about God's rule as king" or "told them how God would show himself as king"
Here "the prophets" refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: "from what the prophets wrote"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Paul was able to convince some of them"
Here the word "they" refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome (Acts 28:17). The word "your" refers to the people to whom Paul had been speaking.
As the Jewish leaders were ready to leave, Paul quoted the Old Testament scriptures that were appropriate for this time.
Here "word" stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: "after Paul had said one more thing" or "after Paul had made this statement"
This sentence contains quotations within quotations.
Paul begins to quote the book that the prophet Isaiah wrote.
This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words "The Holy Spirit spoke" in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: "The Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not know"
The words "hear" and "see" are repeated for emphasis. "You will listen carefully ... you will look intently"
Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God's plan.
Translate Paul's quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or an indirect quotation according to how you translated it in Acts 28:25-26.
Paul finishes quoting Isaiah the prophet.
People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. Here "heart" is a metonym for the mind.
People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will not see.
Here "heart" stands for the mind.
To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically turning toward God.
This does not mean God would only heal them physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
God's message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them"
"some of them will listen." This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time responded.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts.
Here "kingdom of God" refers to God's rule as king. Alternate translation: "He was preaching about God's rule as king" or "He was preaching about how God will show himself as king"
1 Kitabu cha zamani nilikiandika, Theofilo, nikisema yote Yesu aliyoanza kufanya na kufundisha, 2 mpaka siku ambayo Yeye alipokelewa juu. Hii ilikuwa baada ya kutoa amri kupitia Roho Mtakatifu kwa mitume aliokuwa amewachagua. 3 Baada ya mateso yake, Yeye alionekana kwao akiwa hai pia na vithibitisho vingi vikishuhudia. Kwa siku arobaini alijidhihirisha kwao, na alizungumza kuhusu ufalme wa Mungu. 4 Alipokuwa akikutana pamoja nao, aliwaamuru wasiondoke Yerusalemu, lakini wasubiri kwa ajili ya ahadi ya Baba, ambayo, alisema, "Mlisikia kutoka kwangu 5 kwamba Yohana alibatiza kabisa kwa maji, lakini mtabatizwa kwa Roho Mtakatifu katika siku hizi chache." 6 Na walipokuwa wamekutanika pamoja walimuuliza, "Bwana, hivi huu ndio muda utakaowarudishia Israeli ufalme?" 7 Yeye akawaambia, "Siyo sawa kwenu kujua wakati au majira ambayo Baba amekusudia kwa mamlaka yake mwenyewe." 8 Lakini mtapokea nguvu, wakati Roho Mtakatifu atakapokuja juu yenu, na ninyi mtakuwa mashahidi wangu kote katika Yerusalemu na Uyahudi yote na Samaria mpaka mwisho wa nchi." 9 Bwana Yesu alipokwisha yasema haya, wakiwa wanatazama juu, Yeye aliinuliwa juu, na wingu likamfunika wasimwone kwa macho yao. 10 Wakati wanatazama mbinguni kwa makini akienda, ghafla, watu wawili walisimama katikati yao wamevaa mavazi meupe. 11 Walisema, "Enyi watu wa Galilaya, kwa nini mnasimama hapa mkitazama mbinguni?" Huyu Yesu aliyepaa juu mbinguni atarudi kwa namna ile ile kama mlivyomuona akienda mbinguni. 12 Ndipo wakarudi Yerusalemu kutoka kwenye mlima wa mizeituni, ambao uko karibu na Yerusalemu, mwendo wa siku ya Sabato. 13 Walipofika walikwenda ghorofani walikokuwa wakikaa. Nao ni Petro, Yohana, Yakobo, Andrea, Filipo, Thomaso, Batholomayo, Mathayo, Yakobo Mwana wa Alfayo, Simoni Zelote na Yuda Mwana wa Yakobo. 14 Wote waliungana kama mtu mmoja, kwa juhudi walikuwa wakiendelea katika maombi. Pamoja na hao walikuwepo wanawake, Mariamu Mama yake Yesu, na kaka zake. 15 Katika siku zile Petro alisimama katikati ya ndugu, kama watu 120, akasema, 16 Ndugu, ilikuwa lazima kwamba maandiko yatimizwe, ambapo zamani Roho Mtakatifu alisema kwa kinywa cha Daudi kuhusiana na Yuda, ambaye aliwaelekeza wale waliomkamata Yesu. 17 Kwa kuwa yeye alikuwa mmoja wetu na alipokea fungu lake la faida katika hii huduma." 18 (Sasa mtu huyu alinunua eneo kwa kile alichokipokea kwa uovu wake na hapo alianguka akitanguliza kichwa, mwili ukapasuka na matumbo yake yote yakawa wazi yakamwagika. 19 Wote walioishi Yerusalemu walisikia kuhusu hili, hivyo eneo hilo wakaliita kwa lugha yao "Akeldama" hilo ni "shamba la damu.") 20 "Kwenye kitabu cha Zaburi imeandikwa, 'Ngoja eneo lake liwe hame na isiruhusiwe hata mmoja kuishi pale;' na, 'Ruhusu mtu mwingine achukue nafasi yake ya uongozi.' 21 Hiyo ni muhimu, kwa hiyo, mmoja wa wanaume ambao waliambatana nasi wakati Bwana Yesu alipotoka na kuingia kati yetu, 22 kuanzia kwenye ubatizo wa Yohana mpaka siku ile alipotwaliwa juu, lazima awe shahidi wa ufufuo pamoja nasi. 23 "Wakaweka mbele wanaume wawili, Yusufu aitwaye Barnaba, ambaye pia aliitwa Yusto na Mathia. 24 Wao waliomba wakisema, "Wewe, Bwana, ujuaye mioyo ya watu wote, hivyo weka wazi yupi kati ya wawili hawa ambaye umemchagua 25 kuchukua nafasi katika huduma na utume, ambapo Yuda alitenda uovu na kwenda mahali pake." 26 Wakapiga kura kwa ajili yao, na kura ikamwangukia Mathia ambaye alihesabiwa pamoja na wale mitume kumi na moja.
Sura hii inarekodi tukio,kawaida linajulikana kama "kupaa", wakati Yesu alirudi mbinguni baada ya ufufuko wake. Hatarudi tena mpaka "Ujio wake wa pili." and ).
Toleo la UDB limeweka maneno "Kwa mpendwa Theofila" kando na maneno mengine. Hii ni kwa sabau Waiingereza huanza kuandika barua namna hivi. Unaeza anza kitabu hiki jinzi watu huanza kuandika waraka katika mila yako.
Tafsiri zingine zinanukuu kutoka Agano la Kale kwenye kulia kwa ukurasa kuliko maandiko yote kwa jumla. ULB hufanya hivi kupitia nukuu mbili kutoka Zaburi 1:20
Neno "batiza" lina maana mbili katika sura huu. Inaashiria ubatizo wa Yohana na ubatizo wa Roho Mtakatifu
Wasomi wengine huamini kuwa wakati Yesu "alipozungumzuia kuhusu ufalme wa Mungu," aliwaeleza wanafunzi wake ni kwa nini ufalme wa Mungu haukuja kabla ya kifo chake. Wengine huamini kwamba ufalme wa Mungu ulianza wakati Yesu alikuwa hai na ya kwamba hapa Yesu alikuwa anafafanua kwamba huu ulikuwa mwanzo kwa umbo jipya.
yafuatayo ni majina ya wanafunzi kumi na wawili
Katika Injili ya Matayo
Wa kwanza Simoni aliyeitwa Petro, na Andrea nduguye; Yakobo wa Zebedayo, na Yohana nduguye; Filipo, na Bartholomayo; Tomaso, na Mathayo mtoza ushuru; Yakobo wa Alfayo, na Thadayo;Simoni Mkananayo, na Yuda Iskariote
Katika injili ya Marko
Simoni (Petro),Andrea,na Yakobo, mwana wa Zebedayo, na Yohana nduguye Yakobo, akawapa jina la Boanerge, maana yake, wana wa ngurumo; na Filipo, na Bartholomayo, na Mathayo, na Tomaso, na Yakobo wa Alfayo, na Thadayo, na Simoni Mkananayo, na Yuda Iskariote.
Katika injili ya Luka
Simoni(Petero),Andrea,Yakobo,Yohana,Filipo,Bartholomayo,Matayo,Tomaso,Yakobo wa Alfayo,Simoni Mkananayo,Yuda wa Yakobo na Yuda Iskariote.
Kuna uwezekano ya kwamba Thadayo na Yuda wa Yakobo ni mtu mmoja
Hili ni neno la Kihebrania au Kiaramaiki. Luka alitumia maneno ya Kigiriki ili wasomaji wake wajue lilivyotamkua,kisha akawaeleza maana yake. Unatakikana kulitamka jinsi linalatamkwa kwa lugha yako kisha ukaeleza maana yake.
Luka anaelezea ni kwasababu gani anamwandikia Theofilo
Kitabu cha zamani ni Injili ya Luka.
Luka aliandika kitabu hiki kwa mtu anayeitwa Theofilo. Baadhi ya watafsiri hufuata mfumo wa tamaduni zao za kuelezea barua na huandika "Mpendwa Theofilo" mwanzoni mwa sentensi. Theofilo humaanisha "rafiki wa Mungu.
Hii inarejesha kwenye kupaa kwa Yesu mbinguni
Roho Mtakatifu alimwongoza Yesu kuwaelekeza mitume wake juu ya vitu fulani.
Hii inahusu mateso ya Yesu na kifo chake msalabani.
Yesu alionekana kwa mitume wake na kwa wanafunzi wengi wengine.
Tukio hili lilitukia wakati wa siku arobaini ambazo Yesu alionekana kwao baada ya Yeye kufufuka toka katika wafu.
Wakati Yesu alipokutana pamoja na mitume wake.
Roho Mtakatifu ambaye Baba aliahidi kumtuma.
Roho Mtakatifu ambaye Yesu alisema habari zake.
Yesu anatofautisha ubatizo wa Yohana wa maji, na ule ubatizo wa Mungu ambao utakuwa ni wa Roho Mtakatifu.
"Yohana hasa alibatiza watu kwa maji"
"Mungu atawabatiza ninyi"
"Sasa Utafanya Israeli taifa lenye nguvu tena?"
"nyakati au tarehe"
Mitume watapokea nguvuitakayowasaidia kumshuhudia Yesu. "Mungu atawatia nguvi... kuwa mashahidi wake.
"kote duniani" au" mpaka sehemu za mbali sana za dunia"
"mitume wakiwa wanaangalia juu mawinguni" wakati Yesu akiinuliwa na mawingu kwenda juu.
Mungu alimwinua juu ya anga
" na wingu liliwazuia kumwona hivyo wasingelimwona tena"
"Kutazama mawinguni" au "kukaza macho kwenye mawingu"
Malaika anazungumza na mitume kama watu waliotoka Galilaya.
Yesu atarudi katika mawingu , kama ilivyokuwa wakati wa kupaa kwake kwenda mbinguni.
"Mitume wakarudi"
Hii inaelezea umbali ambao kutokana na desturi za walimu wa sheria wa kiyahudi, mtu aliruhusiwa kutembea mwendo wa sabato ambao yapata kilomita moja hivi.
"Walipofika mwisho wa safari yao. Mstari wa 12 unasema, "Ndipo wakarudi Yerusalemu kutoka kwenye mlima wa mizeituni"
"chumba ambacho kipo juu kwenye nyumba"
Kikundi kiliungana na hakikuwa na mgawanyiko au migongano.
Wanafunzi waliomba kwa pamoja kwa kawaida na mara kwa mara.
Tukio hili lilitukia wakati Petro na waumini wengine walikuwa pamoja katika chumba cha juu.
Maneno haya yanaashiria mwanzo mpya wa historia. Yanaelezea kipindi baada ya Yesu kupaa na wakati wanafunzi wakiwa katika chumba cha juu wamekutanika kuomba.
Neno "ndugu" Linaelezea ndugu waumini likiunganisha wanawake kwa wanaume.
Yale mambo tunayoyasoma katika maandiko lazima yatimizwe
Neno "kinywa" Linaelezea yale maneno aliyoyasema Daudi.
Katika mstari 17 Petro anaendelea na hotuba yake kwa waumini.
Ingawa Petro anaongea na kundi lote la waumini waliokuwa chumba cha juu, lakini neno "sisi" analitumia kwa kuwataja mitume pekee waliotembea, kuketi, kuongea na Yesu tangu mwanzo wa huduma yake hadi kupaa kwake mbinguni.
Neno "mtu huyu" linaelezea juu ya Yuda Iskariote.
"pesa alizopokea ni malipo ya ya uovu alioufanya"
Kuanguka kwa Yuda kulisababisha mwili wake kupasuka na matumbo kumwagika.
Watu waliokuwa wakiishi Yerusalemu waliposikia habari za Yuda na kifo chake, wakaliita jina lile shamba lililonunuliwa kwa fedha hizo kuwa ni shamba la damu.
Petro anaendeleza hotuba yake kwa waumini ambayo alikuwa ameianza.
Ujumbe wake unasimulia vile Yuda alivyotenda akiunganisha na unabii wa maandiko, Petro anarejea ujumbe katika kitabu cha Zaburi kwamba anaamini inahusiana na tukio hilo.
Petro anathibitisha kuwa, "Daudi aliandika katika kitabu cha Zaburi".
Ni hali ya eneo kuachwa ukiwa kutokana na chanzo cha historia yake.
Kiwanja ni najisi (mwiko/haramu) au haifai kuishi juu yake.
"Anaweza akarithiwa katika nafasi ya uongozi"
Petro anamaliza hotuba yake kwa waumini aliyoianza
Neno "sisi" Petro analitumia akimaanisha mitume na siyo waumini wote.
Petro anawaambia mtu atakayechukua nafasi awe na sifa hizo.
Petro anafafanua sifa kwaajili ya mtu ambaye atamrithi Yuda kama mtume.
Walipendekeza majina ya watu wawili waliokuwa na sifa sawa na hotuba ya Petro.
Yusufu pia alijulikana kwa majina Barsaba na Yusto alitwaa nafasi iliyokuwa imeachwa wazi na Yuda Iskariote.
"Ndipo waumini waliomba" Inamaanisha wote waliokuwemo chumba cha juu waliomba, pengine kwa kuongozwa na mtume mmoja.
"Bwana, Wewe wajua msukumo wa ndani na mawazo ya kila mmoja"
"Kwa sababu hiyo, Mungu, tuoneshe sisi yupi kwenye watu hawa wawili umemteua kujaza nafasi hii wazi katika matume"
Nafasi iliachwa wazi sababu Yuda alimsaliti Yesu, aliondoka, na akafa.
Walitumia kura kuamua kati ya Yusufu na Mathiasi
Kura iliashiria kwamba Mathiasi alikuwa amechaguliwa kuchukua nafasi ya Yuda
"wanafunzi walimchukulia kuwa ni mmoja wa mitume"
1 Ilipofika siku ya Pentekoste, wote walikuwa pamoja sehemu moja. 2 Ghafla ikatokea muungurumo kutoka mbinguni kama upepo mkali. ukaijaza nyumba yote walimokuwa wameketi. 3 Hapo zikawatokea ndimi, kama ndimi za moto zimegawanyika, zikawa juu yao kila mmoja wao. 4 Wao wote wakajazwa na Roho Mtakatifu na wakaanza kusema kwa lugha zingine, kama vile Roho alivyowajalia kusema. 5 Sasa walikuwapo wayahudi waliokuwa wanaishi Yerusalemu, wacha Mungu, kutoka kila taifa chini ya mbingu. 6 Ngurumo hizi ziliposikiwa, kundi la watu likaja pamoja na wakiwa na wasiwasi kwa sababu kila mtu aliwasikia wakiongea kwa lugha yake mwenyewe. 7 waliduwaa na kushangazwa, wao walisema, "Kweli, hawa wote wanaoongea siyo Wagalilaya? 8 Kwa nini sisi tunawasikia, kila mmoja katika lugha tulizozaliwa nazo? 9 Waparthia na Wamedi na Waelamu, na hao waishio Mesopotamia, Uyahudi, na Kapadokia, na katika Ponto na Asia, 10 katika Frigia, Pamfilia, katika Misri, na sehemu ya Libya hata Kirene, na wageni kutoka Rumi, 11 Wayahudi na waongofu, Wakrete na Waarabu, tunawasikia wakizungumza katika lugha zetu kuhusu kazi za uweza wa Mungu." 12 Wote walikuwa wameduwaa na kutatanishwa; walisemezana wao kwa wao, "Hii ina maana gani?" 13 Lakini wengine walidhihaki wakisema, "Hawa wamejazwa kwa mvinyo mpya." 14 Lakini Petro akasimama pamoja na wale kumi na mmoja, akapaza sauti, akawaambia, "Watu wa Yudea na wote mnaoishi hapa Yerusalemu, hili lijulikane kwenu, sikilizeni kwa makini maneno yangu. 15 Watu hawa hawajalewa kama mnavyodhani, sababu saa hizi ni asubuhi saa tatu. 16 Lakini hili lilikuwa limesemwa kupitia kwa nabii Yoeli: 17 Itakuwa katika siku za mwisho; Mungu asema, nitamwaga Roho wangu kwa watu wote. Wana wenu na binti zenu watatoa unabii, vijana wenu wataona maono, na wazee wenu wataota ndoto. 18 Vilevile juu ya watumishi wangu na watumishi wangu wa kike katika siku hizo, nitamwaga Roho wangu, nao watatabiri. 19 Nitaonesha maajabu juu angani na ishara chini duniani, damu, moto, na mafusho ya moshi. 20 Na jua litabadilishwa kuwa giza na mwezi kuwa damu, kabla haijaja siku kuu na ya ajabu ya Bwana. 21 itakuwa ya kwamba kila mmoja ambaye huliitia jina la Bwana ataokoka.' 22 Watu wa Israeli, sikieni maneno haya: Yesu wa Nazareti, mwanadamu aliyethibitishwa na Mungu kwenu kwa matendo ya uweza na maajabu, na ishara ambazo Mungu kupitia Yeye katikati yenu, kama ninyi wenyewe mnavyojua- 23 Kwa sababu ya mpango uliokusudiwa tangu mwanzo, na maarifa ya Mungu, alitolewa, na ninyi, kwa mikono ya watu wahalifu, mlimsulibisha na kumuua, 24 ambaye Mungu alimwinua, akauondoa uchungu wa mauti kwake, kwasababu haikuwezekana kwake kumilikiwa na huo. 25 Hivyo Daudi anasema kuhusu yeye, 'Nilimwona Bwana daima mbele ya uso wangu, yeye yuko mkono wangu wa kulia hivyo basi sitasogezwa. 26 Kwa hiyo moyo wangu ulikuwa na furaha na ulimi wangu ulifurahishwa. Pia mwili wangu utaishi katika ujasiri. 27 Hutaiacha nafsi yangu iende kuzimu, wala hutaruhusu Mtakatifu wako kuona uozo. 28 Wewe umedhihirisha kwangu njia za uzima; utanifanya nijae furaha mbele ya uso wako.' 29 Ndugu, ninaweza kuzungumza kwenu kwa ujasiri kuhusu baba yetu Daudi: yeye alikufa na akazikwa, na kaburi lake liko pamoja nasi hata hivi leo. 30 Hivyo, alikuwa nabii na alijua kuwa Mungu alishaapa kwa kiapo kwake, kwamba ataweka mmoja katika uzao wake kwenye kiti cha enzi. 31 Aliliona hili mapema, na akasema kuhusu ufufuo wa Kristo, 'wala alikuwa hakuachwa kuzimu, wala mwili wake haukuoza.' 32 Huyu Yesu - Mungu alimfufua, ambaye sisi wote ni mashahidi. 33 Kwa hiyo, akiwa ameinuliwa katika mkono wa kuume wa Mungu, na akiwa amepokea ahadi ya Roho Mtakatifu kutoka kwa Baba, yeye amemimina hii ahadi, ambaye ninyi mnaona na kusikia. 34 Kwani Daudi hakupaa kwenda mbinguni, lakini anasema, 'BWANA alisema kwa Bwana wangu, 35 "keti mkono wangu wa kulia, mpaka nitakapowafanya adui zako kigoda kwa ajili ya miguu yako. 36 Kwa hiyo nyumba yote ya Israeli na ijue kwa hakika kwamba Mungu amemfanya Yeye kuwa Bwana na Kristo, huyu Yesu ambaye mlimsulibisha." 37 Sasa waliposikia hivyo, wakachomwa katika mioyo yao, wakamwambia Petro na mitume wengine, "Ndugu, tufanyeje?" 38 Na Petro akawaambia, "Tubuni na Mbatizwe, kila mmoja wenu, katika jina la Yesu Kristo kwa ajili ya msamaha wa dhambi zenu, na mtapokea zawadi ya Roho Mtakatifu. 39 Kwani kwenu ni ahadi na kwa watoto wenu na kwa wale wote walioko mbali, watu wengi kwa kadri Bwana Mungu wetu atakavyowaita." 40 Kwa maneno mengi alishuhudia na kuwasihi; alisema, "Jiokoeni mtoke katika kizazi hiki kiovu." 41 Ndipo wakayapokea maneno yake na wakabatizwa, hapo wakaongezeka katika siku hiyo kama nafsi elfu tatu. 42 Wakaendelea katika mafundisho ya mitume na ushirikiano, katika kuumega mkate na katika maombi. 43 Hofu ikaja juu ya kila nafsi, na maajabu mengi na ishara zikafanyika kupitia mitume. 44 Wote walioamini walikuwa pamoja na kuwa na vitu vyao kwa pamoja, 45 na waliuza vitu na milki zao na kugawanya kwa wote kulingana na hitaji la kila mmoja. 46 Hivyo siku baada ya siku waliendelea wakiwa na lengo moja katika hekalu, na walimega mkate kwenye kaya, na walishiriki chakula kwa furaha na unyenyekevu wa moyo; 47 walimsifu Mungu na wakiwa na kibali na watu wote. Bwana aliwaongeza siku kwa siku ambao walikuwa wakiokolewa.
Tafsiri zingine zimesongeza kila mstari wa ushairi mbali kulia kuliko maandiko mengine ili isomeke kwa urahisi. ULB hufanya hivi kutumia ushairi ulionukuliwa kutoka Agano La Kale katika 2:17-21,25-28 na 34-35.
Tafsiri zingine zimenukuu kutoka Agano la Kale katika mkono wa kulia wa ukurasa mbali na maandishi mengine. ULB hufanya hivi kutumia nukuu ya 2:31
Matukio yanayofafanuliwa katika sura hii huitwa "Pentekoste." Watu wengi huamini kwamba kanisa lilianza wakati Roho Mtakatifu alikuja kuishi ndani ya waumini katika sura hii.
Neno "ndimi" lina maana mbili katika sura hii. Luka anaelezea kilichoshuka kutoka mbinguni (Matendo 2:3) kama kilichofanana na ndimi za moto. Hii ni tofauti na "ulimi wa mwale," ambao ni moto unaofanana na ulimi. Luka pia anatumia neno "ndimi" kuelezea lugha walizozungumza watu baadaya kujazwa na Roho Mtakatifu (Matendo 2:4-6).
Hakuna ajuaye wakati "Siku za mwisho"
Neno "batiza" katika sura hii linaashiria ubatizo wa Wakristo .
Utabiri mwingi wa Yoeli ulitimilika katika siku ya Pentekoste
Haya maneno yanaashiria mambo ambayo Mungu pekee yake angeyatenda kuonyesha kwamba Yesu ndiye yule wanafunzi wake walinena juu yake.
Hili ni tukio jipya; hii sasa ni siku ya Pentekoste, siku 50 baada ya pasaka.
Neno "wao" huenda linarejea kwenye kundi la mitume na waumini wengine 120 ambao walikuwa pamoja katika. Luka 1:15 ametaja vile.
Neno hili linatumika hapa kuonesha tukio lililotokea pasipo kutegemea.
"kelele ilitokea mawinguni mahali pa makao ya Mungu"
"kama uvumi wa upepo wa nguvu sana" au kama mvumo wa nguvu"
Hii inaweza ikawa nyumba au jengo kubwa.
Hizi si ndimi hasa au moto 1) ndimi zilizoonekana kama za moto au 2) mwale mdogo wa moto ulioonekana kama ndimi wakati unawaka katika sehemu ndogo, kama vile chemli , mwale unaweza ukajitengeneza kama ulimi.
Hii inaweza kutafsiriwa kama kitenzi tendaji. Roho Mtakatifu aliwajaze wote waliokuwa kwenye hicho chumba.
Mstari wa 5 unatoa taarifa ya nyuma kuhusu idadi kubwa ya wayahudi ambao walikuwa wanaishi Yerusalemu, wengi wao walikuwapo wakati wa tukio hili.
Hapa neno "wao" linajumuisha waumini na neno "yake" linataja kila mtu katika kundi.
watu waliotaka kuheshimu na au kumwabudu Mungu
"kila taifa duniani" Watu kutoka mataifa mbalimbali walikuwa wamekuja Yerusalemu.
Hii inarejea sauti ambayo ilikuwa kama upepo wa nguvu kuwa: "Waliposikia sauti hii"
"kundi kubwa la watu"
Maneno haya yana maana moha. Mshangao wao ulikuwa mkuu sana.
Watu waliuliza swali wakionyesha mshangao wao kuwa hawa ni wa eneo moja na lugha yao ni moja iweje waongee na lugha za mataifa yetu?
Inawezekana ikamaanisha 1) ni swali halisi ambalo watu walihitaji jibu lake kutokana na mshangao wao au 2) swali lisilohitaji jibu lililodhihirisha jinsi walivyoshangaa.
Hii inaorodhesha baadhi ya mataifa, mikoa na miji ambayo watu walitoka.
"watu wasio Wayahudi ambao wamekuwa Wayahudi" au "waliogeukia dini ya Kiyahudi"
Watu hawakujua nini cha kufikiri kuhusu kilichokuwa kinatokea. "shangazwa na kuchanganyikiwa."
Baadhi ya watu waliwatuhumu waumini kwa kile kilichotokea wakidai wamelewa na mvinyo.
Linaelezea mvinyo unaoandaliwa kuwa na nguvu kuliko mvinyo ya kawaida
Petro anaanza kuwasilisha hotuba yake kwa Wayahudi siku ya Pentekoste.
Mitume wote walisimama kuunga mkono hoja ya Petro
Petro anaelezea tukio ambalo watu wamelishuhudia likiendelea. Wamsikilize kwa makini
"saa tatu za asubuhi. Petro anawafikirisha wasikilizaji wajue kuwa watu hawanyi wala hawalewi muda huo wa mapema katika siku.
Petro anaendelea na hotuba yake kwa Wayahudi akiwakumbusha unabii wa nabii Yoeli katika Agano la Kale kwamba tukio hilo linalingana na utabiri huo.
"hiki ni kile ambacho Mungu alisema na alimwabia Nabii Yoeli aandike mambo ambayo Mungu alikwishasema"
Hii ni tamathali ya usemi ikizungumzia jinsi Mungu siku za mwisho atamtoa Roho Mtakatifu kwa wingi kwa watu wote.
Petro anaendelea kumnukuu nabii Joeli.
Wote waume kwa wake ni watumishi. Mungu atamwaga Roho wake kwa watumishi wake wote kwa wanaume na kwa wake.
Mungu anamtoa Roho wake kwa ukarimu kwa watu wote.
Mungu anawatia msukumo kuizungumza kweli ya Mungu.
"umande" au "ukungu"
Petro anahitimisha kumnukuu nabii Joeli.
Inamaanisha kwamba, jua litaonekana kuwa jeusi badala ya kutoa nuru.
Inamaanisha kwamba, mwezi utaonekana mwekundu kama damu.
"Si ya kawaida" au "muhimu"
"Bwana atamwokoa kila mmoja ambaye anamwita"
Petro anaendelea na hoja yake kwa Wayahudi aliyoianza
"Sikilizeni kwa yale ninayotaka kuwaambia"
Inamaanisha Mungu anathibitisha kuwa alimchagua Yesu kwa huduma yake ya kudhihirisha matendo makuu ya miujiza.
"Mtu ambaye Mungu alimdhibitisha kwenu"
Inamaanisha kuwa, Mungu alipanga na kujua tangu zamani kwamba yangetokea nyakati za Yesu
Maana yaweza kuwa: 1) "Mlimtia Yesu katika mikono ya maadui" au 2) Yuda alimsaliti Yesu kwenu"
Ingawa watu wahalifu kweli walimsulibisha Yesu, hapa Petro anawashitaki kundi lote kwa kumwua kwasababu walikuwa wamekusudia Yesu auawe.
etro anazungumzia kifo kama mfano wa binadamu anayeshikilia wafungwa hara kusababisha mateso makali.
Petro ananukuu kifungu ambacho Daudi alikiandika katika Zaburi kinachotaja kuteswa kwa Yesu na kufufuka kwake.
Tangu Petro ataje kwamba Daudi alitangulia kusema maneno kuhusu Yesu, maneno "Mimi na Yangu" yanamtambulisha Yesu. Na maneno Bwana na Yeye" yanamtambulisha Mungu.
Linamaanisha, "Mbele yangu au mbele ya uwepo wangu"
Mkono wa kulia ulifikiriwa kuwa ni wa nguvu sana. Mtu aliye mkono wa kuume alikuwa ama mtumishi mwenye nguvu sana au msaidizi mwenye uwezo sana.
NI: "Nilikwa na furaha na kushangilia"
"Ingawa hata mimi ni wa kufa tu, nitakuwa na ujasiri kwa Mungu"
Petro anamaliza nukuu ya Daudi.
Petro anasema, Daudi alisema maneno kuwa Mtakatifu wangu akimaanisha Yesu na maneno "wako" akimaanisha Mungu.
Mwili wake Masihi hautabaki maiti muda mrefu mpaka uoze. au "kuchakaa"
"kweli yenye-kuhuisha"
Neno "Uso" anamaanisha uwepo wa Mungu.
"Shangwe au Kicheko"
Petro anaendelea na hotuba yake aliyoianzisha kwa Wayahudi wanaomzunguka na kwa waumini wengine wa Yerusalemu.
"He died and people buried him"
"Mungu angemtuma mmoja wa uzao wa Daudi juu ya kiti cha enzi cha Daudi"
Mungu alijua hata kabla lilikuwa halijatokea.
Mungu hakumwacha Yesu kuzimu.
Mwili kuoza kunamaanisha kuteketea baada ya kifo. hivyo Mungu hakumwacha Yesu muda ambao hatA mwili wake uteketee.
Neni "sisi" linaelezea wanafunzi na wale wotewaliokuwa mashahidi wa kufufuka kwa Yesu baada ya kifo chake.
Neno "alimfufua" Linaelezea kuwa Mungu alimfufua Yesu kutoka kwa wafu.
Mungu alimwinia Yesu juu katika mkono wake wa kuume.
Neno "mimina" lina maana Yesu ambaye ni Mungu amefanya tukio hili litokee la kumtoa Roho Mtakatifu kwa waumini.
Petro anamaliza hotuba yake kwa Wayahudi aliyoianza
Petro tena ananukuu moja ya Zaburi za Daudi. Daudi hazungumzi kwa nafsi yake mwenyewe katika zaburi hii bali anazungumzia juu ya Yasu Masihi.
Inamaanisha Mungu atafanya ushindi mkamilifu wa maadui wa Masihi na kuwaweka chini yake.
Inamaanisha taifa zima la Israeli.
Wayahudi wanaitikia hotuba ya Petro na Petro anawajibu.
"wakati watu waliposikia Petro akisema"
"Maneno ya Petro yaliwachoma mioyo yao" au "kusikia hatia moyoni na kujawa na huzuni"
"Turuhusu tupate kubatizwa"
"Ahadi ni kwaajili yako"
"WAtu wote waliombali na Mungu mioyoni mwao.
Huu ni mwisho wa sehemu ya habari kwa tukio la siku ya Pentekoste. Inaanza sehemu nyingine inayoelezea jinsi gani waumini waliendelea kuishi baada ya siku ya Pentekoste.
"Aliwaambia waziwazi na kuwasihi waitikie kwa ujumbe alioutoa kwao.
Wajiokoe kutoka katika adhabu ya Mungu itakayowapata watu waovu.
Inamaanisha wakayapokea maneno aliyoyasema Petro kuwa yalikuwa ya kweli.
Wote walioamini walibatizwa.
"watu wapatao elfu tatu waliongezeka"
Walishiriki na kula chakula kwa pamoja
watu walijawa na hofu na kicho cha Mungu ndani yao
Mungu alifanya miujiza na ishara nyingi kupitia wanafunzi wake.
Inaweza kuwa, "wote waliamini jambo hilo moja" au " waumini wote walioamini walikuwa pamona katika sehemu moja"
"walitumia mali zao kwa kumgawia kila mmoja na mwenzake"
Mashamba na vitu vingine vilivyokuwa wanavimiliki.
Kila mmoja aligawiwa kulingana na uhitaji wake.
Waumini waliendelea kukutana pamoja, kwa kusudi moja.
walishirikiana kula chakula chao katika nyumba zao na pia kula chakula cha Bwana kwa pamoja.
Hii inamaana bila kiburi, kwa furaha, bila choyo na bila kuangalia cheo au upendeleo.
"Watu wote waliwakubali"
Ambao Bwana alikuwa akiwaokoa
1 Sasa Peter na Yohana walikuwa wanaelekea katika hekalu wakati wa maombi, saa tisa. 2 Mtu fulani, kiwete tangu kuzaliwa, alikuwa akibebwa kila siku na alikuwa akilazwa katika mlango wa hekalu uitwao mzuri, ili aweze kuomba sadaka kutoka kwa watu waliokuwa wakielekea hekaluni. 3 Alipowaona Petro na Yohana wanakaribia kuingia hekaluni, aliomba sadaka. 4 Petro, akimkazia macho, pamoja na Yohana, alisema,"tutazame sisi." 5 Kiwete akawatazama, akitazamia kupokea kitu fulani kutoka kwao. 6 Lakini Petro akasema, "fedha na dhahabu mimi sina, lakini kile nilichonacho nitatoa kwako. Katika jina la Yesu Kristo wa Nazareth, tembea." 7 Petro akamchukua kwa mkono wake wa kulia, na akamwinua juu: mara moja miguu yake na vifundo vya mifupa yake vikapata nguvu. 8 Akiruka juu, mtu kiwete alisimama na akaanza kutembea; akaingia hekaluni pamoja na Petro na Yohana, akitembea, akiruka, na kumsifu Mungu. 9 Watu wote walimwona akitembea na akimsifu Mungu. 10 Wakatambua kwamba alikuwa ni yule mtu ambaye alikuwa akikaa akiomba sadaka kwenye mlango mzuri wa hekalu; walijawa na mshangao na kustaajabu kwa sababu ya kile kilichotokea kwake. 11 Namna alivyokuwa amewashikilia Petro na Yohana, watu wote kwa pamoja wakakimbilia kwenye ukumbi uitwao wa Sulemani, wakishangaa sana. 12 Petro alipoliona hili, yeye akawajibu watu, "Enyi watu wa Israel, kwa nini mnashangaa? Kwa nini mnayaelekeza macho yenu kwetu, kama kwamba tumemfanya huyu atembee kwa nguvu zetu wenyewe au uchaji wetu?." 13 Mungu wa Ibrahimu, na wa Isaka, na wa Yakobo, Mungu wa Baba zetu, amemtukuza mtumishi wake Yesu. Huyu ndiye ambaye ninyi mlimkabidhi na kumkataa mbele ya uso wa Pilato, japo yeye alikuwa ameamua kumwachia huru. 14 Mlimkataa Mtakatifu na Mwenye Haki, na badala yake mkataka muuaji aachwe huru. 15 Ninyi mlimuua Mfalme wa uzima, ambaye Mungu alimfufua kutoka kwa wafu - Sisi ni mashahidi wa hili. 16 Sasa, kwa imani katika jina lake, mtu huyu ambaye mnamwona na kujua, alifanywa kuwa na nguvu. Imani ambayo inapitia kwa Yesu imempa yeye afya hii kamilifu, mbele yenu ninyi nyote. 17 Sasa, Ndugu, najua kwamba mlitenda katika ujinga, ndivyo pia walivyofanya viongozi wenu. 18 Lakini mambo ambayo Mungu aliwaambia mapema kwa vinywa vya manabii wote, kwamba huyu Kristo atateseka, sasa ameyatimiza. 19 Kwa hiyo, tubuni na mgeuke, ili kwamba dhambi zenu ziweze kuondolewa kabisa, kusudi zije nyakati za kuburudika kutokana na uwepo wa Bwana; 20 na kwamba aweze kumtuma Kristo ambaye ameshateuliwa kwa ajili yenu, Yesu. 21 Yeye ndiye ambaye lazima mbingu zimpokee mpaka wakati wa kurejeshwa kwa vitu vyote, ambavyo Mungu alizungumzia zamani za kale kwa vinywa vya manabii watakatifu. 22 Hakika Musa alisema, 'Bwana Mungu atainua nabii kama mimi kutoka katika ndugu zenu. Mtamsikiliza kila kitu ambacho atawaambia ninyi. 23 Itatokea kwamba kila mtu ambaye hasikilizi kwa nabii huyo ataangamizwa kabisa atoke kati ya watu.' 24 Ndiyo, na manabii wote tokea Samweli na wale waliofuata baada yake, walizungumza na walitangaza siku hizi. 25 Ninyi ni wana wa manabii na wa agano ambalo Mungu alilifanya pamoja na mababu, kama alivyosema kwa Abrahamu, 'Katika mbegu yako familia zote za dunia zitabarikiwa.' 26 Baada ya Mungu kumwinua mtumishi wake, alimtuma kwenu kwanza, ili awabariki ninyi kwa kugeuka kutoka katika uovu wenu."
Sura hii inaeleza kwamba Yesu alikuja kwa Wayahudi kwa sababu Mungu alikuwa akitimiza sehemu yake ya agano lake na Abrahamu. Petero alifikiri kwamba Wayahudi ndio waliokuwa na hatia ya kumuua Yesu.
Warumi ndio waliomuua Yesu, lakini walimuua kwa sababu Wayahudi walimkamata, wakamleta kwa Warumi, wakawaambia wamuue. Kwa sababu hii, Petero alifikiri kwamba hao ndio waliokuwa na hatia ya kumuua Yesu. Lakini anawaeleza yakwamba hao ndio wa kwanza ambao Mwenyezi Mungu ametuma wafuasi wa Yesu kuwakaribisha watubu
Siku moja; Petro na Yohana wanakwenda hekaluni
Mstari wa 2 unatoa mazingira juu ya mtu aliyekuwa kiwete.
"katika eneo la hekalu" au "katika hekalu." walikuwa hawakuenda ndani ya jengo la hekalu ambamo makuhani waliotumika tu ndio walikuwa wanaruhusiwa.
Kila siku watu walikuwa wakimbeba mtu huyo na kumlaza karibu na mlango wa hekalu.
Asiyeweza kutembea
Mlango wa hekalu uliokuwa ukiitwa mzuri.
"Petro na Yohana walimwangalia mtu huyo kwa makini na Petro akaongea"
"kiwete aliwatazama Petro na Yohana kwa makini"
Fedha au dhahabu ilitimika kuwakilisha pesa.
Inafahamika kuwa Petro alikuwa na uwezo wa kumponya yule mtu.
"Kupitia mamlaka na nguvu ya Jina la Yesu Kristo" lilimponya mtu yule.
Hakuingia ndani ya hekalu mahali makuhani pekee wanaruhusiwa kuingia. Yeye aliingia kwenye uwanda wa hekalu
Kila mmoja alishuhudia kuwa aliyeponywa ndiye alikuwa mtu yule.
Hili lilikuwa moja ya jina la milango ya kuingia kwenye eneo la hekalu.
Watu walishikwa na mshangao mkubwa.
Baada ya kuponywa kwa mtu aliyekuwa hawezi kutembea, Petro anaongea na umati.
Katika ukumbi uluokuwa ukiitwa Solomoni. Hapa iko wazi kuwa Petro alitumia eneo hili kutoa hotuba yake, haikuwa ndani ya hekalu ambamo ni makuhani tu walioruhusiwa kuingia.
"kujawa na mshangao" au "Kaduwaa"
"Petro alipoona mkutano unaongezeka na kuzidi kushangaa.
"Waisraeli wenzangu". Petro akizungumza na mkutano. Neno "watu" katika mkutadha huu inahusisha kila mmoja aliyepo.
Petro anauliza swali hili ili kuwaambia watu wasishanganzwe na kile kimetokea.
Petro anawauliza swali hili ili kuwathibitishia kuwa tukio hilo halikutendwa na wao yaani Petro na Yohana, hivyov wasiwatazame wao kama ndiyo waliomponya yule kiwete.
Petro anaendelea na hotuba yake kwa Wayahudi aliyoianza
"ambaye mlimkamata na kumkabidhi kwa Pilato"
"yeye mlimkataa mbele ya Pilato "
"Pilato alipoamua kumweka Yesu huru"
"Mlimtaka Pilato amfungulie muuaji"
Neno "sisi" linawajumuisha Petro na Yohana.
Neno hili linamtaja Yesu "Ni mmoja awapaye watu uzima wa milele au "Mtawala wa maisha"
Neno hili lilitumika kuhamisha usikivu wa mkutano kwa yule kiwete
Kiwakilishi "Jina" ni jina la Yesu.
"amemfanya mtu huyu nguvu ya kupona"
Hapa Petro anageuza usikivu wa mkutano kutoka kwa kiwete na anaendelea kuwaambia moja kwa moja.
Maana inayowezekana 1) Hao watu hawakujua kuwa Yesu alikuwa Masihi au 2) Watu hawakujua maana ya kile walichokuwa wakifanya.
Manabii waliponena, ilikuwa kama Mungu mwenyewe aliyenena kwasababu aliwaambia nini cha kusema.
Inamaanisha yale yote yaliyonenwa "kupitia manabii" na kuyaandika.
"Kutubu na kugeuka kunamaanisha kubadirisha njia ya mtazamo na fikra zao kutoka katika dhambi na wamgeukie Mungu"
"kufuta" au "iliyoondolewa" ili Mungu aweze kuzifuta dhambi zao.
"Muda wa kuburudishwa katika uwepo wa Bwana inaweza kuwa; 1) Muda ambao Mungu anaziimarisha roho za watu wake; 2) Muda ambao Mungu analeta uamsho kwenu.
"Kwamba anaweza tena kumtuma Kristo". Huu ni ujio mwingine wa Yesu Kristo.
Mungu alishamteua Yesu kwa ajili yao.
Petro anaendelea na hotuba yake kwa Wayahudi waliokuwa wamesimama kwenye eneo la hekalu.
Katika mistari ya 22-23 Petro ananukuu mambo fulani Musa alisema mapema kuhusu Masihi.
Ni mmoja ambaye mbingu lazima zimpokee. Petro anazungumza na mbingu kama anaongea na mtu aliyempokea Yesu nyumbani mwake.
"hadi wakati ambao Mungu atarejesha vitu vyote"
"Mungu aliwaambia watakatifu wake manabii kuzungumzia habari zao"
"manabii wake watakatifu ambao waliishi zamani sana"
"atateua mmoja kuwa nabii"
mtu asiyemsikiliza Nabii ambaye Mungu amemtuma atamwangamiza kabisa.
Petro anahitimisha hotuba yake kwa Wayahudi aliyoianza
"Ni dhahili manabii wote" Neno hapa "ndiyo" linaongeza msisitizo kwa kile kinachofuata.
"wale manabii ambao walifuata baada ya uhai wa samweli"
"siku hizi" au "mambo ambayo yanatokea sasa"
"ninyi ni warithi wa manabii" na "ninyi ni warithi wa agano."
"kwasababu ya uzao wako"
Anamaanisha mataifa mbalimbali yatabarikiwa kwa ajili yake.
"Baada ya Mungu kumchagua mtumishi wake" au "Baada ya Mungu kutoa mamlaka kwa mtumishi wake"
Hii inarejea kwa Masihi wa Mungu, Yesu.
1 Wakati Petro na Yohana walipokuwa wakizungumza na watu, makuhani na mlinzi wa hekalu na masadukayo waliwaendea. 2 Walikuwa wameudhika sana kwa sababu Petro na Yohana walikuwa wanawafundisha watu kuhusu Yesu na kutangaza juu ya kufufuka kwake kutoka kwa wafu. 3 Waliwakamata na kuwaweka gerezani hadi asubuhi iliyofuata, kwani tayari ilikuwa jioni. 4 Lakini watu wengi waliokuwa wamesikia ujumbe waliamini; na idadi ya wanaume waliokuwa wameamini walikadiliwa kuwa elfu tano. 5 Hata ilipofika asubuhi siku iliyofuata, kwamba wakuu wao, wazee na waandishi, kwa pamoja walikusanyika Yerusalemu. 6 Anasi kuhani mkuu alikuwepo, na Kayafa, na Yohana, na Iskanda, na wote waliokuwa ni ndugu wa kuhani mkuu. 7 Walipokuwa wamewaweka Petro na Yohana katikati yao, waliwauliza, "Kwa uwezo gani, au kwa jina gani mmefanya hili?" 8 Kisha, Petro, akiwa amejaa Roho Mtakatifu, akawaambia, "Ninyi wakuu wa watu, na wazee, 9 kama sisi siku ya leo tunahojiwa kuhusu tendo jema lililofanywa kwa mtu huyu mgonjwa - kwa namna gani mtu huyu alifanywa mzima? 10 Hebu lijulikane hilo kwenu na kwa watu wote katika Israel, kwamba kwa jina la Yesu Kristo wa Nazareti, ambaye mlimsulibisha, ambaye Mungu alimfufua kutoka kwa wafu, ni kwa njia yake kwamba mtu huyu anasimama hapa mbele yenu akiwa mwenye afya. 11 Yesu Kristo ni jiwe ambalo ninyi wajenzi mlilidharau, lakini ambalo limefanywa kuwa jiwe kuu la pembeni. 12 Hakuna wokovu katika mtu mwingine awaye yote. Kwa maana hakuna jina jingine chini ya mbingu walilopewa watu, ambalo kwa hilo tunaweza kuokolewa." 13 Sasa walipoona ujasiri wa Petro na Yohana, na wakagundua kwamba walikuwa ni watu wakawaida wasio na elimu, walishangaa, wakafahamu kwamba Petro na Yohana wamekuwa pamoja na Yesu. 14 Kwa sababu walimwona yule mtu aliyeponywa amesimama pamoja nao, hawakuwa na kitu cha kusema dhidi ya hili. 15 Lakini walipokuwa wamekwisha kuwaamuru mitume waondoke mbele ya mkutano wa baraza, walizungumza wao kwa wao. 16 Walisema, tutawafanyaje watu hawa? Ni kweli kwamba muujiza wa ajabu umefanyika kupitia wao unajulikana na kila mmoja anayeishi Yerusalemu; hatuwezi kulikataa hilo. 17 Lakini, ili kwamba jambo hili lisienee miongoni mwa watu, hebu tuwaonye wasinene tena kwa mtu yeyote kwa jina hili. 18 Waliwaita Petro na Yohana ndani na kuwaamuru kamwe wasinene wala kufundisha kwa jina la Yesu. 19 Lakini Petro na Yohana walijibu na kuwaambia, "Kama ni sahihi machoni pa Mungu kuwatii ninyi kuliko Mungu, hukumuni wenyewe. 20 Maana sisi hatuwezi kuacha kuyanena mambo ambayo tumeyaona na kuyasikia." 21 Baada ya kuwaonya sana Petro na Yohana, waliwaacha waende. Hawakuweza kupata sababu yoyote ya kuwaadhibu, kwa sababu watu wote walikuwa wakimsifu Mungu kwa kile kilichokuwa kimetendeka. 22 Mtu aliyekuwa amepokea muujiza wa uponyaji alipata kuwa na umri zaidi ya miaka arobaini. 23 Baada ya kuwaacha huru, Petro na Yohana walikuja kwa watu wao na kuwataarifu yote ambayo makuhani wakuu na wazee walikuwa wamewaambia. 24 Walipoyasikia, walipaza sauti zao kwa pamoja kwa Mungu na kusema, "Bwana, wewe uliyeumba mbingu na dunia na bahari na kila kitu ndani yake, 25 wewe ambaye, kwa Roho Mtakatifu, kwa kinywa cha baba yetu Daudi, mtumishi wako, ulisema, "Kwanini watu wa mataifa wamefanya ghasia, na watu wametafakari mambo yasiyofaa? 26 Wafalme wa dunia wamejipanga pamoja, na watawala wamekusanyika kwa pamoja dhidi ya Bwana na dhidi ya masihi wake." 27 Ni hakika, wote Herode na Pontio Pilato, pamoja na watu wa mataifa na watu wa Israeli, walikusanyika kwa pamoja katika mji huu dhidi ya mtumishi wako mtakatifu Yesu, ambaye ulimpaka mafuta. 28 Walikusanyika kwa pamoja kufanya yote ambayo mkono wako na mapenzi yako yaliyaamuru tangu awali kabla hayajatokea. 29 Sasa, Bwana, yaangalie matisho yao, na ukawajaalie watumishi wako kulinena neno lako kwa ujasiri wote. Ili 30 kwamba unaponyosha mkono wako kuponya, ishara na maajabu viweze kutokea kupitia jina la mtumishi wako mtakatifu Yesu." 31 Walipomaliza kuomba, eneo ambalo walikusanyika kwa pamoja likatikiswa, na wote wakajazwa na Roho Mtakatifu, na walinena neno la Mungu kwa ujasili. 32 Idadi kubwa ya wale walioamini walikuwa na moyo mmoja na roho moja: na hakuna hata mmoja wao aliyesema kwamba chochote alichomiliki kilikuwa cha kwake mwenyewe; badala yake walikuwa na vitu vyote shirika. 33 Kwa nguvu kubwa mitume walikuwa wakiutangaza ushuhuda wao kuhusu ufufuo wa Bwana Yesu, na neema kubwa ilikuwa juu yao wote. 34 Hapakuwa na mtu yeyote miongoni mwao aliyepungukiwa na mahitaji, kwa sababu watu wote waliokuwa na hati za viwanja au nyumba, waliviuza na kuleta pesa ya vitu waliyokuwa wameuza 35 na kuviweka chini ya miguu ya mitume. Na mgawanyo ulifanywa kwa kila muumini, kulingana na kila mmoja alivyokuwa na hitaji. 36 Yusufu, mlawi, mtu kutoka Kipro, alipewa jina la Barnabasi na mitume (hiyo ikitafasiriwa, ni mwana wa faraja). 37 Akiwa na shamba, aliliuza na akaleta fedha, akaziweka chini ya miguu ya mitume.
Tafsiri zingine zimetenga kila mstari wa ushairi kulia zaidi kuliko maandishi mengine ili isomeke vyema.ULB hufanya hivi na ushairi ulionukuliwa kutoka Agano la kale 4:25-26
Wakristo wa kwanza walitamani sana kuwa na umoja, Walitaka kuamini mambo sawa na kusaidiana kwa kila kitu walichokimiliki huku wakisaidia pia waliohitaji.
Maneno haya yanaashiria vitu ambavyo vinaeza kufanywa tu na Mungu. Wakristo walitaka Mungu afanye yale tu ambayo angeweza kuyafanya ili watu waamini kwamba waliyoyanena kumhusu Yesu yalikuwa ya ukweli.
Jiwe la pembeni lilikuwa kipande cha jiwe kilichowekwa chini wakati wa ujenzi wa jengo. Neno hili limetumika kumaanisha sehemu muhimu ya kitu,ile sehemu tegemeo. Kusema ya kwamba Yesu ni jiwe kuu la pembeni la kanisa ni kusema kwamba hakuna kitu ndani ya kanisa kilicho na umuhimu kuliko Yesu na ya kwamba kila kitu ndani ya kanisa kinamtegemea,
"Wala hakuna wokovu katika mwingine awaye yote, kwa maana hapana jina jingine chini ya mbingu walilopewa wanadamu litupasalo sisi kuokolewa kwalo" (Matendo 4:12). Kwa maneno haya Petro alimaanisha kwamba hamna mtu yeyote ambaye amewahi kuwa duniani ama atakayekuja duniani kuwaokoa watu.
Viongozi wa dini walimkamata Petro na Yohana baada ya Petro kumponya yule mtu aliyezaliwa kiwete.
"waliwasogelea" au "walikuja kwao"
Walikuwa na hasira. Masadukayo kwa upekee wao wangekuwa na hasira kwa Petro na Yohana kwasababu hawakuamini ufufuo.
Petro na Yohana walikuwa wakisema Mungu angewainua watu kutoka mautini sawa na vile Yesu alivyoinuliwa kutoka miongoni mwa wafu. Petro anazungumzia ufufuo wa Yesu na ufufuo wa watu wote kwa ujumla.
Makuhani na mlinzi wa hekalu pamoja na Masadukayo waliwakamata Petro na Yohana.
Ilikuwa tendo la kawaida kutowahoji watu wakati wa usiku.
Hii inamanisha kwa idadi ya wanaume tu, wanawake na watoto walioamini hawakuhesabiwa.
"walikuwa kama elfu tano" au "iliongezeka hadi elfu tano"
Petro na Yohana wanajibu swali wa viongozi bila ya kuwa na woga.
Neno "wao" linafafanua juu ya Wayahydi kwa ujumla wao.
Kipengere hiki kilitumika hapa kuonyesha tukio lilipoanzia.
Hii ni rejea kwa Sanhendrini, mahakama ya wazee wa kiyahudi kilichounganisha makundi haya matatu ya wayahudi.
Wanaume hawa wawili walikuwa wajumbe wa familia ya Kuhani mkuu. Huyu siye yule Yohana Mtume.
"nani aliyewapa nguvu" au "kitu gani kiliwapa nguvu." Walijua Petro na Yohana wasingemponya mtu kwa nguvu zao wenyewe.
"ni nani aliyewapa mamlaka"
Roho Mtakatifu akiwa amemjaza Petro.
Petro aliuliza swali hili kufafanua kwamba ilikuwa sababu halisi ya kuteswa kwao. Mnatuuliza leo kwa namna gani mtu huyu amepata kupona.
Na ijulikane kwenu na watu wote wa Israel kujua hili.
Neno "Jina" linafafanua nguvu na mamlaka ya jina hilo. Kwa mamlaka ya Jina la Yesu Kristo wa Nazarethi.
Petro anahitimisha hotuba yake kwa viongozi wa dini ya kiyahudi aliyoianza
Petro ananukuu kutoka Zaburi, akimaanisha viongozi wa Kiyahudi, kama wajenzi, waliomkataa na Yesu, lakini Mungu alimfanya kuwa wa muhimu zaidi katika ufalme wake, kama jiwe la pembeni katika ujenzi lilivyo la muhimu.
"Ninyi wajenzi mlimkataa"
Yesu ni mtu pekee aliye na uwezo wa kuokoa
Hii inamaanisha, hakuna Jina jingine chini ya mbingu Mungu amswapa wanadamu.
J"ina ambalo laweza kuokoa au ambaye aweza kuokoa"
Paulo anaendelea kuzungumzia Wayahudi Viongozi.
Neno "Ujasiri" linaelezea njia ambayo Petro na Yohana wameitumia kujibu za viongozi Wayahudi.
Wayahudi viuongozi walitambua hivi kwasababu ya njia ambayo Petro na Yohana waliinena.
Neno "kawaida" na "wasio na Elimu" ni maneno yanayogawana maana moja. Petro na Yohana hawakupata mafunzo ya elimu katika sheria ya kiyahudi
Mtu ambaye alikuwa ameponya na Yesu kupitia Petro na Yohana
Hawakuwa na cha kusema dhidi ya Petro na Yohana juu ya kuponywa kwa huyo.
Linaelezea juu ya Petro na Yohana.
Wayahudi viongozi wanauliza swali kama wamechanganyikiwa kwasababu kwa kuwa hawakufikiri nini cha kuwatendea Petro na Yohana. "Hakuna cha kuwatendea hawa wanaume"
Inamaanisha; kila mtu anayekaa Yerusalamu anajua juu ya muujiza uliotendwa na hawa wanaume.
Neno "jambo" linamaanisha muujiza wowote au mafundisho ya Petro na Yohana yanaweza kuendelea kusambaa.
Neno "Jina" linamaanisha ubinadamu wa Yesu. Wasinene tena kwa yeyote kuhusu huyu mtu, Yesu.
Neno "sisi" linaelezea Petro na Yohana, lakini si kwa wale ambao waliokuwa wakiwaelezea.
Neno "machoni pa Mungu" linamaanisha maoni ya Mungu. Kama Mungu anafikiri ni sawa kuwatii watu kuliko Mungu.
"Lazima tutaendelea kunena" au "Hatutaacha kunena"
Msitari wa 22 unatoa habari ya nyumba kuhusu umri wa mtu kiwete aliyeponywa.
Wayahudi Viongozi waliwatishia Petro na Yohana kuwapa adhabu tena.
Viongozi hawakuweza kupata kujua kwa namna gani wawaadhibu Petro na Yohana bila ya kusababisha vurugu miongoni mwa watu waliomwona mtu aliyeponywa.
Kwa kile Petro na Yohana walichokuwa wametenda
Mtu yule ambaye Petro na Yohana walikuwa wamemtendea muujiza wa uponyaji.
Wakinena pamoja, watu walinukuu Zaburi ya Daudi kutoka Agano la Kale.
Neno "wao" linamaanisha baadhi ya waumini, lakini si Petro na Yohana.
Walikwenda kwa waumini wenzao.
Hii inamaanisha Roho Mtakatifu alisababisha Daudi kunena au kuandika kile Mungu alichosema.
Neno "kinywa" linaelezea yale maneno ambayo Daudi aliyasema ama aliyaandika "Kwa maneno ya baba yetu Daudi"
Hili ni swali lenye jibu linaloelezea maneno yenye ubatili ya kumpinga Mungu.
Watu wanatafakari maneno ya ubatili yaliyo kinyume na Mungu.
Waumini wanakamilisha nukuu yao kutoka kwa mfalme Daudi katika zaburi walizozianza
Mistari hii miwili, Wafalme na Watawala kimsingi ni jambo moja kuonyesha unganiko la kufanya biidi katika kupinga kazi ya Mungu
Waliunganisha majeshi yao pamoja kupigana vitani. Au kuwa kinyume na Masihi wa Mungu.
Waumini wanaendelea na maombi.
"Katika Yerusalemu"
"Yesu anayekutumikia kwa uaminifu"
Neno "Mkono" limetumika kwa maana ya nguvu za Mungu.
Waumini wanakamilisha maombi yao waliyoyaanza
Neno, "Yaangalie" Ni ombi kwa Mungu kuchukua hatua dhidi ya vitisho vya Wayahydi viongozi kwa vitisho vyao kwa waumini.
Neno "Mkono" unaelezea nguvu za Mungu katika kuponya watu.
Neno "Jina" Linamaanisha nguvu na mamlaka ya Mtakatifu Yesu
Eneo walipokuwa wakifanyia maombi pakatikisika.
Roho Mtakatifu aliwajaza wote, na kuanz kulinena neno la Mungu kwa ujasiri
Neno "Moyo" linaelezea mawazo kuwa wote waliwaza kitu kimoja na moyo mmoja.
Waligawana vitu vyao kila mmoja na mwenzake.
Pengine maana yake 1) Mungu aliwabariki waumini zaidi; au 2) Watu katka Yerusalemu waliwasaidia waumini katika hali ya juu.
Umiliki wa hati za viwanja na nyumba kwa waliokuwa wanamiliki Yerusalemu
Fedha ambayo walilipwa kutoka vitu walivyoviuza.
Hii ilikuwa ni njia ya waumini: 1) kuonyesha waziwazi mabadiliko ya mioyo na 2) kuwapa mitume mamlaka juu ya namna zawadi inavyopaswa kutumika.
Waligawanya pesa kwa waumini kwa aliyekuwa na uhitaji
Luka anamwelezea historia ya Barnaba
Mitume walimpa Yusufu jina jingine Barnaba
ambalo linaweza kupewa tafasiri
Mitume walitumia hivyo kuonyesha kwamba Yusufu alikuwa mtu wa kutia moyo wengine
Aliwasilisha pesa kwa mitume.
1 Hivyo, mtu mmoja aliyeitwa Anania, na Safira mkewe, waliuza sehemu ya mali, 2 na akaficha sehemu ya fedha waliyouza (mke wake pia alilijua hili), na akaleta sehemu iliyobakia na kuiweka kwenye miguu ya mitume. 3 Lakini Petro akasema, "Anania, kwa nini shetani ameujaza moyo wako kusema uongo kwa Roho Mtakatifu na kuficha sehemu ya mali ya shamba? 4 Wakati lilipokuwa halijauzwa, halikuwa ni mali yako? Na baada ya kuuzwa, halikuwa chini ya uamuzi wako? Ilikuwaje uwaze jambo hili moyoni mwako? Hujawadanganya wanadamu, bali umemdanganya Mungu." 5 Katika kusikia maneno haya, Anania alidondoka chini na akakata roho. Na hofu kubwa iliwajia wote waliolisikia hili. 6 Vijana wakaja mbele na kumtia katika sanda, na kumpeleka nje na kumzika. 7 Baada ya masaa matatu hivi, mke wake aliingia ndani, asijue ni nini kilichokuwa kimetokea. 8 Petro akamwambia, "Niambie, kama mliuza shamba kwa thamani hiyo." Akasema, "Ndiyo, kwa thamani hiyo." 9 Kisha Petro akamwambia, "Inakuwaje kwamba mmepatana kwa pamoja kumjaribu Roho wa Bwana? Angalia, miguu ya wale waliomzika mme wako iko mlangoni, na watakubeba na kukupeleka nje." 10 Ghafla akadondoka miguuni pa Petro, akakata roho, na wale vijana wakaja ndani wakamkuta ameshakufa. Wakambeba kumpeleka nje, na kumzika karibu na mmewe. 11 Hofu kubwa ikaja juu ya kanisa zima, na juu ya wote walioyasikia mambo haya. 12 Ishara nyingi na maajabu vilikuwa vinatokea miongoni mwa watu kupitia mikono ya mitume. Walikuwa pamoja katika ukumbi wa Sulemani. 13 Lakini, hakuna mtu mwingine tofauti aliyekuwa na ujasiri wa kuambatana nao; hata hivyo, walipewa heshima ya juu na watu. 14 Na pia, waamini wengi walikuwa wakiongezeka kwa Bwana, idadi kubwa ya wanaume na wanawake, 15 kiasi kwamba hata waliwabeba wagonjwa mitaani, na kuwalaza vitandani na kwenye makochi, ili kwamba Petro akiwa anapita, kivuli chake kiweze kushuka juu yao. 16 Hapo pia, idadi kubwa ya watu walikuja kutoka miji iliyozunguka Yerusalem, wakiwaleta wagonjwa na wote waliopagawa na roho wachafu, na wote waliponywa. 17 Lakini kuhani mkuu aliinuka, na wote waliokuwa pamoja naye (ambao ni wa dhehebu la masadukayo); na walijawa na wivu 18 wakanyosha mikono yao kuwakamata mitume na kuwaweka ndani ya gereza la jumla. 19 Na wakati wa usiku malaika wa Bwana akaifungua milango ya gereza na kuwaongoza nje na kusema, 20 "Nendeni, mkasimame hekaluni na kuwaambia watu maneno yote ya Uzima huu." 21 Waliposikia hili, waliingia hekaluni wakati wa kupambazuka na kufundisha. Lakini, kuhani mkuu alikuja na wote waliokuwa naye, na kuitisha baraza lote kwa pamoja, na wazee wote wa watu wa Israeli, na kuwatuma gerezani ili kuwaleta mitume. 22 Lakini watumishi waliokwenda, hawakuwakuta gerezani, walirudi na kutoa taarifa, 23 "Tumekuta gereza limefungwa vizuri salama, na walinzi wamesimama langoni, lakini tulipokuwa tukifungua, hatukuona mtu ndani." 24 Sasa wakati jemedari wa hekalu na makuhani wakuu waliposikia maneno haya, waliingiwa na shaka kubwa kwa ajili yao wakiwaza litakuwaje jambo hili. 25 Kisha mmoja akaja na kuwaambia, "Watu mliowaweka gerezani wamesimama hekaluni na wanafundisha watu." 26 Hivyo jemedari alienda pamoja na watumishi, na wakawaleta, lakini bila ya kufanya vurugu, kwa sababu waliwaogopa watu wangeweza kuwapiga kwa mawe. 27 Walipokwisha kuwaleta, waliwaweka mbele ya baraza. Kuhani mkuu aliwahoji 28 akisema, "Tuliwaamuru msifundishe kwa jina hili, na bado mmeijaza Yerusalemu kwa fundisho lenu, na kutamani kuleta damu ya mtu huyu juu yetu." 29 Lakini Petro na mitume wakajibu, "Lazima tumtii Mungu kuliko watu. 30 Mungu wa baba zetu alimfufua Yesu, mliyemuua, kwa kumtundika juu ya mti. 31 Mungu alimtukuza katika mkono wake wa kuume, na kumfanya kuwa Mkuu na mwokozi, kutoa toba kwa Israeli, na msamaha wa dhambi. 32 Sisi ni mashahidi wa mambo haya, na Roho Mtakatifu, ambaye Mungu amemtoa kwa wale wanaomtii." 33 Wajumbe wa baraza waliposikia hivi, walishikwa na hasira wakataka kuwaua mitume. 34 Lakini pharisayo aliyeitwa Gamalieli, mwalimu wa sheria, aliyeheshimiwa na watu wote, alisimama na kuwaamuru mitume wachukuliwe nje kwa muda mfupi. 35 Kisha akawaambia, "Wanaume wa Israeli, iweni makini sana na kile mnachopendekeza kuwafanyia watu hawa. 36 Kwa sababu, zamani zilizopita, Theuda aliinuka na kujidai kuwa mtu mkuu, na idadi ya watu, wapata mia nne walimfuata. Aliuawa, na wote waliokuwa wanamtii walitawanyika na kupotea. 37 Baada ya mtu huyu, Yuda mgalilaya, aliinuka siku zile za kuandikwa sensa, akavuta watu wengi nyuma yake. Naye pia alipotea na wote waliokuwa wakimtii walitawanyika. 38 Sasa nawaambia, jiepusheni na watu hawa na muwaache wenyewe, kwa sababu, kama mpango huu au kazi hii ni ya watu itatupwa. 39 Lakini kama ni ya Mungu, hamtaweza kuwazuia; mnaweza mkajikuta hata mnashindana na Mungu." Hivyo, walishawishika na maneno yake. 40 Kisha, waliwaita mitume ndani na kuwachapa na kuwaamuru wasinene kwa jina la Yesu, na wakawaacha waende zao. 41 Waliondoka mbele ya baraza wakifurahi kwa sababu wamehesabiwa kuwa wamestahili kuteseka na kutoheshimiwa kwa ajili ya Jina hilo. 42 Kwa hiyo, kila siku, ndani ya hekalu na kutoka nyumba hadi nyumba waliendelea kufundisha na kuhubiri Yesu kuwa ni Masihi.
Hakuna anayejua kwa ukamilifu iwapo Anania na Safira walikuwa Wakristo wa ukweli walipoamua kudangaya kuhusu kipande cha ardhi walichokiuza (Matendo 5:1-10), kwa maana Luka hataji swala hili. Anasema tu kwamba walikuwa "miongoni mwa walioamini" (Luke 4:32).Hata hivyo, Petero alifahamu kwamba walidanganya waumini, na alijua kwamba walikuwa wamsikiliza na kumtii shetani.
Walipowadanganya waumini, pia walimdanganya Roho Mtakatifu kwa sababu anaishi ndani ya Waumini.
"Gereza ya uma" ambamo Baraza la Wayahudi walimueka ndani Petero (Matendo 5:18) huenda lilikuwa gereza.
Maelezo ya namna wakristo walivyokuwa wakishirikiana mahitaji kwa baadhi ya wakristo kuuza mali zao. Luka anatuambia habari za waumini wawili Anania na Safira walivyohusika katika ushirika huo.
"Lakini sasa." Hii inaonyesha sehemu kumalizika na kuanza kwa maelezo ama habari mpya.
"Mke wake pia alijua kuwa Mmewe alikuwa ametunza nyumbani sehemu ya fedha kwa mauzo ya shamba lao".
Inamaanisha kwamba waliwasilisha hiyo fedha kwa mitume.
Kama lugha yako unayotumia haina haitumii maswali yenye majibu ndani ya swali, unaweza kutumia kame sentensi tu.
Petro alitumia swali hili kumkemea Anania. "Kwa namna gani umemruhusu Shetani kukushawishi ili kudanganya juu ya kiasi cha mauzo ya ardhi yenu."
Inaonyesha Anania alikuwa amewaambia mitume kuwa alichotoa kilikuwa kiasi chote cha mauzo ya shamba lake
Petro alitumia maswali haya kumkumbusha Anania kwamba alikuwa na uwezo juu ya pesa yake. "Alikuwa na wajibu wa kusimamia pesa yake kwa uadilifu."
Petro alitumia swali hili kumkemea Anania. "Hukupaswa kuamua kuwa mwongo juu ya jambo hili."
Anania alianguka chini kwasababu alikufa. Hakufa kwasababu alianguka chini bali alikufa na kisha akaanguka chini.
Mke wa Anania naye aliingia ndani ya nyumba walimokuwa mitume.
"Kwamba mme wake alikuwa amekufa"
"Kwa thamani hiyo" linalenga kuthibitisha kama Anania alileta fedha kwa mitume yenye thamani sawa na thamani ya shamba lililouzwa.
Huu ni mwisho wa sehemu ya habari kuhusu Anania na Safira.
Petro aliuliza hili kuonyesha hawa wawili kwamba walikubaliana kutenda dhambi kwa pamoja. "Mmekubaliana kwa pamoja kumjaribu Roho!"
Hapa "Miguu" inamaanisha wanaume waliomzika Anania.
Inamaanisha Safira alipokufa alidondoka mbele yamiguu ya Petro
Hii ni namna ya kusema kwamba "alikufa."
Luka anaendelea kuwaambia wasomaji kile kilichotokea siku za mwanzoni mwa kanisa Yerusalemu.
Miujiza na ajabu nyingi ilitendwa miongoni mwa watu kupitia mikono ya mitume.
Hili lilikuwa ni eneo Njia ya kutembea lililokuwa limezungukwa na nguzo zilizojengwa kushikilia paa ambalo watu waliliita Mfalme Sulemani.
Watu waliwaonyesha waumini heshima ya juu.
Luka anatoa maelezo juu ya watu waliokuwa wakiishi Yerusalemu
Watu wengi walikuwa wakimwamini Bwana.
Inamaanisha kuwa Mungu angeweza kuwaponya wagonjwa kama kivuli cha Petro kingewagusa.
"Wale ambao roho wachafu walikuwa wamewapagaa. Waliokuwa wakiteswa na roho wachafu"
Mungu aliwaponya wote kwa njia ya mitume
Viongozi wa dini walianza kuwatesa waumini
Neno "lakini" linaanzisha habari kinzani. Unaweza kutafasiri hii kwa namna ambavyo lugha yako hutambulisha habari kinzani.
Neno "kuinuka" linamaanisha Kuhani mkuu aliamua kuchukua hatua, si kwamba aliinuka tu kutoka kwenye kiti chake alichokikalia.
Inamaanisha walijawa na wivu sana
Waliwakamata mitume kwa nguvu, kwa kuwa walikuwa wameagiza walinzi wao wapate kuwakamata mitume.
Mitume walikwenda kusimama hekaluni katika ile sehemu ya wazi, hawakuingia ndani ambamo hawaruhusiwi kuingia ispokuwa kwa makuhani tu.
Hii inamaanisha ujumbe wa Injili ambao mitume walikuwa wakiutangaza.
Ilipoanza kuwa nuru, "Ingawa malaika alikuwa amewatoa mitume jela wakati wa usiku, hivyo kulipoanza kupambazuka mitume walikuwa tayari wamefika hekaluni.
Inamaanisha kuhani alituma mmoja wao kwenda gerezani kuwachukua mitume na kuwaleta mbele ya baraza.
eno "hatukuona mtu" linawakilisha Mitume kwamba hawakuwakuta wakiwa ndani ya gereza.
"walishtushwa" au "walichanganyikiwa"
"kuhusu maneno waliyokuwa wamesikia" (taarifa kwamba mitume hawakuwa katika gereza)
Nini kimefanyika hata watu hawa kutoka nje alihali milango imefungwa na walinzi wakiwepo.
Mitume hawakuwa ndani ya hekalu wanamoruhusiwa kiungia makuhani tu, bali walikuwa wamesimama kwenye ukumbi wa nje wa hekalu.
Mlinzi na maafisa waliwaleta mitume mbele ya baraza la viongozi wa dini.
Mitume walipelekwa bila vurugu mbele ya baraza, viongozi walikuwa wamewahofia watu juu ya kitendo chochote wangekifanya kwa mitume.
Neno "Jina" linamaanisha Yesu Kristo. Mitume walizuiliwa wasinene neno lolote kupitia Jina la Yesu.
Inamaanisha wamewafundisha watu wote wa Yerusalemu habari za Yesu.
Neno "Damu" linamaanisa kifo cha Yesu na damu yake. Kwamba Viongozi hao walipaswa kuwajibika kwa kuhusika kwao kumwua Yesu Kristo.
Petro alizungumza kwa niaba ya mitume wote kwa maneno yafuatayo.
Petro anatumia neno "mti" kuonyesha kuwa msalaba ulitengenezwa kutokana na mti. "Kwa kumtundika juu ya msalaba"
Neno "toba" na "msamaha" yanamaanisha kuleta msamaha kwa watu wa Israeli kwa njia ya toba na kisha Mungu kuwasamehe dhambi zao.
Linamaanisha Wayahudi wote.
"Wote wanaojikabidhi chini ya mamlaka ya Mungu"
Gamalieli anatoa maelezo mbele ya wajumbe wa baraza
Luka anamwelezea Gamarieli juu ya historia yake.
Alikuwa anaheshimiwa na watu wote
Gamalieli aliwaagiza walinzi wawatoe nje mitume kwa muda.
Gamarieli anawaeleza majumbe wa baraza wasifanye jambo lolote juu ya hao mitume litakalowaletea majuto baadaye
Theuda alikuwa ameasi na kujitwalia idadi kubwa ya wafuasi
Watu walimwua na jamii ikatawanyika.
Yuda Mgalilaya naye vilevile alitokea wakati wa sensa ya Kaisari, aliwavuta wengi kuasi dhidi ya utawala wa dola ya Kirumi kisha naye kapotea.
Gamarieli anamaliza kuwaeleza wajumbe wa baraza. Pamoja na kuwapiga wale mitume na kuwaamuru wasizidi kunena habari za Yesu na kuwaachia huru, lakini wanafunzi walizidi kufundisha na kuhubiri habari za Yesu.
Gamalieli anawaambia Wayahudi viongozi wasiwaadhibu hao mitume na wasiwatie tena gerezani.
Kama jambo hili wanalolitenda chimbuko lake ni mwanadamu litakoma tu.
Kama kazi hii wanayoifanya chimbuko lake ni Mungu, kazi hii itaendelea.
Gamalieli alifanikiwa kuwashawishi Viongozi Wayahudi na kukubaliana na ushawishi wake.
Wajumbe wa baraza waliwaamru walinzi wa hekalu kuwachapa viboko mitume.
Wasinene tena juu ya jina la Yesu lenye mamlaka.
Ilikuwa ni faida kuteswa na kudharauliwa kwa ajili ya Yesu.
"Baada ya siku hiyo, kila siku." Kifungu hiki kinaonyesha kile walichokifanya mitume kila siku kwa siku zilizofuata. Walitiwa moyo kufanya hili kwasababu ya kile kilichotokea katika tukio hilo la kuadhibiwa kwao.
"Hawakuacha kufundisha" Hekaluni na katika nyumba za waumini.
1 Sasa katika siku hizi, wakati idadi ya wanafunzi ilipokuwa inaongezeka, lalamiko la Wayahudi wa Kiyunani lilianza dhidi ya Waebrania, kwa sababu wajane wao walikuwa wanasahaulika katika mgao wa kila siku wa chakula. 2 Mitume kumi na wawili waliwaita kusanyiko lote la wanafunzi na kusema, "Siyo sahihi kwetu kuliacha neno la Mungu na kuhudumia mezani. 3 Kwa hiyo, ndugu, chagueni, wanaume saba, kutoka miongoni mwenu, watu wema, waliojaa Roho na hekima, ambao tunaweza kuwakabidhi huduma hii. 4 Na sisi, tutaendelea daima katika kuomba na katika huduma ya neno." 5 Hotuba yao ikaupendeza mkutano wote. Hivyo, wakamchagua Stefano, mtu aliyejaa imani na Roho Mtakatifu, na Filipo, Prokoro, Nikanori, Timoni, Parmena, na Nikolao, mwongofu kutoka Antiokia. 6 Waumini waliwaleta watu hawa mbele ya mitume, walioomba na badaye wakawawekea mikono yao. 7 Hivyo, neno la Mungu lilienea; na idadi ya wanafunzi ilizidi kuongezeka huko Yesrusalem; na idadi kubwa ya makuhani wakaitii imani. 8 Na Stefano, aliyejaa neema na nguvu, alikuwa akifanya maajabu na ishara kubwa miongoni mwa watu. 9 Lakini hapo wakainuka baadhi ya watu wafuasi wa Sinagogi liitwalo Sinagogi la Mahuru, na la Wakirene na la Waeskanderia, na baadhi kutoka Kilikia na Asia. Watu hawa walikuwa wakihojiana na Stefano. 10 Lakini, hawakuweza kushindana na hekima na Roho ambayo Stefano alikuwa akitumia katika kuzungumza. 11 Kisha waliwashawishi baadhi ya watu kwa siri kusema, "Tumesikia Stefano akizungumza maneno ya kufuru dhidi ya Musa na dhidi ya Mungu." 12 Waliwashurutisha watu, wazee, na waandishi, na kumwendea Stefano, wakamkamata, na kumleta mbele ya baraza. 13 waliwaleta mashahidi wa uongo, waliosema, "mtu huyu haachi kunena maneno mabaya dhidi ya eneo hili takatifu na sheria. 14 Kwani tumemsikia akisema kwamba huyu Yesu wa Nazareti atapaharibu mahali hapa na kuzibadili desturi tulizokabidhiwa na Musa." 15 Kila mmoja aliyekuwa katika baraza, akaelekeza macho yake kumwangalia Stefano, nao wakauona uso wake ulikuwa kama uso wa malaika.
Waumini wa Yerusalemu waliwapa wajane chakula kila siku. Wote walikuzwa kama Wayahudi ingawa wengine wao walikua wameishi Yudea na walizungumza Kihebrania, na wengine walikuwa wameishi kwa Mataifa na walizungumza Kigiriki. Waliogawa chakula walikigawa kwa wajane waliozungumza Kihebrania na kuwaacha wale ambao hawakukizungumza. Kumfurahisha Mungu, viongozi wa kanisa waliwateua wanaume waliokifahamu Kigiriki kwa kugawa sehemu ya chakula kwa wajane waliokifahamu Kigiriki Mmoja wa" hao wanaume alikuwa Stefano.
Hakuna ajuaye vile uso wa Stefano ulivyokuwa kama uso wa malaika kwa maana Luka hatuambii hilo. Ni vema tafsiri hii kusema tu kuhusu kinachosema ULB kuhusu haya.
Huu ni mwanzo wa sehemu mpya ya habari. Luka anatoa habari muhimu ya kuweza kujifunza.
Hii inaonyesha mwanzo wa sehemu mpya ya habari. Zingatia namna ambavyo sehemu mpya ya habari zinavyotambulishwa katika lugha yako.
"Kuongezeka kukubwa"
Hawa walikuwa ni wayahudi ambao walikuwa wakiishi maisha yao zaidi sehemu fulani katika utawala wa kirumi nje ya Israel, na walikuwa wakiongea Kigiriki. Lugha na utamaduni wao vilikuwa kidogo tofauti na wale waliokulia Israeli.
Hawa walikuwa ni wayahudi waliokuwa wamekulia Israel wakiongea Kiaramaiki. Kanisa liliwaangalia tu wayahudi na wafuasi wa kiyahudi mpaka hapo.
Mjane wa kweli alikuwa ni mwanamke ambaye mme wake alikuwa amekufa, na hakuna jamaa wowote wa kumtunza.
"kupuuzwa" au "kusahaulika." Kulikuwa na wengi sana waliohitaji msaada kiasi kwamba baadhi walikoswa hasa Wayahudi wa Kiyunani.
Pesa ambayo ilitolewa kwa mitume ilitumika kwa sehemu kununua chakula kwa ajili ya wajane wa kanisa la kwanza.
Hapa wanazungumziwa mitume kumi na moja pamoja na Mathias aliyekuwa amechaguliwa.
"Wanafunzi wote" au "Waumini wote"
Ni neno lenye msisitizo wa muhimu wa kutokuacha huduma ya kufundisha neno la Mungu
Hili ni neno kwa ajili ya kuhudumia chakula kwa watu.
Uwezekano wa maana waweza kuwa 1) Wanaume wana sifa tatu- wema, kujazwa na Roho, na kujazwa na hekima au 2) wanaume wana tabia njema kwa sifa mbili- kujazwa na Roho, na kujawa na hekima.
Kuwa na wajibu kwa huduma hiyo muhimu.
Ni huduma ya kufundisha na kuhubiri habari njema.
Hotuba yao ilikubaliwa, pendekezo lilikubaliwa na jamii yote ya waumini.
Haya ni majina ya kigiriki, na mapendekezo yalikuwa kwamba wanaume walioteuliwa walikuwa zaidi au wote kutoka kundi la waumini wa wayahudi wa kigiriki.
"Mtu wa mataifa aliyeamini dini ya kiyahudi"
Kuwapa baraka na kuwakabidhi wajibu na mamlaka kwa kazi ya watu saba
Msitari huu ni neno linalotoa taarifa mpya juu ya ukuaji wa kanisa.
Idadi ya watu walioliamini neno la Mungu iliendelea kuongezeka. hivyo kwa lugha nyingine neo la Mungu liliongezeka.
"Walikubali kuifuata njia mpya ya imani"
Hii inaweza kuwa; 1) Ujumbe wa Injili wa matumaini katika Yesu; au 2) Mafundisho ya kanisa; au 3) Mafundisho ya kikristo.
Huu ni mwanzo wa sehemu mpya ya hadithi.
Mistari hii inatupa maelezo ambayo Stefano na watu wengine hali ilivyoendelea kuwa.
Luka anamwelezea Stefano kama kinara wa sehemu ya simulizi hii.
Neno "Neema" na "Nguvu" yanaelezea nguvu kutoka kwa Mungu. Yaani Mungu alikuwa akimpa nguvu Stefano za kutenda.
"Mahuru" walikuwa yumkini watumwa huru kutoka sehemu hizi tofautitofauti. Haijulikani kama watu wengine walioorodheshwa walikuwa sehemu ya Sinagogi au walishiriki tu katika mdahalo na Stefano.
"kubishana na Stefano" au "kujadiliana na Stefano"
Taarifa za nyuma zilizoanza zinaendelea katika mstari wa 10.
"Wasingeweza kuthibitisha uongo kwa kile Stefano alichosema"
Kwa kuwa jambo lilifanywa kwa siri, inathibitisha kwamba ushuhuda wao ulikuwa wa uongo.
"maneno kinyume na sheria ya Mungu na Musa"
"kuwahamasisha watu kwa kiwango cha kuwa na hasira"
Kisha wote wakamwendea kwa nguvu
"kumshika kwa nguvu"
anaendelea kunena mara zote.
"kuangalia kwa shauku kwake." Hii ni msemo ukimaanisha kuelekeza macho kwake."
Hii ni tabasamu kama kulinganisha na kiwango cha mfanano unaofanana na kuwa "mng'ao" ambao haujasemwa. "alikuwa anang'aa kama uso wa malaika"
1 Kuhani mkuu akasema,"mambo haya ni ya kweli"? 2 Stephano akasema, "Ndugu na mababa zangu, nisikilizeni mimi: Mungu wa utukufu alimtokea baba yetu Abrahamu wakati alipokuwa Mesopotamia, kabla hajaishi Harani,' 3 akamwambia,' Ondoka katika nchi yako na jamaa zako na uende katika nchi nitakayokuonyesha'. 4 Kisha akaondoka katika nchi ya Ukaldayo akaishi Harani, kutoka hapo, baada ya baba yake kufa, Mungu akamleta kwenye nchi hii, wanayoishi sasa. 5 Hakumpa chochote kama urithi wake, hapakuwa na sehemu hata ya kuweka mguu. Lakini Abrahamu aliahidiwa hata kabla hajapata mtoto kuwa atapewa nchi kama miliki yake na uzao wake. 6 Mungu alinena naye hivi, ya kwamba wazao wake wangeishi katika nchi ya ugeni, na kwamba wenyeji wa huko watawafanya kuwa watumwa wao na kuwatenda vibaya kwa muda wa miaka mia nne. 7 Na Mungu akasema, nitalihukumu taifa ambalo litawafanya mateka, na baada ya hapo watatoka na kuniabudu katika sehemu hii.' 8 Na akampa Abrahamu agano la tohara, hivyo Abrahamu akawa baba wa Isaka akamtahiri siku ya nane; Isaka akawa baba wa Yakobo, na Yakobo akawa baba wa mababu zetu kumi na wawili. 9 Mababu zetu wakamwonea wivu Yusufu wakamuuza katika nchi ya Misri, na Mungu alikuwa pamoja naye, 10 na akamwokoa katika mateso yake, na akampa fadhili na hekima mbele ya Farao mfalme wa Misri. Farao akamfanya awe mtawala juu ya Misri na juu ya nyumba yake yote. 11 Basi kukawa na njaa kuu na mateso mengi katika nchi ya Misri na Kanani, na baba zetu hawakupata chakula. 12 Lakini Yakobo aliposikia kuna nafaka Misri, aliwatuma baba zetu kwa mara ya kwanza. 13 Katika safari ya pili Yusufu akajionyesha kwa ndugu zake, familia ya Yusufu ikajulikana kwa Farao. 14 Yusufu akawatuma ndugu zake kwenda kumwambia Yakobo baba yao aje Misri, pamoja na jamaa yake, jumla ya watu wote ni sabini na tano. 15 Hivyo Yakobo akashuka Misri; kisha akafa yeye pamoja na baba zetu. 16 Wakachukuliwa hata Shekemu wakazikwa katika kaburi ambalo Abrahamu alilinunua kwa vipande vya fedha kutoka kwa wana wa Hamori huko Shekemu. 17 Wakati wa ile ahadi ambayo Mungu alimwahidi Abrahamu ulipokaribia, watu wakiwa wameongezeka huko Misri, 18 wakati huo aliinuka mfalme mwingine juu ya Misri, mfalme asiyejua kuhusu Yusufu. 19 Huyo mfalme mwingine akawadanganya watu wetu na kuwatenda mabaya baba zetu, na kuwatupa watoto wao wachanga ili wasiishi. 20 Katika kipindi kile Musa alizaliwa; alikuwa mzuri mbele za Mungu, akalelewa miezi mitatu katika nyumba ya baba yake. 21 Wakati alipotupwa, binti wa Farao alimchukua akamlea kama mwanaye. 22 Musa alifundishwa mafundisho yote ya Kimisri; alikuwa na nguvu katika maneno na matendo. 23 Lakini baada ya kutimiza miaka arobaini, ikamjia katika moyo wake kuwatembelea ndugu zake, wana wa Israeli. 24 Alipomwona Mwisraeli akitendewa mabaya, Musa alimtetea na kulipiza kisasi aliyekuwa akimwonea kwa kumpiga Mmisiri: 25 akifikiri kuwa ndugu zake watafahamu kwamba Mungu anawaokoa kwa mkono wake, lakini hawakufahamu. 26 Siku iliyofuata akaenda kwa baadhi ya Waisraeli waliokuwa wanagombana; akajaribu kuwapatanisha; akisema,' Mabwana, Ninyi ni ndugu; mbona mnakoseana ninyi kwa ninyi,? 27 Lakini aliyemkosea jirani yake akamsukumia mbali, na kusema, 'Nani kakufanya mtawala na muhukumu wetu? 28 Wewe unataka kuniua, kama ulivyomuua Mmisri jana?" 29 Musa akakimbia baada ya kusikia hivyo; akawa mgeni katika nchi ya Midiani, ambapo akawa baba wa wana wawili. 30 Baada ya miaka arobaini kupita, malaika akamtokea katika jangwa la mlima Sinai, katika mwali wa moto ndani ya kichaka. 31 Wakati Musa alipoona moto, alishangaa na kustaajabia kile alichokiona, na alipojaribu kukisogelea ili kukitazama, sauti ya Bwana ikamjia Ikisema, 32 'Mimi ni Mungu wa baba zako, Mungu wa Abrahamu, na wa Isaka, na wa Yakobo'. Musa alitetemeka na hakuthubutu kuangalia. 33 Bwana akamwambia, 'Vua viatu vyako, sehemu uliposimama ni mahali patakatifu. 34 Nimeona mateso ya watu wangu waliopo Misri; Nimesikia kuugua kwao, nami nimeshuka ili niwaokoe; sasa njoo, nitakutuma wewe Misri.' 35 Huyu Musa ambaye waliyemkataa, wakati waliposema, 'nani kakufanya kuwa mtawala na mwamuzi wetu?'_ alikuwa ndiye ambaye Mungu alimtuma awe mtawala na mkombozi. Mungu alimtuma kwa mkono wa malaika ambaye alimtokea Musa kichakani. 36 Musa aliwaongoza kutoka Misri baada ya kufanya miujiza na ishara katika Misri na katika bahari ya Shamu, na katika jangwa kwa kipindi cha miaka arobaini. 37 Ni Musa huyu ndiye aliyewambia watu wa Isiraeli kuwa, 'Mungu atawainulieni nabii kutoka miongoni mwa ndugu zenu, nabii kama mimi'. 38 Huyu ni mtu ambaye alikuwa katika mkutano jangwani na malaika ambaye aliongea naye katika mlima Sinai. Huyu ndiye mtu ambaye alikuwa na baba zetu, huyu ni mtu ambaye alipokea neno lililo hai na kutupatia sisi. 39 Huyu ni mtu ambaye baba zetu walikataa kumtii; walimsukumia mbali, na katika mioyo yao waligeukia Misri. 40 Katika kipindi hicho walimwambia Haruni.'tutengenezee miungu itakayotuongoza. Huyo Musa, aliyekuwa akituongoza kutoka katika nchi ya Misri, hatujui kilichompata.' 41 Hivyo wakatengeneza ndama kwa siku hizo na wakatoa sadaka kwa hiyo sananmu na wakafurahi kwa sababu ya kazi ya mikono yao. 42 Lakini Mungu aliwageuza na kuwapa waabudu nyota wa angani, kama ilivyoandikwa kwenye kitabu cha manabii, 'Je Mmenitolea mimi sadaka za wanyama mliowachinja jangwani kwa muda wa miaka arobaini, nyumba ya Israeli? 43 Mmekubali hema ya kukutania ya Moleki na nyota ya mungu refani, na picha mliyoitengeneza na kuwaabudu wao: na nitawapeleka mbali zaidi ya Babeli.' 44 Baba zetu walikuwa na hema ya kukutania ya ushuhuda jangwani, kama Mungu alivyoamuru alipoongea na Musa, kwamba angeitengeneza kwa mfano wa ule aliouona. 45 Hili ni hema ambalo baba zetu, kwa wakati wao, waliletwa katika nchi na Joshua. Hii ilitokea wakati walipoingia kumiliki taifa ambalo Mungu aliwafukuza kabla ya uwepo wa baba zetu. Hii ilikuwa hivi hadi siku za Daudi, 46 ambaye alipata kibali machoni pa Mungu,' na akaomba kutafuta makao kwa Mungu wa Yakobo. 47 Lakini Selemani alimjengea nyumba ya Mungu. 48 Hata hivyo Aliye Juu haishi kwenye nyumba zilizojengwa kwa mikono; hii ni kama nabii alivyosema, 49 Mbingu ni kiti changu cha enzi, na dunia ni sehemu ya kuwekea miguu yangu. Nyumba ya aina gani mtanijengea?, asema Bwana: au ni wapi sehemu yangu ya kupumzikia? 50 Siyo mkono wangu uliofanya hivi vitu vyote?' 51 Enyi watu wenye shingo ngumu msiotahiriwa mioyo na masikio, kila mara mnampinga Roho Mtakatifu,' mnatenda kama baba zenu walivyotenda. 52 Ni nabii gani katika manabii ambaye baba zenu hawakumtesa?. Waliwaua manabii wote waliotokea kabla ya ujio wa Mmoja mwenye Haki,'na sasa mmekuwa wasaliti na wauaji wake pia, 53 enyi watu mliopokea sheria ile iliyoagizwa na malaika lakini hamkuishika." 54 Kisha wajumbe wa baraza waliposikia mambo haya, walichomwa mioyo yao, wakamsagia meno Stefano. 55 Lakini yeye, akiwa amejaa Roho Mtakatifu, alitazama mbinguni kwa makini na akauona utukufu wa Mungu,' na kumwona Yesu amesimama mkono wa kuume wa Mungu. 56 Stefano akasema, "Angalia nimeona mbingu zimefunguka, na Mwana wa Adam amesimama mkono wa kuume wa Mungu." 57 Lakini wajumbe wa baraza wakapiga kelele kwa sauti za juu, wakaziba masikio yao, wakamkimbilia kwa pamoja, 58 wakamtupa nje ya mji na wakampiga mawe: na mashahidi wakavua nguo zao za nje na kuweka chini karibu na miguu ya kijana aliyeitwa Sauli. 59 Walipokuwa wakimpiga mawe Stefano, aliendelea kumwita Bwana na kusema, "Bwana Yesu, pokea roho yangu,". 60 Akapiga magoti na kuita kwa sauti kubwa, "Bwana, usiwahesabie dhambi hii. "Aliposema haya, akakata roho.
Tafsiri zingine zimeweka kila mstari wa ushairi mbele ya kulia kuliko maandishi mengine ili kurahisisha kusoma. ULB hufanya hivi na ushairi ambao umenukuliwa kutoka Agano la Kale 7:42-43 na 49-50.
Inaonekana kwamba 8:1 ni sehemu ya utungo wa sura hii.
Stefano alihadithia historia ya Israeli kwa ufupi. Alisisitiza ule muda Wana wa Israeli walikuwa wamewakataa watu Mungu alikuwa amechagua kuwaongoza. Mwisho wa habari, alisema viongozi wa Wayahudi aliokuwa akiwazungumzia walikuwa wamemkataa Yesu jinsi Waisraeli watenda dhambi walikuwa wakiwakataa viongozi walioteuliwa na Mungu.
Roho Mtakatifu alimwongoza Stefano kana kwamba alisema tu kile Mungu alitaka aseme.
Mwandishi anapolizungumzia jambo ambalo si muhimu kwa wakati huo lakini litakuja kuwa muhimu baadaye katoka hadithi hiyo, hii huitwa kuashiria yajayo. Luka anamtaja Saulo, aliyejulikana kama Paulo kwa hii hadithi ingawa si mhusika wa maana kwenye habari hii. Hii ni kwa maana Paulo ni mtu muhimu katika sehemu zilizobaki kwenye hiki kitabu cha Matendo ya Mitume.
Stefano alikuwa akizungumza na Wayahudi walizifahamu vyema sheria za Musa na kwa hivyo hakufafanua vitu ambavyo wasikilizaji wake walikuwa wanajua mbele. Lakini utahitajika kueleza baadhi ya vitu hivi ili wasomi wako waweze kuelewa alichokuwa anasema Stefano. Kwa mfano labda utaeleza vizuri kwamba wakati ndugu zake Yusufu "walimuuza Misri"
Stefano alizungumzia Yusufu kuongoza "Juu ya Misri" na juu ya nyumba ya Farao. Hapa alimaanisha ya kwamba Yusufu aliongoza watu wa Misri na watu na mali yote iliyokuwa ndani ya nyumba ya Farao .
Viongozi wa Wayahudi ambao Stefano aliwazungumzuia walikuwa wanafahamu mbele matukio aliyokuwa akiwazungumzuia. Walifahamu kwamba Musa aliandika Kitabu cha Mwanzo. Kama kitabu cha mwanzo hakikutafsiriwa katika lugha yako, itakuwa vigumu kwa wasomaji wako kuelewa alichosema Stefano.
Sehemu ya habari kuhusu Stefano iliyoanzia sura 6:8 inaendelea. Stefano anaanza kumjibu Kuhani Mkuu na baraza kwa kuanza kuzungumzia mambo yaliyotukia katika historia ya Israeli. Maelezo mengi ya Stefano yanatoka kwenye vitabu vya sheria vya Musa.
Kwenye mstari wa 2,Stefano anaanza hotuba yake kumjibu kuhani mkuu na baraza.Anaanza hotuba yake kwa kuongelea mambo yaliyotokea katika historia ya Israeli.
Stefano alikuwa akiheshimika sana kwenye baraza kwa salamu yake ya kifamilia.
Hakuweza kutoa chochote katika hiyo.
Inaweza kuwa na maana ya; 1) Eneo pana la kuweza kusimama; au 2) Aridhi ya kutosha kuweza kutembea kwa hatua kadhaa.
Kwamba nchi itakuwa mali yake milele yeye na uzao wake.
Badaaye Mungu alimwambia Ibrahimu.
Miaka mia nne (400).
Neno "taifa" linamaanisha watu walio ndani yake. Mungu atawahukumu watu wa taifa.
Nchi ambayo uzao wako watakuwa mateka.
Mungu alifanya Agano na Abrahamu la tohara kwa watoto wake wote wa kiume.
Ni habari inayoelezea Uzao wa Abrahamu.
Na Yakobo akawa baba, Stefana anaelezea kwa ufupi.
Wana wakubwa wa Yakobo " "au" ndugu wakubwa wa Yusufu"
Ndugu zake wakubwa na Yusufu walijawa na wivu dhidi yake.
Wayahudi walijua kuwa mababu zao walimwuza Yusufu na kuwa mtumwa katika nchi ya Misri.
Inafaa kutumika kiuhalisia kuwa; "lakini Mungu" alikuwa pamoja naye huko.
Yusufu akawatawala watu wote wa Misri
linaelezea; na kila kitu Farao alichokuwa anakimiliki nyumbani kwake.
"Kukawa na njaa."ardhi ikaacha kutoa chakula
"Ndugu zake wakubwa Yusufu"
"Chakula"
Yakobo aliwatuma baba zetu, ndugu zake na Yusufu.
Katika safari yao ya pili ya kufuata chakula huko Misri.
Yusufu akajifunua kwa ndugu zake na kujitambulisha kama ndugu yao.
Kwa maana nyingine; Farao akafahamu kuwa hao walikuwa ndugu zake na Yusufu.
liwatuma ndugu zake kwenda Kanaani, nyumbani kwa kaka zake.
"Yakobo na ndugu zake, baba zetu" wote walikufa.
"Uzao wa Yakobo walimchukua na kwenda kumzika katika makaburi walikozikwa ndugu zake.
"kwa fedha"
Katika baadhi ya lugha zingine inaweza kuwa msaada ikisomeka; Idadi kubwa ya watu ilipoongezeka, badala ya kusema; muda wa ahadi ulipowadia.
Ulikuwa umekaribia muda ambao Mungu angetimiza ahadi yake kwa Ibrahimu.
falme mwingine alianza kutawala
"Misri" inasimama badala ya watu wa Misri. "Watu wa Misri"
"Yusufu"inarejea sifa njema ya Yusufu. "Nani hakujua kuhusu mamlaka ya Yusufu huko Msri."
"Waliwatenda mababu zetu kimaskini"au" "walichukua faida kwa mababu zetu"
kuwatupa watoto wao wachanga ili wasiishi
Haya ni maelezo ya kumtambulisha mtu mpya, Musa.
Musa alikuwa kijana mzuri
Wazazi wake walimlea Musa miezi mitatu.
Musa "alitupwa" kwa sababu Farao alikuwa ameamuru kila mtoto wa kiume azaliwapo lazima atupwe. Wazazi wake walilazimika kumweka nje ya nyumba yao.
kama vile alikuwa mwanaye wa kiume wa kuzaa
"Wamisri walimfundisha Musa"
hii inaongezea ,"vitu vyote walivyovijua Wamisri."
"alikuwa na uwezo katika maneno na matendo yake"
Musa alitafakari na kisha akaamua
Kuona jinsi gani ndugu zake, wana wa Israeli wanaendeleaje.
Alipomwona Mmisri anamtesa mwisraeli, Musa alimtetea na akalipiza kisasi kwa kumpiga hadi kufa yule Mmisri.
" Musa alidhani kuwa, alichokifanya ndugu zake watajua kuwa ni Mungu anawapigania"
kupitia yeye Mungu alikuwa akiwaokoa ndugu zake.
Waisraeli wawili aliwaona wanaogombana wao kwa wao.
Alijaribu kuwazuia wasipate kuendelea na ugomvi.
Musa alikuwa akizungumza na hao waisraeli waliokuwa wakigombana
Musa aliuliza swali kuwatia moyo waache kugombana. Msizidi kugombana tena
Hili swali lilitumika kumkemea Musa."Huna mamlaka juu yetu"!
Mtu yule alitumia swali hilo kumwonya Musa aanze kuzani yawezekana wengi wao walimwona akimwua yule Mmisri.
Jamii iliyokuwa inamsikiliza Stefani ilikuwa inajua kuwa Musa alikuwa amemwoa mwanamke wa kimidiani alipokimbia kutoka Misri.
Musa alipotambua kuwa Waisraeli wanajua kuwa alikuwa amemwua Mmisri siku moja kabla.
Wakati miaka arobaini imepita baada ya Musa kutoka Misri.
Stefano alikuwa akiongea na kungi ambalo lilijua pia kuwa Mungu aliongea na Musa kwa njia ya Malaika.
Musa alishangaa kwamba kichaka hakiungui moto. Hii ilijulikana na watazamaji wa Stefano.
Hii inamaanisha Musa alikisogelea kichaka kwa karibu ili kuchunguza kilichokuwa kinatokea, lakini ghafla akarudi nyuma kwa hofu aliposikia sauti ikitoka ndani ya kichaka.
"Mimi ni Mungu ambaye baba zako waliniabudu"
Musa alitetemeka kwa hofu.
Mungu alimwambia Musa hivyo ili kumweshimu Mungu.
Musa, eneo unalosimama sasa ni Mungu amelifanya kuwa takatifu, Uwepo wa Mungu ukpo katika eneo hili.
Nimeona kwa hakika pasipo shaka.
Watu wa Mungu "Uzao wa Abraham,Isaka na Yakobo"
"nami nimeshuka ili kuwaondolea vifungo"
"Jiandae" au "KUwa tayari" kwenda. Mungu anatumia amri, anamwamrisha.
Baada ya Waisraeli kutoka Misri, walikaa miaka 40 wakizunguka zunguka jangwani kabla Mungu hajawaongoza kuingia katika nchi aliyokuwa amewaahidi kuwapa.
Hii inarejesha nyuma matukio yaliyotunzwa
Hili swali lilitumika kumkemea Musa."Huna mamlaka juu yetu"!
"Kutawala juu yao na kuwaweka huru kutoka kuwa watumwa"
"Kwa nguvu ya malaika"
"kipindi cha miaka arobaini ambacho watu wa Israeli waliishi jangwani"
"kutoka miongoni mwa watu wenu kuwa Nabii"
Mstari wa 40 ni nukuu kutoka katika vitabu vya sheria vya Musa.
"Huyu ni Musa mtu ambaye ni miongoni mwa Waisraeli.
"Huyu ni mtu ambaye Mungu aliongea naye neno lililo hai kutupa sisi"
Maana sahihi ni 1) "ujumbe ambao uliopo" au 2) "maneno yaletayo uzima."
Mfano huu unaonyesha kukataliwa kwa Musa, "walimkataa yeye kama kiongozi wao"
"WAlikusudia kurejea tena Misri"
"Walipoamua kurudi Misri"
Hapa nukuu ya Stefano inatoka kwa Nabii Amosi
walitengeneza sanamu mfano wa ndama ili waiabudu.
Fungu lote hili linafafanua ndama yule aliyetengenezwa.
Mungu aligeukia mbali kwa kuwa hakupendezwa na watu hao na kutokuwasaidia tena. Mungu aliacha kuwarekebisha.
"Akajiondoa kwao
Inaweza kuwa; 1) Nyota pekee au 2) Jua, Mwezi na Nyota.
Ni muunganiko wa maandiko kutoka Manabii wa Agano la Kale.
Mungu aliwauliza Waesraeli swali kuonyesha kuwa walikuwa hawamwabudu yeye wala kumtolea dhabihu zao. "Hamkuniheshimu mimi wakati mlipochinja wanyama wasiofaa na kutoa dhabihi .... Israeli".
Hii ni ujumla wa Taifa la Israeli
Stefano anaendeleza majibu yake kwa Kuhani Mkuu na wajumbe wa baraza
Hii ni nukuu Stefano anaiweka kutoka kwa Nabii Amosi
Inamaanisha waliitwaa hiyo miungu pamoja nao wakasafiri pamoja nayo huko Jangwani
Hema ya kukutania au hema ambalo lilijengwa kumwabudu mungu Moleki
nyota ambayo ilimtambulisha mungu wa uongo Refani
Walitengeneza picha ya mungu Moleki na Refani kwa kusudi la kumwabudu.
Nitawaondoa kwenye maeneo hata mbali zaidi ya Babeli. Huu ni mwitikio wa hukumu ya Mungu.
hema ambalo lilijengwa kulifunika sanduku lililokuwa na amri kumi zilizochorwa kwenye mawe na kuwekwa ndani ya sanduku.
Hii itajumuisha nchi ,majengo,wanyama na vyote na miliki zote za taifa ambalo Israeli walikuwa wakiwashinda maadui na kuchukua nyara.
Sanduku la agano lilibaki kwenye hema na ilijumuisha muda wa Daudi, mfalme wa Israeli
Daudi alitaka sanduku la agano likae Yerusalemu, siyo litangatange kwenye hema kuwazunguka Israeli
Mistari ya 49-50, Stefano ananukuu maneno kutoka kwa Nabii Isaya. Katika nukuu, Mungu anaongea kuhusu yeye mwenyewe.
zilizotengenezwa na watu
Nabii analinganisha ukuu wa Mungu na jinsi isivyowezekana kwa mtu sehemu kwa Bwana kupumzika katika nchi tangu dunia ilipokuwa utupu lakini ni sehemu ya Mungu kuwekea miguu tu.
Mungu anauliza swali ili kuonesha namna gani mwanadamu ana mapungufu kufikia uumbaji wake. Huwezi kujenga nyumba ambayo itanitosha mimi!
Mungu anauliza hili swali kumwonyesha mwanadamu kwamba hawezi kumpatia Mungu mapumziko. "Hakuna sehemu nzuri ya kumtosha Mungu kupumzikia!"
Mungu anauliza hili swali kuonyesha kwamba mwanadamu hatengenezi chochote. "Mkono wangu umefanya hivi vitu vyote!
Kwa karipio kali, Stefano anamalizia kumjibu Kuhani Mkuu na baraza kwa staili ile aliyoanza nayo sur 7:1.
Shingo ngumu -Stefano alibadilisha kutoka utambulisho wa viongozi wa Kiyahudi na kuwakemea
Shingo ngumu -Hii haina maana walikuwa na shingo ngumu, lakini anawaambia kuwa walikuwa wasumbufu.
Moyo usiomtii Mungu. Wayahudi walilitumia neno kwa watu wasio na tohara ni sawa na watu wasiomtii Mungu. Stefano alitumia "moyo' na "masikio" kuwakilisha Wayahudi viongozi waliotenda kwa namna ya watu wa mataifa walivyokuwa wakitenda. Viongozi hawa hawakumtii na wala kumsikiliza Mungu.
Stefano aliuliza swali kuwaonyesha kwamba hakujifunza chochote katika makosa ya baba zao. "Baba zao waliwatesa kila nabii"!
Anamaanisha juu ya Kristo, Masihi.
"Mlimsaliti na kumwua"
"Sheria ambazo Mungu alizituma kwa Malaika kuwaba baba zetu.
Baraza lilimjia juu Stefano kutokana na ujumbe wake.
Hii ni hatua ya kugeuka; mahubiri yalifikia mwisho na baraza likachukua hatua.
Hii ni fumbo kwa, "kujawa na hasira"
Hili ni fumbo linaloelezea hasira nzito au chuki. "walikuwa na hasira ambayo walisaga meno yao kwa pamoja."
"Aliangalia juu kwenye mawingu."Inatokea kwamba Stefano peke yake aliona maono siyo mwingine yeyote katika mkutano.
Kwa kawaida watu walizoea kuuona utukufu wa Mungu kwa ishara ya nuru." :mwanga mkali kutoka kwa Mungu". Stefano katika maono yake alimwona Mwana wa Adamu amesimama mkono wa kuume wangu.
Stefano alimtambulisha Yesu kwa cheo cha "Mwana wa Adam."
Waliziba masikio yao wasiweze kusikia zaidi alichokuwa akisema Stefano.
mavazi ya nje au nguo mojawapo walizokuwa wakivaa juu ya nguo zingine.
baraza la wazee wakampiga Stefano wakamkamata kwa nguvu na kumtupa nje ya mji
"mbele ya "kwa kusudi la kuzilinda
Sauli alikuwa na umri wa kati ya miaka 30 wakati ule.
Maelezo ya Stefano yanakomea katika sura hii ya 7.
"Chukua Roho yangu" Hili lilikuwa ni ombi toka kwa Stefano.
Hii ni namna ya kuonyesha unyenyekevu kwa Mungu.
Inamaanisha; Uwasamehe dhambi hii.
Ni lugha nyingine kuonyesha umauti wa mtu.
1 Sauli alikuwa kwenye makubaliano ya kifo chake. siku hiyo ndipo alipoanza kuwatesa kinyume cha kanisa lililokuwa Yerusalemu; na waaminio wote waliotawanyika katika majimbo ya Yudea na Samaria, isipokuwa mitume. 2 Watu wachamungu walimzika Stefano na kufanya maombolezo makubwa juu yake. 3 Lakini Sauli alilidhuru sana kanisa. Alikwenda nyumba kwa nyumba na kuwaburuza nje wanawake na waume, na kuwatupia gerezani. 4 waaminio ambao walikuwa wametawanyika bado walilihubiri neno. 5 Filipo akashuka katika mji wa Samaria na akamtangaza Kristo huko. 6 Baada ya makutano kusikia na kuona ishara alizofanya Filipo; wakaweka umakini juu ya kile alichosema. 7 Kutoka hapo watu wengi waliosikia, pepo wachafu waliwatoka watu huku wakilia kwa sauti kubwa, na wengi waliopooza na viwete waliponywa. 8 Na kulikuwa na furaha kubwa katika mji. 9 Lakini palikuwa na mtu mmoja katika mji ule jina lake Simon, ambaye alikuwa akifanya uchawi; ambao aliutumia kuwashangaza watu wa taifa la Samaria, wakati akisema kuwa yeye ni mtu wa muhimu. 10 Wasamaria wote tangu mdogo hata mkubwa, wakamsikiliza; wakasema;"mtu huyu ni ile nguvu ya Mungu ambayo ni kuu." 11 Wakamsikiliza, kwa maana amewashangaza muda mrefu kwa uchawi wake. 12 Lakini wakati walipoamini kuwa Filipo alihubiri juu ya ufalme wa Mungu na juu ya jina la Yesu Kristo, walibatizwa, wanaume kwa wanawake. 13 Na Simoni mwenyewe aliamini: baada ya kubatizwa, aliendelea kuwa na Filipo; alipoona ishara na miujiza iliyokuwa ikitendeka, alishangaa. 14 Wakati mitume wa Yerusalemu waliposikia kuwa Samaria imepokea neno la Mungu, wakawatuma Petro na Yohana. 15 Wakati walipokuwa wakishuka wakawaombea; kwamba wampokee Roho Mtakatifu. 16 Mpaka muda huo, Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa hajawashukia hata mmoja wao; walikuwa tu wamebatizwa kwa jina la Bwana Yesu. 17 Ndipo Petro na Yohana wakawawekea mikono, nao wakampokea Roho Mtakatifu. 18 Wakati Simoni alipoona kwamba Roho Mtakatifu ametolewa kupitia kuwekewa mikono na mitume; akataka kuwapa pesa, 19 Akasema, "Nipeni hii nguvu, ili kila nitakayemwekea mikono apokee Roho Mtakatifu." 20 Lakini Petro akamwambia; pesa yako pamoja na wewe ipotelee mbali, kwa sababu umedhani kuwa karama ya Mungu inapatikana kwa pesa. 21 Hauna sehemu katika jambo hili, kwa sababu moyo wako si mnyoofu mbele za Mungu. 22 Hivyo basi tubu maovu yako na kumwomba Mungu labda utasamehewe fikra za moyo wako. 23 Kwa maana naona uko katika sumu ya uchungu na kifungo cha dhambi." 24 Simoni akajibu na kusema, "Mwombeni Bwana kwa ajili yangu, kwa kuwa mambo yote mliyozungumza yaweza kunitokea. 25 Wakati Petro na Yohana walipokuwa wameshuhudia na kuhubiri neno la Bwana, walirudi Yerusalemu kwa njia hiyo; walihubiri injili katika vijiji vingi vya Wasamaria. 26 Basi malaika wa Bwana akanena na Filipo na kusema, "Angaza na uende kusini katika njia iendayo chini ya Yerusalemu kuelekea Gaza." ( Njia hii iko katika jangwa). 27 Akaangaza na kwenda. Tazama, kulikuwa na mtu wa Ethiopia, towashi mwenye mamlaka kuu chini ya kandase; malkia wa Ethiopia. Aliyewekwa juu ya hazina yake yote; naye alikuwa amekwenda Yerusalemu kuabudu. 28 Alikuwa akirejea ameketi garini mwake akisoma chuo cha nabii Isaya. 29 Roho akasema na Filipo, "Sogea karibu na gari hili ukashikamane nalo. 30 "Hivyo Filipo akaenda mbio, akamsikia akisoma katika chuo cha nabii Isaya; akasema, Je unafahamu unachosoma?" 31 Muethiopia akasema, "nitawezaje mtu asiponiongoza?" Akamsihi Filipo apande garini na kuketi pamoja naye. 32 Sasa fungu la maandiko alilokuwa akisoma Muethiopia ni hili; Aliongozwa kama kondoo kwenda machinjioni kuchinjwa; na kama kondoo alinyamaza kimya, hakufungua kinywa chake: 33 Kwa kuhuzunishwa kwake hukumu yake iliondolewa: Nani ataeleza kizazi chake? maisha yake yameondolewa katika nchi." 34 Hivyo towashi akamwuliza Filipo, na kusema, "nakuomba, ni nabii yupi ambaye anaongelewa habari zake, ni kuhusu yeye, au za mtu mwingine"?. 35 Filipo alianza kuongea, alianza kwa andiko hili la Isaya kumhubiria habari za Yesu. 36 Wakiwa njiani, wakafika penye maji,' towashi akasema, "Tazama, pana maji hapa nini kinazuia nisibatizwe?, 37 maneno haya, "Hivyo Muethiopia akajibu "naamini kwamba Yesu Kristo ni Mwana wa Mungu," hayamo kwenyemaandiko ya kale). Ndipo Muethiopia akaamuru gari lisimame. 38 Walikwenda ndani ya maji, pamoja Filipo na towashi, Filipo akambatiza. 39 Wakati walipotoka kwenye maji, Roho wa Bwana ikampeleka Filipo mbali; towashi hakumwona, akaenda njia yake akishangilia. 40 Lakini Philipo akatokea Azoto. Alipita katika mkoa ule na kuhubiri injili katika miji yote mpaka alipofika Kaisaria.
Tafsiri zingine zimeweka kila mstari wa ushairi mbele ya kulia kuliko maandishi mengine ili kurahisisha kusoma. ULB hufanya hivi na ushairi ambao umenukuliwa kutoka Agano la Kale 8:32-33
Sentensi ya Kwanza ya mstari wa 1 inaishia na maelezo ya matukio ya sura ya 7: Luka anaanza sehemu mpya ya historia yake na maneno "Hapo ikaanza".
Katika sura hii, Luka anawazungumzia kwa mara ya kwanza juu ya watu wanaopokea Roho Mtakatifu (Matendo 8:15-19).Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa mbele amewawezesha waumini kunena kwa lugha, kuwaponya wagonjwa na kuishi kama jumuia na alikuwa amemjaza Stefano pia. Lakini wakati Wayahudi walipoanza kuwafunga waumini katika gereza waumini walioweza kutoroka Yerusalemu walitoroka na walipokuwa wakiondoka waliwahubiria watu kumhusu Yesu. Wakati watu waliosikia ujumbe kuhusu Yesu walipokea Roho Mtakatifu, viongozi wa kanisa walijua kwamba watu hao walikuwa waumini wa ukweli.
Sura hii inazungumzia waumini wakitangaza neno, habari njema na kumtangaza Yesu kwamba ndiye Kristu kuliko sura zingine za kitabo cha Matendo. Neno "tangaza" ni tafsiri ya neno la Kigiriki linalomaanisha kusema habari njema kuhusu jambo ama kitu.
Simlizi inamalizika kumhusu Stefano, kuanzia sura hii ya 8 simlizi inaanza kumtaja Sauli.
Sehemu ya mstari huu wa 1 ni habari inayoeleza kuanza kwa mateso kwa watu wa njia ile baada ya kifo cha Stefano. Unaelezea sababu za Paulo kuanzisha mateso hayo kwa waumini.
Hii inahusu siku ambayo Stefano aliuawa,
Hii ni inavumisha wengi au zaidi ya waamini wa Yerusalem waliyakimbia mateso.
Inadhihirisha kwamba mitume walibaki Yerusalem ingawa hawakuyazoea hayo mateso makubwa
"Watu wenye hofu ya Mungu" au "Watu waliomuogopa Mungu
"Wakalia sana ...juu yake"
Sauli aliwachukua kwa nguvu Wayahudi waamini na kuwatoa nje ya nyumba zao na kuwatupa gerezani.
inaelezea juu wanaume na wanawake ambao waliokuwa wamemwamini Yesu.
Hapa panaanzia simlizi inayomhusu Filipi, ambaye watu walikuwa wamemchagua kuwa shemasi,
" waumini ambao walikuwa wametanyika kwa mateso makubwa".
"Kwenda chini" Neno limetumika hapa kwasababu Samaria iko kwenye ukanda wa chini zaidi ya Yerusalemu.
Haiko wazi kama ni mji wa Samaria katika mji wa Samaria.
Cheyo "Kristo" kinamwelezea Yesu, Masihi.
"Wakati makutano ya watu kutoka mji wa Samaria." Lilikuwa eneo lililobainishwa huko nyuma
Sababu ya watu kuweka umakini ilikuwa ni uponyaji wote alioufanya Filipo.
"roho wachafu walikuwa wakipaza sauti na kutoka kwa watu waliokuwa nayo.
Watu wa mji walikuwa na furaha kubwa
Simoni ametajwa kwenye simlizi hii ya Filipo. Mistari ya 9-11ni maelezo yanayomhusu Simoni ya kuwa alikuwa nani miongoni mwa wasamaria.
Hii ni njia ya kumtambulisha mtu mgeni katika simulizi. Lugha yako pengine inaweza kutumia maneno tofauti kumtambulisha mtu mgeni katika simulizi.
"Mji wa Samaria"
Hii inaongeza chumvi. "Wasamaria wengi katika mji wa Samaria.:
Watu walikuwa wanasema kwamba Simoni ni nguvu ya Mungu inayojulikana Nguvu Kuu.
Mistari hii anatoa maelezo zaidi kuhusu Simoni na baadhi ya Wasamaria waliokuwa wakimwamini Yesu.
Filipo aliwabatiza waamini wapya
Neno "mwenyewe" linatumika kumwelezea Simoni naye aliamini.
Filipo alimbatiza Simoni pia.
Simoni alishangaa pale alipoona Filipo anafanya ishara na miujiza mikubwa
Luka anaendeleza habari ya kile kilichokuwa kinatokea huko Samaria.
Alama hii ni ya mwanzo wa sehemu mpya ya simlizi ya waumini walivyokuwa wakiendelea huko Samaria.
"Samaria" Neno linaloelezea juu ya watu wengi waliokuwa waumini katika wilaya yote ya Samaria.
"Pale Petro na Yohana waliposhuka chini" kwenda Samaria.
"Petro na Yohana waliwaombea waamini wa Samaria"
"Kwamba Wasamaria wanaoamini wangeweza kupokea Roho Mtakatifu"
"Filipo alikuwa tu amewabatiza katika Jina la Bwana Yesu Wasamria walioamini"
"Kwao" linahusu watu wa Wasamaria ambao waliamini ujumbe wa injili kutoka kwa Filipo".
"Mitume waliwapa Roho Mtakatifu kwa kuweka mikono yao juu ya watu"
"Kwamba wakati ninaweka mikono yangu juu ya watu, wapokee Roho Mtakatifu"
Viwalilishi vya majina katika habari hii vinamwakilisha Simoni
Wewe na pesa yako muangamizwe
"Karama" ni neno linaelezea uwezo wa kutoa Roho Mtakatifu kwa njia ya kuweka mikono juu ya mtu mwingine.
Neno "huna sehemu" linaonyesha kuwa Simoni huna sehemu ya kushiriki katika kazi hii.
"Kufikiri kwako si sahihi"
"Kutaka kununua uwezo wa kutoa nguvu ya roho kwa wengine"
"Mawazo haya maovu"
"Anaweza kuwa tayari kukusamehe"
Haya ni maelezo ya fumbo yanayomaanisha wivu uliokidhiri.
"mtumwa wa dhambi" au "atafanya dhambi tu"
Ujumbe unaweza kuzungumzwa kwa namna nyingine; "Mambo mliyoyazungumza yasiweze kutokea kwangu"
Ni kemeo la Petro juu ya Simeoni kuadhibiwa kwake na pesa yake pia.
Hapa ni hitimisho la simulizi kuhusu Simoni na wasamaria.
Petro na Yohana waliwaeleza wasamaria juu ya wao walivyomfahamu Yesu.
Petro na Yohana walielezea juu ya maandiko ambayo Yesu alizungumza kwa wasamaria.
Kwa watu wengi katika vijiji vya Samaria.
Huu ni mwanzo wa simulizi kuhusu Filipo na mwanaume kutoka Ethiopia.
Mstari wa 27 unaonyesha taarifa za mwanaume kutoka Ethiopia.
"Iendayo chini" hapa linatumika kwasababu Yerusalemu iko juu zaidi ya Gaza
Neno "sasa" ni neno la kiunganishi cha simulizi.
Wasomi wengi wanaamini Luka aliongeza mkazo wa kuelezea eneo ambalo Filipo angeweza kupitia.
Neno "tazama" linatutahadharisha kwa mtu mpya katika simulizi. Lugha yako inaweza ikawa njia ya kufanya hivi. Kingereza linatumia "Palikuwa na mtu ambaye alikuwa."
Mkazo"towashi" hii ni kwamba, Mwethiopia aliyekuwa katika ofisi za serikali kuu.
Hiki ni cheo kwa malkia wa Ethiopia . Ni sawa na jinsi "farao" alitumika kuwa mfalme wa Misri.
Hili ni agano la kale la Isaya.
Filipo alifahamu kuwa ni muhimu kuwa karibu na mtu yule aliyepanda kwenye mkokoteni.
Hiki ni kitabu cha Agano la Kale cha Nabii Isaya.
Mwethiopia alikuwa mtu mwenye akili na aliweza kusoma, lakini alikuwa na upungufu wa ufahamu wa kiroho. Filipo alimwulija, "Je! Unafahamu maana ya habari unayoisoma?
Swali hili liliulizwa kusisitiza kuwa hakuweza kuelewa bila msaada. ''siwezi mpaka mtu aniongoze"
Filipo alikubali kutembea naye akiwa chini ya barabara pamoja naye akiyafafanua maandiko.
Hiki ni kifungu kutoka katika kitabu cha Isaya
Mkata manyoya ni mtu ambaye anakata manyoya ya sufu za kondoo ili zitumike.
Alidharauliwa na kuhukumiwa bila haki.
Swali hili lilitumika kuelezea kuwa hatakuwa na uzao. Kwamba; "Hakuna hata mmoja atakayeweza kuzungumzia habari za uzao wake"
Hii inaelezea kifo chake. "Watu walimwua" au "Watu waliyaondoa maisha yake hapa duniani"
"Tafadhari niambie"
"Je, Ni nabii anazungumzia habari zake mwenyewe, au anamzungumzia mtu mwingine"
Inamaanisha maandiko ya Nabii Isaya.
"kufundisha habari njema kuhusu Yesu kwa matoashi'
Waliendelea na safari njiani
Haiko wazi kama haya "Maji" yalikuwa ya kijito au bwawa la maji au maji mengi. tunachofahamu yalikuwa na kina cha kutosha kuwaza kwenda chini yake.
Towashi alitumia swali hili kumwomba Filipo amruhusu kubatizwa. "Tafadhali niruhusu nibatizwe"
Akamwambia dereva wa mkokoteni asimame.
Huu ni mwisho wa simulizi kuhusu Filipo na mtu kutoka Ethiopia.
Filipo alitoweka machoni pa Towashi hivyo hakumwona tena.
Kulikuwa hamna dalili za Filipo kusafiri kati ya alipokutana na Ethiopia na Azoto. Ghafla alipotelea katika barabara ya Gaza na kuzuka tena Azoto.
Simulizi ya Filipo inaishia Kaisaria.
1 Lakini Sauli, aliendelea kusema vitisho hata vya kifo kwa wanafunzi wa Bwana, alikwenda kwa kuhani mkuu 2 na kumwomba barua kwa ajili ya masinagogi huko Dameski, ili kwamba akimpata mtu aliye katika Njia ile, awe mwanaume au mwanamke, awafunge na kuwaleta Yerusalemu. 3 Hata alipokuwa akisafiri, ilitokea kwamba alipokaribia Dameski, ghafla ikamwangaza kotekote nuru kutoka mbinguni,' 4 naye akaanguka chini na akasikia sauti ikimwambia,"Sauli, Sauli, mbona wanitesa mimi?" 5 Sauli akajibu, U nani wewe Bwana? Bwana akasema, " Mimi ndiye Yesu unayeniudhi; 6 Lakini inuka, ingia mjini, nawe utaambiwa yakupasayo kutenda 7 Wale watu waliosafiri pamoja na Sauli wakatulia kimya, wakisikiliza sauti, wasione mtu. 8 Sauli akainuka katika nchi na alipofungua macho yake, hakuweza kuona kitu, wakamshika mkono wakamleta mpaka Dameski. 9 Kwa siku tatu haoni, hali, wala hanywi. 10 Basi palikuwapo mwanafunzi Dameski jina lake Anania, Bwana alisema naye katika maono, "Anania." Na akasema, "Tazama, nipo hapa, Bwana. 11 "Bwana akamwambia, "Inuka uenda zako katika mtaa uitwao Nyofu, na katika nyumba ya Yuda na ukaulize mtu kutoka Tarso aitwaye Sauli; maana angali anaomba; 12 na alimwona katika maono mtu jina lake Anania akiingia na kumwekea mikono juu yake ili kwamba apate kuona. 13 Lakini Anania akajibu, "Bwana, nimesikia habari za mtu huyu kwa watu wengi, kwa kiasi gani alivyowatendea mabaya watakatifu wa huko Yerusalemu; 14 Hapa ana mamlaka kutoka kwa kuhani mkuu kumkamata kila mmoja anayeliitia jina lako. 15 Lakini Bwana akamwambia, "Nenda, kwa maana yeye ni chombo teule kwangu, alichukue jina langu mbele ya Mataifa na wafalme na wana wa Israeli. 16 Maana nitawaonesha yalivyo mengi yatakayompasa kuteswa kwa ajili ya jina langu". 17 Anania akaenda, akaingia mle nyumbani; Akamwekea mikono akasema, Ndugu Sauli, Bwana Yesu, aliyekutokea katika njia ulipokuwa unakuja, amenituma upate kuona tena na ujazwe Roho Mtakatifu. 18 Ghafla vikaanguka machoni pake vitu kama magamba, akapata kuona, akasimama, akabatizwa; akala chakula na kupata nguvu. 19 Akakaa pamoja na wanafunzi huko Dameski kwa siku nyingi. 20 Wakati huo huo akamtangaza Yesu katika masinagogi, akisema kwamba yeye ni Mwana wa Mungu. 21 Na wote waliosikia walishangaa na kusema, "Siyo mtu huyu aliyewaharibu wote walioita Jina hili huko Yerusalemu? Na hapa alikuja kwa kusudi la kuwafunga na kuwapeleka kwa makuhani." 22 Lakini Sauli aliwezeshwa kuhubiri na kuwafanya Wayahudi waliokaa Dameski wachanganyikiwe na kuthibitisha ya kuwa huyu ndiye Kristo. 23 Baada ya siku nyingi, Wayahudi wakafanya shauri pamoja ili wamuue. 24 Lakini mpango wao ukajulikana na Sauli. Wakamvizia mlangoni mchana na usiku wapate kumuua. 25 Lakini wanafunzi wake wakamchukua usiku wakamshusha kupitia ukutani, wakamtelemsha chini katika kapu. 26 Na Sauli alipofika Yerusalemu, alijaribu kujiunga na wanafunzi lakini walikuwa wakimuogopa, wasisadiki kuwa yeye ni mwanafunzi. 27 Lakini Barnaba akamchukua na kumpeleka kwa mitume, Na akawaeleza jinsi Sauli alivyomuona Bwana njiani na Bwana alivyosema nae, na jinsi Sauli alivyohubiri kwa ujasiri kwa jina la Yesu huko Dameski. 28 Alikutana nao walipoingia na kutoka Yerusalemu. Akanena kwa ujasiri kwa jina la Bwana Yesu, 29 akihojiana na Wayahudi wa Kiyunani lakini wakijaribu mara kwa mara kumuua. 30 Wakati ndugu walipojua jambo hilo, wakamchukua mpaka Kaisaria, na wampeleke aende Tarso. 31 Basi kanisa lote katika Uyahudi, Galilaya na Samaria, lilikuwa na amani, na likajengwa, na kutembea katika hofu ya Bwana na faraja ya Roho Mtakatifu, kanisa likakua kwa kuongezeka idadi. 32 Kisha ilitokea Petro alipokuwa akizungukazunguka pande zote za mkoa, akawateremkia waumini waishio katika mji wa Lida. 33 Akamuona huko mtu mmoja jina lake Ainea, mtu huyo amekuwa kitandani miaka minane; maana alikuwa amepooza. 34 Petro akamwambia, "Ainea, Yesu Kristo akuponye; Amka na ujitandikia kitanda chako," Mara akaamka. 35 Na watu wote waliokaa Lida na Sharoni walipomuona mtu huyo, walimgeukia Bwana. 36 Palikuwa na mwanafunzi Yafa aitwaye Tabitha, ambalo lilitafsiriwa kama "Dorcas" Huyu mwanamke alijaa kazi njema na matendo ya rehema aliyoyafanya kwa maskini. 37 Ilitokea katika siku hizo aliugua na akafa; walipomsafisha, walimpandisha chumba cha juu na kumlaza.. 38 Kwa vile Lida ilikuwa karibu na Yafa, na wanafunzi walisikia kwamba Petro alikuwa huko, waliwatuma watu wawili kwake, wakimsihi, "Njoo kwetu bila kuchelewa". 39 Petro akaamka na akaondoka pamoja nao. Alipofika, walimleta katika chumba cha juu. Na wajane wote walisimama karibu naye wakilia, wakimwonyesha koti na nguo ambazo Dorcas aliwashonea wakati akiwa pamoja nao. 40 Petro akawatoa wote nje ya chumba, akapiga magoti akaomba, kisha akaugekia mwili, akasema, "Tabitha, amka". Akafungua macho yake na alipomwona Petro akakaa chini. 41 Kisha Petro akampa mkono wake akamwinua, na alipowaita waamini na wajane, akawakabidhi kwao akiwa hai 42 Jambo hili likajulikana Yafa yote, na watu wengi wakamwamini Bwana. 43 Ilitokea Petro akakaa siku nyingi Yafa pamoja na mtu aitwaye Simoni, mtengeneza ngozi.
Hakuna anayefahamu aliyeanza kuwaita Waumini wafuasi wa Njia. Labda Waumini walijiita hivyo kwa vile Bibilia kwa mara nyingi humzungumzia mtu anayeishi maishi yake kama mtu atambeaye njiani. Kama huu ni ukweli, Waumini walikuwa "Wakifuata njia ya Bwana" kwa kuishi kwa njia inayompendeza Mungu.
Kuna uwezekano "Barua" alizoomba Paulo zilikuwa nyaraka za Kisheria zilizoruhusu kuwafunga gerezani. Viongozi wa masinagogi wa Dameski waliiheshimu hiyo barua kwa vile iliandikwa na kuhani mkuu.Iwapo Warumi wangekuwa wameiona hiyo barua, wangemruhusu pia Saulo kuwatesa Wakristo kwa vile waliwaruhusu Wayahudi kuwafanyia watakavyo wale walovunja sheria zao za kidini.
Ni wazi kwamba Saulo aliuona mwanga na kwamba hii ni kwa sababu ya huu mwanga "alianguka chini" Watu wengine hufikiri kwamba Saulo alifahamu ni Bwana alikuwa akimzungumzia bila kuona kiwili cha binadamu kwa vile Biblia huzungumzia kila mara Mungu kama mwanga na kwamba huishi ndani ya Mwanga. Watu wengine hufikiri kwamba baadaye katika maisha yake aliweza kusema,"Nimemuona Bwana Yesu" kwa vile ni umbo la binadamu aliona hapo.
Simulizi inarudi nyuma kwa Sauli na wokovu wake.
Mistari hii inatupatia picha kwa kutujulisha kuwa Sauli alikuwa akiendelea na kazi zake tangu Stefano alipouawa kwa kupondwa kwa mawe.
Kiwakilishi cha jina "mauaji" linaweza tafsiriwa kama kitendo: aliendelea kuongelea vitisho, hata kwa kuwaua wanafunzi.
Inazungumzia juu ya watu katika Sinagogi. "Kwa watu wa Sinagogi" au "Kwa viongozi wa Sinagogi"
Kama akimpate mtu yeyote
"anayeyafuata mafundisho ya Yesu"
Anaweza akawapeleka kama wafungwa.' "ili viongozi wa wayahudi wapate kuwahukumu na kuwasulubisha".
Baada ya Kuhani Mkuu kumpatia Sauli barua, Sauli alisafiri kuelekea Dameski.
Sauli aliondoka Yerusalemu na kuelekea Dameski.
Haya ni maelezo yanayobadisha simulizi kuonyesha kwamba jambo la tofauti litatokea.
"nuru kutoka mbinguni ikawangaza kotekote"
Inaweza kuwa na maana kuwa; 1) Mbinguni, mahali Mungu anaishi au 2) Anga.
Inawezekana kwamba 1)"Sauli alianguka pekee yake chini"au 2)"Mwanga ulisababisha yeye kuanguka chini"au 3)Sauli alianguka chini kama yeyote ambaye huanguka,"Sauli hakuanguka kwa bahati mbaya.
Bwana alimkemea Sauli katika hali ya swali. "Unaniudhi mimi!"
Kila kuwakilishi cha neno "wewe" linamaanisha umoja.
Sauli hakupata kumjua Yesu kama Bwana. Hii ilikuwa ni tatizo kwamba alikuwa kwenye nguvu za ajabu
"inuka na uende katika mji wa Dameski"
Mtu mmoja atakuambia
Waliisikia sauti, lakini hawakumwona mtu yeyote.
"Lakini hakumwona yeyote" Bali Sauli aliona mwanga tu.
Hii inamaanisha Sauli aliyafunga macho kwasababu ya mwanga ulikuwa mkali.
Sauli alikuwa kipofu.
"Alikuwa kipofu" au "hakuweza kuona chochote"
"hakuweza kula wala kunywa hakuwa na njaa"
Simulizi inabadilika na kuanza kumtaja mtu aliyeitwa Anania ambae anatambulishwa kwenye simulizi. Huyu sio Anania yule aliyetajwa katika matendo ya mitume 5:1, 3.
Hii inatambulisha wahusika wapya, Anania
Anania alisema
Nenda kwenye barabara inayoitwa nyoofu.
Yuda si yule mwanafunzi aliyemsaliti Yesu. Yuda alikuwa ndio mmiliki wa nyumba uko Dameski ambapo Anania alikuwa akiishi.
"Mtu kutoka katika mji wa Tarso"
Hii ilikuwa alama ya kumpatia Sauli baraka za kiroho.
"Aweze kuona kwa mara nyingine tena"
Neno "Watu watakatifu" linamaana ya Wakristo. "Watu wa Yerusalemu waliokwisha kumwamini Yesu"
Inamaana Sauli amepewa nguvu na mamlaka na Kuhani Mkuu, lakini yalikuwa na mipaka kwani ilikuwa ni kwa Wayahudi tu.
"chombo teule" ni hali ya kutengwa maalumu kwa ajuli ya huduma. "Nimemchagua yeye ili anitumikie.
Hii ni hali ya kumuelezea na kuongelea kuhusu Yesu. ili anipeleke mimi kwa watu.
Hii ni hali ya kuwaelezea watu kuhusu mimi (Yesu).
Anania anaenda katika nyumba ambapo Sauli anaishi. Baada ya kuponywa , simulizi inabadilika kutoka kwa Anania kwenda kwa Sauli.
Anania likwenda kwenye na baada ya kuipata ile nyumba mahali alipokuwepo Sauli akaingia ndani.
Anania aliweka mikono yake juu ya Sauli
"Amenituma ili upate kuona tena na Roho Mtakatifu akujaze"
"Kitu kilitokea kama magamba ya samaki na kuanguka toka machoni"
Alikuwa na uwezo wa kuona tena
"Sauli aliiuka na Anania akambatiza"
ukumu la kumtangaza Yesu, punde alianza kulifanya.
"Yeye" inaashiria kuwa ni Yesu. Sauli, Baada ya kumwamini Yesu na kumjua Yesu kama 'mwana wa Mungu"
Wengi walipata kusikia habari zake.
Hii ni kejeli na swali hasi linalomwelezea Paulo kuwa hakika alikuwa mtu ambaye aliwatesa waamini. "Huyo ni mtu ambaye aliwaharibu wote wa Yerusalemu walioliitia jina hili la Yesu!"
Inamaanisha Wayahudi viongozi.
"Lakini mtu mmoja akawaambia mpango wao kwa Sauli" au "Lakini Sauli akafahamu mipango yao juu yake"
Mji huu ulikuwa na ukuta uliouzunguka.Watu waliingia na kutoka katika mji huo kupitia mlango.
Watu walioamini ujumbe wa Sauli kuhusu Yesu na walifuatilia mafundisho yake
Kwa kutumia kamba walimshusha Sauli katika kikapu kikubwa kupitia tundu katika ukuta.
"Walikuwa wote" ni kuimba kwa wingi "karibia wote"
Huu ni mfano wa Sauli anahubiri au anafundisha ujumbe wa injili ya Yesu Kristo.
Hii ni injili ya mfano wenye ujumbe wa Yesu Kristo.
Sauli alijaribu kutafuta sababu za wayahudi wa kiyunani.
Kaisaria iko chini zaidi ya Yerusalemu. Hata hivyo,ilikuwa kawaida kusema kwamba mmoja alipanda juu Yerusalemu.
Kaisari ilikuwa bandari, yawezekana walimpeleka Sauli Tarso kwa njia ya meri.
Katika mstari wa 32, habari inabadirika kutoka simlizi ya Sauli na kuanza simlizi mpya juu ya Petro.
Mstari wa 32 ni habari inayotupatia taarifa za kukua kwa kanisa.
Hapa ni kiwakilishi cha "kanisa" kama umoja likiwakilisha zaidi ya kusanyiko la waumini. Linaelezea waumini wote katika jumuia zote za Israeli.
ilikaa kwa amani". Linamaanisha kuwa yale mateso yaliyoanza kwa mauaji ya Stefani yalikuwa yamekoma.
Hapa mwezeshaji wake ni "Mungu" au "Roho Mtakatifu". "Mungu aliwasaidia wakue" au "Roho Mtakatifu aliwajenga na kuwa imara".
"waliendelea kumheshimu Bwana'
"Roho Mtakatifu aliwaimarisha na kuwapa ujasiri"
Hii ni fahari kwa Petro kutembelea waumini wengi pande za Yuda, Galilaya, na Samaria.
Neno "Alitelemkia" ilieleza kuelekea Lida iliyo upande wa chini kulinganisha na maeneo mengine alikotembelea Petro.
Lida ni mji ulioko kati ya kilomita 18 kaskazini mashariki mwa Jafa. Huu mji ulikuwa ukiitwa Lod kwenye Agano la Kale,na katika Israeli ya sasa.
Petro hakuwa makini kumtafuta mtu aliyepooza lakini ilimtokea. "Hapo Petro akakutana na mtu."
Hapa anatambulisha Ainea kama mtu mpya katika simlizi.
Hii ni historia ya nyuma kuhusu Ainea
hana uwezo wa kutembea, pengine hakuwa na uwezo wa kujisogeza chini ya kiuno
"jitwike godoro lako"
Hii inaimarisha maana " watu wengi walioishi maeneo ya Lida na Sharoni.
Inaweza kuwa msaada kuelezea kuwa walimwona mtu akiwa mtu ameponywa. "Walimwona mtu ambaye Petro alikuwa amemponya".
Luka anaendelea na simlizi ya tukio jipya kuhusu Petro.
Mistari hii inatupa historia ya mwanamke aliyeitwa Tabitha.
Hili linamtambulisha sehemu mpya katika simulizi.
Tabitha ni jina lake katika lugha ya kiaramaiki,na jina la Dorcas katika lugha ya Kigiriki. Majina yote yalikuwa na maana ya "paa."
"anafanya mengi mazuri ya kweli"
"Ilitokea wakati Petro alipokuwa Lida".
Waliusafisha mwili ikiwa ni maandalio ya maziko yake.
Huu ilikuwa ni utaratibu wa muda wa kuuonyesha mwili wakati wa maandalizi ya mazishi.
"Wanafunzi waliwatuma watu wawili kwake"
Chumba cha juu mahali mwili wa Dorkas ulikuwa umelazwa.
Inawezekana kuwa wajane wote wa mji ule walikusanyika pamoja kwani haukuwa mji mkubwa.
wanawake ambao waume zao walifariki na walikuwa wanahitaji kusaidiwa.
"wakati akiwa hai pamoja na wanafunzi"
Simlizi ya Tabitha inaishia katika mstari 42, na mstari 43 unatuambia kilichokuwa kinaendelea kwa Petro baada ya simlizi ya Tabitha kumalizika.
Kwa shauri hili, Petro aliwafanya kila mmoja kuondoka ili aweze kuwa pekee yake na kuomba kwa ajili ya Thabitha.
Petro alimshika mkono wake na kumsaidia kuinuka.
Hata wajane yawezekana walikuwa waumini, lakini hapa wametambulishwa kwa jina la wajane kwasababu Tabitha alikuwa mtu muhimu kwao.
Muujiza wa Petro kumfufua Tabitha kutoka kwenye kifo ukajulikana na watu wote wa Yafa.
"waliiamini injili ya Bwana Yesu."
"Ikatokea kuhusu kwamba Petro akakaa huko kwa muda"
1 Kulikuwa na mtu fulani katika mji wa kaisaria, jina lake aliitwa Kornelio, alikuwa mkuu wa kikosi cha Kiitalia. 2 Alikuwa mchamungu na alimwabudu Mungu na nyumba yake yote; alitoa pesa nyingi kwa wayahudi na aliomba kwa Mungu siku zote. 3 Muda wa saa tisa za mchana, akaona maono Malaika wa Mungu anakuja kwake. Malaika akamwambia "Kornelio! 4 Kornelio akamwangalia malaika na alikuwa na hofu kubwa sana akasema "Hii ni nini mkuu?" Malaika akamwambia "Maombi yako na zawadi zako kwa masikini zimepanda juu kama kumbukumbu kwenye uwepo wa Mungu". 5 Sasa tuma watu kwenda mji wa Yafa kumleta mtu mmoja anayeitwa Simoni ambaye pia huitwa Petro. 6 Anakaa na mtengenezaji wa Ngozi aitwaye Simoni ambaye nyumba yake iko kando ya bahari." 7 Baada ya Malaika aliyekuwa akisema naye kuondoka, Kornelio akawaita watumishi wa nyumbani kwake wawili, na askari aliyekuwa akimwabudu Mungu kati ya maaskari waliokuwa wanamtumikia. 8 Kornelio aliwaambia yote yaliyotokea na akawatuma Yafa. 9 Siku iliyofuata muda wa saa sita wakiwa njiani na wamekaribia mjini, Petro akapanda juu darini kuomba. 10 Na pia akawa na njaa na alihitaji kitu cha kula, lakini wakati watu wanapika chakula, akaonyeshwa maono, 11 akaona anga limefuguka na chombo kinashuka na kitu fulani kama nguo kubwa ikishuka chini kwenye ardhi katika kona zake zote nne. 12 Ndani yake kulikuwa na aina zote za wanyama wenye miguu minne na watambaao juu ya ardhi, na ndege wa angani. 13 Tena sauti ikasema kwake "Amka, Petro chinja na ule". 14 Lakini Petro akasema "Siyo hivyo, Bwana kwa sababu sijawahi kula kitu chochote najisi na kichafu. 15 Lakini sauti ikaja kwake tena kwa mara ya pili "Alichokitakasa Mungu usikiite najisi wala kichafu". 16 Hii ilitokea mara tatu, na kile chombo kikawa kimechukuliwa tena angani. 17 Na wakati Petro akiwa katika hali ya kuchanganyikiwa juu ya hayo maono yanamaanisha nini, Tazama, watu waliokuwa wametumwa na Kornelio wakasimama mbele ya lango, wakiuliza njia ya kwenda kwenye nyumba. 18 Na wakaita na kuuliza kama Simoni ambaye pia aliitwa Petro kama alikuwa anakaa pale. 19 Wakati huo Petro alipokuwa akiwaza juu ya hayo maono, Roho akasema naye, "Tazama watu watatu wanakutafuta. 20 Amka na ushuke chini na uende nao. Usiogope kwenda nao, kwa sababu nimewatuma." 21 Petro akashuka chini kwao na kusema "Mimi ni yule mnayemtafuta. Kwa nini mmekuja?" 22 Wakasema, "Akida mmoja jina lake Kornelio, mtu wa haki na hupenda kumwabudu Mungu, na watu humsema vyema katika taifa lote la kiyahudi, ameambiwa na malaika wa Mungu kukutuma ili kwenda kwenye nyumba yake, ili asikie ujumbe kutoka kwako." 23 Petro akawakaribisha kuingia ndani na kukaa pamoja naye. Asubuhi iliyofuata akaamka akaenda pamoja naye, na ndugu wachache kutoka Yafa wakaambatana naye. 24 Siku iliyofuata walikuja Kaisaria. Na Kornelio alikuwa akiwasubiri; na alikuwa amewaita pamoja ndugu zake na marafiki zake wa karibu. 25 Wakati Petro akiingia ndani, Kornelio akamlaki na kuinama hadi chini kwenye miguu yake kwa kumheshimu. 26 Lakini Petro akamwinua na kusema "Simama; mimi mwenyewe pia ni mwanadamu." 27 Wakati Petro akiwa anaongea naye, alienda ndani akakuta watu wamekusanyika pamoja. 28 Akawaambia, "Ninyi wenyewe mnajua kuwa siyo sheria ya kiyahudi kushirikiana au kutembelewa na mtu ambaye si wa taifa hili. Lakini Mungu amenionesha mimi kuwa sipaswi kumwita mtu yeyote ni najisi au mchafu. 29 Na ndiyo maana nimekuja bila kubisha, nilipotumwa kwa ajili ya hiyo. Kwa hiyo niwaulize kwa nini mlitumwa kwa ajili yangu." 30 Kornelio akasema, "Siku nne zilizopita, wakati kama huu nilikuwa naomba muda wa saa tisa mchana ndani ya nyumba yangu; Nikaona mbele yangu mtu amesimama akiwa na mavazi meupe, 31 Akaniambia "Kornelio maombi yako yamesikiwa na Mungu, na zawadi zako kwa masikini zimekuwa ukumbusho mbele za Mungu. 32 Kwa hiyo tuma mtu Yafa na akamwite mtu mmoja anayeitwa Simoni aje kwako, ambaye pia huitwa Petro. ambaye anaishi kwa mtengenezaji wa Ngozi mmoja aitwaye Simoni ambaye nyumba yake iko pembeni mwa bahari. 33 Zingatia: Msatri huu, "Naya atakapokuja atasema nanyi," haumo kwenye maandiko ya kale. 34 Ndipo Petro akafungua mdomo wake na kusema "Kweli, nimeamini kuwa Mungu hawezi kuwa na upendeleo. 35 Badala yake, kila taifa mtu yeyote anayemwabudu na kufanya matendo ya haki anakubalika kwake. 36 Unajua ujumbe alioutoa kwa watu wa Israel, alipokuwa akitangaza habari njema ya amani kupitia Yesu Kristo ambaye ni Bwana wa wote- 37 ninyi wenyewe mnajua tukio lililotokea, ambalo limetokea Yudea yote na lilianzia Galilaya, baada ya ubatizo ambao Yohana alitangaza. 38 tukio lililokuwa linamhusu Yesu Kristo jinsi Mungu alivyomtia mafuta kwa Roho Mtakatifu na kwa nguvu. Alienda akifanya mema na kuponya wote walioteswa na ibilsi, kwa kuwa Mungu alikuwa pamoja naye. 39 Sisi ni mashahidi wa mambo yote aliyoyafanya katika nchi za Uyahudi na katika Yerusalemu- huyu ni Yesu waliyemuua na kumtundika mtini. 40 Huyu mtu Mungu alimfufua siku ya tatu na kumpa kujulikana, 41 si kwa watu wote, lakini kwa mashahidi waliochaguliwa kabla na Mungu. - sisi wenyewe, tulio kula naye na kunywa naye baada ya kufufuka kutoka kwa wafu. 42 Ametuagiza kuhubiri kwa watu na kushuhudia kuwa huyu ndiye ambaye Mungu alimchagua kuwa mwamuzi wa walio hai na waliokufa. 43 Katika yeye manabii wote washuhudie, ili kwamba kila anayeamini katika yeye atapokea msamaha wa dhambi kupitia jina lake." 44 Wakati Petro akiendelea kusema haya, Roho Mtakatifu akawajaza wote waliokuwa wakisikiliza ujumbe wake. 45 Watu wale wanaohusika na kikundi cha waamini waliotahiriwa- wale wote waliokuja na Petro- walishangazwa, kwa sababu ya karama ya Roho Mtakatifu aliyemwagwa pia kwa wamataifa. 46 Kwa kuwa walisikia hawa wamataifa wanaongea kwa lugha zingine na kumwabudu Mungu. Petro akajibu, 47 "Kuna mtu yeyote anaweza kuzuia maji ili watu wasibatizwe, Watu hawa wamempokea Roho Mtakatifu kama sisi?" 48 Ndipo akawaamuru wabatizwe kwa jina la Yesu Kristo. Baadaye wakamwomba akae nao kwa siku kadhaa.
Wayahudi waliamini kwamba waliamini walitembelea ama kula na watu wa mataifa. Hii ni kwa sababu Wafarisayowalikuwa wameunda sheria kinyume nayo kwa vile walitaka watu wasikule chakula ambacho sheria Musa ilisema ni najisi. Sheria ya Musa ilisema kwamba chakula kingine kilikuwa najisi lakini haikusema kwamba watu hawakustahili kutembelea ama kula na watu wa mataifa. and )
Roho Mtakatifu aliwakujia waliokuwa wakimsikiza Petero. Hii inaonyesha Waumini Wayahudi kwamba watu wa Mataifa wangepokea neno la Mungu na kupokea Roho Mtakatifu vile waumini Wayahudi walivyopokea. Baada ya hiyo,Watu wa Mataifa walibatizwa.
Huu ni mwanzo wa sehemu juu ya habari inayohusu Kornelio.
Mistari hii inatupa mrejesho wa taarifa kuhusu yeye.
Hii ilikuwa ni njia ya kutambulisha mtu mwingine katika habari.
"jina lake aliitwa Kornelio. alikuwa ni mtu mwenye cheo wa maaskari 100 kutoka Italia katika sehemu ya jeshi la Rumi"
"Aliamini katika Mungu na alitaka kumtii Mungu na kumwabudu Mungu katika maisha yake"
"na watu wote wengine wa nyumbani kwake ambao pengine walikuwa wa mataifa walimcha Mungu"
Alikuwa akimwomba Mungu wakati wote.
Hii ni muda wa Alasiri wa kawaida uliokuwa ukitumiwa na wayahudi kwa maombi.
Kornelio aliona kwa wazi"
Inamaanisha kuwa Misaada ya Kornerio kwa wahitaji pamoja na maombi yalimpendeza Mungu na kuwa ukumbusho kwake.
Mtu mtaalamu wa kutengeneza ngozi za wanyama.
"Baada ya maono ya Kornelio kufika mwisho"
Moja ya maaskari waliokuwa wakimtumikia Kornelio ambao pia walikuwa wakimwabudu Mungu. Ilikuwa mara chache sana jeshi la kirumi, ambapo Kornerio na maaskari wengine kumcha Mungu, alihali wenginge hawamchi Mungu.
Kornerio alielezea maono yake kwa watumishi wake wawili na kwa mmoja wa maaskari wake.
"aliwatuma wawili wa watumishi wake na askari mmoja huko Yafa"
Habari inabadilika kutoka kwa Kornelio kutuambia kile Mungu alikuwa anakifanya kwa Petro.
"Ilikuwa saa sita mchana"
Mapaa ya nyumba yalikuwa tambarare, na watu mara nyingi walifanya kazi mbalimbali juu yake.
"Kabla watu hawajamaliza kutayarisha chakula cha mchana"
"Mungu alimpa Petro maono" au "Aliona maono"
Huu ulikuwa ni mwanzo wa Maono ya Petro.
Ndani ya chombo kilikuwa na wanyama na mwonekano wake ni kama nguo kubwa ya pembe nne.
"Kitambaa kikiwa na pembe zake nne juu zaidi ya kingine.
Wanyama wenye miguu... ndege wa angani. Mwitikio wa Petro kwa maono yale mstari unaofuata unaonyesha Wayahudi walikuwa wamepewa amri ya kutokula baadhi ya hao wanyama. "Wanyana na ndege ambao sheria ya Musa ilizuia wasipate kuliwa"
Mtu anayeongea hajulikani. Pengine "sauti" alikuwa Mungu mwenyewe, ingawa inawezekana alikuwa Malaika kutoka kwa Mungu.
Petro anaapa "Sitafanya hivyo"
Imetafsiriwa kuwa wanyama wanawakilisha wasio safi kama ilivyoelezwa na sheria ya Musa na walikuwa hawaliwi na waumini walioishi kabla ya kifo cha Kristo.
Kama Mungu ndiye msemaji, anajipambanua mwenyewe kwa nafsi ya tatu; "Kile ambacho Mungu alikitakasa"
Si kwamba kila kitu alichokiona Petro kilitokea mara tatu. Hii inaweza kuwa na maana; "Kile ambacho Mungu alikitakasa" neno hili ndilo lilijirudia mara tatu mfurulizo.
Inamaana kuwa Petro alikuwa na wakati mgumu kuelewa maana ya maono hayo.
Neno "Tazama" hapa linatutazamisha sisi kuwa makini katika taarifa za ajabu ambazo zinafuata, kwa jambo hili, wanaume wawili walisimama mbele ya geti.
"kusimama mbele ya geti la kuingilia ndani." hii inamaanisha kuwa hii nyumba ilikuwa na ukuta na geti la kuingilia kwenye nyumba hiyo.
Hili nitukio lilitendeka kabla ya kufika kwenye nyumba alipokuwa Petro. Hili tukio lingeripotiwa mapema kabla.
Watu wa Karnelio walibaki nje ya Geti wakati wakiulizia kuhusu Petro.
"Wakati Petro alipokuwa akifikri juu ya haya maono"
"Roho Mtakatifu"
Uwe macho" au "Amka"
Baadhi ya nyaraka za kale zinasema idadi tofauti ya wale watu.
"Shuka chini kutoka dari ya nyumba"
Ingekuwa kawaida kwa Petro kutokwena na hao watu; 1) Kwa vile walikuwa wageni kwake na 2) Walikuwa wa mataifa ambapo Wayahudi walikuwa hawachangamani na wao.
"Mimi ndiye mtu yule mnayemtafuta"
"Wale wajumbe watatu kutoka kwa Kornelio wakasema kwa Petro"
Neno "Kumwabudu" Lina maana ya nia ya ndani kuheshimu na kicho cha kweli.
Hii ni mfano kwa ajili ya tabia nzuri ya Kornelio ilikuwa inajulikana vizuri kwa watu wengi wa Kiyahudi.
Safari ya kuelekea Kaisaria ilikuwa ndefu sana kwa wao kuanza muda wa mchana.
"Wajumbe wa Kornerio wakawa wageni wake"
Hii inaelezea juu ya waumini waliokuwa wakiishi Yafa.
Hii ilikuwa ni siku moja baada ya wao kuondoka Yafa. Safari ya kwenda Kaisaria ilikuwa ndefu zaidi ya siku moja.
Kornerio alikuwa akiwatarajia. Akiwa amewaita pamoja ndugu zake na marafiki zake wa karibu
"Mara Petro alipoingia ndani ya nyumba"
Ingawa kuinama lilikuwa ni tendo la kawaida katika utamaduni wao, Kornerio yeye aliinama kwa Petro kama ishara ya kumsujudia.
Hili ni kukemea vikali au marekebisho kwa Kornelio kuwa asimwabudu Petro.
Petro anawaelekea watu waliokuwa wamekusanyika kwenye nyumba ya Kornelio.
"akakuta wamataifa wengi wamekusanyika pamoja." hii inamaanisha kuwa watu ambao Kornelio alikuwa amewaalika walikuwa wamataifa.
Petro anamlenga Korneria na wageni aliokuwa amewaalika.
"imefichika kwa wayahudi"
Anaelezea watu ambao hawakuwa wayahudi, bila kutaja maeneo maalumu walikokuwa wanaishi.
Kornelio akajibu swali la Petro.
Mstari wa 31na 32 Kornelio ananukuu kile malaika alisema alipojitokeza kwake wakati wa saa tisa.
Kornerio anafafanua juu ya siku kabla ya usiku wa siku kabla ile kabla hajaongea na Petro. Utamaduni wa Kibiblia unahesabu siku hiyo. Hivyo kabla ya siku tatu zilizopitz za usiku ilihesabiwa kuwa "siku ya nne iliyopita." Mila za Magharibi ya sasa, hii inawezakuwa, "Siku tatu zilizopita."
maandiko ya kale yanasema "kufunga na kuomba" badala ya kuomba tu"
Mchana wa kawaida ni wakati wa Wayahudi kuomba kwa Mungu.
Inamaanisha Mungu amesikia maombi yako
"Mungu amekuletea ukumbusho" Hii haimanishi kuwa Mungu alikuwa amesahau.
"Mwambie Simoni anayeitwa Petro kuja kwako"
Hii ni namna ya heshima ya kumshukuru Petro kwa kuja kwake.
Hii inadhihirisha uwepo wa Mungu.
Petro anaanza hotuba kuongea na kila mtu ndani ya nyumba ya Kornelio.
"Petro alianza kuzungumza kwao"
Hii inamaanisha kile anachokwenda kukisema kina umuhimu wa kukijua
"Mungu hapendelei watu maalumu"
"anamkubali kila mtu anayemwabudu na kufanya matendo ya haki"
Neno "Ibada" linamaanisha nia ya ndani ya heshima na kicho cha kweli.
Petro anaendelea na Kornerio pamoja na wageni wake.
"Wote" maana yake watu wote"
"Katika maeneo mbalimbali ya Yudea"
"Baada ya Yohana kuhubiri kwa watu kurubu na kubatizwa"
Roho Mtakatifu na nguvu za Mungu zimenenwa kana kwamba ni vitu vinaweza kumiminwa juu ya mtu.
"Watu wengi waliokuwa wanapitia mateso ya shetani"
Inamaanisha; "Mungu alikuwa akimtia nguvu kuzitenda kazi zote"
Petro na Mitume na waumini ambao walikuwa pamoja na Yesu wakati akiwa hapa duniani.
Inaelezea zaidi Yudea ya wakati huo.
"ambaye viongozi wa kiyahudi walimwua''
Inamaanisha, "kumuwamba Yesu katika mti wa msalaba"
"Huyu mtu Yesu"
"Mungu alimfanya kuishi tena"
"Siku ya tatu baada ya kufa kwake"
"alimpa kujulikana na wengi"
"Kutoka miongoni mwa waliokwisha kufa" Linafafanua juu ya roho za watu waliokwisha kufa. Kurejea kutoka miongoni mwa hizo roho ni kuwa mzima tena.
Petro anamalizia hotuba yake katika nyumba ya Kornerio aliyokuwa ameianza.
Mungu alikuwa amemchagua Yesu Kristo.
Anamaanisha, " Watu walio hai na watu waliokwisha kufa
"Manabii wote walishuhudia habari za Yesu".
Mungu atasamehe dhambi za kila mmoja anayemwamini Yesu kwasababu ya kile Yesu ametenda.
Neno "jina" Linaelezea matendo ya Yesu. Jina lake linamaanisha Mungu huokoa.
Neno "Kuwajaza" maana yake ni kutokea ghafla. "Roho Mtakatifu ghafla alishuka".
Neno "wote" linaelezea kuwa; "Wamataifa ndani ya nyumba waliokuwa wakimsikiliza Petro".
Hii ni namna nyingine ya kuzungumzia juu ya Waumini Wayahudi
Inaelezea juu ya Roho Mtakatifu mwenyewe aliyetolewa kwao.
Mungu alimtoa Roho Mtakatifu. "Zawadi ya bure"
Neno "pia" linaonyesha ukweli kuwa Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa tayari ametolewa kwa Wayahudi waumini
Huu ni mwisho wa sehemu ya simlizi kuhusu Kornerio.
Zilijulikana kuwa ni lugha zilizokuwa zinatamkwa na waliojazwa na Roho Mtakatifu, kilichofanya Wayahudi kukubali kwamba wamataifa nao walikuwa wakimtukuza Mungu.
Petro alilitumia swali hili kuwashawishi Wayahudi wakristo kwamba Wamataifa walioamini wanaweza kubatizwa.
Inamaanisha kwamba Wayahudi wakristo ndio waliowabatiza Wamataifa siku hiyo.
"Kwa Jina la Yesu Kristo" Linaelezea kuwa sababu ya kubatizwa kwao ni kwa kumwamini Yesu Kristo.
1 Mitume na ndugu wale waliokuwa huko Yudea walisikia kuwa wamataifa wamelipokea neno la Mungu. 2 Petro alipokuja huko Yerusalemu, lile kundi la watu waliotahiriwa wakaanza kumkosoa, Wakisema, 3 "Umeshikamana na watu wasiotahiriwa na kula nao!" 4 Lakini Petro alianza kueleza tukio kwa kina; akisema, 5 "Nilikuwa naomba katika mji wa Yafa, na nikaona maono ya chombo kikishuka chini kama nguo kubwa ikishuka kutoka mbinguni katika pembe zake zote nne. Kikashuka kwangu. 6 Nilikitazama na kufikiri juu yake. Nikaona wanyama wenye miguu minne waishio katika nchi, na wanyama wa polini na wanyama watambaao na ndege wa angani. 7 Kisha nikasikia sauti ikisema nami, "Amka, Petro, chinja naj ule!" 8 Nikasema, "Siyo hivyo, Bwana, mdomoni mwangu hakujawahi kuingia kitu chochote kisicho kitakatifu au kichafu" 9 Lakini sauti ikajibu tena kutoka Mbinguni, kile Mungu alichokitangaza kuwa ni safi, usikiite najisi, 10 Hii ilitokea mara tatu, na kila kitu kikachukuliwa mbinguni tena. 11 Tazama, wakati huo watu watatu walikuwa wamesimama mbele ya nyumba ile tulimokuwa; wametumwa kutoka Kaisaria kuja kwangu. 12 Roho akaniambia kwenda nao, na nisitofautiane nao. Hawa wanaume sita wakaenda pamoja na mimi na tuliende kwenye nyumba ya mtu mmoja. 13 Alituambia vile alivyomwona malaika amesimama ndani ya nyumba yake akisema, "Nitume Yafa nikamlete simoni ambaye jina lake lingine ni Petro. 14 Atasema ujumbe kwako katika huo utaokoka wewe na nyumba yako yote." 15 Nilipoanza kusema nao, Roho mtakatifu akaja juu yao kama alivyokuja kwetu mwanzoni. 16 Nakumbuka maneno ya Bwana, alivyosema, "Yohana alibatiza kwa maji; lakini mtabatizwa katika Roho mtakatifu." 17 Pia kama Mungu ametoa zawadi kama alizotupa sisi tulipoamini katika Bwana Yesu Kristo, mimi ni nani, kwamba naweza kumpinga Mungu? 18 Waliposikia mambo haya, hawakurudisha, bali walimsifu Mungu na kusema, "Mungu ametoa toba kwa ajili ya wa mataifa pia" 19 Basi waamini ambao mateso yalianzia kwenye kifo cha Stephano walitawanyika kutoka Yerusalemu-waamini hawa walienda mbali, hadi mpaka Foinike, Kipro na Antiokia. Waliwaambia ujumbe kuhusu Yesu peke yake kwa wayahudi na si kwa mwingine awaye yote. 20 Lakini baadhi yao ni watu kutoka Kipro na Krene, walikuja Antiokia na kusema na wayunani na kumhubiri Bwana Yesu. 21 Na mkono wa Bwana ulikuwa pamoja nao, na watu wengi waliamini na kumgeukia Bwana. 22 Habari zao zikafikia masikioni mwa kanisa la Yerusalem: na wakamtuma Barnaba aende mpaka Antiokia. 23 Alipokuja na kuona karama ya Mungu alifurahi; na aliwatia moyo wote kubaki na Bwana katika mioyo yao. 24 Kwa sababu alikuwa mtu mwema na amejazwa na Roho Mtakatifu na imani na watu wengi wakaongezeka katika Bwana. 25 Baadaye Barnaba alienda Tarso kumwona Sauli. 26 Alipompata, akamleta Antiokia. Ikawa kwa mwaka mzima wakakusanyika pamoja na kanisa na kuwafundisha watu wengi. Na wanafunzi wakaitwa wakristo kwa mara ya kwanza huko Antiokia. 27 Na katika siku hizi manabii wakashuka kutoka Yerusalemu mpaka Antiokia. 28 Mmoja wao ni Agabo ndilo jina lake, akasimama akiashiriwa na Roho kuwa njaa kali itatokea ulimwenguni mwote. Hii ilitokea wakati wa siku za Klaudio. 29 Kwa hiyo, wanafunzi, kila mmoja alivyo fanikiwa, waliamua kupeleka misaada kwa ndugu walioko Uyahudi. 30 Walifanya hivi; Walituma pesa kwa mkono wa Barnaba na Sauli.
Karibu waumini wote wa kwanza walikuwa Wayahudi. Luka anaandika katika sura hii kwamba watu wengi wa mataifa walianza kumwamini Yesu. Waliamini kwamba habari ya Yesu ilikuwa habari ya kweli, vile wakaanza "kulippokea neno la Yesu." Baadhi ya waumini katika Yerusalemu hawakuamini kwamba watu wa Mataifa pia wangekuwa wafuasi halisi wa Yesu. Kwa hivyo Petero alienda akawaambia kilichokuwa kimemtendekea na jinsi alivyowaona watu wa mataifa wakilipokea neno la mungu na kupokea Roho Mtakatifu.
Petro anaingia Yerusalemu na anaanza kuongea na Wayahudi wa huko.
Huu ni mwanzo wa tukio jipya katika simlizi
Linaashiria sehemu mpya ya simlizi
"Ndugu" Linamaanisha waumini katika Yudea.
"Waliokuwa wakiishi mkoa wa Yudea"
Linamaanisha kuwa Wamataifa walikuwa wameupokea ujumbe wa Injili kuhusu Yesu. "Waliamini ujumbe wa Mungu kuhusu Yesu Kristo".
Yerusalemu ilikuwa juu zaidi ya kila eneo la Israeli. hivyo ilikuwa kawaida kwa Waisraeli kusema wanapanda juu kwenda Yerusalemu.
Wayahudi walioamini kwamba kila anayeamini lazina atahiriwe.
Linamaanisha, "watu wa Mataifa"
Ilikuwa kinyume kwa utamaduni wa Wayahudi, Wauahudi kula na Wamataifa.
Petro anawajibu Wayahudi kwa kuwaambia juu ya maono na kile kilichotokea katika nyumba ya Kornerio.
Petro hakujaribu kusema maneno ya kuwapinga Wayahudi waumini, bali alijibu kwa maelezo ya kirafiki na hekima.
"Hakika ya kile kilichotokea"
Chombo kilichoshikilia wanyama kilionekana kitambaa kikubwa.
"Kikubwa chenye pembe nne"
"Wanyama wa miguu" Mwitikio wa Petro ulilenga sheria ya Musa iliyokuwa inazuia kula baadhi ya wanyama.
Pengine ni wanyama wasioweza kufugwa.
Hawa ni wale waendao kwa kutambaa.
Sauti ilinena lakini bila yeyote kujidhihirisha. "Sauti" yawezekana ni Mungu, ingawa inawezekana kuwa ilikuwa sauti ya Malaika.
"Siwezi kufanya hivyo" linganisha na sura 10:13.
Wanyama waliokuwa kwenye kitambaa walikuwa ni wanyama ambao sheria ya Wayahudi katika Agano la Kale iliwazuia wasiweze kuwala.
Katika Agano la Kale Sheria ya Wayahudi, mtu alionekana mchafu katika njia mbalimbali, kama vile kula wanyama waliokuwa hawaruhusiwi kuliwa.
Sentensi hii inaelezea juu ya wanyama waliokuwa kwenye kitambaa kikubwa cha pembe nne.
Si kila tukio lilirudiwa kuonekana mara tatu, Hata hivyo neno; "Kile Mungu alichokitakasa usikiite najisi" Ni neno lilijirudia mara tatu kwa Petro. Linganisha na sura 10:13.
Hili neno linaashiria kuanza kutajwa watu wengine kwenye simlizi hii.
"Mara hiyo bila kuchelewa"
"Mtu fulani alikuwa amewatuma"
"Kwamba nisipate cha kunitofautisha nao kwamba walikuwa wamataifa"
anaume sita wakaenda nami mpaka Kaisaria.
"Hawa sita Wayahudi waumini"
Linaelezea nyumba ya Kornerio
"Simoni ambaye pia aliitwa Petro"
Inaweza kuwa "Mungu atakuokoa"
Linamaanisha; Wote wataokolewa walioko nyumbani mwako"
Hapa Petro anajumuisha yeye, Mitume na Wayahudi waumini wote waliopokea Roho Mtakatifu katika siku ya Pentekoste.
namaanisha kwamba, "Petro kabla hajamaliza kunena, kwa vile alikuwa amenuia kusema nao zaidi, Roho Mtakatifu akaingilia kati kwa kuwashukia.
Roho Mtakatifu alishuka kwa wamataifa walioamini kama vile alivyofanya kwetu siku ya Pentekoste.
Mungu atawabatizeni ninyi katika Roho Mtakatifu.
Petro anamalizia hotuba yake aliyokuwa ameianza katika sura 11:4 kwa Wayahudi juu ya maono yaliyotokea katika nyumba ya Korinerio.
Petro anatumia swali hilikueleza kuwa yeye alikuwa anafanya vile kwa kumtii Mungu.
Petro anaelezea zawadi ya Roho Mtakatifu.
"Walinyamaza, hawakuweza tena kumshambulia Petro.
"Ametoa toba kwa wote kuwaongoza katika uzima wa milele"
Luka anaelezea kuhusu kile kilichotokea kwa waumini waliokimbia baada ya kuuawa kwa Stefano kwa mawe.
Luka anatambulisha simlizi mpya
Mateso yaliyoanza na kifo cha Stefano yalisababisha waumini kukimbia na kusambaa maeneo mbalimbali.
Waumini walidhani ujumbe wa Mungu ulikuwa kwa ajili ya Wayahudi pekee na siyo kwa wamataifa pia.
Watu aliokuwa wakiongea kiyunana nao walikuwa ni watu wa mataifa hawakuwa Wayahudi.
Mkono wa Mungu unamaanisha nguvu zake. "Mungu alikuwa na nguvu kuwawezesha wale waumini kuhubiri kwa ujasiri".
Wengi waliacha kuiamini miungu yao ya zamani, na walimwamini Yesu.
Katika mistari hii Luka anaanza kumtaja Barnaba na wakati huo huo akiwataja waumini wa kanisa la Yerusalemu.
apa neno "masikio" linamaanisha Waumini walisikia habari za matukio.
"Kuona neema ya Mungu" au "Namna gani Mungu ametenda kwa ukarimu juu ya waumini".
"Aliendelea kuwatia moyo"
"kubaki waaminifu katika Bwana" au"Kuendelea kumtumaini Bwana"
"Kwa utimilifu; au Bila kupungukiwa"
Barnaba aliongonzwa na Roho Mtakatifu kwa vile alikuwa amemtii.
"Kuongezeka" Walioamini walizidi kuongezeka.
Luka anazungumzia kuhusu Barnaba na Sauli.
"Alitoka kuelekea Tarso"
Inaonyesha Barnaba alichukua muda na bidii kumtwaa Sauli kutoka Tarso.
neno linaonyesha mwanzo wa tukio jingime katika simlizi hiyo.
"Barnaba na Sauli wakakusanyika pamoja na kanisa."
Inamaanisha kuwa watu wengine walikuwa wakiwaita waumini kwa jina hili. "Watu wa Antiokia waliwaita wanafunzi wakristo"
"Kwa mara ya kwanza huko Antiokia"
Luka anaelezea historia kuhusu unabii huko Antiokia.
Neno hili linatumika kuweka kituo katika simlizi hiyo kuu.
Yerusalemu ilikuwa juu zaidi ya Antiokia, hivyo ilikues kawaida ya Waisraeli kusema wanapanda kwenda Yerusalemu
"Jina lake alikuwa akiitwa Agabo
"Roho Mtakatifu alimwezesha kutoa unabii"
"Upungufu mkubwa wa chakula utatokea"
Akimaanisha, "Katika dola yote ya Kirumi"
Wasikilizaji wa Luka wangejua kwamba Klaudio alikuwa Mtawala wa Rumi wakati huo.
Sura hii wanaotajwa ni waumini wa kanisa huko Antiokia
Neno linaloelezea kuwa jambo lililotokea kwasababu ya kitu kingine pia
atu matajiri walituma misaada zaidi, na wale masikini walituma kwa kiasi chao.
"Kwa wakristo waliokuwa huko Yudea"
"Chini ya usimamizi wa Barnaba na Sauli"
1 Wakati huo mfalme Herode akanyosha mkono wake kwa baadhi ya wale wanaotoka kwenye kusanyiko ili kuwatesa. 2 Akamwuua Yakobo nduguye Yohana kwa upanga. 3 Baada ya kuona kuwa inawapendeza Wayahudi, akamkamata na Petro tena. Hii ilikuwa wakati wa mikate isiyochachwa. 4 Alipomkamata, akamweka gerezani na akaweka vikosi vinne vya askari ili kumlinda, alikuwa akitarajia kumpeleka kwa watu baada ya Pasaka. 5 Petro akawekwa gerezani, lakini maombi yakafanywa kwa bidii na kusanyiko kwa ajili yake kwa Mungu. 6 Siku kabla Herode hajaenda kumtoa, Usiku huo Petro alikuwa amelala katikati ya maaskari wawili, akiwa amefungwa na minyororo miwili, na walinzi mbele ya mlango walikuwa wakilinda gereza. 7 Tazama, malaika wa Bwana ghafla akamtokea na nuru ikang'aa ndani. Akampiga Petro ubavuni na kumwamsha akisema, "Amka haraka."ndipo minyororo aliyokuwa amefungwa ikafunguka kutoka mikononi mwake. 8 Malaika akamwambia, "Vaa nguo zako na vaa viatu vyako." Petro akafanya hivyo. Malaika akamwambia, "Vaa vazi lako na unifuate." 9 Hivyo Petro akamfuata Malaika na akatoka nje. Hakuamini kilichofanywa na malaika kama ni cha kweli. Alidhani anaona maono. 10 Baada ya kupita lindo la kwanza na la pili, wakafika kwenye geti la chuma la kuingilia kwenda mjini, likafunguka lenyewe kwa ajili yao. Wakatoka nje wakashuka kwenye mtaa, mara Malaika akamwacha. 11 Petro alipojitambua, akasema, "Sasa nimeamini kuwa Bwana alimtuma Malaika wake ili kunitoa katika mikono ya Herode, na kwa matarajio ya watu wote wa uyahudi." 12 Baada ya kujua haya, akaja kwenye nyumba ya Mariamu mama yake Yohana ambaye ni Marko; Wakristo wengi walikusanyika wakiomba. 13 Alipobisha kwenye mlango wa kizuizi, mtumishi mmoja msichana anayeitwa Roda akaja kufungua. 14 Alipotambua ni sauti ya Petro, kwa furaha akashindwa kuufungua mlango; badala yake, akakimbia ndani ya chumba; na kuwajulisha kuwa Petro amesimama mbele ya Mlango. 15 Hivyo, Wakasema kwake, "Wewe ni mwendawazimu" lakini alikazia kuwa ni kweli ni yeye. Wakasema "Huyo ni malaika wake." 16 Lakini Petro aliendelea kubisha, na walipofungua mlango, wakamwona na wakashangaa sana. Petro akawanyamazisha kwa mkono kimya kimya na akawaambia jinsi Bwana alivyomtoa kutoka Gerezani. akasema, 17 "Wajulishe haya mambo Yakobo na ndugu zake." Kisha akaondoka akaenda sehemu nyingine. 18 Kulipokuwa mchana, kukawa na huzuni kubwa kati ya askari, kuhusiana na kilichotokea kwa Petro. 19 Baada ya Herode kumtafuta na hakumwona akawauliza walinzi na akaamuru wauawe. Akaenda kutoka uyahudi mpaka Kaisaria na kukaa huko. 20 Herode alikuwa na hasira juu ya watu wa Tiro na Sidoni. Wakaenda kwa pamoja kwake. Wakawa na urafiki na Blasto msaidizi wa mfalme, ili awasaidie. Kisha wakaomba amani, kwa sababu nchi yao ilipokea chakula kutoka katika nchi ya mfalme. 21 Siku iliyokusudiwa Herode alivaa mavazi ya kifalme na kukaa kwenye kiti chake cha kifalme, na akawahutubia. 22 Watu wakapiga kelele, "Hii ni sauti ya mungu wala si sauti ya mwanadamu!" 23 Mara ghafla malaika akampiga, kwa sababu alikuwa hakumpa Mungu utukufu; akaliwa na chango na akafa 24 Lakini neno la Mungu likakua na kusambaa. 25 Baada ya Barnaba na Sauli kukamilisha huduma yao wakatoka pale wakarejea Yerusalemu, wakamchukua na Yohana ambaye jina la kuzaliwa ni Marko.
Sura ya 12 inatuelezea kilichomtendekea mfalme Herode wakati Barnabas alikuwa anamrudisha Saulo kutoka Tarshishi na wakipeleka pesa kutoka Antiokia kwa watu wa Yerusalemu (11:25-30). Aliwaua viongozi wengi akamfunga Petero gerezani. Baada ya Mungu kumsaidia Petero kutoroka gerezani, Herode aliwaua walinzi wa gereza kisha naye akauwawa na Mungu. Luka anatuelezea katika mstari wa mwisho wa sura hii jinsi Barnaba na Saulo waliyorudi kutoka Antiokia.
"Neno la Mungu" linazungumziwa kana kwamba ni kiumbe kinachoweza kumea na kuzaana. and
Hapa tena panaanza mateso upya. tukio la kwanza ni la kuuawa kwa Yakobo na kisha kukamatwa kwa Petro na kutiwa gerezani na baadaye kuwa huru.
Hii ni historia kuhusu Herode kumwua Yakobo.
Hii inaanzisha mwanzo wa simulizi.
Neno linalotambulisha wakati au kipindi cha njaa.
Inamaanisha Herode alikuwa ameanza kuwakamata waumini.
Ni Yakobo na Petro pekee wanatajwa kuashiria huwa hawa walikuwa viongozi wa kanisa la Yerusalemu.
"Kusababisha mateso kwa waumini"
Hii inaonyesha namna Yakobo alivyouawa.
Inamaanisha ama "Herode Mfalme alimwua" au "Herode Mfalme aliagiza kuua."
Neno la kiwakilishi hapa linamaanisha Mfalme Herode.
erode alitambua kuwa mauaji ya Yakobo yalikuwa yamewafurahisha Wayahudi"
"Wayahudi viongozi walipendezwa na tukio hilo"
"Herode alifanya hivi" au "Hii ilitokea"
Inadokeza sikuku ya dini ya Kiyahudi ya Pasaka. "Ni muda huu Wayahudi walikuwa wakila mkate usiotiwa chachu."
"Vikosi vinne vya askari". Kila kikosi kilikuwa na askari wanne vilivyo mlinda Petro. Kila kikosi kimoja baada ya muda uliogawanywa katika saa ishrini na nne. kila mara askari wawili wangekuwa karibu na Petro alihali askari wawili wakiwa kwenye lango.
Herode alikuwa amepanga kumhukumu Petro mbele ya macho ya Wayahudi.
Inamaanisha Maaskari waliendelea kumlinda Petro ndani ya gereza.
Kundi la waumini wa Yerusalemu kwa nia moja walimwomba Mungu kwa ajili yake.
"Walizidi kujikabidhi" au "Kwa nia moja bila kukatisha maombi"
Herode alikuwa amepanga kumtoa Petro nje ya gereza ili kumhukumu.
"alifungwa kwa minyororo miwili". Kila mnyororo ulikuwa umeunganishwa kwa walinzi wawili walioketi karibu na Petro.
"Wakifanya kazi yao ya ulinzi"
Neno linaloashiria kuzingatia kwa taarifa za kushangaza zilizokuwa zinakwenda kutokea.
"Anayefuata" au "Upande wake"
"ndani ya chumba cha gereza"
"Malaika alimpiga ili kumwamsha Petro" Petro alikuwa na usingizi mzito kiasi kwamba ilikuwa inahitajika kuamshwa.
Malaika alisababisha minyororo kuanguka kutoka kwa Petro bila ya kuigusa.
Petro alifanya kile aliagizwa kufanya na Malaika. Petro alitii.
"Hakuwa anajua kilichokuwa kinaendelea"
Tukio la Malaika kwa Petro lilikuwa la kweli.
Askari hawakuwa na uwezo wa kumwona Petro na malaika wakitembea mpaka kutoka lango la nje.
"Waliweza kupita"
"Katika lindo la pili nako wakapita"
"Walilifikia lango kuu"
"Lilifunguka kutoka gerezani kuelekea mjini"
Si Petro wala Malaika aliyelifungua lango hilo.
"Wakatembea wakiwa barabarani"
"Mara Malaika akamwacha" au "Ghafla akatoweka"
"Petro alipopata ufahamu alitambua kuwa tukio lilikuwa halisi"
ungu ameniokoa na mkono mbaya wa Herode uliopangwa kwa ajili yangu"
"Kwamba Wayahudi viongozi walidhani ingefanikiwa kwa Petro kuuawa"
Herode alitambua kuwa Mungu alikuwa amemwpusha Petro na hukumu ya yake.
"Yohana ambaye pia aliitwa Marko"
Maelezo haya yanawataja binti Rhoda pamoja na wote waliokuwa wakiomba mle chumbani.
"Petro alibisha mlangoni" Alizidi kugongagonga kama ilivyokuwa desturi ya Wayahudi ili kuruhusu waliopo kujua kuwa wametembelewa.
"Katika mlango wa nje" au "Katika mlango wa kuingilia kutoka barabarani hadi kwenye yadi ya nyumba"
"Alikuja getini kuuliza ni nani aliyekuwa anabisha hodi"
"Kwa vile alijawa na furaha" au "Furaha kupita kiasi"
"Hakuweza kuufungua mlango" au "Alisahau kufungua mlango"
"Alikwenda mbio kwenye chumba cha nyumba ile"
liwajulisha au "Alisema"
"Amesimama nje mbele ya mlango"
Watu siyo tu hawakumwamini, bali walimkemea pia kwa kusema maneno ya kipuuzi.
"Alisisitiza kusema alichowaambia kilikuwa cha kweli"
"Walimwambia"
"KIle ulichokiona ni malaika wa Petro" Wayahudi waliamini kuwa na malaika mlinzi na inawezekana walifikiri kwa Petro hivyo, kuwa malaika wa Petro alikuwa amekuja kwao.
Ingawa Herode alikuwa amemwua Yakobo sura 12:1, hata hivyo kulikuwa na Yakobo zaidi ya mmoja.
Neno "Kuendelea" linamaanisha Petro alifuluriza kubisha kwa mudo wote wale wa ndani wakiwa wanazungumza habari zake.
"Waambieni habari hizi"
"Waumini wengine"
Hili limetumika kutenganisha simulizi. Muda umekwishapita, sasa ni siku nyingine.
"Saa ya asubuhi"
Kinyume cha huzuni kubwa ni "Furaha kubwa" Askari hao hawakuwa na furaha hiyo tena.
Hili linaelezea kinyume cha furaha kama; Msongo wa mawazo, mashaka, hofu na kuchanganyikiwa.
"Kuhusiana na"
"Herode alimtafuta Petro na kushindwa kumpata"
Ilikuwa ni adhabu ya kawaida kwa serikali ya Rumi kuua walinzi kama mfungwa wao aliwatoroka.
Kaisaria ilikuwa chini zaidi ya Yudea.
Luka anaendelea na simlizi nyingine juu ya maisha ya Herode.
Neno linaloweka daraja la kuelekea kwenye tukio jingine.
Ni tukio lisilofurahisha kwamba wote walikwenda kwa Herode. "Wanaume waliowawakilisha watu wa Tiro na Sidoni walienda kwa pamoja kufanya mazungumzo pamoja na Herode.
"Hawa watu walimfanya kuwa rafiki yao"
Blasto alikuwa msaidizi au ofisa wa Mfalme Herode.
"Wanaume wale waliomba kuwe na amani"
Yawezekana walinunua chakula hiki. "Watu wa Tiro na Sidoni walikuwa wakinunua chakula chao chote kutoka kwa watu waliotawaliwa na Herode."
Inaonekana Herode alikuwa amezuia nchi yake kutoa chakula kwa Tiro na Sidoni kwasababu alikuwa amewakasirikia watu wa nchi hizo.
Hii inawezekana ilikuwa ni siku ambayo Herode alikubali kukutana na wawakilishi wa miji ya Tiro na Sidoni.
Mavazi ya gharama ambayo yangemdhihirisha kuwa alikuwa mfalme.
Hii ilikuwa ni kawaida ya Herode kufanya wakati watu walikuja kumwona.
Hii ni sehemu ya mwisho ya simlizi ya Mfalme Herode.
"Wakati huo huo" au "Wakati watu walipokuwa wakimsifia Herode"
"Herode aliharibiwa" au " kikasababisha Herode kuwa mgonjwa sana"
Herode akawaruhusu watu wamwabudu yeye badala ya kuwaambia wamwabudu Mungu.
"Chango" inaonyesha na wadudu ndani ya mwili, labda minyoo katika utumbo.
Hii ni taarifa inayotoa mrejesho juu ya kuenea kwa neno la Mungu na kwa vile Barnaba na Sauli walikuwa wakifanya.
Neno la Mungu likahubiriwa kama vile mti mbichi uliokuwa na uwezo wa kustawi na kuzaa matunda. "Neno la Mungu likasambaa katika maeneo mbalimbali na watu wakamwamini."
Watu wengi walisikia habari za neno la Mungu na kuupokea wokovu kwa njia ya Yesu.
Inaelezea wakati walipopeleka fedha kutoka kwa waumini wa Antiokia sura 11:29.
Walirudi kwenda Antiokia. "Baraba na Sauli walirudi Antiokia"
"Baraba na Sauli walimchukua Yohana pamoja nao"
"Alikuwa akiitwa jina jingine Marko"
1 Sasa katika kanisa la Antiokia, palikuwa na baadhi ya manabii na walimu. Walikua Barnaba, Simeoni (aliyeitwa Nigeri). Lukio wa Kirene, Manaeni( ndugu asiye wa damu wa Herode kiongozi wa mkoa), na Sauli. 2 Walipokuwa wakimwabudu Bwana na kufunga, Roho Mtakatifu alisema, "Niteengeeni pembeni Barnaba na Sauli, waifanye kazi niliyo waitia." 3 Baada ya Kanisa kufunga, kuomba, na kuweka mikono yao juu ya watu hawa, wakawaacha waende. 4 Kwa hiyo Barnabas na Sauli walimtii Roho Mtakatifu na walitelemka kuelekea Seleukia; Kutoka huko walisafiri baharini kuelekea kisiwa cha Kipro. 5 Walipokuwa katika mji wa Salami, walilitangaza neno la Mungu katika Masinagogi ya Wayahudi. Pia walikuwa pamoja na Yohana Marko kama msaidizi wao. 6 Walipokwenda katika kisiwa chote mpaka Pafo, walikuta mtu fulani mchawi, Myahudi nabii wa uongo, ambaye jina lake lilikuwa Bar Yesu. 7 Mchawi huyu alishirikiana na Liwali Sergio Paulus, aliyekuwa mtu mwenye akili. Mtu huyu aliwaalika Barnaba na Sauli, kwa sababu alihitaji kusikia neno la Mungu. 8 Lakini Elima "yule mchawi" (hivyo ndivyo jina lake lilivyo tafsiriwa) aliwapinga; alijaribu kumgeuza yule liwali atoke kwenye imani. 9 Lakini Sauli aliyeitwa Paulo, alikuwa amejazwa na Roho Mtakatikfu, akamkazia macho 10 na akasema "Ewe mwana wa Ibilisi, umejazwa na aina zote za udanganyifu na udhaifu. Wewe ni adui wa kila aina ya haki. Hautakoma kuzigeuza njia za Bwana, zilizonyooka, je utaweza? 11 Sasa tazama, mkono wa Bwana upo juu yako, na utakuwa kipofu. Hautaliona Jua kwa muda" mara moja ukungu na giza vilianguka juu ya Elimas; alianza kuzunguka pale akiomba watu wamwongoze kwa kumshika mkono. 12 Baada ya liwali kuona kilichotokea, aliamini, kwa sababu alishangazwa kwa mafundisho kuhusu Bwana. 13 Sasa Paulo na rafiki zake walisafiri majini kutoka Pafo na wakafika Perge katika Pamfilia. Lakini Yohana aliwaacha na kurudi Yerusalemu. 14 Paulo na rafiki yake walisafiri kutoka Perge na wakafika Antiokia ya Pisidia. Huko walikwenda katika sinagogi siku ya Sabato na kukaa chini. 15 Baada ya kusoma sheria na manabii, viongozi wa sinagogi aliwatumia ujumbe wakisema, "Ndugu, kama mnao ujumbe wa kutia moyo watu hapa, semeni" 16 Kwa hiyo Paulo alisimama na kuwapungia mkono; alisema, "Wanaume wa Israeli na enyi mnao mtii Mungu, sikilizeni. 17 Mungu wa hawa watu wa Israeli aliwachagua baba zetu na kuwafanya watu wengi walipokaa katika nchi Misri, na kwa mkono wake kuinuliwa aliwaongoza nje yake. 18 Kwa miaka arobaini aliwavumilia katika jangwa. 19 Baada ya kuyaharibu mataifa saba katika nchi ya Kaanani, aliwapa watu wetu nchi yao kwa urithi. 20 Matukio haya yote yalitokea zaidi ya miaka mia nne na hamsini. Baada ya vitu hivi vyote, Mungu aliwapa waamuzi mpaka Samweli Nabii. 21 Baada ya haya, watu waliomba mfalme, hivyo Mungu aliwapa Sauli mwana wa Kishi, mtu wa kabila la Benjamini, kuwa mfalme kwa miaka arobaini. 22 Kisha baada ya Mungu kumuondoa katika ufalme, alimwinua Daudi kuwa mfalme wao. Ilikuwa ni kuhusu Daudi kwamba Mungu alisema, 'Nimempata Daudi mwana wa Yese kuwa mtu apendezwaye na moyo wangu; ambaye atafanya kila kitu nipendacho.' 23 Kutoka kwenye ukoo wa mtu huyu Mungu ameiletea Israeli mkombozi, Yesu, kama alivyoahidi kufanya. 24 Hili lilianza kutokea, kabla ya Yesu kuja, Yohana kwanza alitangaza ubatizo wa toba kwa watu wote wa Israeli. 25 Naye Yohana alipokuwa akimalizia kazi yake, alisema, 'Mwanifikiri mimi ni nani? mimi si yule. Lakini sikilizeni, ajaye nyuma yangu, sisitahili kulegeza viatu vya miguu yake.' 26 Ndugu, watoto wa ukoo wa Abrahamu, na wale ambao kati yenu mnamwabudu Mungu, ni kwa ajili yetu kwamba ujumbe huu wa ukombozi umetumwa. 27 Kwa wale waishio Yerusalemu, na watawala wao, hawakumtambua kwa uhalisia, na wala hawakuutambua ujumbe wa manabii ambao husomwa kila Sabato; kwa hiyo walitimiliza ujumbe wa manabii kwa kumhukumu kifo Yesu. 28 Japokuwa hawakupata sababu nzuri kwa kifo ndani yake, walimwomba Pilato amuue. 29 Walipomaliza mambo yote yaliyoandikwa kuhusu yeye, walimshusha kutoka mtini na kumlaza kaburini. 30 Lakini Mungu alimfufua kutoka wafu. 31 Alionekana kwa siku nyingi kwa wale waliokwenda pamoja naye kutoka Galilaya kuelekea Yerusalemu. Watu hawa sasa ni mashahidi wa watu. 32 Hivyo tunawaletea habari njema kuhusu ahadi walizopewa mababu zetu. 33 Mungu aliweka ahadi hizi kwetu, watoto wao, katika hilo alimfufua Yesu na kumrudisha tena katika uhai. Hili pia liliandikwa katika Zaburi ya pili: 'Wewe ni Mwanangu, leo nimekuwa Baba yako' 34 Pia kuhusu ukweli ni kwamba alimfufua kutoka wafu ili kwamba mwili wake usiharibike, ameongea hivi: 'Nitakupatia utakatifu na baraka halisi za Daudi' 35 Hii ndiyo sababu kasema pia katika zaburi nyingine, 'Hautaruhusu mtakatifu wako kuuona uozo.' 36 Kwa kuwa baada ya Daudi kutumikia mapenzi ya Mungu katika kizazi chake, alilala, alilazwa pamoja na baba zake, na aliuona uaharibifu, 37 Lakini aliyefufuliwa na Mungu hakuuona uharibifu. 38 Hivyo na ifahamike kwenu, ndugu, kupitia mtu huyu, msamaha wa dhambi umehubiriwa. 39 Kwa yeye kila aaminiye anahesabiwa haki na mambo yote ambayo sheria ya Musa isingewapatia haki. 40 Hivyo basi kuweni waangalifu kwamba kitu walichokiongelea manabii kisitokee kwenu: 41 'Tazama, enyi mnaodharau, na mkashangae na mkaangamie; kwa vile nafanya kazi katika siku zenu, Kazi ambayo hamwezi kuiamini, hata kama mtu atawaeleza." 42 Wakati Paulo na Barnaba walipoondoka, watu wakawaomba waongee maneno haya siku ya Sabato ijayo. 43 Wakati mkutano wa sinagogi ulipokwisha, Wayahudi wengi na waongofu thabiti waliwafuata Paulo na Barnaba, ambao waliongea nao na waliwahimiza waendelee katika neema ya Mungu. 44 Sabato iliyofuata, karibu mji mzima ulikusanyika kusikia neno la Mungu. 45 Wayahudi walipoona makutano, walijawa na wivu na kuongea maneno yaliyopinga vitu vilivyosemwa na Paulo na walimtukana. 46 Lakini Paulo na Barnaba waliongea kwa ujasiri na kusema, "Ilikuwa ni muhimu kwamba neno la Mungu liongelewe kwanza kwenu. Kwa kuwa mnalisukumia mbali kutoka kwenu nakujiona kuwa hamkusitahili uzima wa milele, angalieni tutawageukia Mataifa. 47 Kama ambavyo Bwana ametuamuru, akisema, 'Nimewaweka ninyi kama nuru kwa watu wa mataifa, kwamba mlete wokovu kwa pande zote za dunia." 48 Mataifa waliposikia hili, walifurahi na kulisifu neno la Bwana. Wengi waliochaguliwa kwa uzima wa milele waliamini. 49 Neno la Bwana lilienea nchi yote. 50 Lakini wayahudi waliwasihi waliojitoa na wanawake muhimu, pia na viongozi wa mji. Haya yalichochea mateso dhidi ya Paulo na Barnaba na waliwatupa nje ya mipaka ya mji. 51 Lakini Paulo na Barnaba walikung'uta vumbi ya miguu yao. Kisha walienda kwenye mji wa Ikonia. 52 Na wanafunzi walijawa na furaha pamoja na Roho mtakatifu.
Tafsiri zingine zimeweka nukuu kutoka Agano La Kale kwenye mkono wa kulia mbali na maandiko mengine. ULB hufanya hivi kwa kutumia nukuu tatu kutoka Zaburi 13:33-35
Tafsiri zingine zimeweka kila mstari wa ushairi mbele ya kulia kuliko maandishi mengine ili kurahisisha kusoma. ULB hufanya hiv na ushairi ambao umenukuliwa kutoka Agano la Kale 13:41
Nusu ya pili ya kitabu cha Matendo inaanzia katika sura hii. Luka anaandika zaidi kumhusu Paulo kuliko Petero, na inelezea jinsi watu wa mataifa, na siyo Wayahudi, wanafunuliwa habari ya Yesu na waumini.
Mara nyingi Biblia huzungumzia watu wasio wanyoofu, watu wasiotenda yanayomfurahisha Mungu,kana kwamba ni watu watembeayo kwa giza. Inazungumzia mwanga kana kwamba ndio unaweazesha wenye dhambi kubadilika ili wafahamu kwamba wanachotenda ni kibaya na waanze kumtii Mungu. Wayahudi waliwachukulia watu wote wa mataifa kama watembeao kwa giza lakini Paulo na Barnaba wakazungumzia watu wa mataifa kumhusu Yesu kama watakaoenda kuwaletea mwanga wa kawaida. Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light.
Luka anaanza kuzungumzia habari za safari za huduma ambazo kanisa la Antiokia liliwatuma Barnaba na Sauli.
Mstari wa 1 unatupatia maelezo kuhusu watu wa kanisa la Antiokia.
"Kwa wakati, kanisa la Antiokoa"
"Majina ya baadhi ya waliokuwepo katika kanisa la Antiokia
"Manaeni alikuwa pengine rafiki yake na Herode waliocheza michezo ya ujana pamoja naye"
"Mtawala wa sehemu au robo ya nchi"
Neno hili linatambulisha matukio mawili yaliyokuwa yanatendeka kwa wakati mmoja.
"Nitengeeni hao kwa kunitumikia mimi"
Linamaanisha, Mungu amewachagua kufanya hazi hii.
"Wakaweka mikono juu ya manaume hao ambao Mungu alikuwa amejitengea kwa kazi yake. Tendo hili lilionyesha kwamba viongozi walikubali kuwa Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa amewaita Barnaba na Sauli kwa kuifanya kazi hii."
"Wakawaacha waende zao" au "Wakawatuma wanaume hao kutenda kazi ambayo Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa amewatuma kuitenda"
Luka anandika kuwaelezea Barnaba na Sauli
Neno hili linatambulisha tukio lililotendeka kwasababu ya lile lililokuwa limetangulia kutukia. Tukio la mwanzo lilikuwa la kutengwa na Roho Mtakatifu kwa Barnaba na Sauli
Neno "Kutelemka" linatumika hapa kwasababu Seleukia ni mji ulio chini zaidi ya Antiokia.
Mji ulio kandokando ya ziwa.
Mji wa Salami ulikuwa katika kisiwa cha Kipro.
Maana inayowezekana; 1) "Kulikuwa na masinagogi mengi ya Wayahudi katika mji wa Salami mahali Barnaba na Sauli walihubiri" au 2) Barnaba na Sauli waliaza kuhubiri ndani ya Sinagogi katika mji wa Salami na kuendelea kuhubiri katika Masinagogi waliyoyaona wakati wakisafiri kuzunguka kisiwa hicho cha Kipro
"Yohana Marko alisafiri pamoja nao na alikuwa akiwasaidia"
"Aliyewahudumia"
Mistari hii imetaja viwakilishi vingi vya majina kuelezea watu mbalimbali walio tajwa na mwandishi Luka.
Walitembelea kisiwa chote kutoka upande mmoja hadi upande mwingine wakiunena ujumbe wa Injili katika kila mji walimopita.
Ni mji Mkuu wa kisiwa cha Kapro mahali Liwali alikuwa akiishi.
Neno "Kumkuta" linamaanisha kuwa walimfikia bila ya kumtafuta.
"Mtu aliyekuwa akifanya kazu ya uchawi" au "Mtu aliyekuwa akifanya mambo yasiyo ya kawaida katika fani ya kimazingaombwe"
"Bar - Yesu" maana yake "Mwana wa Yesu". Hakukuwa na mahusiano yoyote ya karibu na Yesu Kristo". Jina Yesu lilikuwa ni jina la kawaida katkia wakati ule.
"Alikuwa mara kwa mara pamoja na" au "Alikuwa mara kwa mara akiambatana na"
Huyu alikuwa Kiongozi mtendaji Katika utawala mkoa wa dola ya Rumi.
Hii ni historia ya maisha ya Liwali Sergio Paulus.
Huyu alikuwa Bar- Yesu, ambaly aliyekuwa akiitwa mchawi.
"Hivyo ndivyo jina lake katika lugha ya kigriki"
"Aliwazuia akijaribu kumgeuza"
"Alijaribu kumshawishi Liwali kuiacha imani ya ujumbe wa Injli"
Wakati wakiwa katika kisiwa cha Pafo, Pauli alianza kuzungumza na Elima.
"Sauli" ambalo ni jina la Kiyahudi, na "Paulo" ambalo ni jina la Kirumi. Wakati alipokuwa akizungumza na mtawala wa Rumi, alikuwa akitumia jina la Kirumi.
"Akamkazia macho kwa makini"
Paulo anasema yule mtu alikuwa akitenda kama Ibilisi. "Wewe sawa na shetani" au "Unatenda kama Shetani"
"Wakati wote unatenda kwa kusababisha wengine waamini ambacho si kweli kwa kutumia udanganyifu na mara zote unatenda mabaya"
Inamaanisha kuwa mzembe na kutokufuata sheria ya Mungu kwa dhati.
Paulo anamwunganisha Elima pamoja na Ibilisi. Kama vile Ibilisi ni adui wa Mungu kwa kuwa kinyume na haki, ndivyo ilivyo kwa Elima pia.
Paulo anatumia swali kumkemea Elima kwa upinzani wake kwa Mungu.
Hapa "njia zilizonyoka" linamaanisha njia zilizo za kweli katika Bwana.
Paulo anamalizia majadiliano na Elima.
Neno "mkono" unawakilisha nguvu za Mungu na neno "juu yako" linamaanisha adhabu . "Mungu atakuadhibu"
Hii inaweza kutafsiriwa kuwa; "Mungu atakufanya kipofu"
Elima atakuwa kipofu kabisa kwamba hataweza kuliona jua.
"Kwa kipindi fulani" au "Mpaka muda wa Mungu aliouamru"
"Macho ya Elima yakapata ukungu na giza" au "Elima uoni ulikuwa hafifu na kisha hakuweza kuona kabisa"
"Elima alianza kutangatanga"
Huyu alikuwa ni mtumishi wa serikali katika jimbo la Rumi.
"Alimwamini Yesu"
"Mafundisho kuhusu Bwana Yesu yalimshangaza mno"
Hii ni sehemu mpya ya simlizi kuhusu Paulo akiwa Antiokia ya Pisidia
Mistari ya 13 na 14 inatupa inatupa ufafanuzi wa simlizi hiyo.
"Paulo na rafiki zake" Walikuwa Barnaba na Yohana Marko (aliyeitwa Yohana). Kutokea hapa na kuendelea, Sauli akaitwa Paulo katika Matendo ya Mitume. Jina la Paulo limeorodheshwa kwanza kuonyesha kuwa alikuwa kiongozi wa kundi. Ni muhimu kutunza mtiririko huu katika tafasiri.
Linaonyesha mwanzo wa kipengere na simlizi mpya.
"Walisafiri kwa kutumia jahazi kutoka Pafo"
"Walifika Perge iliyo Pamfilia"
"Lakini Yohana Marko akawaacha Paulo na Barnaba"
"Mji wa Antiokia ni wilaya ya Pisidia"
"Sheria na Manabii" Inamaanisha sehemu ya maandiko ya Wayahudi ambayo yalisomwa. 'Baada ya mtu mmoja kusoma kutoka vitabu vya sheria na maandiko ya Manabii"
"Wakiwaomba mmoja wao aseme neno"
Neno "ndugu" lilitumika wa watu katika Sinagogi kuwazungumzia Paulo na Barnaba kama Wayahudi wenzao.
"Kama mnataka kutuambia jambo lolote la kututi moyo"
"Tafadhali mnaweza kunena"
Paulo anaanza hotuba yake kwa watu waliokuwamo kwenye Sinagogi huko Antiokia ya Pisidia. Anaanza kwa kuzungumzia mambo ambayo yalitokea katika historia ya Israeli.
Inamaanisha kutoa ishara kwa mikono kwamba yuko tayari kuanza kusema.
Anamaanisha, Wamataifa ambao wanafuata desturi na dini ya Kuyahudi. "Ninyi msio Waisrael, lakini mnamwabudu Mungu"
"Nisikieni mimi" au "Sikieni ambacha nataka kuwaambia"
"Mungu ambye anaabudiwa na Waisraeli
"Mababa wa Wayahudi"
"Aliwawezesha wao kuwa watu wengi sana"
anamaanisha Mkono wa Mungu wenye uweza.
"Kutoka katika nchi ya Misri"
linamaanisha "Aliwajali" na "Aliwavumilia katika kutokutii kwao"
Mwinjilisti Luka katika kuandika kwake anatumia viwakilishi vingi vya majina kuelezea wale ndugu wanaotajwa katika vifungu hivi.
Neno "Mataifa" linafafanua tofauti ya makundi ya watu na siyo mipaka ya mataifa kijiografia.
lichukua muda wa miaka mia nne na hamsini kuikamilisha kazi ya kuyaondoa mataifa Kanaani.
"Muda huo ulifikia hata kipindi cha Nabii Samweli"
Nukuu katika simlizi hii inatoka katika kitabu cha Samweli na katika Zaburi za Ethani katika Agano la kale.
"Kuwa mfalme wao kwa miaka arobaini"
Inamaanisha kuwa Mungu alisababisha Sauli asiendelee kuwa Mfalme. "Alimkataa asiwe Mfalme"
"Mungu alimchagua Daudi kuwa Mfalme wao."
"Mfalme wa Israeli" au "Mfalme juu ya Waisreli"
"Mungu alisema hivyo kuhusu Daudi"
"Nimeshaona kwamba"
namaanisha kuwa "Yeye ni mtu anayetaka kutenda ambayo mimi nataka"
Nukuu hii inatoka katika vitabu vya Injili.
"KUtoka katika ukoo wa Daudi." Hii imewekwa mwanzoni mwa sentensi kuelezea kuwa Mwokozi angekuwa nduye aliyetoka katika ukoo wa Daudi.
Inamaanisha watu wa Israeli.
"Kama vile Mungu alivyoahidi angefanya"
Unaweza kulitafasiri neno "toba" kama kitenzi kama vile; "Ubatizo kwa watu waliotakiwa kutubu kwa ajili ya dhambi zao."
Yohana aliuliza swali kuwafanya watu wafikirie Yohana alikuwa nani.
Yohana alikuwa anamwelezea Masihi, ambaye watu walikuwa wanamtegemea kuja.
Neno linalo elezea umuhimu wa kile ambacho atakwenda kusema.
Hii pia inazungumzia kuja kwa Masihi. "Masihi atakuja Mapema"
"Mimi sistahili hata kungua kamba za kiatu chake."
Viwakilishi vya majina hapa vinamuwakilisha Paulo na kundi lote la watu waliokuwemo kwenye Sinagogi.
Paulo analielezea kundi la Wayahudi na wale wa mataifa walioungia katika dini ya kiyahudi ili kubaki na hali yao waliyoichagua ya kumwabudu Mungu wa kweli.
Kwa maneno mwngine; "Mungu ameshatuma ujumbe wake wa wokovu"
Neno hili linamaanisha kwamba; "Mungu atawaokoa watu"
"Hawakuweza kabisa kumtambua huyu mtu Yesu alikuwa ni mmoja ambaye Mungu alimtuma kuwakomboa."
Unawakilisha; "Maandiko ya manabii" au "Ujumbe wa manabii."
"Ambao mtu anausoma"
"Hakika walitenda kama vile Manabii walivyosema."
Viwakilishi vya majina, vinawakilisha Wayahudi na Viongozi wa dini zao katika Yerusalemu.
"Hawakupata sababu zenye maana kwanini Yesu alipaswa auawe"
Neno "Kumwomba" ni neno lenye nguvu likimaanisha "Kutaka, kulazimisha, kudai"
"Wakati walipomtendea Yesu, kila kitu walichokuwa wamekisema manabii kilitimia.
"Walimwua Yesu na kuuondoa mwili wake kutoka kwenye msalaba baada ya kufa."
"Kutoka msalabani"
"Lakini" ni neno linaloonyesha nguvu ya kutofautisha usemi uliotangulia na ule unaofuata kama vile; "Watu walimwua Yesu lakini Mungu alimfufua Yesu"
"Alimfufu kutoka miongoni mwa wale waliokuwa wamekufa"
"Kufanywa mzima tena"
"Wanafunzi waliotembea pamoja na Yesu kutoka Galilaya mpaka Yerusalemu wakimwona kwa siku nyingi."
"Tunajua kutoka maandiko mengine kwamba, muda wa siku arobaini"
"Sasa wanashuhudia kwa watu habari za Yesu"
Nukuu ya pili hapa inatoka katika kitabu cha nabii Isaya.
Kiunganishi cha neno kinachoonyesha tukio kwamba tukio lililokwisha kupita ni kwasababu ya tukio lililokuwa limetangulia kutukia. Tukio la nyuma kabla ya lile lililofuata ni la kumfufua Yesu kutoka kwa wafu.
"mababu zetu" Paulo bado anaongea na Wayahudi na watu wa mataifa waliofuata desturi za Kiyahudi huko Antiokia Pisidia. Hawa walikuwa mababu wa kimwili wa Wayahudi na Mababu wa kiroho wa wakristo wa mataifa waliofuata desturi za Kiyahudi.
"Mungu amekwisha timiza hizo ahadi"
"Kwetu" inamaanisha wale watoto wa hao mababu"
"Kwa kumfanya Yesu kuwa mzima tena"
kweli huu umeandikwa pia na Zaburi ya pili."
Hivi ni vyeo muhimu vinavyoeleza ule uhusiano kati ya Yesu na Mungu.
"Mungu alinena haya maneno juu ya kumfanya Yesu kuwa mzima tena ili asionekane na mauti tena"
"Wafu" ni neno linalowakilisha watu waliokwisha kufa. Atamfufua kutoka miongoni mwao na kumfanya kuwa mzima tena"
"Baraka za kipekee"
Wasikilizaji wa Paulo wangeweza kufahamu kuwa Zaburi hii ilikuwa inamtaja Masihi.
"Daudi pia alisema." Daudi ni mwandishi wa Zaburi ya 16 ambapo nukuu hii imechukuliwa.
Neno "kuona uozo" ni neno linalofanana na "kuharibika." Hutaruhusu mwili wa mtakatifu wako kuharibika."
Hapa Daudi anamwambia Mungu.
"Katika kipindi cha uhai wake"
"alifanya kile alichomtaka Mungu kufanya"
Hii ilikuwa lugha laini iliyokwa inazungumzia kifo.
"Alizikwa pamoja na baba zake waliokuwa wamekufa"
"Kuona uharibifu" ni kusema kuwa "Mwili wake uliharibiwa"
"Lakini Yesu ambaye"
"Yesu hakuona uharibifu"
Kiwakilishi cha jina "yeye" linaelezea juu ya Yesu.
"Fahamu hivi" au "Hii ni muhimu kwako kujua"
Paulo anatumia lugha ua ndugu kuona Wayahudi na wafuasi wa dini ya kiyahudi wote ni ndugu.
"tunawatangazia kuwa dhambi zenu zinaweza kusamehewa kupitia Yesu."
"Msamaha" inaweza kutafasiriwa kuwa; Mungu anaweza kusamehe dhambi zako"
"Kila mmoja anayemwamini yeye"
"Yesu anamhesabia haki kila mmoja anayemwamini"
"dhambi zote"
Paulo anamalizia hotuba yake katika Sinagogi la Antiokia ya Pisidia aliyoianza katika sura 31:16.
Katika ujumbe wake kwa watu wa Sinagogi, Paulo ananukuu nukuu ya Nabii Habakuki.
"Iweni waangalifu kwa mambo ambayo nimekwisha waelezeni."
"Kwa kile manabii walishawahi kuzungumzia"
"Mnaofanya mizaha, dharau"
"Mkashitushwe"
"Kisha kufa"
"Ninatenda kitu"
"Kipindi cha uhai wenu"
"Ninafanya kitu ambacho"
"Hata ikiwa mtu mmoja kuwaanbia habari yake"
"Wakati Paulo na Barnaba walipokuwa wakiondoka"
"Wakawaomba"
"Maneno ambayo Paulo alikuwa ameyatamka kwenye hotuba yake"
Inaweza kuwa; 1) Wakati Paulo na Barnaba walipoondoka mstari 42: au 2) Paulo na Barinaba waliopouacha mkutano kabla ya kuhitimisha.
"Hawa walikuwa si Wayahudi ambao hawakufuata utamaduni wa Kiyahudi"
"Na Paulo na Barnaba walinena nao hao na kuwasihi"
"Waendelee kumtumaini Mungu ambaye husamehe dhambi kwasababu ya kile Yesu alifanya kwao"
"Mji" Ni neno linaliwakilisha watu wa mji huo.
"Kuwasikia Paulo na Barnaba wakinena neno la Bwana Yesu.
:Hawa ni Wayahudi Viongozi"
"Hali ya wivu ikawajia"
"Maneno yaliyopinga ujumbe wao"
"Mambo yale yaliyosemwa na Paulo"
Paulo ananukuu nukuu ya Nabii Isaya katika Agano la Kale.
"Mungu alikuwa ameagiza kile cha kufanya"
"Kwamba tulinene neno la Mungu kwenu kwanza"
"Kulipinga neno la Mungu lililonenwa"
Mmeonyesha kuwa hamkuuthamini uzima wa milele"
"Tutawaambia watu wa Mataifa habari za Yesu"
Hapa ni ukweli kuhusu Yesu kwamba Paulo alikuwa akihubiri kana kwamba kulikuwa na nuru iliyokuwa ikiruhusu watu kuona.
"Kuwaambia watu mahali pote katika dunia kwamba ninataka kuwaokoa"
"Kumsifu Mungu kwa ujumbe kuhusu Bwana Yesu"
"Watu wote ambao Mungu alikuwa amewachagua kupokea uzima wa milele"
"Wale alioliamini jina la Yesu walienda kila mahali katika jimbo hilo na kuwaambia wengine habari za Yesu"
Huu ni muda wa mwisho wa Paulo na Barnaba kukaa Antiokia ya Pisidia na wakaenda ikonia.
Hii yawezekana kuzungumzia viongozi wa Kiyahudi.
"Kushawisha" au "kuhamasisha"
"Wanaume mashuhuri"
"Walishawishi wanaume mashuhuri na wanawake kuwatesa Paulo na Barnaba"
"Waliwatoa Paulo na Barnaba kutoka nje ya mji"
"Huu ulikuwa tukio la mfano kuonyesha kwa watu wasioamini kwamba Mungu alikuwa amewakataa na angeweza kuwahukumia"
"Yawezekana ni wale waumini wapya walioamini huko Antiokia Pisidia ambao Paulo na Barnaba waliwaacha"
1 Ikatokea ndani ya Ikonio kwamba Paulo na Barnaba waliingia pamoja ndani ya sinagogi la Wayahudi nakuongea namna ambayo kundi kubwa la watu Wayahudi na Wayunani waliamini. 2 Lakini wayahudi wasiotii waliwachochea akili wamataifa na kuwafanya kuwa wabaya dhidi ya ndugu. 3 Kwa hiyo walikaa huko kwa muda mrefu, wakiongea kwa ujasiri kwa nguvu ya Bwana, huku akitoa uthibitisho kuhusu ujumbe wa neema yake. Alifanya hivi kwa kutoa ishara na majaabu vifanywe kwa mikono ya Paulo na Barnaba. 4 Lakini eneo kubwa la mji liligawanyika: baadhi ya watu walikuwa pamoja na Wayahudi, na baadhi pamoja na mitume. 5 Wakati wamataifa na Wayahudi walipojaribu kuwashawishi viongozi wao kuwatendea vibaya na kuwaponda mawe Paulo na Barnaba, 6 wakalitambua hilo na kukimbilia katika miji ya Likaonia, Listra na Derbe, na maeneo yanayozunguka pale, 7 na huko waliihubiri injili. 8 Na huko Listra palikuwa na mtu mmoja aliyekaa, hakuwa na nguvu miguuni mwake, kilema kutoka tumboni mwa mama yake, hajawahi kutembea. 9 Mtu huyu alimsikia Paulo akiongea. Paulo alimkazia macho na akaona kwamba alikuwa na imani ya kuponywa. 10 Hivyo alisema kwake kwa sauti ya juu, "Simama kwa miguu yako." Na yule mtu aliruka juu na kuanza kutembea. 11 Umati ulipoona alichokifanya Paulo, waliinua sauti zao, wakisema katika lahaja ya Kilikaonio, "miungu imetushukia kwa namna ya binadamu." 12 Walimwita Barnaba "Zeu," na Paulo "Herme" kwa sababu alikuwa msemaji mkuu. 13 Kuhani wa Zeu, ambaye hekalu lake lilikuwa nje ya mji, alileta fahari la ng'ombe na mtungo wa maua mpaka kwenye lango la mji, yeye na umati walitaka kutoa sadaka. 14 Lakini mitume, Barnaba na Paulo, walipolisikia hili, walirarua mavazi yao na kwa haraka walikwenda nje kwenye umati, wakilia 15 na kusema, "Enyi watu, kwanini mnafanya mambo haya? Na sisi pia ni binadamu wenye hisia kama za kwenu. Tunawaletea habari njema, kwamba mgeuke kutoka kwenye vitu hivi visivyofaa na kumwelekea Mungu aliye hai, aliyeumba mbingu, dunia na bahari na kila kitu kilichomo. 16 Katika nyakati zilizopita, aliwaruhusu mataifa kutembea katika njia zao wenyewe. 17 Lakini bado, hakuondoka pasipo shahidi, katika hilo alifanya vizuri na akawapatia mvua kutoka mbinguni na nyakati za mazao, akiwajaza mioyo yenu kwa vyakula na furaha" 18 Hata kwa maneno haya, Paulo na Barnaba kwa shida waliuzuia umati kuwatolea sadaka. 19 Lakini baadhi ya Wayahudi kutoka Antiokia na Ikonio walikuja kuushawishi umati. Wakampiga mawe Paulo na kumburuta hadi nje ya mji, wakidhani alikuwa amekufa. 20 Hata hivyo wanafunzi walikuwa wamesimama karibu naye, aliamka, wakaingia mjini. Siku ya pili, aliende Derbe na Barnaba. 21 Baada ya kufundisha injili katika mji ule na kuwafanya wanafunzi wengi, walirudi Listra, hadi Ikoniamu, na hadi Antiokia. 22 Waliendelea kuimarisha nafsi za wanafunzi na kutiwa moyo kuendelea katika imani, akasema, "Lazima tuingie katika ufalme wa Mungu kwa kupitia mateso mengi." 23 Walipo wateua kwa ajili yao wazee wa kila kusanyiko la waaminio, na wakiwa wameomba na kufunga, waliwakabidhi kwa Bwana, ambaye wao walimwamini. 24 Kisha walipita katika Pisidia, walifika Pamfilia. 25 Wakati walipoongea maneno katika Perga, waliteremka kwenda Atalia. 26 Kutoka huko walipanda meli hadi Antiokia ambako walikuwa wamejitoa kwa neema ya Mungu kwa ajili ya kazi ambayo sasa walikuwa wameikamilisha. 27 Walipofika huko Antiokia, na kulikusanya kusanyiko la pamoja, wakatoa taarifa ya mambo ambayo Mungu amefanya kwao, na jinsi alivyowafungulia mlango wa imani kwa watu wa Mataifa. 28 Walikaa kwa muda mrefu na wanafunzi.
Ujumbe wa Yesu ni ujumbe wa Mungu ambao huwapa neema wanaomuamini Yesu. and )
Watu wa mataifa katika himaya ya Warumi waliabudu miungu wengi ambao hawakuwepo. Paulo na Barnaba waliaambia kuamini katika "Mungu aliye hai" Yahwe.
Yesu aliwaambia wafuasi wake kabla hajafa kwamba kila anayemfuata angepata mateso. Paulo anayarudia maneno hayo kupitia maneno tofauti na hayo.
Habari ya Paulo na Barnaba Ikonia inaendelea.
Maana hapa yawezekana kuwa 1) "ilitokea Ikonia ya kwamba" au 2) "Kama kawaida ndani ya Ikonia"
"alizungumza kwa namna ambayo." Inaweza kusaidia kutamka kwamba walizungumza ujumbe kuhusu Yesu. "walizungumza ujumbe kuhusu Yesu kwa nguvu"
Hii inalenga kikundi cha Wayahudi ambao hawakumuamini ujumbe wa Yesu.
kusababisha Wayunani kuwa na hasira inazungumzwa kana kwamba maji yaliyotulia kuchafuliwa.
hapa neno "akili" linamaanisha watu
hapa "ndugu" linamaanisha Paulo na Barnaba na waumini wapya.
Hapa neno "Yeye" linamaanisha Bwana.
"Hata hivyo walibaki kule." Paul na Barnaba walibaki ikonia kuwasaidia watu wengi walioamini katika 14:1. "Kwa hiyo" inaweza kuondolewa kama itaongeza mchanganyiko kwenye maandishi.
"kuonesha kwamba ujumbe kuhusu neema yake ni kweli"
"kuhusu ujumbe wa neema ya Bwana"
HIi inaweza kuelezwa katika hali ya kutenda. "kwa kuwawezesha Paulo na Barnaba kufanya ishara na maajabu"
Hapa "mikono" inamaanisha nia na juhudi za wanaume hawa wawili kulingana na walivyoongozwa na Roho Mtakatifu. "kwa huduma ya Paulo na Barnaba"
Hapa "mji" inamaanisha watu waliomo kwenye mji. "watu wengi wa mji waligawanyika" au "watu wengi wa mji hawakukubaliana"
"waliaunga mkono Wayahudi" au "walikubaliana na Wayahudi." Kundi la kwanza lililotajwa halikukubaliana na ujumbe kuhusu neema.
Kundi la pili lililotajwa lilikubaliana na ujumbe kuhusu neema. Inaweza kusaidia kutaja tena kitezi. "walijiunga na mitume"
Luka anamaanisha Paulo na Barnaba. Hapa "mitume" inaweza kutumika katika hali ya ujumla ya "wale waliotumwa nje."
Hapa waliopata habari ni Paulo na Barnaba.
"walijaribu kuwashawishi viongozi wa Ikonio." Hapa "walijaribu" inaashiria hawakuweza kuwashawishi kikamilifu kabla ya mitume kuondoka katika mji.
"kuwapiga Paulo na Barnaba na kuwaua kwa kuwaponda mawe"
Wilaya ndani ya Asia Ndogo
Mji ndani ya Asia Ndogo kusini mwa Ikonio na Kaskazini mwa Derbe
Mji ndani ya Asia Ndogo kusini mwa Ikonio na Listra
"Paulo na Barnaba walihubiri injili pia huko"
Paulo na Barnaba sasa wako Listra.
Taarifa ya Jumla: Anayezungumziwa kuwa na imani ni yule kiwete; na aliyemsemesha ni Paulo. Yule aliyesemeshwa ni kiwete.
Hii inatambulisha mtu mpya katika simulizi.
"kutokuweza kusogeza miguu yake" au "kutokuweza kutembea kwa miguu yake"
"kilema"
"kiwete tangu kuzaliwa"
"Paulo alimtazama moja kwa moja"
Nomino "imani" inaweza kutafsiriwa kama kitenzi "amini." "aliamini kwamba Yesu anaweza kumponya" au "aliamini kuwa Yesu anaweza kumfanya mzima"
"akaruka hewani." Hii inaashiria kwamba miguu yake ilikuwa imeponywa kikamilifu.
Hii inamaanisha uponyaji wa Paulo kwa kiwete.
Idadi kubwa ya watu iliamini kuwa Paulo na Barnaba walikuwa miungu ya kipagani walioshuka toka mbinguni. "miungu wameshuka toka mbinguni kuja kwetu"
"katika lugha yao ya Kilikaonia" (UDB). Watu wa Listra walizumngumza Kilikaonia na Kigriki pia.
Watu hawa waliamini kuwa miungu walihitaji kubadili mionekano yao ili wawe kama binadamu.
Zeu alikuwa mfalme juu ya miungu wengine wote wa kipagani.
Herme alikuwa mungu wa kipagani aliyeleta ujumbe kutoka kwa Zeu na miungu wengine.
Inaweza kusaidia kuweka taarifa ya ziada kuhusu kuhani. "Kulikuwa na hekalu nje tu ya mji ambapo watu walimwabudu Zeu. Kuhani aliyehudumu katika hekalu aliposikia kile ambacho Paulo na Barnaba walichokifanya, alileta
Ng'ombe walikuwa ni wakutolewa sadaka. Mashada yalikuwa mojawapo kati ya kuwawekea mataji Paulo na barnaba, au kuwawekea ng'ombe kwa ajili ya sadaka.
Milango ya miji mara nyingi ilitumika kama sehemu ya kukutana kwa watu wa mji husika.
"walitaka kutoa sadaka kwa Paulo na Barnaba kama miungu Zeu na Herme.
Inawezekana Luka anatumia "mtume" katika hali ya ujumla ya "yule ambaye ametumwa."
Hili ni tendo la ishara kuonesha kuwa walihuzunishwa na kukasirishwa kwamba kundi lilitaka kuwatolea wao sadaka.
Barnaba na Paulo wanawakaripia watu kwa kujaribu kuwatolea sadaka. "watu, hampaswi kutuabudu!"
Kwa kauli hii, Baranaba na Paulo wanasema kuwa wao sio miungu. "Sisi ni binadamu tu kama nyie.. Sisi sio miungu!"
"kama nyie kwa kila hali"
"acheni kuabudu miungu ambayo haiwezi kuwasaidia, na badala yake anzeni kumuabudu Mungu aliye hai"
"Mungu ambaye kweli yupo" au "Mungu anayeishi"
"katika nyakati za zamani" au "Hadi sasa"
"kuishi kulingana na"
Paulo na Barnaba wanaendelea kuzungumza na kundi nje ya mji wa Listra.
Hii inaweza pia kuwekwa katika hali chanya. "hakika Mungu ameacha shuhuda" au "hakika Mungu ameshuhudia"
"kama inavyooneshwa na ukweli kuwa"
Hapa "mioyo yenu" inamaanisha watu. "akiwapa cha kutosha kula na vitu ambavyo vitawapa furaha"
Paulo na Barnaba waliwazuia makutano kuwatolea sadaka, lakini ilikuwa ni taabu kufanya hivyo.
"walikuwa na wakati mgumu kuwazuia"
Aliyedhaniwa kuwa amekufa ni Paulo.
Inaweza kusaidia kueleza wazi alichowashawishi umati kufanya. "kuwashawishi watu kutowaamini Paulo na Barnaba, na kuwegeukia"
Hii inaweza kutokuwa kundi moja na "makutano" katika mstari uliopita. Muda umepita, na hili linaweza kuwa kundi tofauti lililokusanyika pamoja.
"kwa sababu walifikiri kuwa ameshakufa"
Hawa walikuwa waumini wapya katika mji wa Listra.
"Paulo aliingia tena Listra na waumini"
"Paulo na Barnaba walienda katika mji wa Derbe"
Hapa waliotangaza ijili na kuwatia mioyo wanafunzi wao inamaanisha Paulo.
Wanaposema "Tunapaswa" inajumuisha Paulo, Barnaba na waumini.
"Derbe"
Hapa "nafsi" inamaanisha wanafunzi. Hii inatia mkazo katika mawazo ya ndani na imani. "Paulo na Barnaba waliwasihi waumini kuendelea kuamini ujumbe kuhusu Yesu" au "Paulo na Barnaba waliwasihi waumini kuendelea kukua imara katika mahusiano yao na Yesu.
"kuwatia mioyo waumini kuendelea kumwamini Yesu"
Waliowachagua na kuwakabidhi kwa Bwana ni Paulo na Barnaba na walioamini ni wale walioongozwa kwa Bwana na Paulo na Barnaba.
"Paulo na Barnaba walipochagua viongozi katika kila kundi jipya la waumini"
Maana zinazowezekana ni 1) "Paulo na Barnaba wakawakabidhi wazee waliowachagua" au 2) "Paulo na Barnaba wakawakabidhi wazee na waumini wengine" (UDB)
Wale walioamini inategemea na chaguo lako la ni kina nani waliokuwa wanazungumziwa katika maelezo yaliyopita (mojawapo kati ya wazee au viongozi na waumini wengine).
Usemi "wakaenda chini" unatumika hapa kwa sababu Atalia iko chini kwa kimo kuliko Perge.
Hii inaweza kuelezwa kwa hali ya kutenda. "ambapo waumini na viongozi Antiokia waliwakabidhi Paulo na Barnaba kwa neema ya Mungu" au "ambapo watu wa Antiokia waliomba kwamba Mungu awatunze na kuwalinda Paulo na Barnaba"
Waliofika Antiokia na kutoa taarifa ni Paulo na Barnaba. Aliyefungua mlango ni Mungu.
"wakawaita waumini wa palepale kukusanyika pamoja"
Mungu kuwawezesha Mataifa kuamini inazungumziwa kana kwambaaliwafungulia mlango uliokuwa unawazuia kuingia katika imani. "Mungu alifanye iwezekane kwa Mataifa kuamini"
1 Watu fulani walishuka kutoka Uyahudi na kuwafundisha ndugu, wakisema, "msipotahiriwa kama desturi ya Musa, hamwezi kuokolewa." 2 Wakati Paulo na Barnaba walipokuwa na mapambano na mjadala pamoja nao, ndugu waliamua kwamba Paulo, Barnaba, na wengine kadhaa waende Yerusalem kwa mitume na wazee kwa ajili ya swali hili. 3 Kwa hiyo, kwa kutumwa kwao na kanisa, walipitia Foinike na Samaria wakitangaza kugeuzwa nia kwa wamataifa. Walileta furaha kuu kwa ndugu wote, 4 Walipokuja Yerusalem, walikaribishwa na Kanisa na mitume na wazee, na waliwasilisha taarifa ya mambo yote ambayo Mungu amefanya pamoja nao. 5 Lakini watu fulani walioamini, waliokuwa katika kundi la Mafarisayo, walisimama nakusema, "ni muhimu kuwatahiri na kuwaamuru waishike sheria ya Musa." 6 Hivyo mitume na wazee walisimama pamoja kulifikiria hili swala. 7 Baada ya majadiliano marefu, Petro alisimama na kusema kwao, "Ndugu mwatambua kwamba kitambo kizuri kilichopita Mungu alifanya chaguo kati yenu, kwamba kwa mdomo wangu Mataifa wasikie neno la injili, na kuamini. 8 Mungu, anayefahamu mioyo, anashuhudia kwao, anawapa Roho mtakatifu, kama alivyofanya kwetu; 9 na hakutengeneza utofauti kati yetu na wao, akiifanya mioyo yao safi kwa imani. 10 Kwa hiyo, kwa nini mnamjaribu Mungu kwamba muweke nira juu ya shingo za wanafunzi ambayo hata baba zetu wala sisi hatukuweza kustahimili? 11 Lakini twaamini kwamba tutaokolewa kwa neema ya Bwana Yesu, kama walivyokuwa." 12 Kusanyiko lote lilinyamaza walipokua wakimsikiliza Barnaba na Paulo walipokuwa wakitoa taarifa ya ishara na maajabu ambayo Mungu alifanya pamoja nao kati ya watu wa mataifa. 13 Walipoacha kuongea, Yakobo alijibu akisema, "Ndugu nisikilizeni. 14 Simoni ameelezea jinsi kwanza Mungu kwa neema aliwasaidia Mataifa ili kwamba ajipatie kutoka kwao watu kwa ajili ya jina lake. 15 Maneno ya manabii yanakubaliana na hili kama lilivyoandikwa. 16 'Baada ya mambo haya nitarudi na kuijenga tena hema ya Daudi, iliyoanguka chini; nitainua na kuhuisha uhararibifu wake, 17 ili kwamba watu waliobaki wamtafute Bwana, pamoja na watu wa Mataifa walioitwa kwa jina langu.' 18 Hivi ndivyo asemavyo Bwana aliyefanya mambo haya yajulikanayo tangu enzi za zamani. 19 Hivyo basi, ushauri wangu ni, kwamba tusiwapatie shida watu wa Mataifa wamgeukiao Mungu; 20 lakini tuandike kwao kwamba wajiepushe mbali na uharibifu wa sanamu, tamaa za uasherati, na vilivyonyongwa, na damu. 21 Kutoka vizazi vya wazee kuna watu katika kila mji wahubirio na kumsoma Musa katika masinagogi kila Sabato." 22 Kwa hiyo ikaonekana kuwa imewapendeza mitume na wazee, pamoja na kanisa lote, kumchagua Yuda aliyeitwa Barsaba, na Silas, waliokuwa viongozi wa kanisa, na kuwatuma Antiokia pamoja na Paulo na Barnaba. 23 Waliandika hivi, "Mitume, wazee na ndugu, kwa ndugu wa Mataifa walioko Antiokia, Shamu na Kilikia, salamu. 24 Tulisika kwamba watu fulani ambao hatukuwapatia amri hiyo, walitoka kwetu na wamewataabisha kwa mafundisho yaletayo shida nafsini mwenu. 25 Kwa hiyo imeonekana vyema kwetu sote kuchagua watu na kuwatuma kwenu pamoja na wapendwa wetu Barnaba na Paulo, 26 watu walio hatarisha maisha yao kwa ajili ya jina la Bwana Yesu Kristo. 27 Kwa hiyo tumemtuma Yuda na Sila, watawaambia mambo yayo hayo. 28 Kwa kuwa ilionekana vyema kwa Roho Mtakatifu na kwetu, kutoweka juu yenu mzigo mkubwa kuliko mambo haya yaliyo ya lazima: 29 kwamba mgeuke kutoka kwenye vitu vitolewavyo kwa sanamu, damu, vitu vya kunyongwa, na uasherati. Kama mtajiweka mbali na hivi, itakuwa vyema kwenu. Kwa herini." 30 Hivyo basi, walivyotawanyishwa, waliteremkia Antiokia; baada ya kukusanya kusanyiko pamoja, waliwasilisha barua. 31 Walipokua wameisoma, walifurahi kwa sababu ya kutiwa moyo. 32 Yuda na Sila, na manabii, waliwatia moyo ndugu kwa maneno mengi na kuwatia nguvu. 33 Baada ya kukaa muda fulani huko, walitawanyishwa kwa amani kutoka kwa ndugu kwa wale waliowatuma. 34 [ Lakini ilionekana vyema Sila kubaki huko ] 35 Lakini Paulo na wengine walikaa Antiokia pamoja na wengine wengi, ambapo walifundisha na kuhubiri neno la Bwana. 36 Baada ya siku kadhaa Paulo alisema kwa Barnaba, "Na turudi sasa na kuwatembelea ndugu katika kila mji tulipohubiri neno la Bwana, na kuwaona walivyo. 37 Barnaba alihitaji pia kumchukua pamoja nao Yohana aliyeitwa Marko. 38 Lakini Paulo alifikiria haikuwa vizuri kumchukua Marko, aliyewaacha huko Pamfilia na hakuendelea nao katika kazi. 39 Kisha hapo kukatokea mabishano makubwa kwa hiyo walitengana, na Barnaba alimchukua Marko na kusafiri kwa meli mpaka Kipro, 40 Lakini Paulo alimchagua Sila na kuondoka, baada ya kukabidhiwa na ndugu katika neema ya Bwana. 41 Na alienda kupitia Shamu na Kilikia, akiimarisha makanisa.
Tafsiri zingine zimeweka kila mstari wa ushairi mbele ya kulia kuliko maandishi mengine ili kurahisisha kusoma. ULB hufanya hivi na ushairi ambao umenukuliwa kutoka Agano la Kale 15:16-17
Mkutano unaoelezwa na Luka katika sura hii huitwa "Baraza la Yerusalemu." Huu ulikuwa nimuda ambapo viongozi wengi wa kanisa walikuja pamoja kuamua iwapo waumini walihitaji kufuata sheria zote za Musa.
Katika sura hii, Luka anaanza kwa kutumia neno "ndugu" kumaanisha Wakristo wenzake badala ya Wayahudi wenzake.
Waumini wengine walitaka watu wa mataifa watahiriwe kwanza kwa vile Mungu alimuambia Abarahamu kwamba yeyote aliyetaka kuwa wake lazima angepashwa tohara na hii sheria ingedumu. Kwa upande mwingine Paulo na Barnaba walikuwa wameshuhudia Mungu akiwapa watu wa Mataifa kipaji cha Roho Mtakatifu na kwa hivyo hawakusisitiza watu wa mataifa watahiriwe. Makundi yote mawili yalienda Yerusalemu kwa uamuzi wa viongozi wa kanisa kuhusu swala hilo.
Kuna uwezekano ya kwamba viongozi wa kanisa walitoa uamuzi kwa hizi sheria ili Wayahudi pamoja na watu wa Mataifa waweze kuishi pamoja na kula chakula kimoja pamoja.
Paulo na Barnaba bado wapo Antiokia wakati kulikuwa na malumbano kuhusiana na kutahiriwa kwa watu wa Mataifa
ndugu ina maana ya watu walioamini
maneno yeye au wao yanamtaja Paulo
kanisa hapa linamaanisha watu waliokuwa sehemu ya kanisa
hapa Luka anatofautisha watu wanaoamini kuwa wokovu ni kwa Yesu pekee na wale wanaoamini kuwa wokovu ni kwa Yesu lakini pia wanaamini juu ya kutahiriwa kuwa ni muhimu kwa ajili ya wokovu
kutii sheria ya Musa
mdomo hapa unamaanisha Petro
alimwacha Roho Mtakatifu aje juu yao
Petro anamaliza mazungumzo yake na mitume pamoja na wazee
hii inamaanisha wazee wa Kiyahudi
neno wao hapa linamaanisha Paulo na Barnaba
kila mtu, au kundi lote
Mungu alitenda, au Mungu alisababisha
Yakobo anaanza kuongea na mitume na wazee
kwa ajili ya jina la Mungu
Yakobo anamnukuu nabii Amosi kutoka Agano la Kale
thibitisha ukweli
hii inamaanisha Mungu
Mtu anayeanza kumtii Mungu
hii ina maana ya kusoma sheria za Musa
hii ina maana ya watu wote waliopo kanisani
Hili ni jina la kisiwa katika jimbo la Asia ndogo
watu waliotumwa walikuwa Yuda aitwaye Barsaba na Sila
hii inamaanisha kunywa damu au kula nyama yenye damu
hii inamaanisha mwisho wa barua
manabii walikuwa ni walimu walioidhinishwa na Mungu kuongea kwa niaba yake
walioamini wenzake
hii ina maana ya ujumbe wa Mungu
nashauri turudi sasa
hili ni jimbo katika Asia ndogo
hii inamaanisha kuwa Sila alikuwa na Paulo na kisha akaondoka
Haya ni maeneo katika Asia ndogo
1 Paulo pia alipokuja Derbe na Lystra; na tazama, pale palikuwepo na mwanafunzi aitwaye Timotheo, ni Kijana aliyezaliwa na mama wa Kiyahudi ambaye ni muumini na baba yake ni Mgiriki. 2 Watu wa Listra na Ikonia walimshudia vizuri. 3 Paulo alimtaka ili asafiri naye, hivyo akamchukua na kumtahiri kwa sababu ya Wayahudi waliokuwako huko kwani wote walimjua kuwa baba yake ni Mgiriki. 4 Walipokuwa wakienda walipita kwenye miji na kutoa maagizo kwa makanisa ili kuyatii maagizo hayo yaliandikwa na mitume na wazee huko Yerusalemu. 5 Hivyo makanisa yakaimarishwa katika imani na walioamini wakaongezeka kwa idadi kila siku. 6 Paulo na mwenzake wakaenda Firigia na Galatia, kwani Roho wa Mungu aliwakataza kuhubiri neno huko kwenye jimbo la Asia. 7 Walipokaribia Misia, walijaribu kwenda Bithinia, lakini Roho wa Yesu akawakataza. 8 Kwa hiyo wakapita Misia wakaja mpaka Mji wa Troa. 9 Maono yalimtokea Paulo usiku, kulikuwa na mtu wa Makedonia amesimama, akimwita na kusema "Njoni mtusaidie huku Makedonia". 10 Paulo alipoona maono, mara tukajiandaa kwenda Makedonia, akijua kwamba Mungu alituita kwenda kuwahubiria injili. 11 Hivyo tukaondoka kutoka Troa, tukaenda moja kwa moja Samothrake, na siku iliyofuata tukafika mji wa Neapoli. 12 Kutoka hapo tukaenda Filipi ambao ni moja ya mji wa Makedonia, mji muhimu katika wilaya na utawala wa Kirumi na tukakaa siku kadhaa. 13 Siku ya Sabato, tulikwenda nje ya lango kwa njia ya mto, sehemu ambayo tulidhania kutakuwa na mahali pa kufanyia maombi. Tulikaa chini na kuongea na akinamama waliokuja pamoja. 14 Mwanamke mmoja aitwaye Lidia, muuzaji wa zambarau, kutoka katika mji wa Tiatira, mwenye kumwabudu Mungu, alitusikiliza. Bwana alimfungua moyo wake na kuweka maanani maneno yaliyosemwa na Paulo. 15 Baada ya kubatizwa, yeye na nyumba yake yote, alitusihi akisema " kama mmeniona kuwa mimi ni mwaminifu katika Bwana, basi nawasihi muingie na kukaa kwangu". Akatusihi sana. 16 Ikawa kwamba, tulipokuwa tunaenda mahali pa kuomba, msichana mmoja aliyekuwa na pepo la utambuzi akakutana nasi. Alimletea bwana wake faida nyingi kwa kubashiri. 17 Mwanamke huyu alimfuata Paulo pamoja na sisi, akipiga kelele na kusema "Hawa wanaume ni watumishi wa Mungu aliye Mkuu, wanaowatangazia ninyi habari ya wokovu". 18 Alifanya hivyo kwa siku nyingi, lakini Paulo akiwa amekasirishwa na tendo hilo, aligeuka nyuma na kumwambia pepo, " Nakuamuru kwa Jina la Yesu umtoke ndani yake." Naye akatoka na kumwacha mara moja. 19 Mabwana zake walipoona ya kuwa tumaini la faida yao limeondoka, waliwakamata Paulo na Sila na kuwaburuza sokoni mbele ya wenye mamlaka. 20 Walipowafikisha kwa mahakimu, walisema, "Hawa wanaume ni Wayahudi na wanasababisha ghasia kubwa katika mji wetu. 21 Wanafundisha mambo ambayo siyo sheria sisi kuyapokea wala kuyafuata kama Warumi." 22 Umati ukawainukia kinyume Paulo na Sila, mahakimu wakararua nguo zao na kuwavua na kuamuru wachapwe viboko 23 Baada ya kuwachapa viboko vingi, waliwatupa gerezani na kumuamuru askari wa gereza kuwalinda vyema. 24 Baada ya kupokea amri hiyo, askari wa gereza aliwatupa katika chumba cha ndani ya gereza na kuwafunga miguu yao kwenye sehemu alipowahifadhi. 25 Wakati wa usiku wa manane, Paulo na Sila wakawa wakiomba na kuimba nyimbo za kumsifu Mungu, huku wafungwa wengine wakiwasikiliza, 26 Ghafla kukatokea tetemeko kuu na misingi ya gereza ikatikiswa, milango ya gereza ikafunguka, na minyororo ya wafungwa wote ikalegezwa. 27 Mlinzi wa Gereza aliamka kutoka usingizini na akaona milango yote ya gereza imefunguliwa; hivyo akachukua upanga wake maana alitaka kujiua kwa sababu alifikiri wafungwa wote walikwishatoroka, 28 Lakini, Paulo akapiga kelele kwa sauti kuu, akisema "usijidhuru kwa sababu wote tuko mahali hapa". 29 Mlinzi wa gereza aliomba taa ziletwe na akaingia ndani ya gereza kwa haraka, akitetemeka na kuogopa, akawaangukia Paulo na Sila, 30 na kuwatoa nje ya gereza na kusema, "Waheshimiwa, nifanye nini ili nipate kuokoka?" 31 Nao wakamwambia, "Mwamini Bwana Yesu nawe utaokoka pamoja na nyumba yako." 32 Walinena neno la Bwana kwake, pamoja na watu wote wa nyumbani kwake, 33 Mlinzi wa gereza aliwachukua usiku ule na kuwaosha sehemu walizoumia, yeye pamoja na watu wa nyumbani mwake wakabatizwa mara. 34 Akawaleta Paulo na Sila nyumbani kwake na kuwatengea chakula. Naye akawa na furaha kuu pamoja na watu wa nyumbani mwake kwa sababu walimwamini Mungu. 35 Ilipokuwa mchana, mahakimu walituma ujumbe kwa yule mlinzi wa gereza wakisema, "Waruhusu wale watu waende", 36 Mlinzi wa gereza akamjulisha Paulo juu ya maneno hayo ya kuwa, "Mahakimu walituma ujumbe niruhusu mwondoke: hivyo tokeni nje na mwende kwa amani." 37 Lakini Paulo akawaambia, "Walitupiga hadharani, watu ambao ni Warumi bila kutuhukumu na waliamua kututupa gerezani; halafu sasa wanataka kututoa kwa siri? Hapana, haitawezekana, wao wenyewe waje kututoa mahali hapa". 38 Walinzi wakawajulisha mahakimu juu ya maneno hayo, mahakimu wakaogopa sana pale walipojua kuwa Paulo na Sila ni Warumi. 39 Mahakimu wakaja na kuwasihi watoke, na walipowatoa nje ya gereza, waliwaomba Paulo na Sila watoke nje ya mji wao. 40 Kwa hiyo Paulo na Sila wakatoka nje ya gereza wakaja nyumbani kwa Lidia. Paulo na Sila walipowaona ndugu, waliwatia moyo na kisha kuondoka katika mji huo.
Paulo alimtahiri Timotheo kwa vile walikuwa wanahubiri ujumbe wa Yesu kwa Wayahudi na watu wa Mataifa. Paulo alitaka Wayahudi wajue kwamba aliheshimu sheria za Musa ingawa viongozi wa kanisa Yerusalemu walikuwa wameamua kwamba Wakristo hawana haja ya tohara.
Watu wengi hupenda sana kujua yanayojiri siku za usoni, lakini sheria za Musa zilisema kwamba ni dhambi kuongea na roho za wafu ili kujua yajayo. Inaonekana huyu mwanamke alijua kutabiri yajayo vyema.Alikuwa mtumwa aliyetumiwa na wenyeji wake kujitajirisha kutokana na kazi hii yake. Paulo alitaka aache kutenda dhambi, na kwa hivyo aliamuru huyo pepo amtoke. Luka hatuelezi iwapo alianza kumfuata Yesu ama hata jambo lingine kumhusu.
Hii sehemu ya hadithi ni kuhusu safari ya Paulo na Sila. Hapa Timotheo alitambuisha kwenye hadithi na kujiunga na Paulo na Sila. Mstari wa 1 na 2 hutoa taarifa za msingi kuhusu Timotheo
Neno "Tazama" inatutaadharisha juu ya mtu mpya katika simulizi. Lugha yako huenda ikawa na njia ya kufanya hivyo.
"Kijana aliyezaliwa na mama wa Kiyahudi ambaye anamwamini Kristo.
"Timotheo alikuwa na tabia nzuri" au "Walioamini walisema mambo mazuri juu ya Timotheo"
"Paulo alimtaka Timotheo asafiri naye hivyo Paulo akamchukua" maneno mengine kama (yeye, yake) yanamrejea Timotheo.
Kama Mgiriki, baba yake Timotheo hangeweza binafsi kumtahiri Timotheo hivyo Paul alimtahiri. Tohara mara nyingi ilifanywa na Mwalimu wa Kiyahudi, kama vile Paulo.
"Walipo kuwa" hii inamaanisha Paulo, Sila na Timotheo.
'Kwa washiriki wa kanisa kutii' au 'kwa waumini kutii'
"ambayo imeandikwa na mitume na wazee huko Yerusalemu"
"Paulo , Sila na Timotheo waliimarisha makanisa"
Haya ni majimbo huko Asia
"Roho Mtakatifu aliwakataza wao" au " Roho Mtakaifu hakuwaruhusu"
Haya ni majimbo mengine mawili zaidi huko Asia
"Roho Mtakatifu"
Maono ni tofauti na ndoto.
"akimuomba Paulo" au "akimsihi Paulo"
"Unisaidie na watu wengine wa Mekedonia"
Neno "tukajiandaa" inajumuisha Paulo pamoja na wale waliokuwa naye, hii ni pamoja na Luka ambaye ndiye muandishi wa kitabu cha Matendo ya Mitume.
Alituita, hii inajumuisha Paulo pamoja na wale waliokuwa naye, hii ni pamoja na Luka ambaye ndiye muandishi wa kitabu cha Matendo ya Mitume.
"kuhubiri injili kwa watu wa Makedonia"
Msatri wa 13, ni mwanzo wa hadithi ya Lidia. Hii ni hadithi fupi iliyotokea wakati wa kusafiri kwa Paulo
"tukaenda" hii inajumuisha Paulo pamoja na wale waliokuwa naye, hii ni pamoja na Luka ambaye ndiye muandishi wa kitabu cha Matendo ya Mitume.
Hizi ni miji ya mwambao karibu na Philipi.
ni sehemu ambayo Warumi waliteka na kuishi kwa muda huo, hasa maaskari
Hii ndyo mwishowa hadithi ya Lidia
"Kulikuwa na Mwanamke aitwaye Lidia"
"Mfanya biashara aliyeuza nguo za zambarau"
Mwenye kumuabudu Mungu ni Mataifa ambaye hutoa sifa kwa Mungu na kumfuata Yeye, lakini hafuati sheria zote za Kiyahudi.
"Yeye alitusikiliza"
"Mambo ambayo paulo aliyasema "
"walipo mbatiza Lidia na watu wa nyumbani mwake"
Hii ni hadithi nyingi inayotokea wakati wa kusafiri kwa Paulo. Hii ni tukio la kwanza katika hadithi, ni habari ya mbashiri mdogo.
"kulikuwa na mwanamke mdogo"
roho mbaya huongea naye kuhusu habari ya maisha ya watu ya baadaye.
hii ni habari ya nyuma kuhusu mchana huyo
"alisumbuliwa na yeye" au " alijisikia vibaya kwa kile kitu anachokifanya"
"Paulo aligeuka nyuma" au " alikwenda kumkabili yule msichana nyuma yake"
"na pepo akatoka mara moja"
wale wanao mmiliki yule msichana mtumwa
Hii inamaanisha ule uwezo wa kubashiri aliokuwa nao yule msichana na watu kumlipa kwa kuwabashiria.
Mabwana waliwaburuza "Paulo na Sila" lakini siyo kundi lote akiwemo Luka na Timotheo.
'Katika uwepo wa mamlaka' au 'kuhukumiwa na mamlaka
"Baada ya mabwana kuwaleta Paulo na Sila mbele ya mahakimu, mabwana wale wakasema"
"Paulo na Sila wanafundisha"
mabwana wanajumuisha mambo ya kitawala katika madai yao kwani wao pia walikuwa raia wa Kirumi
Mahakimu walirarua nguo za Paulo na Sila na kuwavulia"
"Kumuamuru maaskari kumchapa Paulo na Sila kwa viboko"
"mahakimu waliwaweka Paulo na Sila" au " mahakimu waliwaamuru maasakari kumuweka Paulo na Sila"
Askari wa gereza ni mtu anayehusika na wafu wote waliowekwa jela au gerezani. "kumuambi mlinzi wa gereza ahakikishe kuwa hawatoki nje"
"kuwafungia imara katika sehemu"
ni kipande cha mti iliyo na matobo kwa ajili ya kuwekea miguu ya mtu ili imzuiye mtu huyo asiweze kwenda.
Hii ni tukio lingine katika hadithi; inahusu Paulo na Sila gerezani na mlinzi wa gereza
"Neno wao" linamaanisha Paulo na Sila, ambao walikuwa wakiomba na kuimba nyimbo za kumsifu Mungu.
"ambayo ilitikisa misingi ya gereza"
"minyororo yao waote ilifunguka"
Mlinzi wa gereza alichagua kujiuwa kuliko kukabiliana na aina ya mateso yatakayo mpata kwa kuwaruhusu wafungwa kutoroka.
Neno "wote" linajumuisha Paulo, Sila na wafungwa wengine wote.
"aliingi kwa haraka ndani ya gereza"
"Mlinzi wa gereza alijinyenyekesha kwa kuinama mbele ya Paulo na Sila.
"kuwaongoza nje ya gereza"
wakanena, hapa inamaanisha Paulo na Sila..
Mlinzi wa gereza aliwaleta Paulo na Sila nyumbani kwake"
"Paulo na Sila walimbatiza Mlinzi wa gereza pamoja na watu wote wa nyumbani kwake"
Maneno haya yanamaanisha Mlinzi wa gereza
"kwasababu watu wote wa nyumbani kwake waliamini"
Hii ni tukio la mwisho kwenye hadithi. Inahusu Paulo na Sila kuwachiwa kutoka gerezani
Hii ni mwanzo wa habari nyingine
"kutuma ujumbe" au Kutuma amri"
"waruhusu hao wanaume" au "waruhusu hao wanaume waende"
"tokeni nje ya gereza"
"kusema na walinzi"
"mahakimu walifanya hatharani"
Neno "walitupiga", lina maanisha Paulo na Sila
Paulo hapa anawajibu mahakimu au wakuu wa mji, japo anaongea na mlinzi wa gereza. " Haitawezekana"
Hii ina maana ya wananchi wa kisheria ya Dola. Uraia zunatoa uhuru wa kutoteswa na haki katika kesii. Viongozi wa mji walikuwa na hofu kuwa inaweza kufahamu jinsi viongozi wa jiji walivyo wanyanyasa Paulo na Sila.
"watawala wa mji waje"
"mahakimu walikuja na kumsihi Paulo na Sila"
"baada ya mahakimu kuwaondoa Paulo na Sila"
"Hii ni mwisho wa hadithi ya Paulo na Sila kuwa gerezani"
Fungu hili linazungumzia habari a Paulo na Sila pamoja na Waumini wa mji wa Philipi.
"nyumbani kwa Lidia"
Neno "ndugu" linamaanisha waumini wa jinsi zote. Waliwaona waumini.
1 Na walipopita katika miji ya Amfipoli na Apolonia, walikuja mpaka mji wa Thesalonike ambao kulikuwa na sinagogi la Wayahudi. 2 Kama ilivyo kawaida ya Paulo, alienda kwao, na kwa muda wa siku tatu za Sabato alijadiliana nao juu ya maandiko. 3 Alikuwa akiwafungulia maandiko na kuwaeleza kuwa, ilimpasa Kristo ateseke na kisha kufufuka tena kutoka kwa wafu. Aliwaambia, "Huyu Yesu ninayewaambia habari zake ndiye Kristo" 4 Baadhi ya Wayahudi walishawishika na kuungana na Paulo na Sila, pamoja na Wagiriki wachamungu, akinamama wengi waongofu na kundi kubwa la watu. 5 Lakini baadhi ya Wayahudi wasioamini, waliojawa na wivu, walienda sokoni na kuwachukuwa baadhi ya watu waovu, wakakusanya umati wa watu pamoja, na kusababisha ghasia mjini, kisha wakaivamia nyumba ya Jason, wakitaka kuwakamata Paulo na Sila ilikuwaleta mbele za watu. 6 Lakini walipowakosa, walimkamata Yasoni na baadhi ya ndugu wengine na kuwapeleka mbele ya maofisa wa mji, wakipiga kelele, " Hawa wanaume walioupindua ulimwengu wamefika mpaka huku pia, 7 Wanaume hawa waliokaribishwa na Yasoni wanaihalifu sheria ya Kaisari, wanasema kuna mfalme mwingine anayeitwa Yesu" 8 Umati na maofisa wa mji waliposikia mambo hayo, waliingiwa na wasiwasi. 9 Baada ya kuwa wamekwisha kuchukua fedha ya thamani ya ulinzi kutoka kwa Yason na wengine, waliwaachia waende. 10 Usiku ule ndugu walimtuma Paulo na Sila Beroya. Na walipofika kule walikwenda katika sinagogi la Wayahudi. 11 Watu wale walikuwa wenye werevu mkubwa kuliko wale watu wa Thesalonike, kwa sababu walikuwa na utayari wa kulipokea neno kwa akili zao, na kuchunguza maandiko kila siku ili kuona kama maneno yaliyonenwa ndivyo yalivyo. 12 Kwa hiyo wengi wao waliamini, wakiwemo wanawake wenye ushawishi mkubwa wa Kigiriki na wanaume wengi. 13 Lakini Wayahudi wa Thesalonike walipogundua kwamba Paulo anatangaza neno la Mungu huko Beroya, walienda huko na kuchochea na kisha kuanzisha ghasia kwa watu. 14 Kwa haraka, ndugu wakampeleka Paulo kwa njia ya ziwa, lakini Sila na Timotheo wakabaki pale. 15 Wale ndugu waliompeleka Paulo walienda naye hadi Athene, walipomwacha Paulo huko, walipokea maagizo kutoka kwake kuwa, Sila na Timotheo waje kwake kwa haraka iwezeanavyo. 16 Na wakati akiwasubiri huko Athene, roho yake ilikasirishwa ndani yake kwa jinsi alivyouona mji ulivyojaa sanamu nyingi. 17 Hivyo akajadiliana katika sinagogi na wayahudi wale waliomcha Mungu na kwa wale wote aliokutana nao kila siku sokoni. 18 Lakini baathi ya Wanafalsafa wa Waepikureo na Wastoiko wakamkabili. Na wengine wakasema, " Ni nini anachokisema huyu mwongeaji mchanga? Wengine wakasema, "inaonekana anahubiri habari ya mungu mgeni," kwasababu anahubiri habari ya Yesu na ufufuo. 19 Wakamchukua Paulo na kumleta Areopago, wakisema, "Twaweza kujua haya mafundisho mapya unayoyaongea? 20 Kwasababu unaleta mambo mapya katika masikio yetu. Kwahivyo tunataka kujua haya mambo yana maana gani?" 21 (Na watu wote wa Athene pamoja na wageni waliopo kwao, hutumia muda wao aidha katika kuongea na kusikiliza juu ya jambo jipya.) 22 Kwa hiyo Paulo akasimama katikati ya watu wa Areopago na kusema, "Enyi watu wa Athene, naona kuwa ninyi ni watu wa dini kwa kila namna, 23 Kwani katika kupita kwangu na kuangalia vitu vyenu vya kuabudu, nimeona maneno yalioandikwa kwenye moja ya madhabahu yenu, ikisema "KWA MUNGU ASIYEJULIKANA". Hivyo basi, huyo mnayemwabudu pasipokujua, ndiye ninayewajulisha ninyi. 24 Mungu aliyeumba dunia na kila kitu kilichoko ndani, kwa kuwa ni Bwana wa mbingu na nchi, hawezi kukaa katika mahekalu yaliyotengenezwa na mikono. 25 Na pia hatumikiwi na mikono ya wanadamu kana kwamba anahitaji kitu kwao, kwani yeye mwenyewe huwapa watu uzima na pumzi na vitu vingine vyote. 26 Kupitia mtu mmoja, alifanya mataifa yote ya watu waishio juu ya uso wa dunia, na akawawekea nyakati na mipaka katika maeneo wanaoishi. 27 Kwa hiyo, wanatakiwa kumtafuta Mungu, na yamkini wamfikie na kumpata, na kwa uhakika hayupo mbali na kila mmoja wetu. 28 Kwake tunaishi, tunatembea na kuwa na uzima wetu, kama vile mtunzi wenu mmoja wa shairi aliposema 'tu wazaliwa wake.' 29 Kwa hiyo, ikiwa sisi ni wazaliwa wa Mungu, hatupaswi kufikiri kuwa uungu ni kama dhahabu, au shaba, au mawe, sanamu iliyochongwa kwa ustadi na mawazo ya watu. 30 Kwa hiyo, Mungu alinyamazia nyakati zile za ujinga, lakini sasa anaamuru watu wote kila mahali wapate kutubu. 31 Hii ni kwa sababu ameweka siku atakayo ihukumu dunia kwa haki kwa mtu ambaye alimchagua. Mungu alitoa uhakika wa mtu huyu kwa kila mtu pale alipomfufua katoka kwa wafu. 32 Na watu wa Athene waliposikia habari ya kufufuliwa kwa wafu, baadhi yao wakamdhihaki Paulo, ila wengine wakasema "Tutakusikiliza tena kwa habari ya jambo hili" 33 Baada ya hapo, Paulo akawaacha. 34 Lakini baadhi ya watu waliungana naye wakaamini, akiwemo Dionisio Mwareopago, na Mwanamke anaitwa Damari na wengine pamoja nao.
Wayahudi walimtarajia Kristo ama Maasiya awe mfalme mwenye nguvu kwa vile Agano la Kale limesema hivyo mara nyingi. Agano hilo pia lizungumzia wakati ambapo Maasiya angeteseka na hayo ndio Paulo alikuwa akiwaambia Wayahudi.
Paulo alisema kwamba watu wa Athene walikuwa watu wa "Kidini" lakini hawakumuabudu Yahweh. Waliiabudu miungu wengi wasio kweli. Hapo awali waliwaleta watu wengi chini ya utawala wao na baadaye wakaanza kuabudu miungu zao.
Katika sura hii Luka anafafanua kwa mara ya kwanza jinsi Paulo alivyo waambia ujumbe wa Kristo kwa wale hawakufahamu lololete kuhusiana na agano la kale.
Habari kuhusu Paulo na Sila inaendelea pamoja na Timotheo katika safari yao ya kimisionari. Walifika Thesalonike na Luka hakuwa pamoja nao.
Ni habari kuhusu Paulo na Sila pamoja na Wayahudi katika Sinagogi huko Thesolanike
Ni neno linalogawanya habari iliyokuwa ikiendelea kwa kutaja jambo jingine. Luka anaanza kuelezea sehemu mpya ya tukio.
"Kusafiri kupitia"
Hii ni miji ya mwambao huko Makedonia
Neno linaloonyesha kuwa walisafiri hadi kufika mjini.
" kama ilivyokuwa kawaida yake" au "Kama alivyofanya siku zote". Mara kwa mara Paulo alikuwa na ya kuingia kwenye Sinagogi siku ya sabato mahali wayahudi walikusanyuka.
"katika kila siku ya sabato kwa majuma matatu".
"alijadiliana na Wayahudi wa Sinagogi" au walijadili na Wayahudi wa Sinagogi"
"aliwapa sababu" au "kuhojiana pamoja nao" au "kuzungumza pamoja nao".
Maana inawezekana ni 1) "Paulo alikuwa akieleza maandiko kwa usahihi ili watu waweze kuwa na uwezo wa kuelewa ni nini alikuwa akifundisha" au 2) "Paulo alikuwa akifungua kitabu au kitabu cha maandiko."
"ilikuwa ni sehemu ya mipango ya Mungu"
"kurudi tena katika uhai"
"kutoka miongoni mwa wafu" anaelezea juu ya roho za watu ambao wamekwisha kufa. Kurudi kutoka miongoni mwao kunamaanisha kurudi katika uzima tena.
"Wayahudi walishawishika " au "Wayahudi walikubali"
"na kuwa na ushirika na Paulo"
wale wenye kumcha Mungu lakini hawajabadilishwa kuingia dini ya kiyahudi kwa njia ya kutahiriwa.
"ni umati mkubwa wa watu"
Fungu hili linajadili juu ya Wayahudi wasioamini na wanaume wengine waovu kutoka sokoni.
"Ni hali ya wivu inayoleta msukumo ndani ya mtu" "Kuwa na wivu sana" au "Kuwa na hasira sana"
Inaelezwa kuwa hawa Wayahudi walikuwa na wivu kwasababu baadhi ya Wayahudi wa Kiyunani wakiuamini ujumbe wa Paulo.
"baadhi ya wanaume waovu"
"Kutoka eneo la wazi la mkusanyiko" Ni eneo la wazi la kufanyia biashara ya kuuza na kununua bidhaa, Ng'ombe au eneo la kutolea huduma.
Mji kusimamisha kazi zake kutokana na ghasia.
"Kuingia kwa vurugu na kuivamia nyumba kwa nguvu" . Hii inawezekana walikuwa wakiirushia mawe nyumba na kutaka kuvunya mlango wa nyumba.
Hili ni jina la mtu.
"Kundi la watu Serikalini au kundi la watu raia wa nchi walikusanyika ili kufanya maamuzi"
"mbele ya Viongozi"
Viongozi wa Kiyahudi waliongea wakimaanisha Paulo na Sila kwa kusema "Hawa wanaume"
Hiki Kifungu inawakilisha namna nyingin ya Kusema Paulo na Sila wanasabisha ghasia. Viongozi wa Kiyahudi wanatia chumvi juu ya ushawishi walionao Paulo na Sila katika mafundisho yao.
Hii kifungu inaashiria kuwa Yasoni alikubaliana na mitume waliokuwa wakieneza ujumbe wa machafuko
Fungu hili linazungumzia wale waheshimiwa wa mji huo.
"kufadhaika" au "kuwa na mashaka kiakili"
Fedha hii ilikuwa ahadi ya mwenendo mzuri, ambayo inaweza kurudishwa kama mambo yote yataenda vizuri, au kutumika kukarabati uharibifu uliosababishwa na mwenendo mbaya. "walipokea dhamana" au "amana" au "faini"
"waumii wengine mbali na Yasoni"
Hii ni sehemu nyingine ya habari kuhusu Paulo na Sila safarini. Kwa sasa wako Beroya"
Neno "ndugu" linamaanisha wanaume na wanawake walioamini"
Ni watu waliokuwa na utayari wa kufikiri kwa hali ya kupokea mawazo mapya zaidi ya watu wengine'.
"kusikiliza mafundisho"
"Hao Waberoya walikuwa wamejiandaa kuchunguza mafundisho ya Paulo kulingana na maandiko"
"kusoma kwa umakini na kupima uhalisia wa kifungu cha maandiko kila siku"
"Maneno aliyoyasema Paulo yalikuwa ya kweli.
Athene ni mji uliokuwa chini ya pwani kutoka Beroya ambayo ni Makedonia. Atheni ulikuwa moja ya miji muhimu zaidi katika Uyunani.
"walipoambiwa" au "walipojulishwa" au "waliposikia"
Hii inazungumzia kuhusu watu walioshawishwa kama mtu anayechanganya kemikali ili kutoa mlipuko. Waliwaendea na kuwashawishi kutenda isivyo.
"kusababisha hofu na wasiwasi miongoni mwa watu"
Neno "ndugu" linamaanisha wanaume na wanawake walioamini"
"Walioambatana na Paulo" au "waliokwenda pamoja na Paulo"
"Aliwaambia wawaelekeze Silas na Timotheo"
Hii ni sehemu nyingine ya hadithi ya Paulo na Sila wakiwa safarini. Paulo kwa sasa yuko Athene akiwangojea Silas na Timotheo kuungana naye.
"alisumbuliwa" au "alifadhaika" au "akawa na huzuni"
Hili neno linaashiria kuwa kulikuwa na majibizano zaidi kutoka kwa wasikilizaji kuliko katika kuhubiri. "alijadiliana"
Hii ni sehemu ambayo watu huuza na kununua vitu, ngombe, au huduma hutolewa. " sehemu ya umma"
Inamaanisha Watu wa mataifa waliokuwa wakimsifu Mungu na kumfuata ingawa hawakuwa wakifuata taratibu za ibada ya Kiyahudi.
Watu hawa waliamini mambo yote yalifanywa kwa bahati na kwamba miungu walikuwa na shughli zao na walifurahi kutobuguziwa katika kuiongoza ulimwengu. Walikataa ufufuo na walitaka maisha rahisi ya raha pekee.
Watu hawa waliamini uhuru unatokana na kujiwekea mwenyewe hatima yako. Walikataa Mungu anayependa binafsi na ufufuo.
"walimkabii Paulo"
"na baadhi ya wanafilosofia wakasema"
'Babbler' ilitumika kwa kutaja ndege kuokota mbegu kama chakula. Ilihusu ubaya wa wasengenyaji. Wanafalsafa walisema Paulo alikuwa na baadhi ya habari ambazo hazikuwa na thamani ya kusikiliza
"Wanafilosopha wengine wakasema"
"Inaonekana ni mtu ayetangaza " au "anaonekana yuko katika umisheni wa kusambaza habari'
Wanafalsafa wa Waepikureo na Wastoike walimchukua Paulo"
kilima katika Athene juu ambayo mahakama kuu ya Waethene ambapo huenda walikutana.
"Twaweza" hapa inamaanisha mafilosopha peke yao. "'Tunataka kufanya uamuzi juu ya mambo haya unayodai "
"Wananchi wa Athene" ni watu kutoka Athene, mji karibu na pwani katika Makedonia (sasa ni Ugiriki)
"Mtu mgeni" au "mtu mpya katika jamii ya Athene"
"walitumia muda wao "au "hutumia muda wao"
"Kujadili mawazo mapya ya falsafa" au "kuzungumza juu jambo jipya kwao'
Paulo alianza mahubiri yake kwa wanafilosofia wa Areopago.
Paulo alikuwa akirejea jinsi Waathene wanavyoonyesha hadharani kuheshimu miungu kwa sala, kujenga madhabahu na kutoa dhabihu
"kwasababu nilipotembea na kupita"
Inaweza ikawa na maana zifuatazo 1) "mungu fulani asiyejulikana" au 2)"kwa mungu yeyote tusiyemjua
Kwa hali ya ujumla "dunia" inamaanisha mbingu na ardhi na kila kitu kilichoko ndani yake.
"Yeye" inarejea yule Mungu asiyefahamika ambaye Paulo anawaelezea kuwa ni Bwana Mungu. "kwasababu ni Mungu"
"kupitia matendo ya watu"
"Kutumikiwa" ni ile hali ambayo Daktari anapomhudumia mgonjwa ili apone. "kujali kwa"
"kwa mikono ya wanadamu"
"kwasababu Yeye mwenyewe"
Inaweza kuwa na maana zifuatazo .1) "ni Adamu ambaye Mungu alimuumba" au 2) "Inaweza ikajumuisha Adamu na Hawa ambao Mungu aliwaumba"
"Mungu,muumbaji, alifanya mataifa yote"
Hapa inamanisha watu wote waishio juu ya uso wa dunia.
neno hili ni alama ya kauli kwamba alisema kwasababu ya kile ambacho alisema hapo awali.
"Kumtafuta Mungu"
"kuona haja ya Yeye"
Paulo anasema kinyume ya kile anachozungumza ili kusisitiza jambo. " Yeye yuko karibu sana"
Paulo anajiweka mwenyewe, wasikilizaji wake na kila taifa alipotumia neno "kila mmoja wetu"
"Kwa Mungu"
Paulo anajumuisha wasikilizaji wake na yeye mwenyewe.
Hapa 'tu wazaliwa wake' ni wazaliwa ambao wanaweza kuwa si watoto wa sasa. Wao kushiriki baadhi ya sifa pamoja na babu zao. 'Wake' ni kiwakilishi kisichojulikana katika nukuu hii.
Hapa "uungu" inarejea hali ya Mungu au sifa zake.
Paulo alimaliza mazungumzo yake na wanafilosofia wa Areopago, aliyokuwa ameianza.
neno hili ni alama ya kauli kwamba alisema kwasababu ya kile ambacho alisema hapo awali
Inaweza kuwa na maana zifuatazo 1) "kwamba hawajui kuhusu kitu chochote" au 2) " kumkataa kwa makusudi"
hapa, neno "walimwengu" inarejea watu waishio duniani.
"kwa mtu ambaye Mungu alimchagua"
"Mungu alionyesha uchaguzi Wake kwa mtu huyu"
Hii ni sehemu ya mwisho wa hadithi kuhusu Paulo akiwa huko Athene
Wale watu waliokuwepo pale Areopago wakimsikiliza Paulo
Wale hawakuamini kuwa inawezekana kwa mtu yeyote kufa na kurudi tena kwenye maisha. "Baadhi walimdharau" au "baadhi walimcheka Paulo"
"sisi" inarejea watu wa Athene ambao walitaka kumsikiliza Paulo. Waliongea moja kwa moja kwa Paulo lakini si pamoja Paul katika kundi lao."
Dionysius ni jina la mtu. Areopago ina maana kwamba Dionysius alikuwa mmoja wa majaji katika Areopago.
1 Baada ya mambo hayo, Paulo aliondoka Athene kwenda Korintho. 2 Huko akampata Myahudi aitwaye Akwila mtu wa kabila la Ponto, yeye na mke wake aitwaye Prisila walikuja kutoka huko Italia, kwa sababu Klaudia aliamuru Wayahudi wote waondoke Roma; Paulo akaja kwao; 3 Paulo akaishi na kufanya kazi nao kwani yeye anafanya kazi inayofanana na yao. Wao walikuwa ni watengeneza mahema. 4 Paulo akajadiliana nao katika sinagogi kila siku ya Sabato. Aliwashawishi Wayahudi pamoja na Wagiriki. 5 Lakini Sila na Timotheo walipokuja kutoka Makedonia, Paulo alisukumwa na Roho kuwashuhudia Wayahudi kuwa Yesu ndiye Kristo. 6 Wakati Wayahudi walipompinga na kumdhihaki, hivyo Paulo akakung'uta vazi lake mbele yao, na kuwaambia, "Damu yenu na iwe juu ya vichwa vyenu wenyewe; Mimi sina hatia. Kutoka sasa na kuendelea, nawaendea Mataifa". 7 Hivyo akaondoka kutoka pale akaenda kwenye nyumba ya Tito Yusto, Mtu anayemwabudu Mungu. Nyumba yake iko karibu na sinagogi. 8 Krispo, kiongozi wa sinagogi pamoja na watu wa nyumbani mwake wakamwamini Bwana. Watu wengi wa Korintho waliomsikia Paulo akiongea waliamini na kubatizwa. 9 Bwana akamwambia Paulo usiku kwa njia ya maono, "Usiogope, lakini ongea na usinyamaze. 10 Kwani Mimi niko pamoja nawe, na hakuna atakayejaribu kukudhuru, maana nina watu wengi katika mji huu". 11 Paulo akakaa huko kwa muda wa mwaka mmoja na miezi sita akifundisha neno la Mungu miongoni mwao. 12 Lakini Galio alipofanywa mtawala wa Akaya, Wayahudi walisimama pamoja kinyume na Paulo na kumpeleka mbele ya kiti cha hukumu, 13 wakisema, "Mtu huyu huwashawishi watu wamwabudu Mungu kinyume cha sheria". 14 Wakati Paulo alipokuwa akitaka kusema, Galio akawaambia Wayahudi, "Ninyi Wayahudi, kama ingelikuwa ni kosa au uhalifu, ingekuwa halali kuwashughulikia. 15 Lakini kwa sababu ni maswali, yanayohusu maneno na majina, na sheria zenu, basi hukumuni ninyi wenyewe. Mimi sitamani kuwa hakimu kwa habari ya mambo hayo." 16 Galio akawaamuru waondoke mbele ya kiti cha hukumu, 17 Hivyo, wakamkamata Sosthene, kiongozi wa sinagogi, wakampiga mbele ya kiti cha hukumu. Lakini Galio hakujali walichokifanya. 18 Paulo, baada ya kukaa pale kwa muda mrefu, aliwaacha ndugu na kwenda kwa meli Siria pamoja na Prisila na Akwila. Kabla ya kuondoka bandarini, alinyoa nywele zake kwani alikuwa ameapa kuwa Mnadhiri. 19 Walipofika Efeso, Paulo alimwacha Prisila na Akwila pale, lakini yeye mwenyewe akaingia kwenye sinagogi na kujadiliana na Wayahudi. 20 Walipomwambia Paulo akae nao kwa muda mrefu, yeye alikataa. 21 Lakini akaondoka kwao, akawaambia, "Nitarudi tena kwenu, ikiwa ni mapenzi ya Mungu". Baada ya hapo, akaondoka kwa meli kutoka Efeso. 22 Paulo alipotua Kaisaria, alipanda kwenda kusalimia Kanisa la Yerusalemu, kisha akashuka chini kwa kanisa la Antiokia. 23 Baada ya kukaa kwa muda pale, Paulo aliondoka kupitia maeneo ya Galatia na Frigia na kuwatia moyo wanafunzi wote. 24 Myahudi mmoja aitwaye Apolo, aliyezaliwa huko Alexandria, alikuja Efeso. Alikuwa na ufasaha katika kuongea na hodari katika Maandiko. 25 Apollo alikuwa ameelekezwa katika mafundisho ya Bwana. Kwa jinsi alivyokuwa na bidii katika roho, aliongea na kufundisha kwa usahihi mambo yanayomuhusu Yesu, ila alijua tu ubatizo wa Yohana. 26 Apolo akaanza kuzungumza kwa ujasiri katika hekalu. Lakini Prisila na Akwila walipomsikia, walifanya urafiki naye na wakamwelezea juu ya njia za Mungu kwa usahihi. 27 Alipotamani kuondoka kwenda Akaya, ndugu walimtia moyo na kuwaandikia barua wanafunzi walioko Akaya ili wapate kumpokea. Alipowasili, kwa neema aliwasaidia sana wale waliomini. 28 Kwa nguvu zake na maarifa, Apolo aliwazidi Wayahudi hadharani akionesha kupitia maandiko ya kuwa Yesu ndiye Kristo.
Wayahudi wengine walioishi mbali kutoka Yerusalemu na Judea walisikia kumhusu Yohane Mbatizaji na wakafuata mafundisho yake. Walikuwa bado kusikia habari za Yesu. Mmoja wa hao aliitwa Apollo. Alimfuata Yohane Mbatizaji lakini hakufahamu kwamba Maasiya alikuwa aliisha kuja. Yohane aliwabatiza watu kuonyesha ya kwamba walitubu dhambi zao na lakini ubatizo huu ulikuwa tofauti na ubatizo wa Kikristo. and and )
Hii ni sehemu nyingine ya hadithi ya safari ya Paulo. Kwa sasa yuko Corintho. Akwila na Priskila wanatambulishwa kwenye hadithi katika mstari 2 na 3 inatoa habari ya nyuma kuhusu wao.
"baada ya matukio hayo kufanyika huko Athene"
Inaweza kuwa na maana kwamba: 1) "Paulo alitokea kumpata kwa bahati" au 2) "Paulo alimpata baada ya kuwatafuta kwa nia.'
Hapa anamtaja mtu yule aliyemwona huko naye ni Akwira.
Ponto ilikuwa mkoa katika pwani ya kusini ya Bahari ya Nyeusi.
"Hii huenda ni muda fulani kwa miaka ya nyuma"
Jina hili ni la nchi. Roma ni mji mkuu wa Italia.
Klaudia alikuwa ndiye Kaisari wa Kiroma kwa sasa.
Alikuwa akifanya aina ya kazi waliyoifaya na wao.
Sila na Timotheo walioungana na Paulo
Hapa "kujadiliana" inamaanisha Paulo alikuwa na maongezi ya pande mbili". "kwa hiyo walijadiliana"
"aliendelea kujaribu kuwashawishi"
Paulo alizidi kusukumwa na Roho.
Hii ni hatua ya mfano zinaonyesha kwamba Paulo alikata mahusiano na Wayahudi wasioamini na kuwaacha kwa hukumu ya Mungu.
Hapa "damu" inalinganishwa na adhabu ya dhambi. Paulo anawaambia Wayahudi hao kuwa watawajibika kwa ajili ya hukumu watakayokabiliana nao kwa sababu ya ukaidi wa kukataa kutubu. "Ninyi peke yenu mtabeba jukumu la adhabu yenu kwa ajili ya dhambi zenu".
maelezo ya fungu hili yanazungumzia habari za Tito Yusta na Krispas
Ni majina ya wanaume
Ni mwabudu Mungu wa kimataifa ambaye alimtukuza Mungu na kumfuata, lakini si kwa njia ya kushika sheria za Kiyahudi.
ni mtu wa kawaida ambaye hufadhili na kuhudumia sinagogi, na si lazima awe mwalimu.
"watu walioishi na yeye ikiwa ni pamoja na ndugu na jamaa zake"
"Watu wengi wa Korintho ambao siyo Wayahudi" walibatizwa
Bwana anatoa amri moja katika njia mbili tofauti -"usiwe na hofu" na "Sema na wala usinyamaze"'-kufanya maneno yake kuwa na nguvu. "N lazima kuacha kuwa na hofu, na badala yake endelea kusema na usikae kimya.'
Mungu anamuamuru Paulo kwa nguvu aongee. " Hakika ni lazima uongee"
"usinyamaze kuongelea kuhusu injili"
"Mimi" inamaanisha Bwana, ambaye anaongea na Paulo.
"nawe" inamaanisha Paulo , ambaye Bwana anaongea naye kwa njia ya maono.
"Kuna watu wengi katika mji huu walioweka imani yao kwangu"
Hii ni kauli ya kumalizia kwa sehemu hii ya hadithi.
Hili ni tukio jipya katika hadithi. Paulo aliletwa kwenye kiti cha hukumu mbele ya Galio.
Akaya ilikuwa jimbo la Roma ambao Korintho ilikuwa sehemu yake ambayo sasa inafahamika kama kusini mwa Ugiriki.
Wayahudi walimshika Paulo kwa nguvu na kumleta Paulo mbele ya mahakama. "walimpeleka ili akahukumiwe na mtawala"
Galio alikuwa gavana wa Kirumi wa Mkoa.
Hayo yalikuwa ni sheria ya Musa na desturi nyingine za kiyahudi wakati wa Paulo
Mimi nakataa kufanya hukumu kuhusiana na mambo hayo"
Fungu linaelezea watu wamataifa mbele ya baraza. Waliitikia kinyume cha wayahudi waliokuwa wamemleta Paulo mbele ya kiti cha hukumu.
Galio aliwaaga waondoke mbele yake na kiti chake cha hukumu.
Hali hii ya kutia chumvi ni kusisitiza hisia kali watu waliyokuwa nayo . "watu wengi walimkamata" au "wengi wao walimshika"
Inamaanisha 1)"Watu wa Mataifa walimpiga Sosthene mbele ya kiti cha hukumu kwasababu alikuwa kiongozi wa Kiyahudi. Au 2) Sosthene alikuwa Myahudi Mkristo hivyo wayahudi walipandwa na hasira juu ya imani yake na kumwadhibu mbele ya kiti cha hukumu.
Sosthene ilipigwa mwili wake ."kupigwa" au "kuumizwa".
Huu ni mwendelezo wa safari ya kimisionari ya Paulo, pamoja na Priskila na Akwila waliondoka Korintho.
Kenkrea ulikuwa ni bandari katika sehemu ya mji mkuu wa Korintho.
Neno "ndugu" linamaanisha wanaume na wanawake walioamini
Paulo alipanda kwenye meli iliyokuwa inaenda Syria . Priskila na Akwila walienda pamoja naye.
Hii ni alama ya mfano wa tendo lililodhihirisha nadhiri kamilifu.
" kujadiliana pamoja" au "kujadiliana"
Hapa wanatambulishwa Wayahudi waliokuwa wakiishi mji wa Efeso
"kuwaambia kwaherini"
Paulo anaendelea na safari yake ya kimisionari.
Frigia ulikuwa ni jimbo katika Adsia ambao kwa sasa ni Uturuki.
"alifika Kaisaria kwa njia ya Meli"
"Paulo alisafiri kwenda mji wa Yerusalemu" Kupanda kwenda juu kwa vile Yerusalimu ulikuwa nyanda za juu zaidi ya Kaisaria.
"kuwasalimia washirika wa kanisa laYerusalemu"
Alishuka kwenda Antiokia kwa vile Antiokia ulikuwa mji uliochini ya bonde zaidi ya Yerusalemu.
"Paulo alikwenda zake" au "Paulo aliondoka"
Unazungumziwa muda alioutumia kukaa nao kabla mtu hajaanza safari nyingine.
Luka anaelezea kile kilichotokea katika Mji wa Efeso wakiwa na Prisila na Akwira
Apolo anatambulishwa kwenye hadithi. Mistari ya 24 na 25 inatoa habari kumuhusu yeye.
Hapa Luka anaanza kuelezea habari ya mtu mpya.
"Mtu ambaye alizaliwa katika mji wa Alexandria". Hii inaweza kuwa ni miji ya 1) "Alexandria huko Misiri katika mwambao wa kaskasini. " au 2) Alexandra huko Asia katika mwambao wa magharibi."
"mwongeaji mzuri"
"Alikuwa anayafahamu vema maandiko. Alikuwa anauelewa mzuri wa maandiko ya Agano la Kale.
"Baadhi ya waumini walikuwa wamemfundisha Apolo namna Bwana Yesu alivyokuwa anataka watu wapate kuishi.
Neno "roho" linamtambulisha Apolo kama mtu aliyekuwa mwenye nia thabiti ya roho.
"Ubatizo ambao Yohana alifanya" Huu ni ulinganisho wa ubatizo wa Yohana ambao ulikuwa wa maji na ubatizo wa Yesu ambao ulikuwa wa Roho Mtakatifu.
Namna vile anawataka watu waishi.
"kwa undani zaidi "
Akaya lilikuwa jimbo katika sehemu ya Kusini mwa Ugiriki kwa sasa
"Kwenda kupitia katika Mkoa wa Akaya"
Neno "ndugu" hapa linamaanisha wanaume na wanawake walioamini.
"kuandka barua kwa Wakiristo walioko Akaya"
"Wale waliokuwa wameamini wokovu wa Yesu wa neema"
Appolo aliwashinda Wayahudi mbele ya watu wengine kwa hoja zake.
"Kwa nguvu ya ushindani wa hoja zake na ujuzi wake wa kuongea"
1 Ikawa kwamba Apolo alipokuwa Korintho, Paulo akapita nyanda za juu na kufika katika mji wa Efeso, na akakuta wanafunzi kadhaa huko. 2 Paulo akawaambia, "Je, mlipokea Roho Mtakatifu mlipoamini?" Wakamwambia, "Hapana, hatukuweza hata kusikia kuhusu Roho Mtakatifu." 3 Paul alisema, "Sasa ninyi mlibatizwaje?" Wakasema, "Katika ubatizo wa Yohana. 4 Basi Paulo akajibu, "Yohana alibatiza kwa ubatizo wa toba. Akawaambia wale watu kwamba wanapaswa kumwamini yule ambaye angekuja baada yake, yaani, Yesu." 5 Watu waliposikia habari hii, wakabatizwa kwa jina la Bwana Yesu. 6 Na ikawa Paulo alipoweka mikono yake juu yao, Roho Mtakatifu akaja juu yao na wakaanza kunena kwa lugha na kutabiri. 7 Jumla yao walikuwa wanaume wapatao kumi na wawili. 8 Paulo alienda katika sinagogi akanena kwa ujasiri kwa muda wa miezi mitatu. Alikuwa akiongoza majadiliano na kuwavuta watu kuhusu mambo yanayohusu ufalme wa Mungu. 9 Lakini Wayahudi wengine walikuwa wakaidi na wasiotii, walianza kusema mabaya kuhusu njia ya Kristo mbele ya umati. Basi Paulo aliachana nao na akawatenga waaminio mbali nao. Naye alianza kuongea kila siku katika ukumbi wa Tirano. 10 Hii iliendelea kwa miaka miwili, kwa hiyo wote waliokuwa wanaishi katika Asia walisikia neno la Bwana, wote Wayahudi na Wayunani. 11 Mungu alikuwa akifanya matendo makuu kwa mikono ya Paulo, 12 kwamba hata wagonjwa waliponywa, na roho chafu waliwatoka, wakati walipochukua leso na nguo zilizotoka mwilini mwa Paulo. 13 Lakini palikuwapo Wayahudi wapunga pepo wakisafiri kupitia eneo hilo, wakilitumia jina la Yesu kwa ajili ya matumizi yao wenyewe. Wakiwaambia wale walikuwa na pepo wachafu; Wakisema, "Ninawaamuru mtoke kwa jina la Yesu ambaye Paulo anamhubiri." 14 Waliofanya haya walikuwa wana saba wa kuhani Mkuu wa Kiyahudi, Skewa. 15 Roho wachafu wakawajibu, "Yesu namjua, na Paulo namjua; lakini ninyi ni nani? " 16 Yule roho mchafu ndani ya mtu akawarukia wapunga pepo na akawashinda nguvu na kuwapiga. Ndipo wakakimbia kutoka ile nyumba wakiwa uchi na kujeruhiwa. 17 Jambo hili likajulikana kwa wote, Wayahudi na Wayunani, ambao waliishi huko Efeso. Wakawa na hofu sana, na jina la Bwana likazidi kuheshimiwa. 18 Pia, wengi wa waumini walikuja na wakaungama na wakidhihirisha matendo mabaya waliyoyafanya. 19 Wengi waliokuwa wakifanya uganga wakakusanya vitabu vyao, wakavichoma mbele ya kila mtu. Wakati wao walipohesabu thamani ya vitu hivyo, ilikuwa vipande hamsini elfu vya fedha. 20 Hivyo Neno la Bwana likaenea kwa upana sana katika nguvu. 21 ya Paulo kukamilisha huduma yake kule Efeso, Roho akamwongoza kwenda Yerusalemu kupitia Makedonia na Akaya; Akasema, "Baada ya kuwako huko, yanipasa kuiona Rumi pia." 22 Paul akawatuma Makedonia wanafunzi wake wawili, Timotheo na Erasto, ambao walikuwa wamemsaidia. Lakini yeye mwenyewe akabaki Asia kwa muda. 23 Wakati huo kulitokea ghasia kubwa huko Efeso kuhusu ile Njia. 24 Sonara mmoja jina lake Demetrio, ambaye aliyetengeneza visanamu vya fedha vya mungu Diana, alileta biashara kubwa kwa mafundi. 25 Hivyo akawakusanya mafundi wa kazi hiyo na kusema, "Waheshimiwa, mnajua kwamba katika biashara hii sisi tunaingiza pesa nyingi. 26 Mnaona na kusikia kwamba, si tu hapa Efeso, bali karibia Asia yote, huyu Paulo amewashawishi na kuwageuza watu wengi. Anasema kwamba hakuna miungu ambayo imefanywa kwa mikono. 27 Na si tu iko hatari kwamba biashara yetu itakuwa haihitajiki tena, lakini pia na hekalu la mungu mke aliye mkuu Diana anaweza kuchukuliwa kuwa hana maana. Tena angeweza hata kupoteza ukuu wake, yeye ambaye Asia na dunia humwabudu." 28 Waliposikia haya, walijawa na hasira na wakapiga kelele, wakisema, "Diana wa Waefeso ni mkuu." 29 Mji wote ukajaa ghasia, na watu wakakimbia pamoja ndani ya ukumbi wa michezo. wakawakamata wasafiri wenzake na Paulo, Gayo na Aristariko, waliotoka Makedonia. 30 Paulo alitaka kuingia katika umati wa watu, lakini wanafunzi walimzuia. 31 Pia, baadhi ya maafisa wa mkoa wa Asia ambao walikuwa marafiki zake wakampelekea ujumbe kwa nguvu kumwomba asiingie katika ukumbi wa michezo. 32 Baadhi ya watu walikuwa wakisema kitu hiki na wengine jambo lile, kwa sababu umati wa watu ulikuwa umechanganyikiwa. Wengi wao hawakuweza hata kujua kwa nini walikuja pamoja. 33 Wayahudi wakamleta Iskanda nje ya umati wa watu na kumuweka juu mbele ya watu. Iskanda akatoa ishara kwa mkono wake kutoa maelezo kwa watu. 34 Lakini walipotambua kuwa yeye ni Myahudi, wote wakapiga kelele kwa sauti moja kwa muda wa saa mbili, "Diana ni mkuu wa Wafeso." 35 Baada ya karani wa mji kuunyamazisha umati, alisema, 'Enyi wanaume wa Efeso, ni nani asiyejua kwamba mji huu wa Efeso ni mtunzaji wa hekalu la Diana mkuu na ile picha ilivyoanguka kutoka mbinguni? 36 Kuona Basi kwamba mambo haya hayatawezekana, tunapaswa kuwa na utulivu na msifanye chochote kwa haraka. 37 Kwa maana mmewaita watu hawa hapa mahakamani ambao si wezi wa hekalu wala si wenye kumkufuru mungu wetu mke. 38 Kwa hiyo, kama Demetrio na mafundi waliopamoja naye wana mashtaka dhidi ya mtu yeyote, mahakama ziko wazi na maliwali wapo. Na waletwe mbele ya shauri. 39 Lakini kama wewe ukitafuta chochote kuhusu mambo mengine, yatashughurikiwa katika kikao halali. 40 Kwa kweli tuko katika hatari ya kutuhumiwa kuhusu ghasia siku hii. Hakuna sababu ya machafuko haya, na hatutakuwa na uwezo wa kuyaeleza. 41 Baada ya kusema haya, aliwatawanya makutano.
Yohane aliwabatiza watu kuwashiria kwamba walikuwa wanatubu dhambi zao. Wafuasi wa Yesu waliwabatiza watu waliotaka kumfuata Yesu.
Hekalu la Diana lilikuwa na umuhimu kubwa katika jiji la Efeso. Watu wengi walienda Efeso kuliona hili hekalu, na wakanunua sanamu za Diana, mungu we kike, wakati walipokuwa pale. Watu waliouza sanamu hizi za Diana walihofia kwamba watu wasingeamini kwamba Diana ni mungu wa ukweli, wangeacha kununua sanamu kutoka kwa wauzaji.
Paulo anasafiri kwenda Efeso
"Nyanda za juu za nchi" lilikuwa ni eneo la Asia ambalo kwa sasa ni Uturuki kaskazini ya Efeso. Paulo alilazimika kusafiri kwa nchi kavu kuzunguka pembezoni mwa bahari ili kuweza kufika Efeso ambao pia ni Uturuki ya sasa.
Huu ni mwanzo wa habari mpya.
"Kusafiri kupitia"
Hii inamaanisha kuwa na Roho Mtakatifu aliyekuja juu yao.
Sisi hatukusikia kuhusu Roho Mtakatifu
Paulo anaendeleza mjadala wake pamoja na waumini wapya huko Efeso.
"Ubatizo wa aina gani mliobatizwa?"
"Tuliupokea ubatizo kupitia mafundisho aliyokuwa akifundisha Yohana"
"Ubatizo ambao watu waliuomba wakati walipotaka kugeuka kutaka kutubu dhambi zao
Hapa neno "Yule" linamaanisha Yesu.
Hii inamaanisha angekuja baada ya Yohana Mbatizaji.
Paulo anaendelea kuishi huko Efeso
"Watu" hapa inahusu waumini wa Efeso wakizungumza na Paulo.
Wakapokea ubatizo
Hapa "Jina" linamaanisha nguvu na mamlaka ya Yesu.
Akaweka mikono yake juu ya vichwa vyao wakati akiomba'
hakuna maelezo ya ambao wanaweza kuelewa ujumbe wao
Hii ni taarifa za msingi kuhusu wanaume ambao walikuwa wamebatizwa
Paul mara kwa mara alihudhuria mikutano katika sinagogi kwa miezi mitatu na kusema nao kwa ujasiri
kujaribu kuwashawishi watu kwa ujumbe wa kweli.
Hapa neno "Ufalme" linasimamia uongozi wa Mungu kama Mfalme.
Baadhi ya Wayahudi wakaidi walikataa kukubali ujumbe
Kuongea mambo mabaya
wokovu kupitia Yesu Kristo
Katika ukumbi mkubwa mahali Tirano alipokuwa akifundishia watu.
Hili ni jina la mtu mwanaume
Inaweza kuwa na maana ya 1) 'Paul alishirikisha injili kwa watu wengi katika Asia' au 2) 'Ujumbe wa Paulo uliwafikia wote wa Asia kutoka Efeso kutoka hadi Asia yote.
Hapa "neno" linasimama kwa ujumbe. Ujumbe kuhusu Bwana Yesu.
Fungu hili linazungumzia juu ya wale waliokuwa wagonjwa.
Hapa "mikono" linasimamia maisha yote ya Paulo. Mungu alikuwa akimtumia Paulo kutenda miujiza.
Hivi vilikuwa vitambaa ambavyo Paulo alivivaa ama kuvitumia. Walipovigusa vitambaa amabvyo Paulo alivivaa wakati wa huduma.
Huu ni mwanzo wa tukio jingine lililotokea wakati Paulo akiwa Efeso. Ni kuhusu wapunga mapepo Wayahudi.
watu ambao hufukuza roho wabaya kutoka kwa watu au maeneo
Ingawa hawakuwa wakimwamini Yesu, walijaribu kutumia jina lake kama moja ya maneno yao ya muujiza
Walilitaja jina la Yesu kwa roho wachafu zilizokuwa zimewapaa watu
wale waliokuwa wakiongozwa na roho wabaya
"Yesu" lilikuwa ni jina la kawaida wakati ule, hivyo hao wapunga mapepo waliwataka wato kujua waliyekuwa wakimnena.
Hii inasimamia nguvu na mamlaka ya Yesu.
Hii ni habari inayojadili habari ya wapunga mapepo.
Hili ni jina la mtu mwanaume.
"Namjua Yesu na Paulo" au "Nimesikia kuhusu Yesu na Paulo"
roho aliuliza swali hili kuwathibitishia wapunga mapepo kuwa wao hawakuwa na mamlaka juu ya roho wachafu.
Hii inamaanisha roho mchafu alimsababisha yule mtu aliyekuwa akiongozwa naye kuwarukia hao wapunga mapepo.
Linaelezea juu ya watu waliokuwa wakitoa roho chafu kutoka kwa watu au eneo fulani.
Wapunga mapepo walikimbia na kuacha nguo zao. walikimbia uchi.
Waliliheshimu jina la Yesu ama walilifikiria jina la Bwana Yesu kuwa kuu.
Hili linasimama kwa nguvu na mamlaka ya Yesu.
Huu ni mwisho wa sehemu ya habari inayowahusu Wayahudi wapunga mapepo.
'Walikusanya vitabu vyao'. Neno "vitabu" linaelezea aina ya magombo yaliyokuwa yakitumika kuendeshea manuizio ya uchawi kutokana na mwelekezo wa maneno yaliyoandikwa humo.
mbele ya kila mtu
"thamani ya vitabu" au "thamani ya yale magombo"
50,000.00
"Kipande cha fedha" ilikuwa takriban mshahara wa siku kwa mfanyakazi wa kawaida
"Kwasababu ya matendo makuu haya, watu wengi zaidi waliusikia ujumbe kuhusu Bwana Yesu."
Paulo anazungumzia kuhusu uamuzi wake wa kwenda Yerusalemu, lakini hajaondoka Efeso bado
Paul anakamilisha kazi ambayo Mungu alikuwa amemwagiza kuifanya katika Efeso.
Inawezekana kuwa na maana ya 1) Paulo aliamua kwa msaada wa Roho Mtakatifu au 2) Paulo alikusudia kutokana na uamzi wa roho yake, ambayo inamaana alifanya uamzi wake.
Akaya ilikuwa Jimbo la Rumi mahali ambapo Korintho ilipokuwa. Ulikuwa ni mji kubwa kusini mwa Ugiriki na mji mkuu wa jimbo.
Mimi lazima pia kusafiri kwenda Rumi
Ni kufanywa wazi kwa mistari michache inayofuatia kwamba Paulo alikuwa alibakia Efeso
Luka anaelezea juu ya ghasia ambayo ilizuka wakati Paulo akiwa Efeso.
Demetrio ametambulishwa kweny habari hii. Mstari wa 24 umeelezea kumhusu Demetrio
Efeso kulikuwa na hekalu kubwa lililojengwa kwa ajili ya mungu mke Diana, Wakati mwingine imetafasiriwa kwa jina la kigiriki "Artemi". Diana alikuwa miungu ya uongo ya kurutubisha uzazi.
"Watu walikuwa wamechanganyikiwa kabisa"
Hili lilikuwa ni neno lililotumika kutaja Ukristo.
Matumizi ya neno "fulani" linamwelezea mtu mpya katika habari.
Mtu mjuzi anayefanya kazi ya kufua fedha kufanya visanamu na vito vya thamani.
Hili ni jina la mtu mwanaume. Demetrio alikuwa mfua dhahabu katika Efeso aliyekuwa kinyume na Paulo na kanisa la mtaa hapo Efeso.
"aAlitengeneza pesa nyingi kutoka kwa watu waliotengeneza visanamu.
Demetrio anaendelea kuzungumza na mafundi
"Mumekuja kwa kujua na kuelewa kwamba"
Paulo anawazuia watu kuacha kuabudu miungu. Paulo anawashawishi watu kufuata mwelekeo mwingine.
Neno hapa "Mikono" linaelelzea hali yote ya mtu. Anamaanisha kuwa Hakuna miungu iliyotengenezwa kwa mikono ya wanadamu iliyo ya kweli.
"Kwamba watu hawataweza tena kuhitaji na kununua miungu kutoka kwetu."
Hii inaweza kutafsiriwa kuwa; "watu watafikiri kuwa hakuna faida inayoendelea kuabudu katika hekalu ya mungu mke Diana."
Umarufu wa Diana utapotea kwa kufikiri habari yake.
hili linakuzwa ili kuonyesha vile Diana alivyokuwa anapendwa na wengi.
Habari hii inazungumzia mafundi waliokuwa wakifua visanamu. Kundi jingine ni la wale waliokusanyika kuwasikiliza mafunzi wafua visanamu.
Gayo na Aristariko walitoka Makedonia lakini walikuwa wakitenda kazi na Paulo katika Efeso katika wakati wake.
"wakawa na hasira sana"
kelele kwa sauti kubwa, akizungumza
Watu waliokuwemo katika mji wote wakaingiwa na taharuki na kuanza kupiga kelele.
Kulikuwa na hamasisho la ghasia kubwa
Ukumbi wa Efeso ilitumika kwa ajili ya mikutano ya hadhara na kwa ajili ya burudani kama vile michezo na muziki
watu waliokuwa wakisafiri pamoja na Paulo
Haya ndiyo majina ya watu wanaume
Efeso ilikuwa sehemu ya utawala wa Rumi katika jimbo la Asia.
Ukumbi wa Efeso ulitumika katika mikutano ya wazi na kwa matamasha ya michezo na muziki. Ulikuwa ni ukimbi inje ya mji wenye nusu mduara ukiwa na viti vyenye kubeba watu maelfu.
Hili ni jina la mtu mwanamme
kutigisha mkono akitoa ishara kwa watazamaji ili wanyamaze na aweze kutoa maelezo.
Alitaka kutoa hotuba, lakini sio wazi nini alichokuwa anakwenda kusema.
Kupaza sauti ya watu wote kwa wakati mmoja ilionekana kama sauti moja ikinena.
Karani wa mji anaongea ili kuunyamazisha umati wa watu
Hii inafafanua juu ya "Karani" au "Mwandishi"
karani aliuliza swali hili kuwahakikishia umati kuwa walikuwa sahihi na kuwatia moyo.
Karani wa mji anatumia neno "asiye" ili kusisitiza kuwa watu wote wa mji wanajua hili.
Watu wa Efeso wanatunza na kulinda hekalu la Atemi
Ndani ya hekalu la Diana kulikuwa mfano wa mungu fasheni iliyoanguka kutoka angani, kulikuwa mwamba uliofikiriwa kutoka Zeus
karani wa mji alimaliza kizungumza na umati
Hili neno linaashiria kuwa Karani alisema kwa sababu ya kile ambacho alisema hapo awali. Karani wa mji alikuwa amesema, Gayo na Aristariko alikuwa walikuwa si wezi wala wenye kufuru.
Nono "shitaka" na "tuhumu" ni vitendo dhidi ya wengine.
Huyu alikuwa ni gavana, mwakilishi wa mambo ya kisheria katika mahakama.
Hili halimaanishi Demetrio na wale waliokuwa naye watashitakiana wao kwa wao. Hili lilikuwa eneo ambalo kila mtu alikuwa huru kutoa shitaka kwa mtu yeyote.
"Lakini kama kuna matatizo vema kuongea"
"Vema kujadili na kutatua tatizo kwa utaratibu wa kawaida"
"Hii inaweza kusababisha hatari kwa mamlaka ya Rumi tukituhumiwa kuanzisha ghasia kama hii ya leo"
1 Baada ya ghasia kumalizika, Paulo aliwaita wanafunzi na kuwatia moyo. Kisha kuwaaga na akaondoka kwenda Makedonia. 2 Naye akiishakupita mikoa hiyo na alikuwa akiwatia moyo waamuni, akaingia Uyunani. 3 Baada ya yeye kuwa pale kwa muda wa miezi mitatu, njama ziliundwa dhidi yake na Wayahudi alipokuwa akikaribia kusafiri kwa njia ya bahari kuelekea Shamu, hivyo aliazimu kurudi kupitia Makedonia. 4 Walioandamana naye hadi Asia walikuwa Sopatro, mwana wa Pirho kutoka Berea; Aristariko na Sekundo, wote kutoka waamini wa Wathesalonike; Gayo wa Derbe; Timotheo; Tikiko na Trofimo kutoka Asia. 5 Lakini watu hawa wamekwisha tangulia na walikuwa wanatungojea kule Troa. 6 kwa njia ya Bahari kutoka Filipi baada ya siku za mikate isiyotiwa chachu, na katika siku tano tukawafikia huko Troa. Tulikaa huko kwa siku saba. 7 Hata siku ya kwanza ya juma, tulipokuwa tumekusanyika pamoja ili kuumega mkate, Paulo alizungumza na Waamini. Alikuwa akipanga kuondoka kesho yake, hivyo akaendelea kuongea hadi usiku wa manane. 8 Kulikuwa na taa nyingi katika chumba cha juu ambapo tulikuwa tumekusanyika pamoja. 9 Katika dirisha alikuwa amekaa kijana mmoja jina lake Utiko, ambaye alielemewa na usingizi mzito. Hata Paulo alipokuwa akihutubu kwa muda mrefu, kijana huyu, akiwa amelala, akaanguka chini kutoka ghorofa ya tatu na aliokotwa akiwa amekufa. 10 Lakini Paulo alishuka chini, alijinyoosha yeye mwenyewe juu yake, akamkumbatia. Kisha akasema, "Msikate tamaa, kwa kuwa yu hai." 11 Kisha akapanda tena ghorofani na akaumega mkate, akala. Baada ya kuzungumza nao kwa muda mrefu hadi alfajiri, akaondoka. 12 Wakamleta yule kijana akiwa hai wakafarijika sana. 13 Sisi wenyewe tulitangulia mbele ya Paul kwa meli na tukaelekea Aso, ambapo sisi tulipanga kumchukua Paul huko. Hiki ndicho yeye mwenyewe alitaka kufanya, kwa sababu alipanga kwenda kupitia nchi kavu. 14 Alipotufikia huko Aso, tukampakia kwenye Meli tukaenda Mitilene. 15 Kisha sisi tukatweka kutoka huko na siku ya pili tulifika upande wa pili wa kisiwa cha Kio. Siku iliyofuata, tukawasili kisiwa cha Samo, na kesho yake tukafika mji wa Mileto. 16 Kwa sababu Paulo alikuwa ameamua kusafiri kupitia Efeso, ili kwamba asitumie muda wowote katika Asia; kwa maana alikuwa na haraka ya kuwahi Yerusalemu kwa ajili ya sikukuu ya Pentekoste, kama ingeliwezekana yeye kufanya hivyo. 17 Kutoka Mileto akatuma watu hadi Efeso na akawaita wazee wa Kanisa. 18 Walipofika kwake, akawaambia, ninyi wenyewe mwajua tangu siku ya kwanza nilipokanyaga hapa Asia, jinsi nilivyokuwa kwenu muda wote. 19 Nimemtumikia Bwana kwa unyenyekevu wote na kwa machozi, na mateso yaliyonipata mimi kwa hila za Wayahudi. 20 Mwajua jinsi ambavyo sikujizuia kutangaza kwenu kitu chochote ambacho kilikuwa muhimu, na jinsi mimi nilivyowafundisha wazi wazi na pia kwenda nyumba kwa nyumba. 21 Mnajua jinsi mimi nilivyoendelea kuwaonya Wayahudi na Wayunani juu ya toba kwa Mungu na imani katika Bwana wetu Yesu. 22 Na sasa, angalieni, mimi, nikiwa ninamtii Roho Mtakatifu kuelekea Yerusalemu, nisiyajue mambo ambayo yatanitokea mimi huko, 23 ila kwa kuwa Roho Mtakatifu hunishuhudia mimi katika kila mji na anasema kwamba minyororo na mateso ndivyo vinavyoningojea. 24 Lakini mimi si kufikiria kwamba maisha yangu ni kwa njia yoyote ya thamani kwangu, ili niweze kumaliza mwendo wangu na huduma niliyopokea kutoka kwa Bwana Yesu, kuishuhudia injili ya neema ya Mungu. 25 Na sasa, tazama, najua kwamba wote, miongoni mwa wale nilioenda kuwahubiri Ufalme, hamtaniona uso tena. 26 Kwa hiyo nawashuhudia leo hii, kwamba sina hatia kwa damu ya mtu yeyote. 27 Kwa maana sikujizuia kuwatangazia mapenzi yote ya Mungu. 28 Kwa hiyo iweni waangalifu juu yenu ninyi wenyewe, na juu ya kundi lolote ambalo Roho Mtakatifu amewaweka ninyi kuwa waangalizi. Iweni waangalifu kulichunga kusanyiko la Bwana, ambalo alilinunua kwa damu yake mwenyewe. 29 Najua kwamba baada ya kuondoka kwangu, mbwa mwitu wakali wataingia kwenu, na wasilihurumie kundi. 30 Najua kwamba hata miongoni mwenu wenyewe baadhi ya watu watakuja na kusema mambo mapotovu, ili kuwavuta wanafunzi wawafuate wao. 31 Kwa hiyo muwe macho. Kumbukeni kwamba kwa miaka mitatu sikuweza kuacha kuwafundisha kila mmoja wenu kwa machozi usiku na mchana. 32 Na sasa mimi nawakabidhi kwa Mungu, na kwa neno la neema yake, ambalo laweza kuwajenga na kuwapa urithi pamoja nao wote waliowekwa wakfu kwa Mungu. 33 Sikutamani fedha, dhahabu, au mavazi. 34 Mnajua ninyi wenyewe kwamba mikono hii imenipatia mahitaji yangu mwenyewe na mahitaji ya wale waliokuwa pamoja nami. 35 Katika mambo yote niliwapa mfano wa jinsi inavyopasa kuwasaidia wanyonge kwa kufanya kazi, na jinsi mnavyopaswa kukumbuka maneno ya Bwana Yesu, maneno ambayo yeye mwenyewe alisema: "Ni heri kutoa kuliko kupokea." 36 Baada ya kusema namna hii, alipiga magoti akaomba pamoja nao. 37 Wote wakalia sana na kumwangukia Paulo shingoni na kumbusu. 38 Walihuzunika zaidi ya yote kwa sababu ya kile ambacho alikuwa amesema, kwamba kamwe hawatauona uso wake tena. Kisha wakamsindikiza merikebuni.
Katika sura hii Luka anafafanua safari ya mwisho ya Paulo kwa waumini walioko katika mikoa ya Makedonia na Asia kabla ya Paulo kurudi Yerusalemu.
Paulo alifananisha maisha ndani ya Yesu kan kwamba alikuwa kwa mashindano ya kupiga mbio. Alimaanisha kwamba alihitaji kuendelea kufanya bidii sana hata kama mambo hayakumwendea vyema mpaka akataka kuachia njiani.
Paulo alifikiri kwamba Roho Mtakatifu alimhitaji aende Yerusalemu hata kama yeye hakutaka. Huyo Roho Mtakatifu pia aliwaambia watu wengine kwamba Paulo atakapofika Yerusalemu watu watajaribu kumdhuru.
Paulo anaondoka Efeso anaendelea safari zake
"Baada ya ghasia" au "kufuatia ghasia"
"alisema kwaheri."
"Kwa hali ya dhati aliwatia moyo waumini" au "Alisema mambo mengi ya kuwatia moyo waumini"
yeye alikaa miezi mitatu huko
"Wayahudi waliandaa njama dhidi yake"
alikua tayari kusafiri kwa meli kwenda Syria
Luka mwandishi wa Matendo ya Mitume, alikuwa ameungana na timu ya Paulo. Hapa anatumia maneno ya wingi akimtaja Paulo akiwamo na yeye.
Kusafiri pamoja na Paul
Haya ndiyo majina ya watu wanaume
Haya ndiyo majina ya maeneo waliyopitia
Haya ni majina ya watu wanaume
"hawa watu walikuwa wamesafiri mbele yetu"
Hii inaelezea juu ya wakati wa sikukuu ya Wayahudi. Kipindi cha Pasaka.
Luka anaelezea huduma ya Paulo ya mahubiri huko Troa na kile kilichotokea juu ya Eutiko
Luka bado anaelezea kuwa walikuwa pamoja katika safari hiyo.
Mkate kilikuwa ni chakula cha kawaida wakati wa saa ya chakula. Kumega mkata hapa, inaweza kuwa walishiriki chakula saa ya chakula.
aliendelea kutoa ujumbe
Hii inaweza kuwa chumba cha juu ghorofa ya tatu.
Habari hii inazungumzia juu ya Paulo na Eutiko.
Hii ilikuwa sehemu ya uwazi katika kona ya ukuta wa chumba cha juu. Upana wake ulitosha mtu kuweza kuketi pale.
Hili ni jina la mtu mwanaume
Hapa inasemea; "Alichoka sana na kupelekea usingizi mzito uliompata"
Wakati walipotelemka kwenda kuona hali yake, walimwona akiwa amekwisha kufa.
Hii inamaanisha ghorofa mbili kabla ya tatu inayofuata.
Huu ni mwisho wa sehemu ya hadithi kuhusu mahubiri ya Paulo kule Troa na kuhusu Eutiko
Mkate kilikuwa chakula cha kawaida kipindi cha saa ya chakula. Inamaanisha pengine walishiriki chakula kilichokuwa na aina nyingi zaidi ya mkate.
"aliendelea na safari"
Inawezekana kuwa na maana ya; 1) kijana zaidi ya 14, au 2) mtumishi au mtumwa au 3) mvulana kati ya umri wa 9 na 14 miaka.
Paulo na wenzake wakaendelea na safari yao
Fungu hili linazungumzia juu ya Luka na wale waliokuwa wakisafiri naye bila Paulo kuwemo kwenye kundi.
Neno 'wenyewe' linaongeza mkazo na hutenganisha Luka na wasafiri wenzake Paulo, ambaye hakusafiri kwa mashua
Aso ni mji uliokuwa chini ya mji wa Behram ya sasa katika Uturuki pwani ya bahari ya Aegean.
"yeye mwenyewe" ni kiwakilishi cha jina la Paulo aliyekuwa anatamani
Kusafiri kwa nchi kavu
Mitylene ni mji katika siku ya leo Mitilini, Uturuki katika pwani ya bahari ya Aegeana.
Habari hii inaelezea Paulo, Mwandishi Luka na wale waliosafiri pamoja nao.
"karibu na kisiwa" au " kuvuka kutoka kwenye kisiwa"
Chiosi ni kisiwa katika pwani ya Uturuki kwa sasa katika bahari ya Aegean
"Tuliwasili katika kisiwa cha Samos"
Samos ni kisiwa cha kusini ya Chios katika pwani ya bahari ya Aegean kwa sasa ni Uturuki.
Mileto ulikuwa ni mji wa bandari magharibi mwa Asia Ndogo karibu ni kwenye chanzo cha mto Meander.
Paulo alisafiri majini kusini zamani mji wa bandari wa Efeso, kusini zaidi ili kufika nchi kavu huko Mileto.
Hii inamaanisha "muda" kama vile ulikuwa bidhaa ambao mtu angeweza kuutumia.
Paulo anawaita wazee wa kanisa la Efeso na kuanza kuzungumza nao.
Mileto ilikuwa ni mji wenye bandari Magharibi ya Asia ndogo karibu na chanzo cha mto Meander.
Paulo hapa anatumia msisitizo kwa kile anachowaambia.
aliingia mkoa huu wa Asia
Anazungumzia muda alioutumia akiwa kwao.
'Unyenyekevu' au 'kujishusha hadi chini'
"machozi" wakati mwingine alijisikia hali ya huzuni na kulia machozi.
Hii haimaanishi kwa kila Myahudi. Anaelezea juu ya baadhi ya wale waliomtendea mabaya.
" Mnajua jinsi ambavyo sikunyamaza, lakini kila mara niliwahutubia."
Paulo alifundisha watu kwenye makazi yao binafsi yaani nyumba kwa nyumba.
"toba" na "imani" ni maneno yanayoweza kutafsiriwa kwa vitenzi. Kwamba walipaswa kutubu mbele za Mungu na kuamini katika Bwana Yesu Kristo.
Hapa anaongelea juu ya Roho Mtakatifu akimshawishi Paulo kwenda Yerusalemu kama vile Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa amemfunga mfano wa mtumwa.
Roho Mtakatifu amewasilisha maonyo haya kwangu
Mimi nahusika kufungwa jela kwa minyororo na kuteswa katika kifungo.
Paulo anatumia mfano waq mashindano. Ili kukamilisha kazi ambayo Mungu aliiweka kwa ajili ya yake kuifanya
"kuwaambia watu habari njema kuhusu neema ya Mungu. Hii ndiyo huduma ambayo Paulo alikuwa ameipokea kutoka kwa Yesu.
Paulo anazidi kuongea na wazee wa Efeso
"Na sasa, nisikilizeni kwa makini, kwasababu ninajua"
Mimi najua kuwa ninyi kwa ujumla wenu wote.
kwenu ambao mimi niliwahubiria ujumbe kuhusu ufalme wa Mungu
Neno 'uso' hapa inawakilisha mwili wa Paulo.
Siwezi kulaumiwa na mtu yeyote kuwa na hatia mbele za Mungu
Hapa inamaanisha nafsi ya kila mmoja wao awe mwanaume au mwanamke.
"kwamba sikukaa kimya bila kuwatangazia ujumbe wa kweli.
Neno hili ni alama ya kauli inayosema kwa sababu ya kile ambacho nilisema hapo awali. Katika kesi hiyo, inaturudisha nyuma kwa yale yote ambayo Paulo amesema hadi sasa katika hotuba yake kuhusu yeye kuondoka kwao.
Waumini wanafananishwa na kundi la kondoo. Viongozi wamepewa wajibu na Mungu kulilinda kundi la waumini kwa uangalifu mkuu dhidi ya mbwa mwitu.
kumwaga "damu" ya Kristo hapa inafananishwa na malipo kwa Mungu kwa ajili ya dhambi zetu.
Ni picha ya waumini ambao ni kondoo kuanza kufundishwa mafundisho ya uongo yatakayoanza kuwavutana kuwatoa katika kweli ya Mungu
Mwalimu wa uongo anayeweza kuwavuta waumini kwa mafundisho ya uongo, kwa lengo la kuwaondoa waumini kuwa wanafunzi wa Yesu na kuwafanya kuwa wanafunzi wake.
'kuwa macho na kukumbuka' au 'kuwa macho kama unakumbuka' au 'kuwa macho kwa kukumbuka.'
kuwa macho na tahadhari 'au' kuangalia nje" au "kukaa macho"
"Endelea kukumbuka" au "Tahadhari"
Paulo hakufuruliza kuwafundisha kwa miaka mitatu, lakini mara kwa mara katika muda wa miaka mitatu.
Maana inawezekana ni 1) 'sikuweza kuacha kuwaonya au 2) "sikuweza kuacha kuhamasisha kwa marekebisho."
Hapa "machozi" inaelezea kilio cha Paulo kwasababu ya hisia zake kali juu ya vile alivyojihisi wakati akiwaonya hao watu.
Hapa "neno" linasimama juu ya ujumbe. Kwamba namwomba Mungu awalinde na kuwasaidia kuendelea kuuamini ujumbe niliosema nanyi juu ya neema yake.
Imani ya mtu kuwa imara ni mfano wa ukuta uliojengwa na kuzidi kuimarishwa zaidi na zaidi.
Hapa pia anazungumzia neno la neema yake Mungu kana kwamba Mungu mwenyewe alikuwa akiwapa urithi watu wake.
Paulo alimaliza hotuba yake kwa wazee wa Kanisa la Efeso, Ambayo alikuwa akiihutubia
"Sikuwa na tamaa ya fedha za mtu yeyote" au "Mimi mwenyewe sikuhitaji fedha ya mtu yeyote"
Mavazi yalidhaniwa kuwa kama hazina; kwa kadri mtu alivyozidi kuwa navyo, ndivyo alivyodhaniwa kuwa na utajiri.
Neno "wenyewe" inatumika hapa kwa kuongeza msisitizo.
Neno "mikono" hapa inawakilisha roho yote ya Paulo. 'Mimi nilifanya kazi kwa mikono yangu mwenyewe ya kupata fedha na kulipa kwa ajili ya gharama zangu."
"Fanyeni kazi ilikupata fedha kusaidia watu ambao hawawezi kuzipata kwaajili yao wenyewe"
Hapa "maneno" yanafafanua juu ya Yesu alivyosema.
Mtu hupokea neema ya Mungu na uzoefu wa furaha yake zaidi anapotoa
Paul anamalizia muda na hotuba yake kwa wazee wa kanisa la Efeso na kisha kuomba pamoja nao.
Ilikuwa desturi ya kawaida kupiga magoti wakati wa kuomba. Ilikuwa alama ya unyenyekevu mbele za Mungu.
"Aliwakumbatia kwa karibu" au "kuweka mikono yao karibu naye"
Kumbusu mtu kwenye shavu ni usemi wa kindugu au upendo wa kirafiki katika Mashariki ya Kati.
Neno "uso" hapa inawakilisha mwili wa Paulo kimwili. 'hamtaniona katika mwili katika dunia hii.'
1 Wakati tulipokua tumeachana nao, na tunasafiri baharini, tukafika moja kwa moja kwenye mji wa Kosi, na kesho yake tukafika mji wa Rodo, na kutoka huko tukafika mji wa Patara. 2 Tulipopata meli inayovuka kwenda Foinike, tulipanda tukasafiri. 3 Tulipofika mbele ya kisiwa cha Kipro, tukaiacha upande wa kushoto, tukasafiri hadi Siria, tukaweka nanga katika mji wa Tiro, kwa sababu huko ndiko meli ilikuwa ipakuliwe shehena yake. 4 Baada ya kuwaona wanafunzi, tukakaa huko siku saba. Wanafunzi hawa wakamwambia Paulo kupitia kwa Roho kwamba yeye asikanyage Yerusalemu. 5 Hata tulipotimiza siku zile, sisi tukaondoka tukaenda zetu. Wote pamoja, na wanawake zao na watoto wao, walitusindikiza katika njia zetu hadi tulipotoka nje ya mji. Kisha tukapiga magoti pwani, tukaomba, tukaagana kila mmoja. 6 Tukapanda meli, huku nao wakarudi nyumbani kwao tena. 7 Hata tulipomaliza safari yetu kutoka Tiro, tukafika Tolemai. Pale tulisalimia ndugu, na kukakaa nao kwa siku moja. 8 Kesho yake tuliondoka tukaenda Kaisaria. Sisi tukaingia nyumbani mwa Filipo, mhubiri wa injili, aliyekuwa mmoja wa wale saba, nasi tukakaa pamoja naye. 9 Mtu huyu alikuwa na mabinti wanne mabikira ambao walitabiri. 10 Baada ya kukaa huko kwa siku kadhaa, akashuka kutoka Uyahudi nabii mmoja aitwaye Agabo. 11 Yeye alikuja kwetu na akautwaa mkanda wa Paulo. kwa huo alijifunga miguu na mikono yake mwenyewe na kusema, "Roho Mtakatifu asema hivi," "Wayahudi wa Yerusalemu watamfunga mtu anayemiliki mkanda huu, nao watamkabidhi mikononi mwa watu wa mataifa." 12 Tuliposikia mambo hayo, sisi na watu waliokuwa wakiishi mahali pale tulimsihi Paulo asipande kwende Yerusalemu. 13 Ndipo Paulo alijibu, "Mnafanya nini, mnalia na kunivunja moyo wangu? Kwa maana niko tayari, siyo tu kufungwa, lakini pia kufia huko Yerusalemu kwa ajili ya jina la Bwana Yesu." 14 Kwa vile Paulo hakutaka kushawishiwa, tuliacha na kusema, " Basi mapenzi ya Bwana yafanyike." 15 Baada ya siku hizi, tulichukua mifuko yetu na tukapanda Yerusalemu. 16 Baadhi ya wanafunzi kutoka Kaisaria pia walifuatana nasi. Wakamleta mtu mmoja aitwaye Mnasoni, mtu wa Kipro, mwanafunzi wa zamani, ambaye tulikaa naye. 17 Tulipofika Yerusalemu, ndugu walitukaribisha kwa furaha. 18 Kesho yake Paulo alienda pamoja nasi kwa Yakobo, na wazee wote walikuwepo. 19 Baada ya kuwasalimu, aliwapa taarifa moja baada ya nyingine ya mambo ambayo Mungu aliyotenda miongoni mwa mataifa kwa kupitia huduma yake. 20 Wakati waliposikia hayo, wakamsifu Mungu, na wakamwambia, "Unaona, ndugu, kuna maelfu wangapi wameamini miongoni mwa Wayahudi. Wao wote wana nia ya kushika sheria. 21 Wameambiwa kuhusu wewe, kwamba unafundisha Wayahudi wanaoishi kati ya mataifa kuachana na Musa, na kwamba unawaambia wasiwatahiri watoto wao, na wasifuate desturi za zamani. 22 Tunapaswa tufanye nini? Bila shaka watasikia kwamba wewe umekuja. 23 Hivyo fanya kile sisi tunachokuambia sasa: tunao watu wanne ambao wameweka nadhiri. 24 Wachukue watu hawa na ujitakase mwenyewe pamoja nao, na uwalipie gharama zao, ili waweze kunyoa vichwa vyao. Hivyo kila mmoja apate kujua kwamba mambo waliyoambiwa kuhusu wewe ni ya uongo. Watajifunza kwamba wewe pia unafuata sheria. 25 Lakini kwa habari za mataifa ambao wamekuwa waumini, tuliandika na kutoa maagizo kwamba wanapaswa kujiepusha na vitu vilivyotolewa dhabihu kwa sanamu, na damu, kutokana na kile kilichonyongwa, na wajiepushe na uasherati." 26 Ndipo, Paulo aliwatwaa wanaume, na siku ya pili, akajitakasa mwenyewe pamoja nao, akaingia Hekaluni, kutangaza kipindi cha siku za kujitakasa, hadi sadaka itolewa kwa ajili ya kila mmoja wao. 27 Siku hizo saba zilipokaribia kumalizika, baadhi ya Wayahudi kutoka Asia wakamuona Paulo Hekaluni, na makutano wakakasirika, na wakamnyoshea mikono. 28 Walikuwa wanapiga kelele, "Watu wa Israeli, tusaidieni. Huyu ni yule mtu anayewafundisha watu kila mahali mambo ambayo ni kinyume na watu, sheria, na mahali hapa. Pia amewaleta Wayunani katika Hekalu na kupanajisi mahali hapa patakatifu." 29 Kwa kuwa mwanzoni walikuwa wamemwona Trofimo Muefeso akiwa pamoja naye mjini, nao walidhani kwamba Paulo alimleta hekaluni. 30 Mji wote ulikuwa na taharuki, na watu wakakimbia pamoja na kumkamata Paulo. Wakamtoa nje ya Hekalu, na milango mara ikafungwa. 31 Walipokuwa wakijaribu kumuua, habari zilimfikia mkuu wa jeshi la walinzi kuwa Yerusalemu yote ilikuwa imejaa ghasia. 32 Mara hiyo akawachukua askari na jemadari akaukimbilia umati. Wakati Watu walipomwona mkuu wa jeshi na askari, wakaacha kumpiga Paulo. 33 Kisha mkuu wa jeshi alimkaribia na akamshika Paulo, na akaamuru afungwe minyororo miwili. Akamuuliza yeye ni nani na amefanya nini. 34 Baadhi ya watu kwenye umati walikuwa wanapayuka kitu hiki na wengine kingine. Kwa kuwa jemadari hakuweza kuwaambia chochote kwa sababu ya zile kelele, akaamuru Paulo aletwe ndani ya ngome. 35 Basi alipofika kwenye ngazi, akachukuliwa na askari kwa sababu ya ghasia za umati. 36 Maana umati wa watu walimfuata na waliendelea kupiga kelele, "Mwondoeni huyu!" 37 Paulo alipokuwa analetwa ndani ya ngome, alimwambia mkuu wa jeshi, "Naweza kukwambia kitu?" Yule mkuu wa jeshi akasema, "Je unaongea Kiyunani? 38 Je, wewe si yule Mmisri ambaye awali aliongoza uasi na alichukua magaidi elfu nne nyikani?" 39 Paulo akasema, "Mimi ni Myahudi, kutoka mji wa Tarso ya Kilikia. Mimi ni raia wa mji maarufu. Nawaomba, mniruhusu nizungumze na watu." 40 Wakati jemadari alipompa ruhusa, Paulo akasimama penye ngazi na akatoa ishara kwa watu kwa mkono wake. Wakati kulipokuwa na ukimya sana, akaongea nao kwa Kihebrania. Akasema,
Matendo 21:1-19 Inaelezea safari ya Paulo kwenda Yerusalemu. Baada ya kuasili Yerusalemu,Waumini walimuambia kwamba Wayahudi walitaka kumdhuru .Walimwelezea pia alichopaswa kufanya ili wasimdhuru (Mistari 20-26). Ingawa Paulo alikifanya alichoambiwa na waumini,Wayahudi walijaribu kumuua. Warumi walimuokoa na wakampa nafasi ya kuwaongelesha Wayahudi.
stari wa Mwisho wa sura hii unaishia na sentensi isiyokamilifu kimaana. Tafsiri nyingi huwacha hiyo sentensi kama haijakamilika kama vile ULB hufanya.
Wayahudi wa Yerusalemu walifuata sheria za Musa. Hata wale waliomfuata Yesu bado walizizingatia. Makundi yote yalifikiri kwamba Paulo alikuwa akiwaambia Wayahudi walio Uyunani wasifuate hizo sheria. Lakini watu wa Mataifa ndio Paulo alikuwa akiwahutubia.
Nadhiri ambazo Paulo na marafiki wake watatu walichukua ilikuwa ni kama ya Wanaume wa kujifunga kwa Nadhiri kwa vile walinyoa nywele zao (Matendo 21:32)
Wayahudi walimlaumu Paulo kwa kumleta mtu wa Mataifa katika sehemu maalum ya hekalu ambamo Mungu aliwaruhusu Wayahudi pekee kuingia. Wakafikiri kwamba Mungu alitaka wamuadhibu Paulo kwa kumuua. (Tazama: //en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy)
Warumi walidhani kwamba ni Warumi pekee yao waliostahili kuhudumiwa kwa haki. Wangewatenda watakavyo wale ambao hawakuwa raia wa Urumi lakini kwa Warumi waliwatendea kufuata sheria. Watu wamoja walizaliwa raia wa Roma na wengine wakaipa pesa serikali ya Warumi ili wawe raia.
Mwandishi Luka, Paulo na washirika wake wanaendelea na safari yao.
Paulo anatumia kiwakilishi cha jina kwa wingi akijitambulisha yeye, Paulo na wenzao wanaosafiri kwa pamoja.
"tulikwenda moja kwa moja kwenye mji wa kosi" au "tulikwenda moja kwa moja kwenye mji wa kosi bila kupitia sehemu nyingine"
Kosi ni kisiwa cha pwani ya Ugiriki pwani kwa sasa ni Uturuki mkoa wa kusini mwa Aegean ya bahari.
Rhodes ni kisiwa cha pwani ya Ugiriki kwa sasa ni Uturuki kusini mwa bahari ya Aegeani na kosi pia kaskazini ya Krete
Patara ni mji upande wa kusini magharibi mwa pwani ya Bahari ya Aegean kwa sasa ni Uturuki kuelekea bahari ya Mediterraneani.
Hapa "Meri kuvuka kupitia" linamaanisha kuwa ni wale watumishi wa meri ambao wangesafiri pamoja na meri.
Hapa hakumaanishi meri ilikuwa inavuka wakati huo, bali ingevuka baadaye.
Neno 'sisi' linamhusu Luka, Paulo na wale waliokuwa wakisafiri pamoja nao.
"Tulikipita kisiwa upande wa kushoto"
Hapa "Meri" inasimama kwa nafasi ya watumishi waliokuwa wakisafiri na meri. Wafanyakazi hao wangeshusha mizigo kutoka merini.
"Waumini hawa walimwambia Paulo kile Roho Mtakatifu alikuwa amekidhihirisha kwao"
Hapa "Miguu" linamaanisha Paulo mwenyewe asikanyage huko Yerusalemu.
Fungu hili linazungumzia waumini huko Tiro
Inaonyesha kuwa kuna muda waliokaa katika mji huo.
likuwa desturi ya kawaida kupiga magoti wakati wa kuomba. Hii ilikuwa ni alama ya kuonyesha unyenyekevu mbele za Mungu.
"Alisema 'kwaheri' kwa kila mmoja
Paulo anaanza rariba yake akiwa Kaisaria
Tolemai ulikuwa ni mji wa kusini mwa Tiro, Lebanoni. Tolemai ya sasa ni Acre, Israeli.
"waumini wenzake"
"Saba" inahusu wanaume waliochaguliwa kusambaza chakula na misaada kwa wajane.
"Philipo"
Neno hili limetumika kama alama ya kumalizika kwa tukio moja na kuanza kwa tukio jingine. Luka anasimulia habari za Philipo na binti zake.
"Mabinti bikra wanne ambao kwa kawaida walikuwa wakipokea na kupeleka ujumbe kwa watu kutoka kwa Mungu.
Fungu hili linazungumzia habari ya unabii ulionenwa kumhusu Paulo katika Kaisaria kutoka kwa nabii Agabo.
Hii inamtambulisha mtu mpya katika habari hii.
Agabo alikua mtu kutoka Yudea
"Aliutwaa mkanda wa Paulo kutoka kiunoni mwake"
Alimaanisha kuwa Roho Mtakatifu alimjulisha Nabii Agabo kuwa Wayahudi huko Yerusalemu watamfunga Paulo kama alivyojifunga mkanda wa Paulo na kumkabidhi kwa watu wa mataifa.
Hii haimanishi Wayahudi wote, lakini baadhi ya watu walifanya hivyo.
"Kumkabidhi kwa"
Neno "Mikono" Linawakirisha udhibiti.
Neno hili linasimamia mamlaka miongoni mwa wamataifa.
Fungu hili linaelezea kumhusu Mwandishi Luka na baadhi ya waumini isipokuwa Paulo.
Paulo anauliza swali hili kuonyesha waumini wanapaswa kuacha kujaribu kumshawishi. 'Acheni, mnachofanya mnataka kunivunja moyo wangu.'
Hapa "jina" linamaanisha utu wa Yesu Kristo.
Hakuweza kujaribu kumshawishi ili asiende Yerusalemu.
Inamaanisha kuwa; lolote lile likitokea litakuwa kwa mpango wa Bwana.
Huu ni mwisho wa kipindi cha Paulo kuwa huko Kaisaria.
Neno 'sisi' linamhusu Luka, Paulo na wale waliosafiri pamoja nao.
"Miongoni mwao alikuwemo mtu mwingine"
Mnasoni alikuwa mtu kutoka kisiwa cha Kupro.
Hii inamaanisha Mnason alikuwa muumini wa Yesu aliyeamini mwanzoni mwa huduma.
Paulo na wenzake sasa wanafika Yerusalemu.
Hawa walikuwa waumini wanaume na wanawake, waliowakaribisha.
"Paulo alitoa maelezo ya kina ya mambo yote ambayo Mungu aliyatenda"
wazee katika Yerusalemu wakaanza kumjibu Paulo.
Neno "ndugu" linamaanisha waumini wenzao.
Hapa baadhi ya Wayahudi walikuwa wakifuatilia kuharibu mafundisho ya Paulo aliyokuwa amawafundisha waumini wapya, ili wafuate desturi za Musa badala ya kumfuata Yesu.
"Watu waliwaambia waumini wa Kiyahudi"
Fungu hili limawahusu Yakobo na wazee wengine.
Hii ilikuwa ni aina ya kiapo ambapo mtu hakutaka kunywa kileo au kukata nywele zao mpaka mwisho wa kipindi cha kuweka muda. "watu wanne ambao walitoa ahadi kwa Mungu."
Walikuwa wanapaswa wao wenyewe kujitakasa ili waweze kuabudu ndani ya hekalu.
Lipa kile ambacho watahitaji kulipiwa.
Hii ni ishara ya mtu anayetimiza nadhili yake kwa Mungu.
Mambo ambayo yanasemwa na watu kukuhusu wewe.
Inamaanisha utii wa kuzishika sheria za Mungu.
Yakobo na Wazee katika Yerusalemu wanamaliza maswali yao kwa Paulo.
ote hayo yalikuwa sheria za kile wanachotakiwa kula.
Wajiepushe kula nyama iliyotolewa kwa ibada za sanamu.
Mnyama ambaye ameuawa bila damu kutoka.
Kabla ya kuingia Hekaluni Wayahudi walitakiwa kuwa sherehe au tohara. Kusafishwa alikuwa na kufanya na Wayahudi kuwa na mawasiliano na watu wa mataifa mengine.
Hii ni hatua tofauti ya kujitakasa ambayo ilitakiwa kuitimiza ili waweze kuingia hekaluni.
"Mpaka walipowasilisha wanyama kwa sadaka"
Huu ni mwanzo wa sehemu ya hadithi kuhusu kukamatwa kwa Paulo.
Mstari wa 29 unaelezea habari kuhusu Wayahudi kutoka Asia.
Hizi zilikuwa siku saba kwa ajili ya kujitakasa.
Paulo hakuwa ndani ya hekalu lenyewe. Alikuwa kwenye uwa wa nje wa hekalu.
"Ilisababisha kundi kubwa la watu kuanzisha upinzani.
Neno Kumnyoshea mikono" lina maana ya watu kuanza kumvamia.
"Watu wa Israel, sheria ya Musa, na hekalu
Mwandishi Luka anaelezea kwanini wayahudi kutoka Asia walimshitaki Paulo kuwa alimleta Myunani
Huyu alikuwa mwanaume Myunani ambaye Paulo alishitakiwa kuwa aliingia naye hekalu
Neno "wote" hapa ni lugha ya kuumba picha kubwa kwa msisitizo. neno "mji" inawakilisha watu katika mji huo. "Watu wengi katika mji wakawa na hasira juu ya Paulo."
Paulo alivamiwa
Walifunga milango ili kwamba kusije kufanyika maandamano ndani ya hekalu.
afisa wa kikosi cha ulinzi au kiongozi wa askari wapatao 600
Neno "Yerusalemu" hapa inawakilisha watu wa Yerusalemu. neno "wote" ni msisitizo kuonyesha umati mkubwa waliokuwa wamekasirika. "wengi wa watu huko Yerusalemu walikuwa katika ghasia."
Kutoka ngome, kuna ngazi kwenda chini katika mahakama.
afisa wa kikosi cha kijeshi cha Rumi au kiongozi wa askari wapatao 600
"Akamshika Paulo" au "Paulo alishikiriwa"
Aliwaagiza askari wake kumkamata na kumfunga.
Hii inamaanisha kuwa Paulo alifungwa na maaskari wawili kila mmoja upande wake mmoja.
Alimwuliza kuwa yeye ni nani?, Amefanya nini?
Mkuu wa ulinzi anazungumza na umati, hazungumzi na Paulo.
Huyu alikuwa ni afisa wa kijeshi au kiongozi wa askari wapatao 600.
Aliagiza askari wake wamlete Paulo.
Ngome hii ilikuwa imeunganishwa kwenye uwanda wa nje wa hekalu.
'Wakati Paulo alipofika kwenye ngazi za ngome, askari wakamchukua'
Umati wa watu kwa kutumia lugha kiasi fulani kali na lugha halisi ya kuomba Paulo auwawe.
"askari walipokuwa tayari kuleta Paulo"
ngome ilikuwa imeunganishwa na uwanda wa nje wa hekalu
afisa wa jeshi la Kirumi wa askari wapatao 600.
Mkuu wa jeshi anatumia maswali haya kueleza mshangao kwamba Paulo si yule aliyemdhani kuwa. Nilifikiri kuwa ni yule Mmisri ambaye aliongoza uasi katika jangwa na magaidi elfu nne."
Muda mfupi kabla ya ziara ya Paulo, mtu asiyejulikana jina kutoka Misri, alikuwa akizindua uasi dhidi ya Rumi katika Yerusalemu. Baadaye alitorokea "jangwani," 'na kamanda anashangaa kama Paulo atakuwa ndiye na mtu huyo.
Neno "uasi" linamaanisha watu waliasi na kwenda kinyume na serikali ya Rumi"
"4000 watu wanaoua na kuwadhuru wengine wale wasiokubaliana nao"
Ni wale Wayahudi walioiasi serikali ya Rumi na kuanza kuwauaWarumi na kila mmoja ambaye aliyeunga mkono serikali ya Kirumi.
Paulo anaanza kujitetea kwa kile alichukuwa amefanya
"nakuomba" au "nakusihi"
"Tafadhali nikubalie" au tafadhali niruhusu"
Neno "kibali" linamaanisha kuwa mkuu wa kikosi alikmpa Paulo kibali cha kuzungumza.
Neno "ngazi" linamaanisha hatua ya juu ya kupanda kuelekea kwenye ngome.
Paulo alitoa ishara ya mkono kwa watu kuashiria wanyamaze
wakati watu waliponyamaza kabisa
1 "Ndugu na baba zangu, sikilizeni utetezi wangu nitakaofanya kwenu sasa." 2 Makutano walipo sikia Paulo akiongea nao kwa kiebrania, wakanyamaza. Akasema, 3 "Mimi ni myahudi, nimezaliwa mji wa Tarso eneo la Kilikia, ila nilipata elimu katika mji huu, miguuni pa Gamalieli. Nilifundishwa kulingana na njia sahihi za sheria za baba zetu. Mimi ninabidii ya Mungu, kama ninyi nyote mlivyo leo. 4 Niliwatesa kwa njia hii hadi kufa; nikawafunga wanaume na wanawake na kuwatupa gerezani. 5 Hata kuhani mkuu na wazee wote wanaweza kutoa ushahidi kwamba nilipokea barua kutoka kwao kwa ajili ya ndugu walio Dameski, kwangu mimi kusafiri kwenda huko. Ilikuwa niwalete watu Yerusalemu wa njia ile ili wafungwe na kuadhibiwa. 6 Ilitokea kwamba pale nilipokua nikisafiri nakaribia Dameski, majira ya mchana ghafla nuru kuu ikatokea mbinguni ikaanza kuniangaza. 7 Nikaanguka chini na kusikia sauti ikiniambia, 'Sauli, Sauli kwanini unaniudhi?' 8 Nikajibu, 'wewe ni nani, Bwana?' Akaniambia, 'Mini ni Yesu Mnazareti, ambaye wewe unaniudhi.' 9 Wale waliokuwa na mimi waliiona nuru, ila hawakusikia sauti ya yule alie ongea na mimi. 10 Nikasema, 'Nifanye nini, Bwana?' Bwana akaniambia, 'Simama na uingie Dameski; huko utaambiwa kila kitu unachopaswa kufanya.' 11 Sikuweza kuona kwa sababu ya muangaza wa nuru ile, ndipo nikaenda Dameski kwa kuongozwa na mikono ya wale waliokuwa na mimi. 12 Huko nikakutana na mtu aitwaye Anania, alikuwa mtu aliyeshika sheria na mwenye kuheshimika mbele ya Wayahudi wote walioishi huko. 13 Akaja kwangu, akasimama mbele yangu, na kusema, 'Ndugu yangu Sauli, upate kuona.'Kwa muda ule ule nikamuona. 14 Akasema, 'Mungu wa baba zetu amekuchagua wewe upate kujua mapenzi yake, kumuona yule mwenyehaki, na kusikia sauti itokayo kwenye kinywa chake. 15 Kwa sababu utakuwa shahidi kwake kwa watu wote juu ya uliyoyaona na kusikia. 16 Basi sasa kwa nini unasubiri? Amka, ubatizwe, ukaoshe dhambi zako, ukiliita jina lake.' 17 Baada ya kurejea Yerusalemu, na nilipokuwa nikisali ndani ya hekalu, ikatokea kwamba nikapewa maono. 18 Nikamuona akiniambia, 'Hima na utoke Yerusalemu haraka, kwa sababu hawatakubali ushuhuda wako kuhusu mimi.' 19 Nikasema, 'Bwana, wao wenyewe wanajua niliwafunga gerezani na kuwapiga wale waliokuamini katika kila sinagogi. 20 Na damu ya Stefano shahidi wako ilipomwagwa, Mimi pia nilikuwa nimesimama karibu na kukubali na nilikuwa nalinda nguo za wale waliomwua.' 21 Lakini aliniambia, 'Enenda, kwa sababu mimi nitakutuma uende mbali kwa watu wa mataifa."' 22 Watu wakamruhusu aongee juu ya neno hili. Lakini baadaye walipaza sauti na kusema, "mwondoe mtu huyu katika nchi: kwa sababu sio sahihi aishi." 23 Walipokuwa wakipaza sauti, na kutupa mavazi yao na kutupa mavumbi juu, 24 jemedari mkuu akaamuru Paulo aletwe ngomeni. Akaamuru aulizwe huku anapigwa mijeledi, ili yeye mwenyewe ajue kwa nini walikuwa wanampigia kelele namna ile. 25 Hata walipokuwa wamemfunga kwa kamba, Paulo akamwambia yule akida aliye simama karibu naye, "Je! ni haki kwenu kumpiga mtu aliye Mrumi na bado hajahukumiwa?" 26 Yule akida aliposikia maneno haya, akaenda kwa jemedari mkuu na kumwambia, akisema, "Unataka kufanya nini? Kwa maana mtu huyu ni mrumi." 27 Jemedari mkuu akaja na kumwambia, "Niambie, je wewe ni raia wa Rumi?" Paulo akasema, "Ndiyo." 28 Jemedari akamjibu, "Ni kupitia kiasi kikubwa cha pesa ndipo nilipata uraia." Lakini Paulo akamwambia, "Mimi ni mrumi wa kuzaliwa." 29 Basi wale waliokuwa tayari kwenda kumuuliza wakaondoka na kumwacha wakati huo huo. Na jemedari naye akaogopa, alipojua kuwa Paulo ni Mrumi, na kwa sababu amemfunga. 30 Siku iliyofuatayo, jemedari mkuu alitaka kujua ukweli kuhusu mashtaka ya Wayahudi dhidi ya Paulo. Hivyo akamfungua vifungo vyake akaamuru wakuu wa makuhani na baraza lote wakutane. Akamleta Paulo chini, na kumweka katikati yao.
Hii ndio mara ya pili kusema habari ya Kubadilishwa kwa Paulo kuwa Mkristo katika kitabu cha Matendo.Kwa sababu hili ni tukio muhimu katika kanisa la awali, "kuna mara tatu ya kusema habari ya kubadilishwa kwa Paulo kuwa Mkristo. (Tazama: Matendo 9 na Matendo 26).
Wakati huu Wayahudi wengi walizungumza Kiaramea na Kiyunani. Wengi wa waliozungumza Kihebrania walikuwa Wayahudi watu wa elimu. Hii ndio maana watu walimsikiliza Paulo kwa makini alipoanza kuzungumza kwa Kihebrania.
Hakuna anayefahamu aliyeanza kuwaita Waumini wafuasi wa Njia. Labda Waumini walijiita hivyo kwa vile Bibilia kwa mara nyingi humzungumzia mtu anayeishi maishi yake kama mtu atembeaye njiani. Kama huu ni ukweli, Waumini walikuwa "Wakifuata njia ya Bwana" kwa kuishi kwa njia inayompendeza Mungu.
Warumi walidhani Kwmaba ni Warumi pekee yao waliostahili kuhudumiwa kwa haki. Wangewatenda watakavyo wale ambao hawakuwa raia wa Urumi lakini kwa Warumi waliwatendea kufuata sheria. Watu wamoja walizaliwa raia wa Roma na wengine wakalipa pesa serikali ya Warumi ili wawe raia. "Kiranja Mkuu" angeadhibiwa kwa kuwatendea raia wa Urumi sawa wale wasiokuwa raia.
Paulo anazungumza na Wayahudi huko Yerusalemu.
Hii ilikuwa ni njia ya kistaarabu ya kuzungumza na watu ambao walikuwa na umri sawa na wa Paulo, na wanaume wazee waliokuwa katika kusanyiko hilo.
"Nitakaoueleza kwenu" au "nitakao uwakilisha kwenu"
"lugha ya Kihebrania ilikuwa lugha ya Wayahudi"
alikuwa mwanafunzi wa rabi Gamalieli hapa Yerusalemu "
Gamarieli alikuwa mwalimu mashuhuri wa sheria ya Kiyahudi.
"Aliniagiza jinsi ya kutii kwa makini kila sheria ya baba zetu" au "mafundisho niliyopata yalifuatiwa na maelezo halisi ya sheria ya baba zetu"
"Nimejitoa kikamilifu kumtii Mungu" au "Mimi nina hamu kuhusu huduma yangu kwa Mungu"
"Kama ilivyo kwenu nyote hivi leo". Paulo anajilinganisha na umati wa watu.
Hii ilikuwa ni neno lililotumika kutaja Ukristo
"mauti" inaweza kutafsiriwa na kitenzi "kuua" au "kufa
"Walitupwa gerezani" au "Kuwaweka gerezani"
"Kushuhudia" au "kutoa ushahidi"
"Makuhani wakuu na wazee nilipokea barua kutoka kwao"
Hapa "ndugu" inahusu "Wayahudi wenzake
"Waliniagiza kuwafunga minyororo wale wote wa njia ile na kuwaleta Yerusalemu
"ili wapate adhabu" au "ili viongozi wa Wayahudi wangeweza kuwaadhibu"
Paulo anazungumzia namna alivyoweza kukutana na Yesu.
Msemo huu umetumika hapa kama tukio la kwanza. Hapa Paulo anaelezea jinsi alivyokutana na Yesu.
Hapa "sauti" inasimama kwa mtu akizungumza. "Mimi nilisikia mtu akiniambia"
Neno "sauti" linasimama badala ya mtu anayeongea. Hawakuelewa kile yule mtu alichokuwa akiongea nami.
"kuna mtu atakuambia" au "huko utafahamu"
"Niliachwa nikiwa sioni kwasababu ya uli mwanga angavu.
Hapa "mikono" anasimama kwa wale waliomuongoza Paul. Hii inaweza ikaanza: "Watu waliokuwa na mimi waliniongoza kwenda Dameski"
Fungu hili linazungumzia habari za Anania
Huyu si Anania aliyekufa mapema mwanzoni mwa sura ya 5:3
Anania ilikuwa makini sana kuhusu kufuata sheria za Mungu.
"Wayahudi walioishi kule walinema mema juu yake"
Hapa "Ndugu" ni njia ya kistaarabu kumuelezea mtu. "Rafiki yangu Sauli"
neno "kuona" inaweza kutafsiriwa na kitenzi "kuona." "kuona tena"
Hii ni kawaida kama tukio lilitendeka muda mfupi baada ya kuanza kwa tukio.
Paulo anamalizia kuwaambia kile kilichotokea kwake huko Dameski. Ananukuu kile Anania alisema kwake. Hii ni sehemu ya hotuba ya Paulo aliyoitoa huko Yerusalemu.
"kile Mungu anapanga na kinaweza kutokea"
Vyote "sauti" na "kinywa" rejea kwa nayezungumza. "kumsikiliza akiongea moja kwa moja kwako"
Hapa "watu" maana yake watu wote akiwa mwanamume au mwanamke. "kwa watu wote"
Hapa "sasa" haina maana "wakati huu," lakini linatumika kuleta umakini na hatua muhimu ifuatayo.
Hii inaweza kuanza: "naomba nikupatize" au "kupokea ubatizo"
kama kuoshwa kwa mwili wa mtu ili kuondoa uchafu, akiliitia jina la Yesu kwa msamaha wa dhambi. Omba msamaha wa dhambi zako.
Hapa "jina" ni Bwana Yesu. "wito kwa Bwana" au "kuamini katika Bwana"
Paulo anaanza kwa kuwaambia umati wa watu kuhusu maono yake kwa Yesu.
Kipengere hiki kinaweka alama ya kuonyesha kuanza kwa tukio.
Hii inaweza ikaanza: "nilikuwa na maono" au "Mungu alinipa maono"
"Nilimwona Yesu akiniambia"
"Wale ambao wanaishi Yerusalemu hawataamini kile unachowaambia kunihusu mimi"
Huu ni mwisho wa hotuba ya Paulo kwa umati wa Wayahudi waliokuwa kwenye ngome.
Fungu hili linazungumzia Wayahudi wasioamini waliokuwa Yerusalemu
"wao wenyewe" ni msisitizo wa neno katika kiwakilishi cha jina
Paulo alikwenda kwenye masinagogi akiwatafuta Wayahudi waliokuwa wamemwamini Yesu.
Msemo huu ulikuwa ni desturi ya kusema mtu aliyeuawa. "walimwua Stephen."
Neno "nchi" yanaongeza mkazo "Mwondoeni." : "Mwueni"
Neno "Walipokuwa" limetimika kwa alama matukio mawili ambayo yanatokea wakati huo huo.
Tukio hili linaonyesha Wayahudi walikuwa wamekasirika kwasababu walijisikia kuwa Paulo alikuwa amenena kinyume cha Mungu.
Hii inamaanisha "aliwaamuru askari wake ili kumleta Paulo"
ilikuwa imeungana na uwanda wa nje wa hekalu
Kamanda alitaka Paul kuteswa kwa kuchapwa viboko ili kuhakikisha anasema ukweli.
Fungu hili linazungumzia juu ya askari.
Hizi zilikuwa na nyuzi nyuzi za ngozi au mnyama.
Paulo alitumia swali hili kuuliza juu ya uhalali wa kuchapwa kwake viboko. "Si halali kwenu kumpiga mijeledi mtu ambaye ni raia wa Rumi na hajakuhumiwa!"
Swali hili limetumika kuwaomba kamanda kufikiria upya mpango wake wa kumjeledi Paulo. "Hupaswi kufanya hivi!"
Fungu hili linazungumzia habari za Paulo
Neno "kuja" linaweza kuwa na maana ya "kwenda"
"Ilikuwa baada ya kulipa kiasi kikubwa cha pesa katika mamlaka ya Kirumi"
"Nilijipatia uraia" au " Nilipewa uraia"
Baba akiwa raia wa Kirumi, hivyo watoto wake wanakuwa raia wa Kirumi mara wanapozaliwa
Wanaume waliokuwa wamepanga kumwuliza maswali.
Mstari huu unazungumzia jemedari mkuu
afisa wa jeshi mwenye kikosi cha askari wapatao 600
"yawezekana jemedaari mkuu alimfungua Paulo minyororo." au Mkuu wa jeshi aliamuru askari wake kumfungua vifungo Paulo"
Kutoka kwenye ngome, kuna njia ya kutelemka chini mpaka kwenye uwanda wa nje wa hekalu"
1 Paulo akawaangalia moja kwa moja watu wa baraza na kusema, "Ndugu zangu, nimeishi mbele za Mungu kwa dhamira nzuri hadi hivi leo." 2 Kuhani mkuu Anania akawaamuru wale waliosimama karibu naye wampige kinywa chake. 3 Ndipo Paulo akamwambia, "Mungu atakupiga wewe, ukuta uliopakwa chokaa. Umekaa ukinihukumu kwa sheria, nawe unaamuru nipigwe kinyume cha sheria?" 4 Wale waliokuwa wamesimama karibu naye wakasema, "Hivi ndivyo unavyomtukana kuhani mkuu wa Mungu?" 5 Paulo akasema, "ndugu zangu, mimi sikujua kwamba huyu ni kuhani mkuu. Kwa kuwa imeandikwa, hutazungumza vibaya juu ya mtawala wa watu wako." 6 Paulo alipoona ya kwamba upande mmoja wa baraza ni Masadukayo na wengine Mafarisayo, akapaza sauti na kusema, "ndugu zangu, mimi ni Mfarisayo, mwana wa Mfarisayo. Ni kwa sababu hii nategemea kwa ujasiri ufufuo wa wafu ninao hukumiwa nao." 7 Alipoyasema haya, malumbano makubwa yakatokea baina ya Mafarisayo na Masadukayo, na mkutano ukagawanyika. 8 Kwani Masadukayo husema hakuna ufufuo, malaika wala hakuna roho, ila Mafarisayo husema haya yote yapo. 9 Ghasia kubwa ikatokea na baadhi ya waandishi waliokuwa upande wa Mafarisayo wakasimama na kujadili, wakisema, "hatujaona chochote kibaya dhidi ya mtu huyu. Vipi kama roho au malaika ameongea na yeye?" 10 Wakati kulitokea hoja kubwa, mkuu wa majeshi aliogopa kwamba Paulo angeraruliwa vipande vipande na wao, hivyo akaamuru wanajeshi washuke chini na kumchukua kwa nguvu kutoka kwa wajumbe wa baraza, na kumleta katika ngome. 11 Usiku uliofuata Bwana alisimama karibu naye na kusema, "Usiogope, kwa kuwa umenishuhudia katika Yerusalemu, hivyo utatoa ushahidi pia katika Roma." 12 Kulipokucha, baadhi ya Wayahudi walifanya agano na kuita laana juu yao wenyewe: walisema ya kwamba hawatakula wala kunywa chochote mpaka watakapomuua Paulo. 13 Kulikuwa na watu zaidi ya arobaini ambao walifanya njama hii. 14 wakaenda kwa wakuu wa makuhani na wazee na kusema, "Tumejiweka wenyewe kwenye laana kuu, tusile chochote hadi tutakapomwua Paulo. 15 Hivyo sasa, baraza limwambie jemadari mkuu amlete kwenu, kana kwamba mnaamua kesi yake kwa usahihi. Kwetu sisi tuko tayari kumwua kabla hajaja hapa." 16 Lakini mtoto wa dada yake na Paulo akasikia kwamba kulikuwa na njama, akaenda akaingia ndani ya ngome na kumwambia Paulo. 17 Paulo akamwita akida mmoja akasema, "Mchukue kijana huyu kwa jemadari; maana ana neno la kumwambia." 18 Basi akida akamchukua yule kijana akampeleka kwa jemedari mkuu akamwambia, "Paulo yule mfungwa aliniita akataka nikuletee kijana huyu kwako. Ana neno la kukuambia." 19 Yule jemadari mkuu akamshika kwa mkono akajitenga naye kando, na akamwuliza, "Ni kitu gani unachotaka kuniambia?" 20 Kijana yule akasema, "Wayahudi wamepatana kukuomba umlete Paulo kesho kwenye baraza kana kwamba wanataka kupata habari zake kwa usahili zaidi. 21 Basi wewe usikubali kwa maana watu zaidi ya arobaini wanamvizia. Wamejifunga kwa laana, wasile wala wasinywe hata watakapomwua. Hata sasa wako tayari, wakisubiria kibali toka kwako." 22 Basi yule jemadari mkuu akamwacha kijana aende zake, baada ya kumwagiza "usimwambie mtu yeyote ya kwamba umeniarifu haya." 23 Akawaita maakida wawili akasema watayarisheni askari mia mbili kwenda Kaisaria na askari wapanda farasi sabini, na wenye mikuki mia mbili, mtaondoka zamu ya tatu ya usiku. 24 Akawaambia kuweka wanyama tayari ambaye Paulo atamtumia na kumchukua salama kwa Feliki Gavana. 25 Akaandika barua kwa namna hii, 26 Klaudio Lisia kwa Liwali mtukufu Feliki, salamu. 27 Mtu huyu alikamatwa na wayahudi wakawa karibu kumwua, ndipo nikaenda pamoja na kikosi cha askari nikamwokoa, nilipopata habari ya kuwa yeye ni raia wa kirumi. 28 Nilitaka kujua kwa nini wamemshtaki, hivyo nikampeleka kwenye baraza. 29 Nikaona kwamba alikuwa ameshitakiwa kwa ajili ya maswali ya sheria yao, wala hakushitakiwa neno lolote la kustahili kuuawa wala kufungwa. 30 Kisha ikajulikana kwangu kwamba kuna njama dhidi yake, hivyo kwa haraka nikamtuma kwako, na kuwaagiza wanaomshitaki pia walete mashitaka dhidi yake mbele yako. Wakaagana." 31 Basi wale askari wakatii amri: wakamchukua Paulo wakampeleka hata Antipatri usiku. 32 Siku iliyofuata, maaskari wengi wakawaacha wale wapanda farasi waende pamoja naye, nao wakarudi zao ngomeni. 33 Na wapanda farasi walipofika Kaisaria, na kumpa liwali ile barua, wakamweka Paulo mbele yake. 34 Naye liwali alipoisoma barua, alimuuliza Paulo alitokea jimbo gani; alipojua ya kwamba ni mtu wa Kilikia, 35 akasema, "Nitakusikia wewe watakapo kuja wale waliokushitaki," akaamuru awekwe katika ikulu ya Herode.
Tafsiri zingine zinanukuu kutoka Agano la Kale kwenye kulia kwa ukurasa kuliko maandiko yote kwa jumla. ULB hufanya hivi kupitia kilichonukuliwa katika 23:5
Wafarisayo waliamini kwamba baada ya watu kufa, wangefufuka tena na Mungu awazawadie ama awaadhibu. Wasadukayo waliamini kwamba pindi watu wanapokufa,hawangefufuka. and )
Wayahudi wengine waliahidi Mungu kutokula ama kunywa mpaka Paulo auliwe na wakamuomba Mungu awaadhibu kama hawangetekeleza ahadi yao.
Warumi walidhani Kwmaba ni Warumi pekee yao waliostahili kuhudumiwa kwa haki. Wangewatenda watakavyo wale ambao hawakuwa raia wa Urumi lakini kwa Warumi waliwatendea kufuata sheria. Watu wamojf walizaliwa raia wa Roma na wengine wakalipa pesa serikali ya Warumi ili wawe raia. "Kiranja Mkuu" angeadhibiwa kwa kuwatendea raia wa Urumi sawa wale wasiokuwa raia.
Hii ni mfano ya kawaida katika Maandiko matakatifu inayoonyesha mtu kuwa mzuri au kitu kuwa kizuri na safi ama mwenye haki lakini yule mtu ni mwovu ama amejinajisi ama si wa haki.
Paulo anasimama mbele ya wakuu wa makuhani na wajumbe wa baraza.
Hii ina maana " Wayahudi."
"Mimi najua kuwa hata leo nimefanya kila kitu Mungu alichotaka mimi kufanya"
Ni mtu tofauti na Anania anayetajwa sura ya 5:3
Inamaanisha ukuta uliopakwa chokaa ili uonekane kuwa safi. Paulo anamwambia Anania kuwa anaonekana safi kama ukuta uliopakwa chokaa lakini ndani kumejaa uovu.
Paulo anatumia swali ili kumdhihirisha Anania kuwa ni mnafiki.
wanaume walitumia swali hili kumkemea Paul kwa nini alisema. "Usimtusi Kuhani Mkuu wa Mungu!
Paul ananukuu mambo ambayo Musa aliandika katika sheria. Hii inaweza kuwa: "Kwa maana Musa aliandika katika sheria"
Hapa "Ndugu zangu" maana yake "Wayahudi wenzake"
Hapa "mwana" maana yake yeye ni mwana halisi wa Farisayo na pia mtoto wa farisayo. "baba na mababa zake walikuwa mafarisayo"
neno "ufufuo" linaweza kumaanisha "kurudi kwenye maisha." kivumishi cha jina "wafu" inaweza kuwa "wale waliokufa." "Mimi kwa ujasiri nakubali wale waliokufa watarejea katika maisha"
"Mnanihukumu juu ya jambo hili"
"watu katika umati kwa nguvu hawakukubaliana wao kwa wao"
Hii ni taarifa za msingi kuhusu Masadukayo na Mafarisayo.
"Walianza kupiga kelele kwa sauti kubwa miongoni mwao." neno "hivyo" inaelezea tukio lililotokea kwa sababu ya kitu kingine kilichotokea hapo awali. Katika kesi hiyo, tukio liliopita ni la Paulo kuzungumzia imani yake juu ya ufufuo.
Mafarisayo wanawakemea Masadukayo na kudhibitisha kwamba roho na malaika wapo na wanaweza kuzungumza na watu. "Labda roho au malaika amesema naye!"
Neno "mabishano makali" linaweza kuwa "Mwanzo wa vurugu"
Afisa wa jeshi la Kirumi au kiongozi wa askari wapatao 600.
Inamaanisha Paulo angeweza kuraruliwa vipande na kusababusha maumivu ya mwili.
"kutumia nguvu za kimwili kumwondoa mahali pale"
Ngome ilikuwa imeunganika na uwanda wa nje wa hekalu.
Hii ina maana usiku baada ya siku Paulo alipokwenda mbele ya Baraza. "Usiku huo"
maneno "kuhusu mimi" yameeleweka. "kutoa ushuhuda juu yangu katika Roma" au "kutoa ushuhuda juu yangu katika Roma"
Wakati Paulo akiwa kifungoni kwenye ngome, Wayahudi wasioamini waliapa kumwua.
"kufanya nadhiri" au "kuapa mbele za Mungu"
Ni makubaliano ya kawaida ya kufanya jambo fulani.
Neno "laana" Walimwomba Mungu awalaani hama wasingetimiza nadhili yao
wanaume 40
"ambao alipanga kumuua Paulo"
kuapa na kumwomba Mungu ili awalaani kama hawatatimiza nadhiri zao ni kusema kana kwamba laana ilikuwa kitu walichokibeba juu ya mabega yao. Sisi tumeapa tusile chochote hata tumwue Paulo na tumemwomba Mungu pia atulaani kama hatuwezi kufanya kile tulicho ahidi kufanya"
Hii haina maana "wakati huu," lakini imetumika kuweka umakini kwa hatua muhimu ifuatayo.
Neno 'kwahiyo" linaonyesha kuna ujumbe uliotangulia kusemwa awali.
"Mlete Paulo kutoka ngomeni ili akutane nawe hapa"
"kana kwamba mnataka kujifunza zaidi juu ya kile Paulo amekifanya"
"walikuwa tayari kwa kumshambulia Paulo" au "walikuwa wakisubiri kumwua Paulo"
Ngome ilikuwa imeunganishwa na uwanda wa nje wa hekalu.
Mfungwa Paulo ameniomba kuja kuzungumza nawe.
Jemedari mkuu alimshika kijana mkono na kwenda naye kando, hii inaonyesha kijana yule alikuwa mpwa wa Paulo mwenye umri wa kati ya miaka 12 hadi 15.
Hii haina maana Wayahudi wote. "Baadhi ya Wayahudi wamepatana"
"kumleta Paul chini kutoka kwenye ngome"
"wanataka kujifunza zaidi juu ya nini Paulo amefanya"
"wanaume 40"
"tayari kumwotea Paulo" au tayari kumwua Paulo"
"Wao walikuwa wameapa kutokula wala kunywa chochote mpaka wamemwua Paulo. Na kumwambia Mungu awalaani kama hawatafanya walichoahidi kufanya"
Felix aliyekuwa mkazi wa Kaisaria alikuwa ni Gavana wa sehemu ya Rumi
"aliwaita yeye mwenyewe"
Maakida wake wawili
"Wapanda farasi 70"
"Askari 200 ambao wanajilinda kwa mikuki"
Hii ilikuwa yapata 9:00 usiku.
Jemedari mkuu anaandika barua kwa Gavana Feliki kuhusu kukamatwa kwa Paulo.
Hii ni njia rasmi ya mwanzo wa barua. Mkuu wa jeshi akimaanisha mwenyewe katika nafsi ya tatu. Nina andika kwa Klaudio Lisia, wewe mheshimiwa Liwali Feliki salamu kwako"
Feliki alikuwa mtawala wa Kirumi aliyejitakia heshima kuu
Hapa "Wayahudi" maana yake "baadhi ya Wayahudi." Hii inaweza ikasemwa: "Baadhi ya Wayahudi walimtia mbaroni mtu huyo"
"walikuwa tayari kumwua Paulo
Nilikuwa pamoja na maaskari wangu pale Paulo alipokuwa pamoja na Wayahudi
"mimi" inahusu Klaudio Lisia.
Walikuwa wakumtuhumu kwa kumwuliza maswali.
Maneno "mauti" au "kifungo" yanaweza kuwa; hakukuwa na kitu kinyume cha mamlaka ya Kirumi cha kumwua ama kumtupa gerezani.
"Baadaye nilikuja kubaini"
neno "hivyo" linaweka alama kuwa tukio hilo lilitokea kwasababu ya kitu kingine kilichotokea hapo awali. Katika kesi hiyo, tukio lililopita ni mkuu wa jeshi kuamuru maaskari kumsindikiza Paulo.
Hapa "kuleta" inaweza kutafsiriwa kama "chukua". "walimpata Paulo na kumpeleka wakati wa usiku"
"Alimwuliza Paulo mkoa gani aliotokea?"
"wakati liwali alipotambua kuwa Paulo alikuwa ametoka mkoa wa Kilikia, liwali alisema." Hii yaweza tajwa kama nukuu ya moja kwa moja. "Paulo alisema, 'Mimi nimetokea Kilikia.' Kisha liwali akasema"
"Nitakusikiliza kwa yale yote utakayo yasema"
Hii inaweza ikasemwa: "akaamuru askari amweke Paulo" au "akamwamuru askari amtunze Paulo"
1 Baada ya siku tano, Anania kuhani mkuu, baadhi ya wazee na msemaji mmoja aitwaye Tertulo, wakaenda pale. Watu hawa wameleta mashtaka dhidi ya Paulo kwa gavana. 2 Paulo alipo simama mbele ya gavana, Tertulo akaanza kumshitaki na kusema kwa gavana, "kwa sababu yako tuna amani kuu; na kwa maono yako yanaleta mageuzi mazuri katika taifa letu; 3 basi kwa shukurani yote tunapokea kila kitu ukifanyacho, Wasalam mheshimiwa Feliki. 4 Lakini nisikuchoshe zaidi, nakusihi unisikilize maneno machache kwa fadhili zako. 5 Kwa maana tumempata mtu huyu mkorofi, na anasababisha Wayahudi wote kuasi duniani. Tena ni kiongozi wa madhehebu ya Wanazorayo. (Zingatia: Sehemu ya maneno ya mstari huu 24: 6 6 Na tena alijaribu kulitia hekalu unajisi hivyo tukamkamata., haumo kwenye nakala bora za kale). (Zingatia: Mstari huu 7 Lisiasi, afisa, alikuja na akamchukua kwa nguvu mikononi mwetu., haumo kwenye nakala bora za maandiko ya kale). 8 Ukimwuliza Paulo kuhusu mambo haya, hata utaweza kujifunza ni kitu gani tumemshtakia." 9 Wayahudi nao wakamshtaki Paulo, wakisema kwamba haya mambo yalikuwa kweli. 10 Liwali alipompungia mkono ili Paulo aongee, Paulo alijibu, "Ninajua ya kwamba kwa miaka mingi umekua mwamuzi wa taifa hili, na nina furaha kujieleza mwenyewe kwako. 11 Waweza kuhakikisha kuwa hazijapita siku zaidi ya kumi na mbili tangu nilipopanda kwenda kuabudu Yerusalemu. 12 Na waliponikuta katika hekalu, sikubishana na mtu yeyote, na sikufanya fujo katika mkutano, wala katika masinagogi wala ndani ya mji; 13 na wala hawawezi kuhakikisha kwako mashitaka wanayoyashitaki dhidi yangu. 14 Ila nakiri hili kwako, ya kwamba kwa njia ile ambayo wanaiita dhehebu, kwa njia iyo hiyo ninamtumikia Mungu wa baba zetu. Mimi ni mwaminifu kwa yote yaliyoko kwenye sheria na maandiko ya manabii. 15 Nina ujasiri ule ule kwa Mungu ambao hata hao nao wanaungojea, kuja kwa ufufuo wa wafu, kwa wote wenye haki na wasio na haki pia; 16 na kwa hili, ninafanya kazi ili niwe na dhamira isiyo na hatia mbele za Mungu na mbele ya watu kupitia mambo yote. 17 Sasa Baada ya miaka mingi nimekuja kuleta msaada kwa taifa langu na zawadi ya fedha. 18 Nilipofanya hivi, Wayahudi fulani wa Asia wakanikuta ndani ya sherehe ya utakaso ndani ya hekalu, bila kundi la watu wala ghasia. 19 Watu hawa ambao imewapasa kuwapo mbele yako sasa hivi na waseme kile walichonacho juu yangu kama wana neno lo lote. 20 Au watu hawa wenyewe na waseme ni kosa gani waliloliona kwangu niliposimama mbele za baraza la kiyahudi; 21 isipokuwa kwa ajili ya kitu kimoja nilichokisema kwa sauti niliposimama katikati yao, ' ni kwa sababu ya ufufuo wa wafu ninyi mnanihukumu."' 22 Feliki alikuwa ametaarifiwa vizuri kuhusu njia, na akauahirisha mkutano. Akasema, "Lisia jemedari atakapokuja chini kutoka Yerusalemu nitatoa maamuzi dhidi ya mashitaka yenu." 23 Ndipo akamwamuru akida amlinde Paulo, ila awe na nafasi na hata asiwepo mtu wakuwakataza marafiki zake wasimsaidie wala wasimtembelee. 24 Baada ya siku kadhaa, Feliki akarudi na Drusila mkewe aliyekuwa Myahudi, akatuma kumwita Paulo na akasikiliza toka kwake habari za imani ndani ya Kristo Yesu. 25 Ila Paulo alipokuwa akijadiliana naye kuhusu haki, kuwa na kiasi na hukumu itakayokuja, Feliki akapata hofu akajibu, "nenda mbali kwa sasa, ila nikipata muda tena, nitakuita." 26 Muda uo huo, alitegemea kwamba Paulo atampa fedha kwa hiyo alimwita mara nyingi akaongea naye. 27 Ila miaka miwili ilipopita, Porkio Festo akawa Liwali baada ya Feliki, ila Feliki alitaka kujipendekeza kwa Wayahudi, hivyo akamwacha Paulo chini ya uangalizi.
Paulo alimwambia mkuu wa mkoa kwamba hakutenda tukio aliloshtakiwa na Wayahudi na kwa hivyo asimwadhibu kwa asilotenda.
Viongozi wote Wayahudi (Matendo 24:2-4) na Paulo walianza kutoa hotuba zao wakitumia maneno yakudhihirisha heshima kwa mkuu wa mkoa.
Maneno "mkuu wa mkoa", Kamanda," na "akida" yanaweza kuwa magumu kutafsiri katika lugha nyingine.
Paulo sasa yuko kwenye misukosuko. Tertulo anawasilisha mashitaka kwa Liwali Feliki dhidi ya Paul.
"Siku tano baada ya askari wa Kirumi kumchukua Paul kwenda Kaisaria"
Angalia jinsi gani unaweza kulitafasiri katika 23:1
"mwanasheria." Tertulo alikuwa mtaalam wa sheria ya Kirumi. Alikuwa huko kumshtaki Paul mahakamani.
Hili ni jina la mtu mwanamume.
"alienda Kaisaria ambako Paulo alikuwa"
"mbele ya Gavana ambaye alikuwa jaji wa mahakama"
"alianza kuleta ukiukwaji wa sheria ya Kirumi dhidi yake"
"sisi, raia tulio chini ya utawala wa Felix tuna amani kubwa"
"na kupitia mipango yako mizuri imeleta mabadiliko makubwa katika taifa letu"
Angalia jinsi gani unaweza kuitafasili katika
"na mipango yako imeboresha sana taifa letu"
Angalia jinsi gani unaweza kuitafasili katika 23:25
Fungu hili linazungumzia juu ya Anania, baadhi ya wazee na Tetulo
Maana inawezekana ni 1) "ili mimi nisichukue sana muda wako" au 2) "Hivyo kwamba nisikufunge."
"kusikiliza hotuba yangu fupi"
neno "sisi" inamaanisha Anania, wazee kadhaa na Tertulo. "sisi tulimshuhudia Paulo" au "tuligundua kwamba Paulo chazo cha matatizo"
neno "wote" hapa ni kuongezewa chumvi kama kisingizio cha kumshtaki Paulo. "Wayahudi wote duniani kote"
Neno "dhehebu la Wanazarayo" ni jina jingine kwa wakristo "Mtu huyu anaongoza makundi ya watu wafuasi wa madhehebu ya Wanazarayo""
hili ni kundi dogo ya watu ndani ya kundi kubwa. Tertulo anaona Wakristo kuwa kundi dogo ndani ya Uyahudi.
Tertulo anamaliza kuwasilisha mashtaka ya Paulo kwa Gavana Feliki.
"kumshtaki Paulo kwa kufanya" au "kumshtaki Paulo kwa kuwa na hatia ya kufanya"
Hii inamaana ya viongozi wa Wayahudi waliokuwa pale katika kesi ya Paulo.
Paul anaitikia kwa Gavana Feliki kuhusu mashtaka yaliyowasilishwa dhidi yake.
"gavana akitoa ishara"
Neno "taifa" linamaanisha watu wa taifa la Kiyahudi. "Mwamuzi wa wa watu wa taifa la Wayahudi"
"Kuielezea hali yangu"
"unauwezo wa kufuatilia na kuthibitisha"
"Siku 12 tangu"
Neno "kuhamasisha" ni kuwafanya watu wasiwe na utulivu"
"Lawama juu ya matendo maovu" au "mashitaka ya uharifu"
"Mimi nakiri hili kwako" au "ninatubu hili kwako"
"wanaita kundi la wazushi"
Hii inamaana kwamba Paulo anadai kufuata dini ya kale, ambayo kwa ufafanuzi si dini mpya, "madhehebu."
Hapa "watu hawa" inahusu Wayahudi ambao ndio wanamtuhumu Paulo mahakamani.
neno "ufufuo" linaweza kutumika kama "Kurudishwa katika maisha na Mungu." Na, neno "wafu" linaweza kuwa "wale waliokufa." "wakati Mungu akiwarudisha katika uhai wale wote waliokuwa wamekufa"
"wale waliofanya mambo mabaya"
"Nafanyakazi vizuri"
Hapa "dhamiri" inahusu maadili ndani ya mtu kuwa akiamua kati ya mema na mabaya. "kuwa bila lawama" au "daima kutenda haki"
"Katika uwepo wa Mungu"
neno hili linaweka alama ya kuhama kutoka katika hoja ya Paulo. Hapa anaanza kuelezea hali katika Yerusalemu wakati baadhi ya Wayahudi walipomweka Paulo nguvuni.
"baada ya miaka mingi kutoka Yerusalemu"
Hapa "nilikuja" inaweza kutafsiriwa kama "Nilikwenda." "Nilikwenda kusaidia watu wangu kwa kuwapelekea fedha kama zawadi"
"katika hekalu baada ya kumaliza sherehe ya kujitakasa mwenyewe"
Hii yaweza tajwa kama kauli mpya. "Mimi nilikuwa sijakusanya umati wala sikujaribu kuanzisha ghasia"
"Wayahudi kutoka Asia"
"Kama wana jambo lolote la kusema"
Paul alimaliza kumjibu Gavana Feliki kuhusu mashtaka yaliyowasilishwa dhidi yake.
Hii ina maana ya wajumbe wa baraza ambao walikuwepo Kaisaria katika kesi ya Paulo.
"waseme iwapo kuna kitu kibaya nilikifanya na kukithibitisha"
neno "ufufuo" linaweza kutumika kama "Kurudishwa katika maisha na Mungu." Na, neno "wafu" linaweza kuwa "wale waliokufa." "wakati Mungu akiwarudisha katika uhai wale wote waliokuwa wamekufa"
hii inaweza semwa kama "mnanihukumu mimi leo hii"
Felix alikuwa Gavana wa Kirumi katika eneo la mji wa Kaisaria.
Hili lilijuwa jina jingine la ukristo.
"wakati Lisia mkuu wa kikosi anakuja chini" au "muda Lisia mkuu wa kikosi anakuja chini"
"Nitafanya uamuzi kuhusu shutuma hizo dhidi yako" au "nitatoa hukumu kama wewe una hatia"
"Paulo anapewa uhuru si vinginevyo ni miongoni mwa wafungwa"
"Baada ya siku kadhaa"
Drusila ni jina la mwanamke.
Hii ina maana Myahudi wa kike. "ambaye alikuwa Myahudi"
Felix inaweza kuwa aliona uthibitisho wa dhambi zake.
"kwa wakati huu wa sasa"
Feliki alikuwa na matumaini Paul atatoa rushwa ili amwachie huru.
"hivyo Feliki mara nyingi alimwagizia Paulo aletwe azungumza naye"
Huyu alikua Gavana mpya wa Rumi aliyechukua nafasi ya Feliki.
Hapa "Wayahudi" inamaanisha viongozi wa Wayahudi. "alitaka viongozi wa Wayahudi wampende"
"alimwacha Paulo gerezani"
1 Ndipo Festo alipoingia katika jimbo hilo na baada ya siku tatu alienda toka Kaisaria hadi Yerusalemu. 2 Kuhani mkuu na Wayahudi mashuhuri walileta shutuma dhidi ya Paulo kwa Festo, na walizungumza kwa nguvu kwa Festo. 3 Na walimwomba Festo fadhili juu ya habari za Paulo apate kumwita Yerusalemu ili waweze kumwua njiani. 4 Lakini Festo alijibu kwamba Paulo alikuwa mfungwa katika Kaisaria, na kwamba yeye mwenyewe atarudi huko haraka. 5 Alisema "Kwa hiyo, wale ambao wanaweza, wanaweza kwenda huko na sisi. Kama kuna kitu kibaya kwa mtu huyu, mnapaswa kumshtaki." 6 Baada ya kukaa siku nane au kumi zaidi, akarudi Kaisaria. Na siku iliyofuata akakaa katika kiti cha hukumu na kuamuru Paulo aletwe kwake. 7 Alipofika, Wayahudi kutoka Yerusalemu wakasimama karibu, Wakatoa mashtaka mengi mazito ambayo hawakuweza kuyathibitisha. 8 Paulo alijitetea na kusema, 'Si dhidi ya jina la Wayahudi, si juu ya hekalu, na si juu ya Kaisari, nimefanya mabaya.' 9 Lakini Festo alitaka kujipendekeza kwa Wayahudi, na hivyo akamjibu Paulo kwa kusema, 'Je, unataka kwenda Yerusalemu na kuhukumiwa na mimi kuhusu mambo haya huko?' 10 Paulo alisema, 'ninasimama mbele ya kiti cha hukumu cha Kaisari ambapo napaswa kuhukumiwa. Sijawakosea Wayahudi, kama wewe ujuavyo vema. 11 Ikiwa nimekosa na kama nimefanya kinachostahili kifo, sikatai kufa. Lakini kama shutuma zao si kitu, hakuna mtu anaweza kunikabidhi kwao. Ninamwomba Kaisari. ' 12 Baada ya Festo kuongea na baraza akajibu, " unamwomba Kaisari; utaenda kwa Kaisari." 13 Baada ya siku kadhaa, mfalme Agripa na Bernike walifika Kaisaria kufanya ziara rasmi kwa Festo. 14 Baada ya kukaa hapo kwa siku nyingi, Festo aliwasilisha kesi ya Paulo kwa mfalme; Akasema, 'Mtu mmoja aliachwa hapa na Feliki kama mfungwa. 15 Nilipokuwa Yerusalemu makuhani wakuu na wazee wa Wayahudi walileta mashtaka juu ya mtu huyu kwangu, nao waliuliza juu ya hukumu dhidi yake. 16 Kwa hili mimi niliwajibu kwamba si desturi ya Waroma kumtoa mtu kwa upendeleo badala yake, mtuhumiwa anapaswa kuwa na nafasi ya kuwakabili washitaki wake na kujitetea dhidi ya tuhuma hizo. 17 Kwa hiyo, walipokuja pamoja hapa, sikuweza kusubiri, lakini siku iliyofuata niliketi katika kiti cha hukumu na kuamuru mtu huyo aletwe ndani. 18 Wakati washitaki waliposimama na kumshtaki, nilifikiri kwamba hakuna mashtaka makubwa yaliyoletwa dhidi yake. 19 Badala yake, walikuwa na mabishano fulani pamoja naye kuhusu dini yao na kuhusu Yesu ambaye alikuwa amekufa, lakini Paulo anadai kuwa yu hai. 20 Nilikuwa nimefumbwa jinsi ya kuchunguza suala hili, na nikamwuliza kama angeenda Yerusalemu kuhukumiwa kuhusu mambo haya. 21 Lakini Paulo alipoitwa awekwe chini ya ulinzi kwa ajili ya uamuzi wa Mfalme, niliamuru awekwe hata nitakapompeleka kwa Kaisari. ' 22 Agripa alizungumza na Festo, "ningependa pia kumsikiliza mtu huyu." "Festo, akasema, "kesho utamsikiliza." 23 Hivyo kesho yake, Agripa na Bernike walifika na sherehe nyingi; walifika katika ukumbi na maafisa wa kijeshi, na watu mashuhuri wa mji. Na Festo alipotoa amri, Paulo aliletwa kwao. 24 Festo akasema, "Mfalme Agripa, na watu wote ambao wapo hapa pamoja nasi, mnamwona mtu huyu; jumuiya yote ya Wayahudi huko Yerusalemu na hapa pia wametaka niwashauri, na wao wakapiga kelele kwangu kwamba asiishi. 25 Naliona kwamba hakufanya lolote linalostahili kifo; lakini kwa sababu amemwita Mfalme, niliamua kumpeleka kwake. 26 Lakini sina kitu dhahiri cha kuandika kwa Mfalme. Kwa sababu hii, nimemleta kwako, hasa kwako wewe, Mfalme Agripa, ili nipate kuwa na kitu cha kuandika kuhusu kesi. 27 kwa kuwa naona haina maana kumpeleka mfungwa na bila kuonyesha mashitaka yanayomkabili.
Neno hili limetumika kwa njia mbili katika sura hii. Wakati viongozi Wa Wayahudi walipomwomba Festus neema, walikuwa wanamuomba kuwafanyia kitu maalum ambacho hajazoea kukifanya. Wakati Festus "alitaka kupata neema ya Wayahudi", alitaka wakuwe kama yeye na wakuwe" tayari kumtii miezi na miaka inayokuja.
Warumi walidhani kwamba ni Warumi pekee yao waliostahili kuhudumiwa kwa haki. Wangewatenda watakavyo wale ambao hawakuwa raia wa Urumi lakini kwa Warumi waliwatendea kufuata sheria. Watu wamoja walizaliwa raia wa Roma na wengine wakalipa pesa serikali ya Warumi ili wawe raia. Wafanyakazi wa serikali wangeadhibiwa kwa kuwatendea raia wa Urumi sawa na wale wasiokuwa raia.
Festo ndiye gavana wa Kaisaria
Neno hili linaonyesha mwanzo wa tukio linalofuata kwenye simulizi.
Inamaanisha 1) Festo aliingia katika eneo au 2) Festo aliingia kwenye eneo ili kuanza kutawala
Hii inamaanisha 1) kwenda juuinaonesha umuhimu wa Yerusalemu au 2) alikwenda mpaka juu kwa kuwa Yerusalemu ipo kilimani.
"kumshtaki Paulo kwa kuvunja sheria"
"walimbembeleza Festo"
"kwamba Festo atamuita Paulo..... ili Wayahudi wamuue"
Anaweza kumtuma
Watamvamia Paulo na kumuua akiwa njiani
Paulo ni mfungwa Kaisaria na mimi mwenyewe ntarejea huko baada ya muda mfupi.
Kama Paulo amefanya jambo lolte baya.
"Unaweza kuleta mashtaka" au "unaweza kumshataki kwa kuvunja sheria"
Baada ya Festo kukaa
" kukaa juu ya kiti ili afanye kazi ya hakimu"
"kwamba wamlete Paulo kwake"
"Paulo alipofika na kusimama mbele ya Festo"
"sheria ya wayahudi"
Paulo alisema hajavunja sheria yoyote kuhusu nani aingie kwenye hekalu la Yerusalemu. "siyo dhidi ya sheria za kuingia hekalini"
Alitaka kuwaridhisha wayahudi
"Ntakapokuhukumu kutokana na mashitaka haya"
"Ni sehemu gani ambapo wewe itanihukumu"
Paulo akaendelea kuongea na Festo
"ikiwa nimefanya jambo baya la kustahili adhabu ya kifo"
"ikiwa mashitaka yao juu yangu si ya kweli"
Hii inamaanisha 1) Festo hana mamlaka ya kisheria ya kumkabidhi Pailo kwa waliomshaki mashitaka ya uongo au 2) Paulo alisema kwamba kama hajafanya kosa lolote basi gavana asisikilize maombi ya Wayahudi.
"Naomba kwamba niende mbele ya Kaisari ili nisikilizwe"
Hili ni baraza la kisiasa la serikali ya Roma. "Festo aliongea na washauri wa serikali yake"
Festo akaanza kuelezea kesi ya Paulo kwa mfalme Agripa.
Neno hili linaonyesha mwanzo wa tukio jipya kwenye simulizi.
Agripa alikua mfalme aliyetawala wakati huo na Bernike alikuwa dada yake.
"kumtembelea Festo kuhusu masuala ya kiofisi.
Wakati Felix akiacha ofisi alimuacha mtu gerezani.
Neno hili linanyesha maelezo ya kilichosemwa kabla. Hivyo Festo alisema mtu aliyeshitakiwa anatakiwa awakabili washitaki wake na kujitetea.
"wakati viongozi wa Kiyahudi walipokuja kuonana na mimi hapa"
"Nilikaa juu ya kiti ambacho nilifanya kazi ya hakimu"
"Niliamuru askari wamlete Paulo mbele yangu"
Neno "dini" linamaanisha mfumo wa imani ya watu juu ya maisha na nguvu.
"ambapo baraza la Wayahudi wataamua kama anamakosa kuhusu masitaka haya"
Festo akamaliza kuelezea kesi ya Paulo kwa mfalme Agripa
"Niliwaambia maaskari wamuweke garezani"
"Festo akasema, 'ntapanga ili usikilize Paulo kesho"
"Walimpeleka Paulo mbele zao"
"Wayahudi waliongea na mimi kwa nguvu"
Maelezo haya yanaweka mkazo wa kinyume cha kusema "afe maramoja"
Festo akaendelea kuongea na Mfalme Agripa
" Nimemleta Paulo kwenu nyote lakini hasa kwako Mfalme Agripa"
"ili nipate cha ziada cha kuandika" au "ili nijue niandike nini"
"itakuwa na maana nikimpeleka mfungwa na kuonyesha mashtaka yanayomkabili"
inamaanisha kuwa 1) mashitaka yaliyoletwa juu yake na viongozi wa Kiyahudi au 2) mashitaka chini ya sheria za Roma yanayoelezea kesi ya Paulo.
1 Hivyo, Agripa akamwambia Paulo, `Unaruhusiwa kujitetea. ' Ndipo Paulo akanyoosha mkono wake akajitetea hivi. 2 "Najiona mwenye furaha, Mfalme Agripa, ili kufanya kesi yangu mbele yako leo dhidi ya mashtaka yote ya Wayahudi. 3 Hasa, kwa sababu wewe ni mtaalamu wa desturi za Wayahudi na maswali. Hivyo naomba unisikilize kwa uvumilivu. 4 Kweli, Wayahudi wote wanajua jinsi nilivyoishi tangu ujana wangu katika taifa langu huko Yerusalemu. 5 Wananijua tangu mwanzo na wanapaswa kukubali kwamba niliishi kama Mfarisayo, dhehebu lenye msimamo mkali kwenye dini yetu. 6 Sasa nimesimama hapa nihukumiwe kwa sababu mimi naliangalia ahadi ambayo Mungu aliifanya na baba zetu. 7 Hii ni ahadi ambayo makabila yetu kumi na mbili yanatumaini kupokea kama wakimwabudu Mungu kwa bidii usiku na mchana. Ni kwa ajili ya tumaini hili, mfalme Agripa, kwamba Wayahudi wananishitaki. 8 Kwa nini yeyote kati yenu anafikiri ni ajabu kwamba Mungu hufufua wafu? 9 Wakati mmoja nilifikiria mwenyewe kwamba ningefanya mambo mengi dhidi ya jina la Yesu wa Nazareti. 10 Nilifanya haya katika Yerusalemu; Niliwafunga waamini wengi gerezani, na nilikuwa na mamlaka kutoka kwa wakuu wa makuhani kufanya hivyo; na wakati wanauawa, nilipiga kura dhidi yao. 11 Mara nyingi niliwaadhibu katika masinagogi yote na nilijaribu kuwafanya waikane imani yao. Nilikuwa na hasira sana juu yao na niliwafukuza hata katika miji ya ugenini. 12 Wakati nilipokuwa nikifanya haya, nilienda Dameski, nikiwa na mamlaka na maagizo kutoka kwa makuhani wakuu; 13 nilipokuwa njiani wakati wa mchana, Mfalme, niliona mwanga kutoka mbinguni uliokuwa mkali kuliko jua na uling'aa kutuzunguka mimi na watu waliokuwa wakisafiri pamoja nami. 14 Sisi sote tulipoanguka chini, nalisikia sauti ikizungumza na mimi ikisema katika lugha ya Kiebrania: `Sauli, Sauli! Kwa nini unanitesa? Ni vigumu kwako kuupiga teke mchokoo. 15 Ndipo nikasema, 'Wewe ni nani, Bwana?' Bwana akajibu, 'Mimi ni Yesu ambaye unanitesa. 16 Sasa inuka usimame kwa miguu yako; sababu kwa kusudi hili mimi nimeonekana kwako, nimekuteua kuwa mtumishi na shahidi juu ya mambo ambayo unajua kuhusu mimi sasa na mambo nitakayokuonyesha baadaye; 17 na Nitakuokoa kutoka kwa watu na watu wa Mataifa ambapo ninakutuma, 18 kufungua macho yao na kuwatoa gizani kwenda kwenye mwanga na kutoka kwenye nguvu za shetani wamgeukie Mungu; ili wapate kupokea kutoka kwa Mungu msamaha wa dhambi na urithi ambao nimewapa wale niliowatenga kwa imani iliyo kwangu. 19 Hivyo, mfalme Agripa, sikuweza kuasi maono ya mbinguni, 20 lakini, kwa wale walio katika Dameski kwanza, na kisha Yerusalemu na nchi yote ya Yudea, na pia kwa watu wa mataifa mengine, nilihubiri kwamba watubu na kumgeukia Mungu, wafanye matendo yanayostahili toba. 21 Kwa sababu hiyo Wayahudi walinikamata hekaluni, wakajaribu kuniua. 22 Mungu amenisaidia mpaka sasa, hivyo nasimama na kushuhudia kwa watu wa kawaida na kwa wale wakubwa juu ya yale ambayo manabii na Musa walisema yatatokea na si vingine; 23 kwamba Kristo lazima atateseka na atakuwa wa kwanza kufufuka kutoka kwa wafu na kutangaza mwanga kwa Wayahudi na watu wa mataifa. 24 Paulo alipomaliza kujitetea, Festo alisema kwa sauti kubwa, 'Paulo, wewe ni mwendawazimu! masomo yako yamekufanya uwe mwendawazimu. 25 Lakini Paulo akasema, Mimi si mwendawazimu, mheshimiwa Festo; lakini kwa ujasiri nasema maneno ya ukweli mtupu. 26 Kwa kuwa mfalme anajua kuhusu mambo haya; na hivyo, ninaongea kwa uhuru kwake, kwa maana nina hakika kwamba hakuna lolote lililofichwa kwake; kwa kuwa hili halijafanywa pembeni. 27 Je, unaamini manabii, Mfalme Agripa? Najua kwamba unaamini. ' 28 Agripa akamwambia Paulo, 'Kwa muda mfupi unaweza kunishawishi mimi na kunifanya Mkristo? 29 Paulo akasema, '"Namwomba Mungu kwamba, kwa muda mfupi au mrefu, si wewe tu, bali pia wote wanaonisikia leo, wawe kama mimi, lakini bila hii minyororo ya gerezani." 30 Ndipo mfalme alisimama, na liwali, na Bernike pia, na wale waliokuwa wamekaa pamoja nao, 31 walipoondoka ukumbini, walizungumzia wao kwa wao na kusema, 'Mtu huyu hastahili kifo wala kifungo.' 32 Agripa akamwambia Festo, "Mtu huyu angeweza kuwekwa huru kama asingekata rufani kwa Kaisari."
Hii ni mara ya tatu kwa kusema habari ya kubadilishwa kwa Paulo. Hii ni kwa sababu hili ni tukio muhimu kwenye Kanisa la awali. Kuna mara tatu ya kusema kubadilishwa kwa Paulo. (Tazama: Matendo 9 na 22)
Paulo alimwelezea Mfalme Agripa kwa nini alikitenda alichokitenda na ya kwamba mkuu wa mkoa asimuadhibu kwa hicho.
Kila mara Biblia huzungumzia watu wasiokuwa waadilifu, watu wasiotenda yanayompendeza Mungu kana kwamba wanatembea gizani. Inazungumzia mwanga kama kinachowawezesha wenye dhambi kuwa waadilifu baada ya kugundua kwamba wanachofanya si kizuri na kumheshimu Mungu.
Festo alimpeleka Paulo mbele ya Mfalme Agripa. Kwenye mstari wa pili Paulo anaanza kutoa utetezi wake kwa Mfalme Agripa.
"ilinyoosha mkono wake mbele ya makutano ili apate umakini wao"
Akaakza kujitetea mwenyewe dhidi ya mashitaka"
Paulo alikuwa na furaha akatumia kuwepo kwake mbele ya Agripa kama nafasi ya kuongea juu ya injili.
Inamaniisha 1)Mafarisayo walikua na Paulo na walimfahamu kama Mfarisayo au 2)"Paulo alijulikana sana kwa Wayahudi
Ina maanisha 1) kwa watu wake mwenyewe sio lazima wawe kwenye eneo la Israeli au 2) kwenye ardhi ya Israeli.
Paulo alitumia maneno haya kuonesha utetezi mwingine.
"Nipo hapa waliponiweka ili nihukumiwe"
Paulo ana matumaini na kuja kwa Mesia.
"Tunaamini kuwa tutapokea ahadi ambayo Mungu ametuahidi"
Paulo alisema haya ili kumfanya Agripa aunganishe aliyoyasema Paulo na ambacho Agripa alikiamini juu ya Mungu anavyoweza kufufua wafu. "Wewe mwenyewe unaamini kuwa Mungu anaweza kufufua wafu"
Paulo alitumia maneno haya kuonesha utetezzi wake mwingine. Sasa anaelezea alivyokuwa anawatesa watakatifu.
neno "jina" linasimama kwa ujumbe wa Yesu. "kinyume na ujumbe wa Yesu"
"Kupiga kura ili kuwaadhibu"
Inamaanisha 1)Paulo aliwaadhibu baadhi ya waamini mara nyingi au 2) Paulo aliwaadhibu waamini mbalimbali.
Paulo alitumia maneno haya kuonesha ushahidi mwingine. sasa anaelezea namna Yesu alipomuita toka kwenye kuwatesa watakatifu na kumfuata yeye.
neno hili limetumika kuonesha matukio mawili yanayotokea kwa wakati mmoja. Hapa Paulo alikuwa anawatesa watakatifu alipokuwa akienda Dameski.
Paulo alikuwa na barua toka kwa viongozi wa kiyahudi wakimpa mamlaka ya kuwatesa waamini wa Kiyahudi.
Mungu anafananisha kukataa kwa Paulo kuhusu mipango ya Mungu na ng'ombe anayepiga teke fimbo ya mkulima. "ngumu kwako kupambana na maelekezo ya Mungu kwako."
Paulo aliendelea kutoa utetezi wake kwa Mfalme Agripa. Kwenye mistari hii aliendelea kunukuu mazungumzo yake na Bwana.
"Nilitengezeza mwenyewe" au "Kuweka wakfu mwenyewe"
Hii inaelezea Imani juu ya Mungu kwa waliotengwa na Mungu kwa ajili yake.
Paulo alimaliza kumnukuu Bwana
Neno hili linanyesha maelezo ya kilichosemwa kabla. Paulo alielezea ambacho Bwana alimuamuru katika maono.
"Nilitii ujumbe niliopewa kwenye maono yaliyotoka mbinguni"
Paulo akamaliza kujitetea kwa Mfalme Agripa
Paulo anamanisha maandishi yaliyokusanywa ya Manabii wa Agano la kale.
"Kwamba kristo atateseka na kufa"
Kutangaza ujumbe wa ukombozi"
"Unaongea upuuz"i au "umechanganyikiwa"
"Mimi ni mzima" au "nina uwezo wa kufikiri vizuri"
"uzito" au "kuhusu jambo lenye uzito"
Naongea kwa uhuru kwa Mfalme Agripa
"Haikufanywa kwa siri"
Paulo alimuuliza swali hili Agripa na Agripa alishaamini waliyosema manabii kuhusu Yesu. "umeshaamini waliyosema manabii wa Kiyahudi Mfalme Agripa!"
Agripa aliuliza hili swali ili kumuonyesha Paulo kwamba haawezi kumshawishi Agripa kirahisi bila kithibitisho. "Unafikiri unaweza kunishawishi kirahisi!"
Kisha Mfalme Agripa akasemama pamoja na Gavana Festo"
1 Ilipoamuliwa kwamba tunatakiwa tusafiri kwa maji kwenda Italia, walimkabidhi Paulo na wafungwa wengine kwa afisa mmoja wa jeshi la Kiroma aliyeitwa Julio, wa Kikosi cha Agustani. 2 Tukapanda meli kutoka Adramitamu, ambayo ilikuwa isafiri kandokando ya pwani ya Asia. Hivyo tukaingia baharini. Aristaka kutoka Thesolanike ya Makedonia akaenda pamoja nasi. 3 Siku iliyofuata tukatua nanga katika mji wa Sidoni, ambapo Julio alimtendea Paulo kwa ukarimu na akamruhusu kwenda kwa rafiki zake kupokea ukarimu wao. 4 Kutoka hapo tukaenda baharini tukasafiri kuzunguka kisiwa cha Kipro ambacho kilikuwa kimeukinga upepo, kwa sababu upepo ulikuwa ukitukabili. 5 Baada ya kuwa tumesafiri katika maji yaliyo karibu na Kilikia na Pamfilia, tukaja Mira, mji wa Lisia. 6 Pale yule afisa wa jeshi la Kiroma, akaikuta meli kutoka Alexandria ambayo ilikuwa isafiri kuelekea Italia. Akatupandisha ndani yake. 7 Baada ya kuwa tumesafiri polepole kwa siku nyingi na hatimaye tukawa tumefika kwa taabu karibu na Kinidas, upepo haukuturuhusu tena kuelekea njia hiyo, hivyo tukasafiri kandokando ya kivuli cha Krete tukiukinga upepo, mkabala na Salmone. 8 Tukasafiri kandokando ya pwani kwa ugumu, mpaka tukafika mahali palipoitwa Fari Haveni ambayo iko karibu na mji wa Lasi. 9 Tulikuwa tumechukua muda mwingi sana, na muda wa mfungo wa Kiyahudi ulikuwa umepita pia, na sasa ilikuwa ni hatari kuendelea kusafiri. Hivyo Paulo akatuonya, 10 na kusema, "Wanaume, naona safari ambayo tunataka tuichukue itakuwa na madhara na hasara nyingi, siyo tu ya mizigo na meli, lakini pia ya maisha yetu." 11 Lakini afisa wa jeshi la Kiroma akamsikiliza zaidi bwana wake na mmiliki wa meli, kuliko mambo yale ambayo yalizungumzwa na Paulo. 12 Kwa sababu bandari haikuwa sehemu rahisi kukaa wakati wa baridi, mabaharia wengi wakashauri tusafiri kutoka pale, ili kwa namna yoyote tukiweza kuufikia mji wa Foinike, tukae pale wakati wa baridi. Foinike ni bandari huko Krete, na inatazama kaskazini mashariki na kusini mashariki. 13 Upepo wa kusini ulipoanza kuvuma polepole, mabaharia wakafikiri wamepata kile ambacho walikuwa wanakihitaji. Wakang'oa nanga na kusafiri kandokando ya Krete karibu na pwani. 14 Lakini baada ya muda mfupi upepo mkali, ulioitwa Wa kaskazini mashariki, ukaanza kutupiga kutoka ng'ambo ya kisiwa. 15 Wakati meli ilipolemewa na kushindwa kuukabili upepo, tukakubaliana na hali hiyo, tukasafirishwa nao. 16 Tukakimbia kupitia ule upande uliokuwa unaukinga upepo wa kisiwa kiitwacho Kauda; na kwa taabu sana tulifanikiwa kuuokoa mtumbwi. 17 Baada ya kuwa wameivuta, walitumia kamba kuifunga meli. Waliogopa kwamba tungeweza kwenda kwenye eneo la mchanga mwingi la Syiti, hivyo wakashusha nanga na waliendeshwa kandokando. 18 Tulipigwa kwa nguvu sana na dhoruba, hivyo siku iliyofuata mabaharia wakaanza kutupa mizigo kutoka melini. 19 Siku ya tatu, mabaharia wakaanza kuyatoa maji kwa mikono yao wenyewe. 20 Wakati ambapo jua na nyota hazikutuangazia kwa siku nyingi, bado dhoruba kubwa ilitupiga, na matumaini kwamba tungeokolewa yalitoweka. 21 Baada ya kuwa wameenda muda mrefu bila chakula, hapo Paulo akasimama katikati ya mabaharia akasema, "Wanaume, mlipaswa mnisikilize, na tusingengo'a nanga kutoka Krete, ili kupata haya madhara na hasara. 22 Na sasa nawafariji mjitie moyo, kwa sababu hakutakuwa upotevu maisha kati yenu, isipokuwa hasara ya meli tu. 23 Kwa sababu usiku uliopita malaika wa Mungu, ambaye huyo Mungu mimi ni wake, na ambaye ninamwabudu pia - malaika wake alisimama pembeni mwangu 24 na kusema, "Usiogope Paulo. Lazima usimame mbele ya Kaisari, na tazama, Mungu katika wema wake amekupa hawa wote ambao wanasafiri pamoja nawe. 25 Hivyo, wanaume, jipeni moyo, kwa sababu namwamini Mungu, kwamba itakuwa kama nilivyoambiwa. 26 Lakini lazima tuumie kwa kupigwa katika baadhi ya visiwa." 27 Ulipofika usiku wa kumi na nne, tulipokuwa tukiendeshwa huko na huko kwenye bahari ya Adratik, kama usiku wa manane hivi, mabaharia walifikiri kwamba wamekaribia nchi kavu. 28 Walitumia milio kupima kina cha maji na wakapata mita thelathini na sita, baada ya muda mfupi wakapima tena wakapata mita ishirini na saba. 29 Waliogopa kwanza tunaweza kugonga miamba, hivyo wakashusha nanga nne kutoka katika sehemu ya kuwekea nanga na wakaomba kwamba asubuhi ingekuja mapema. 30 Wale mabaharia walikuwa wanatafuta namna ya kuitelekeza ile meli na walizishusha majini boti ndogo ndogo za kuokolea maisha, na wakajifanya kwamba wanatupa nanga kutoka sehemu ya mbele ya boti. 31 Lakini Paulo akamwambia yule askari wa jeshi la Kiroma na wale askari, "Hamuwezi kuokoka isipokuwa hawa watu wanabaki kwenye meli". 32 Kisha wale askari wakakata kamba za ile boti na ikaachwa ichukuliwe na maji. 33 Wakati mwanga wa asubuhi ulipokuwa unajitokeza, Paulo akawasihi wote angalau wale kidogo. Akasema, "Hii ni siku ya kumi na nne mnasuburi bila kula, hamjala kitu. 34 Hivyo nawasihi mchukue chakula kidogo, kwa sababu hii ni kwa ajili ya kuishi kwenu; na hakuna hata unywele mmoja wa vichwa vyenu utakaopotea. 35 Alipokwisha kusema hayo, akachukua mkate akamshukuru Mungu mbele ya macho ya kila mtu. Kisha akaumega mkate akaanza kula. 36 Kisha wote wakatiwa moyo na wao wakachukua chakula. 37 Tulikuwa watu 276 ndani ya meli. 38 Walipokwisha kula vya kutosha, waliifanya meli nyepesi kwa kutupa ngano ndani ya bahari. 39 Ilipokuwa mchana, hawakuitambua nchi kavu, lakini wakaona sehemu ya nchi kavu iliyoingia majini iliyokuwa na mchanga mwingi. wakajadiliana kama wanaweza kuiendesha meli kuelekea hapo. 40 Hivyo wakazilegeza nanga wakaziacha baharini. Katika muda huo huo wakazilegeza kamba za tanga na wakaiinua sehemu ya mbele kuelekea kwenye upepo, hivyo wakaelekea kwenye hiyo sehemu ya mchanga mwingi. 41 Lakini wakaja mahali ambapo mikondo miwili ya maji inakutana, na meli ikaelekea mchangani. Na ile sehemu ya mbele ya meli ikakwama pale na haikuweza kutoka, lakini sehemu ya mbele ya meli ikaanza kuvunjika kwa sababu ya ukali wa mawimbi. 42 Mpango wa wale askari ulikuwa ni kuwaua wafungwa, ili kwamba hakuna ambaye angeogelea na kutoroka. 43 Lakini yule askari wa jeshi la Kiroma alitaka kumwokoa Paulo, hivyo akausimamisha mpango wao; na akawaamuru wale ambao wanaweza kuogelea, waruke kutoka melini kwanza na waende nchi kavu. 44 Kisha wanaume wengine watafuata, wengine juu ya vipande vya mbao na wengine juu ya vitu vingine kutoka kwenye meli. Kwa njia hii ikatokea kwamba wote tutafika salama nchi kavu.
Watu walioishi karibu na bahari walisafiri kutumia boti zilizosukumwa na upepo. Wakati wa kipindi fulani mwakani, upepo ungeelekea mwelekeo usiyofaa hadi ikawa vigumu sana kusafiri majini.
Paulo alimwamini Mungu kama atamwezesha kusafiri kwa usalam hadi atakapofika inchi kavu. Aliwaambia mabaharia na wanajeshi kuamini pia kwamba Mungu atachunga maisha yao.
Luka anatumia maneno karibu kuwa sawa na yale aliyotumia kueleza habari ya karama mwisho wa Yesu pamoja na wanafunzi wake. Alichukua mkate, akashukuru Mungu na kuumega na kula. Hata hivyo tafsiri yako isimfanye msomaji kufikiria kwamba Paulo alikuwa anaongoza sherehe ya kidini.
Paulo, kama mfungwa , anaanza safari kwenda Rumi
Neno sisi linamaanisha Luka mwandishi pamoja na Paulo na wasafiri wengine waliosafiri na Paulo
Adramitamu ni mji uliokuwa pwani ya uturuki ya sasa
Maaskari wa kirumi wakamweka kwa afisa Julias wa Agustani kwa mkuu wa Paulo na wafungwa wengine.
Neno sisi linamaanisha Luka, Paulo na wote waliosafiri pamoja naye.
Julias alimtendea vizuri Paulo
Neno Kukinga linaweza kusemwa katika hali tendaji.
Unaweza kuonesha kuwa kilichofanya wakasafiri kwa taabu ilikuwa ni kwa sababu ya upepo ulivuma dhidi yao.
Huu ni mji katika Pwani ya Krete
Maneno kama "sisi" "Tuli" inamaanisha Paulo na wengine waliokuwa katika meli.
Mfungo huu ulifanyika katika siku ya utakaso ambayo mara nyingi ilifanyika mwishoni mwa mwezi wa septemba au mwanzoni mwa mwezi wa octoba katika kalenda ya watu wa magharigi. Baada ya muda huo ilikuwa hatari kutokana na vimbunga vya mara kwa mara.
Unaweza kuonesha kwa nini haikuwa rahisi kukaa bandarini. "Bandari haikuweza kutosheleza kuleta usalama kwenye gati za meli wakati wa baridi na vimbunga"
Pande hizi hutegemea mahali jua linako chomozea na mahali jua linapozamia. Kaskazini Mashariki inaweza kuwa kushoto kiasi mwa upande unao chomoza jua. Kusini mashariki inakuwa ni kulia kiasi mwa upande wa jua linako zamia.
Upepo ulivuma kwa ukali dhidi ya upande wa kichwa cha meli kiasi kwamba hatukuweza kusafiri.
Hii inaweza kusemwa katika hali ya kutenda, Upepo ulivuma kwa nguvu"
Hili lilifanyika ili kupunguza uzitoili meli isizame.
Vifaa ina maanisha vyombo maalumu kwa ajili ya mabaharia. Hii inaonesha jinsi hali ilivyokuwa tete.
Upepo wa kutisha ulitupiga sana.
Na matokeo yake tumepata madhara na hasara.
Neno "Lazima usimame mbele ya Kaisari" Inamaanisha paulo kufika mbele ya mahakama na kuhukumiwa na Kaisari. "Lazima usimame mbele ya Kaisari akuhukumu"
"Upepo lazima utatupeleka ufukweni mwa visiwa fulani."
Usiku wa manane unaweza kutafsiriwa kama usiku wa saa nane.
Mita ni kipimo kama cha urefu wa mikono.
Hizi ni botti au melindogo ambazo hutolewa nyuma ya meli kubwa . boti hizi huwekwa kwa ajili ya kujiokolea wakati meli inataka kuzama
Maneno ya nayayo semwa kinyume yakimaanisha hakuna uwezekano wa kuokoka mpaka watu wabaki melini.
Kulipokuwa kukipambazuka
Siku ya kumi na nne
Hii ilikuwa ni njia ya usemi ulio maanisha kwamba hakuna harari yoyote ingewapata. "Kila mmoja atakuwa salama katika dhoruba hii."
Hii inaweza kusemwa katika hali tendaji, "Wote walitiwa moyo"
Hii ni taarifa ya nyuma.
Sehemu ya nchi kavu iliyoingia majini iliyokuwa na mchanga mwing
Mkondo wa maji unaotiririka kwenda upande mmoja wakati wote. Mara nyingine zaidi ya mkondo mmoja unaweza kutiririka ukiukatisha ule mwingine. Hali hii inaweza kusababisha mchanga kulundikana mahali pamoja na kufanya kina cha maji kuwa kifupi.
Maaskari walikuwa wanapanga
"Kuruka kutoka katika meli na kuingia majini"
Wengine kwenye vipande vya mbao
1 Tulipofikishwa salama, tulitambua kwamba kisiwa kinaitwa Malta. 2 Watu wenyeji wa pale si tu kwamba walitupa ukarimu wa kawaida, bali waliwasha moto na kutukaribisha sote, kwa sababu ya mvua na baridi iliyokuwa ikiendelea. 3 Lakini Paulo alipokuwa amekusanya mzigo wa kuni na kuuweka motoni, nyoka mdogo mwenye sumu akatoka kwenye zile kuni kwa sababu ya lile joto, na akajizungusha kwenye mkono wake. 4 Watu wenyeji wa pale walipoona mnyama ananing'inia kutoka kwenye mkono wake, wakasemezana wao kwa wao, "Mtu huyu hakika ni muuaji ambaye ametoroka baharini, lakini haki haimuruhusu kuishi." 5 Lakini yeye akamtupia huyo mnyama katika moto na hakupata madhara yoyote. 6 Wao walimngojea avimbe kwa homa au aanguke ghafla na kufa. Lakini baada ya kumwangalia kwa muda mrefu na kuona kwamba hakuna jambo ambalo si la kawaida kwake, walibadilisha mawazo yao na kusema alikuwa mungu. 7 Basi mahali pale karibu palikuwa na ardhi ambayo ilikuwa mali ya mkuu wa kisiwa, mtu aliyeitwa Pablio. Alitukaribisha na kutukarimu kwa siku tatu. 8 Ilitokea kwamba baba wa Pablio alishikwa na homa na ugonjwa wa kuhara. Na Paulo alipomwendea, aliomba, akaweka mikono juu yake, na kumponya. 9 Baada ya hili kutokea, watu wengine pale kisiwani waliokuwa wanaumwa pia walikwenda na waliponywa. 10 Watu wakatuheshimu kwa heshima nyingi. Tulipokuwa tunajiandaa kusafiri, walitupa vile tulivyovihitaji. 11 Baada ya miezi mitatu, tulisafiri ndani ya meli ya Iskanda ambayo ilikuwa imepigwa baridi hapo kisiwani, ambayo viongozi wake walikuwa ndugu wawili mapacha. 12 Baada ya kuwa tumetua katika mji wa Sirakusa, tulikaa pale siku tatu. 13 Kutokea pale tulisafiri tukafika katika mji wa Regio. Baada ya siku moja upepo wa kusini ulitokea ghafla, na baada ya siku mbili tukafika katika mji wa Putoli. 14 Huko tuliwakuta baadhi ya ndugu na tulikaribishwa kukaa nao kwa siku saba. Kwa njia hii tukaja Rumi. 15 Kutoka huko wale ndugu, baada ya kuwa wamesikia habari zetu, walikuja kutupokea huko soko la Apias na Hotel tatu. Paulo alipowaona wale ndugu alimshukuru Mungu akajitia ujasiri. 16 Tulipoingia Roma, Paulo aliruhusiwa kuishi peke yake pamoja na yule askari aliyekuwa akimlinda. 17 Basi ilikuwa baada ya siku tatu Paulo aliwaita pamoja wale wanume waliokuwa viongozi kati ya Wayahudi. Walipokuja pamoja, alisema kwao, "Ndugu, pamoja na kwamba sijafanya kosa lolote kwa watu hawa au kufanya kinyume na taratibu za mababa zetu waliotutangulia, nilitolewa kama mfungwa kutoka Yerusalemu hadi kwenye mikono ya Warumi. 18 Baada ya kunihoji, walitamani kuniacha huru, kwa sababu kulikuwa hakuna sababu kwangu mimi ya kustahili adhabu ya kifo. 19 Lakini wale Wayahudi walipoongea kinyume cha shauku yao, nililazimika kukata rufaa kwa Kaisaria, japokuwa haikuwa kana kwamba naleta mashtaka juu ya taifa langu. 20 Kwa sababu ya kukata kwangu rufaa, hivyo, niliomba kuwaona na kuongea nanyi. Ni kwa sababu ya kile ambacho Israel anaujasiri kwacho, nimefungwa na kifungo hiki. 21 Kisha wakamwambia, "Hatujawahi kupokea barua kutoka Yudea kukuhusu wewe, wala hakuna ndugu aliyekuja na kutoa taarifa au kusema neno lolote baya kuhusu wewe. 22 Lakini tunataka kusikia kutoka kwako unafikiri nini kuhusu hili kundi la watu hawa, kwa sababu inajulikana kwetu kwamba linaongea kinyume kila mahali." 23 Walipokuwa wametenga siku kwa ajili yake, watu wengi zaidi walimwijia mahali alipokuwa anaishi. Alisema lile jambo kwao na kushuhudia kuhusu ufalme wa Mungu. Alijaribu kuwashawishi kuhusu Yesu, kwa namna zote mbili kutoka katika sheria za Musa na kutoka kwa manabii, kuanzia asubuhi hadi jioni. 24 Baadhi yao walishawishika kuhusu mambo yale yaliyosemwa, wakati wengine hawakuamini. 25 Waliposhindwa kukubaliana wao kwa wao, waliondoka baada ya Paulo kulisema jambo hili moja, "Roho Mtakatifu alisema vyema kupitia Isaya nabii kwa baba zenu. 26 Alisema, 'Nenda kwa watu hawa useme, "Kwa masikio yenu mtasikia, lakini hamtaelewa; Na kwa macho yenu mtaona lakini hamtatambua. 27 Kwa ajili ya mioyo ya watu hawa imekuwa dhaifu, masikio yao yamesikia kwa taabu, wamefumba macho yao; ili kwamba wasijekutambua kwa macho yao, na kusikia kwa masikio yao, na kuelewa kwa mioyo yao, na kugeuka tena, na ningeliwaponya."' 28 Kwa hiyo, mnapaswa kujua kwamba huu wokovu wa Mungu umepelekwa kwa watu wa Mataifa, na watasikiliza." (Zingatia: Mstari huu 29 "Wakati alipokuwa amesema mambo haya, wayahudi waliondoka, wakiwa na mashindano makubwa kati yao.," haumo kwenye nakala bora za kale). 30 Paulo alikaa katika nyumba yake ya kupanga kwa miaka yote miwili, na aliwakaribisha wote waliokuja kwake. 31 Alikuwa akihubiri ufalme wa Mungu na alikuwa akifundisha mambo juu ya Bwana Yesu Kristo kwa ujasiri wote. Hakuna aliyemzuia.
Hakuna anayefahamu ni kwa nini Luka anamaliza habari hii bila kuwaambia watu kilichomtendekea Paulo baada ya yeye kuwa Roma kwa miaka miwili.
Viongozi wa Wayahudi walishangaa kwamba Paulo alitaka kuzungumza nao kwa vile hawakuwa wamepokea barua kutoka kwa kuhani mkuu Yerusalemu kusema kwamba Paulo alikuwa anakuja.
Wakati viongozi wa Wayahudi walipozungumza kuhusu "ndugu" walimaanisha Wayahudi wenzao na sio Wakristo.
Wenyeji waliamini ya kwamba Paulo alikuwa mungu, lakini hawakuamini kwamba alikuwa Mungu wa kweli. Hatujui ni kwa nini Paulo hakuwaambia wenyeji kwamba hakuwa Mungu.
Baada ya meli kuharibika, watu wa kisiwa cha Malta walimsaidia Paulo na wenzake waliokuwa kwenye meli. Walikaa pale miezi mitatu.
Malta ni kisiwa kilichopo katika kisiwa kingine ambacho kwa sasa kinaitwa Sisili.
wenyeji wa pale
nyoka mwenye sumu kali alitokea kwenye mzigo wa kuni
neno "Haki" lilimaanisha jina la Mungu waliyemwabudu.
alitikisa mkono wake ili yule nyoka aangukie kwenye moto
labda kulikuwa na imani kwamba mtu yeyote aliyeishi baada ya kugongwa na nyoka alikuwa sio wa kawaida
Hapa maneno "sisi" ana "sisi" yanamtaja Paulo
alikuwa mgonjwa
na aliwaponya wote
Safari ya Paulo kwenda Rumi inaendelea
meli ambayo ilitoka Alexandria
wafanyakazi waliachwa kisiwani majira ya baridi
huu ni mji wa bandari uliopo kusini magharibi mwa Italia
Puteli kwa sasa ipo katika mji wa Napoli
hii ilimtia moyo sana
hawa ni wale viongozi wa Kiyahudi au wa kidini waliopo Rumi
kinyume na Wayahudi
hii haimanishi Wayahudi wote bali viongozi tu
alilalamika juu ya mambo ambayo viongozi wa Kirumi walitaka kufanya
dhehebu ni kundi dogo ndani ya kubwa
kwa sababu sisi tunaijua
alichagua siku kwa ajili yake kuongea naye
ufalme wa Mungu hapa unamaanisha utawala wa Mungu kama mfalme
Zviongozi wa Kiyahudi walipokuwa tayari kuondoka, Paulo alinukuu maandiko kutoka Agano la Kale kwa ajili yao
Sentensi hizi mbili zinamaanisha kitu kimoja
Paulo anamalizia kumnukuu nabii Isaya
kumtii Mungu ni sawa na kumgeukia Mungu
Paulo anamaliza kuongea na viongozi wa Kiyahudi
baadhi yao watasikiliza
Luka anakamilisha simulizi ya Paulo katika kitabu cha Matendo ya Mitume
ufalme wa Mungu una maana ya utawala wa Mungu